MA Lighting grandMA2 User Manual
MA lighting grandMA2 is a powerful and versatile lighting control console designed for a wide range of applications, from theatre and live events to television studios and architectural lighting. With its intuitive interface and advanced features, the grandMA2 offers unparalleled control over your lighting systems. This comprehensive manual provides detailed information on every aspect of the device, from setup and operation to advanced programming techniques.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
Version 3.9 | 2024-09-30 English grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Table of contents 1. New in the Manual 28 2. Introduction 29 2.1. About this Manual 30 2.2. System Requirements grandMA2 onPC 31 2.3. Installation of grandMA2 onPC 32 2.4. Help from MA Technical Support 33 3. 4. 5. Safety Information 34 3.1. Symbols Used 35 3.2. Intended Use 36 3.3. Dangers Caused by Electric Current 37 3.4. General Safety Instructions 38 Device Overview 39 4.1. grandMA2 console 40 4.2. grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) 43 4.3. grandMA2 fader wing 45 4.4. MA onPC command wing 47 4.5. MA onPC fader wing 49 System Overview 51 5.1. Standalone systems 52 5.2. Network systems 53 5.2.1. What is the Replay Unit (RPU) 54 5.2.2. What is the Network Processing Unit (NPU) 55 5.2.3. What is the MA Video Processing Unit (VPU)? 56 5.2.4. What is the Network Dimmer Processor (NDP)? 57 5.2.5. What is MA 3D? 58 5.2.6. What are the MA nodes? 59 5.3. Parameters vs. DMX channels 60 5.4. Parameter expansion 62 5.5. Big systems 65 5.6. Media systems and CITP 67 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 2 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6. 7. First Steps 68 6.1. Unpack the Device 69 6.2. Check Scope of Delivery 70 6.3. Position the Device 71 6.4. Connect Power 72 6.5. Connect Desk Lamps 73 6.6. Connect External Screens 74 6.7. Connect USB Mouse and USB Keyboad 76 6.8. Connect DMX 78 6.9. Connect Sound 79 6.10. Connect SMPTE (LTC) 80 6.11. Connect Ethernet 81 6.12. Connect Analog Remote Control 83 6.13. Connect grandMA2 fader wing 85 6.14. Setup your PC 86 6.15. Turn on the Console the First Time 88 Keys & Buttons on the Console 91 7.1. Key Overview 92 7.2. >>> [GoFastForward] Key 100 7.3. <<< [GoFastBack] Key 102 7.4. . [Dot] Key 103 7.5. Align Key 105 7.6. Assign Key 107 7.7. At Key 108 7.8. Backg (Background) Key 110 7.9. Backup Key 111 7.10. Blind Key 112 7.11. Bt Pg + (Button Page) Key 113 7.12. Bt Pg - (Button Page) Key 114 7.13. B.O. (Blackout) Key 115 7.14. Channel Key 116 7.15. Ch Pg + (Channel Page +) Key 118 7.16. Ch Pg - (Channel Page -) Key 120 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 3 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.17. Clear Key 122 7.18. Copy Key 123 7.19. Cue Key 124 7.20. Del (Delete) Key 125 7.21. Down Key 126 7.22. Edit Key 127 7.23. Effect Key 128 7.24. [Encoder] Key 131 7.25. Esc Key 132 7.26. Exec (Executor) Key 133 7.27. Executor Buttons 134 7.28. Fd Pg + (Fader Page) Key 135 7.29. Fd Pg - (Fader Page) Key 136 7.30. Fix Key 137 7.31. Fixture Key 138 7.32. Freeze Key 140 7.33. Full Key 141 7.34. Go + Key (small) 142 7.35. Go + (large) Key 143 7.36. Go - Key (small) 144 7.37. Go - (large) Key 145 7.38. Goto Key 146 7.39. Group Key 148 7.40. Help Key 150 7.41. Highlt (Highlight) Key 151 7.42. If Key 152 7.43. Keyboard Keys 154 7.44. Learn Key 155 7.45. List Key 156 7.46. MA Key 162 7.47. Macro Key 165 7.48. [Minus] - Key 167 7.49. Mouse Key 168 7.50. Move Key 169 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 4 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8. 7.51. Next Key 171 7.52. [Numeric] Keys 172 7.53. Off Key 174 7.54. On Key 176 7.55. Oops Key 177 7.56. Page Key 179 7.57. Pause (small) Key 181 7.58. Pause (large) Key 182 7.59. Please Key 183 7.60. [Plus] + Key 185 7.61. Preset Key 186 7.62. Prev (Previous) Key 188 7.63. Prvw (Preview) Key 189 7.64. Select Key 191 7.65. Sequ (Sequence) Key 192 7.66. Set Key 193 7.67. Setup Key 195 7.68. Solo Key 197 7.69. Store Key 198 7.70. Temp Key 200 7.71. Thru Key 201 7.72. Time Key 202 7.73. Top Key 206 7.74. Tools Key 207 7.75. Up Key 209 7.76. Update Key 210 7.77. User 1 Key 212 7.78. User 2 Key 213 7.79. View Key 214 7.80. U1 - U4 keys 216 7.81. V1 - V10 Keys 218 7.82. X1 - X20 Keys 219 Workspace 221 8.1. 222 User Interface © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 5 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.1. Screen Layout 223 8.1.2. User-Defined Area 227 8.1.3. Command Line 228 8.1.4. X-Key Labels 232 8.1.5. View Buttons 233 8.1.6. Master Section 237 8.1.7. Time Control 241 Encoder Bar 243 8.2.1. Preset Control Bar 244 8.2.2. Encoder Toolbar 247 8.3. Encoder Settings 249 8.4. Command wing bar 253 8.5. Command Section 255 8.6. Mini executor bar 257 8.7. Work with views 258 8.8. Touch gestures 262 8.9. Calculator 265 8.2. 9. 8.10. Info 267 8.11. Oops and undo 271 8.12. Colors 275 8.12.1. System Colors 276 8.12.2. Marker Colors 281 8.12.3. Cue Colors 287 8.13. Text indicators and symbols 289 8.14. Icons 291 8.15. Keyboard shortcuts 296 8.15.1. Turn on or turn off the keyboard shortcuts 301 8.15.2. Edit keyboard shortcuts 302 8.15.3. Add or delete keyboard shortcuts 304 8.15.4. Export or import keyboard shortcuts 307 Manage windows 309 9.1. Create and Manage Basic Windows 311 9.2. Clear the Screen or Delete Windows 315 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 6 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10. Function of the Command Line 316 10.1. General Syntax Rules 318 10.1.1. Helping Keywords 319 10.1.2. Object Keywords 321 10.1.3. Function Keywords 323 10.2. All keywords 328 10.2.1. Special Characters 329 10.2.2. <<< [GoFastBack] keyword 330 10.2.3. >>> [GoFastForward] keyword 331 10.2.4. - [Minus] keyword 332 10.2.5. + [Plus] keyword 334 10.2.6. AddUserVar keyword 335 10.2.7. AddVar Keyword 337 10.2.8. Agenda Keyword 338 10.2.9. Alert keyword 341 10.2.10. Align keyword 342 10.2.11. AlignFaderModules keyword 343 10.2.12. All Keyword 345 10.2.13. AllButtonExecutors keyword 346 10.2.14. AllChaseExecutors Keyword 347 10.2.15. AllFaderExecutors Keyword 348 10.2.16. AllRows keyword 349 10.2.17. AllSequExecutors Keyword 350 10.2.18. And keyword 351 10.2.19. Appearance keyword 352 10.2.20. Asterisk * 356 10.2.21. Assign keyword 357 10.2.22. At keyword 360 10.2.23. At @ Character 364 10.2.24. Attribute keyword 365 10.2.25. AutoCreate keyword 367 10.2.26. Backup Keyword 368 10.2.27. Black keyword 369 10.2.28. Blackout keyword 370 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 7 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.29. BlackScreen keyword 371 10.2.30. Blind keyword 373 10.2.31. BlindEdit keyword 374 10.2.32. Block keyword 375 10.2.33. ButtonPage keyword 377 10.2.34. Call keyword 378 10.2.35. Camera keyword 380 10.2.36. ChangeDest keyword 381 10.2.37. Channel keyword 383 10.2.38. ChannelFader keyword 384 10.2.39. ChannelLink keyword 386 10.2.40. ChannelPage keyword 387 10.2.41. Chat keyword 388 10.2.42. CircularCopy keyword 389 10.2.43. Clear keyword 390 10.2.44. ClearActive keyword 391 10.2.45. ClearAll keyword 392 10.2.46. ClearSelection keyword 393 10.2.47. Clone keyword 394 10.2.48. CmdDelay keyword 400 10.2.49. CmdHelp keyword 401 10.2.50. Copy keyword 402 10.2.51. CrashLogCopy keyword 404 10.2.52. CrashLogDelete keyword 405 10.2.53. CrashLogList keyword 406 10.2.54. Crossfade keyword 407 10.2.55. CrossfadeA keyword 408 10.2.56. CrossfadeB keyword 409 10.2.57. Cue keyword 410 10.2.58. Cut keyword 411 10.2.59. Default Keyword 412 10.2.60. DefGoBack keyword 413 10.2.61. DefGoForward keyword 414 10.2.62. DefGoPause keyword 415 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 8 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.63. Delay keyword 416 10.2.64. Delete keyword 417 10.2.65. DeleteShow keyword 419 10.2.66. DisconnectStation keyword 421 10.2.67. Dmx keyword 423 10.2.68. Dollar $ Character 425 10.2.69. DmxUniverse keyword 426 10.2.70. Dot . Character 428 10.2.71. DoubleRate keyword 429 10.2.72. DoubleSpeed Keyword 430 10.2.73. Down keyword 431 10.2.74. DropControl keyword 432 10.2.75. Edit keyword 433 10.2.76. Effect keyword 434 10.2.77. EffectAttack Keyword 435 10.2.78. EffectBPM Keyword 436 10.2.79. EffectDecay Keyword 437 10.2.80. EffectDelay Keyword 438 10.2.81. EffectFade Keyword 439 10.2.82. EffectForm Keyword 440 10.2.83. EffectHigh Keyword 441 10.2.84. EffectHZ Keyword 442 10.2.85. EffectID Keyword 443 10.2.86. EffectLow Keyword 444 10.2.87. EffectPhase Keyword 445 10.2.88. EffectSec Keyword 446 10.2.89. EffectSpeedGroup keyword 447 10.2.90. EffectWidth Keyword 448 10.2.91. Empty Keyword 449 10.2.92. EndIf Keyword 450 10.2.93. EndSession Keyword 451 10.2.94. Escape keyword 452 10.2.95. ExecButton1 Keyword 453 10.2.96. ExecButton2 Keyword 454 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 9 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.97. ExecButton3 Keyword 455 10.2.98. Executor Keyword 456 10.2.99. Exit keyword 460 10.2.100. Export Keyword 461 10.2.101. Extract Keyword 463 10.2.102. Fade Keyword 465 10.2.103. FadePath Keyword 467 10.2.104. Fader Keyword 468 10.2.105. FaderPage Keyword 469 10.2.106. Feature Keyword 470 10.2.107. Filter Keyword 472 10.2.108. Fix Keyword 473 10.2.109. Fixture Keyword 474 10.2.110. FixtureType Keyword 475 10.2.111. Flash Keyword 476 10.2.112. FlashGo keyword 477 10.2.113. FlashOn keyword 478 10.2.114. Flip Keyword 479 10.2.115. Form Keyword 480 10.2.116. Freeze Keyword 481 10.2.117. Full Keyword 482 10.2.118. FullHighlight keyword 483 10.2.119. Gel keyword 484 10.2.120. Go Keyword 486 10.2.121. GoBack Keyword 488 10.2.122. Goto Keyword 490 10.2.123. Group Keyword 492 10.2.124. HalfRate Keyword 493 10.2.125. HalfSpeed Keyword 494 10.2.126. Help Keyword 495 10.2.127. Highlight Keyword 496 10.2.128. IdentifyFaderModule keyword 497 10.2.129. If Keyword 498 10.2.130. IfActive Keyword 500 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 10 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.131. IfOutput Keyword 501 10.2.132. IfProg Keyword 502 10.2.133. Image keyword 503 10.2.134. Import Keyword 504 10.2.135. Info Keyword 506 10.2.136. Insert Keyword 507 10.2.137. Interleave keyword 508 10.2.138. Invert Keyword 509 10.2.139. InviteStation Keyword 510 10.2.140. Item3D keyword 511 10.2.141. JoinSession Keyword 512 10.2.142. Kill Keyword 513 10.2.143. Label Keyword 514 10.2.144. Layer Keyword 515 10.2.145. Layout Keyword 517 10.2.146. Learn Keyword 518 10.2.147. LeaveSession Keyword 520 10.2.148. List Keyword 521 10.2.149. ListEffectLibrary Keyword 523 10.2.150. ListFaderModules Keyword 524 10.2.151. ListLibrary Keyword 525 10.2.152. ListMacroLibrary Keyword 526 10.2.153. ListOops Keyword 527 10.2.154. ListOwner Keyword 528 10.2.155. ListPluginLibrary Keyword 529 10.2.156. ListShows Keyword 530 10.2.157. ListUpdate Keyword 531 10.2.158. ListUserVar Keyword 532 10.2.159. ListVar Keyword 533 10.2.160. Load Keyword 534 10.2.161. LoadNext 535 10.2.162. LoadPrev keyword 536 10.2.163. LoadShow Keyword 537 10.2.164. Locate Keyword 540 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 11 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.165. Lock Keyword 541 10.2.166. Login Keyword 542 10.2.167. Logout Keyword 543 10.2.168. Lua Keyword 544 10.2.169. Macro Keyword 545 10.2.170. ManualXFade keyword 547 10.2.171. Mask Keyword 548 10.2.172. Master Keyword 549 10.2.173. MasterFade Keyword 550 10.2.174. MAtricks Keyword 551 10.2.175. MAtricksBlocks Keyword 552 10.2.176. MAtricksFilter Keyword 553 10.2.177. MAtricksGroups Keyword 554 10.2.178. MAtricksInterleave Keyword 555 10.2.179. MAtricksReset Keyword 556 10.2.180. MAtricksWings Keyword 557 10.2.181. MediaServer keyword 558 10.2.182. Menu Keyword 559 10.2.183. Message Keyword 560 10.2.184. Messages Keyword 561 10.2.185. MidiControl Keyword 564 10.2.186. MidiNote Keyword 565 10.2.187. MidiProgram Keyword 567 10.2.188. Model Keyword 568 10.2.189. Move Keyword 569 10.2.190. Move3D Keyword 570 10.2.191. NetworkInfo Keyword 571 10.2.192. NetworkNodeInfo Keyword 573 10.2.193. NetworkNodeUpdate Keyword 574 10.2.194. NetworkSpeedTest Keyword 575 10.2.195. NewShow Keyword 577 10.2.196. Next Keyword 579 10.2.197. NextRow Keyword 580 10.2.198. Normal Keyword 581 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 12 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.199. Off Keyword 582 10.2.200. On Keyword 584 10.2.201. Oops Keyword 586 10.2.202. Or keyword 588 10.2.203. OutDelay Keyword 589 10.2.204. OutFade Keyword 590 10.2.205. Page Keyword 591 10.2.206. Parentheses ( ) Character 593 10.2.207. Park Keyword 594 10.2.208. Part Keyword 596 10.2.209. Paste Keyword 598 10.2.210. Pause Keyword 599 10.2.211. Plugin Keyword 600 10.2.212. PMArea Keyword 601 10.2.213. Preset Keyword 605 10.2.214. PresetType Keyword 607 10.2.215. Preview Keyword 609 10.2.216. PreviewEdit Keyword 611 10.2.217. PreviewExecutor Keyword 612 10.2.218. Previous Keyword 613 10.2.219. PrevRow Keyword 614 10.2.220. Profile Keyword 615 10.2.221. Protocol Keyword 616 10.2.222. PSR Keyword 622 10.2.223. PSRList Keyword 623 10.2.224. PSRPrepare Keyword 624 10.2.225. Quotation Marks " " Character 625 10.2.226. Rate Keyword 626 10.2.227. Rate1 Keyword 627 10.2.228. RdmAutomatch Keyword 628 10.2.229. RdmAutopatch Keyword 630 10.2.230. RdmFixtureType Keyword 632 10.2.231. RdmInfo Keyword 633 10.2.232. RdmList Keyword 635 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 13 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.233. RdmSetParameter Keyword 637 10.2.234. RdmSetpatch Keyword 641 10.2.235. RdmUnmatch Keyword 643 10.2.236. Reboot Keyword 645 10.2.237. Record Keyword 647 10.2.238. Release Keyword 649 10.2.239. ReloadPlugins Keyword 651 10.2.240. Remote Keyword 652 10.2.241. RemoteCommand Keyword 655 10.2.242. Remove Keyword 656 10.2.243. RemoveIndividuals Keyword 657 10.2.244. Replace Keyword 658 10.2.245. ResetDmxSelection Keyword 660 10.2.246. ResetGuid keyword 661 10.2.247. Restart Keyword 663 10.2.248. Root Keyword 665 10.2.249. Rotate3D Keyword 666 10.2.250. SaveShow Keyword 667 10.2.251. Screen Keyword 668 10.2.252. Search Keyword 669 10.2.253. SearchResult Keyword 671 10.2.254. Select Keyword 673 10.2.255. SelectDrive Keyword 675 10.2.256. Selection Keyword 676 10.2.257. SelFix Keyword 677 10.2.258. Semicolon ; Character 678 10.2.259. Sequence Keyword 679 10.2.260. SetHostname Keyword 680 10.2.261. SetIP Keyword 681 10.2.262. SetNetworkSpeed Keyword 683 10.2.263. Setup Keyword 684 10.2.264. SetUserVar Keyword 686 10.2.265. SetVar Keyword 689 10.2.266. ShuffleSelection Keyword 692 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 14 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.267. ShuffleValues Keyword 693 10.2.268. Shutdown Keyword 694 10.2.269. SnapPercent Keyword 696 10.2.270. Slash / Character 697 10.2.271. Solo Keyword 699 10.2.272. SpecialMaster Keyword 700 10.2.273. Square Brackets [ ] Character 701 10.2.274. Speed Keyword 702 10.2.275. StepFade Keyword 703 10.2.276. StepInFade Keyword 704 10.2.277. StepOutFade Keyword 705 10.2.278. Stomp Keyword 706 10.2.279. Store Keyword 708 10.2.280. StoreLook Keyword 711 10.2.281. Surface Keyword 713 10.2.282. Swop Keyword 714 10.2.283. SwopGo Keyword 716 10.2.284. SwopOn Keyword 718 10.2.285. SyncEffects Keyword 720 10.2.286. TakeControl Keyword 721 10.2.287. Telnet Keyword 723 10.2.288. Temp Keyword 724 10.2.289. TempFader Keyword 726 10.2.290. Thru Keyword 727 10.2.291. Timecode Keyword 729 10.2.292. TimecodeSlot Keyword 733 10.2.293. Timer Keyword 734 10.2.294. ToFull Keyword 736 10.2.295. Toggle Keyword 738 10.2.296. Tools Keyword 739 10.2.297. Top Keyword 741 10.2.298. ToZero Keyword 743 10.2.299. Unblock Keyword 745 10.2.300. Unlock Keyword 747 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 15 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.301. Unpark Keyword 748 10.2.302. Up Keyword 749 10.2.303. Update Keyword 750 10.2.304. UpdateFirmware Keyword 752 10.2.305. UpdateSoftware Keyword 753 10.2.306. UpdateThumbnails Keyword 754 10.2.307. User Keyword 755 10.2.308. UserProfile Keyword 757 10.2.309. Value Keyword 759 10.2.310. Version Keyword 760 10.2.311. View Keyword 762 10.2.312. ViewButton Keyword 764 10.2.313. ViewPage Keyword 765 10.2.314. WebRemoteProgOnly Keyword 766 10.2.315. With Keyword 767 10.2.316. World Keyword 768 10.2.317. Zero Keyword 769 10.3. Work with Lists 11. 770 10.3.1. Object List 771 10.3.2. Selection List 773 10.3.3. Executor List 775 10.3.4. Attribute List 776 10.3.5. Station List 777 Using the Backup Menu 778 11.1. Create a new show 782 11.2. Loading a show 784 11.3. Saving a show 787 11.4. Saving a show with a new name 788 11.5. Deleting a Show 789 11.6. Using a USB stick 791 11.7. Setting up a file server 792 11.8. Partial Show Read 797 11.9. ASCII Show Read 798 11.10. grandMA2 to grandMA3 Show File Converter 802 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 16 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 12. 13. Single User and Multi User systems 805 12.1. What is the difference between a single-user and a multi-user system 806 12.2. Create user profiles and users 808 12.3. User specific settings 812 12.4. Login on a station 821 Networking 823 13.1. What is networking 824 13.2. Set the IP address in the console 825 13.3. Set the IP address in the onPC 826 13.4. Using DHCP in MA devices 827 13.5. Session control 828 13.5.1. How to create a session 831 13.5.2. Protecting the session and station 832 13.5.3. Adding devices to the session 834 13.5.4. How to end or leave a session 841 13.5.5. Session Collision 842 13.6. Getting DMX in and out of the system 13.6.1. Setting up DMX ports on MA devices 845 13.6.2. Network DMX protocols 850 13.6.3. What affects my DMX output? 857 13.7. Using CITP 14. 844 859 13.7.1. Streaming CITP video 861 13.7.2. Thumbnail exchange 863 13.8. PosiStageNet (PSN) 866 13.9. FTP connection to console and NPU 869 Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup 872 14.1. What Are Channels & Fixtures 873 14.1.1. What are Attributes 875 14.1.2. What are DMX breaks 876 14.2. What is 3D and Stage setup 877 14.3. Adding fixtures to the show 878 14.4. Delete fixtures from the show 897 14.5. Working with Layers 899 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 17 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 15. 16. 14.6. Multipatching 902 14.7. Live patching 904 14.8. DMX Sheet 909 14.9. DMX testing in the DMX Sheet 911 14.10. DMX and Parameter lists 914 14.11. Universe Pool 918 14.12. Stage View 920 14.13. Virtual 3D Cameras 924 14.14. Position fixtures in the virtual 3D stage 927 14.15. Auto-calibrate fixture positions 936 Basic Fixture Types 940 15.1. What are Attributes, Features & Preset Types 941 15.2. ColorMix vs. MixColor 943 15.3. Different Fixture Types 945 15.3.1. Conventional fixture type 946 15.3.2. LED 947 15.3.3. Mirror 948 15.3.4. Moving Lights 949 15.3.5. Media Server 950 15.3.6. Virtual Fixtures 951 Operate Fixtures 952 16.1. Channel Sheet 953 16.2. Fixture Sheet 957 16.3. Sheet options 961 16.3.1. Tools 963 16.3.2. Layer mask 966 16.3.3. Display 968 16.3.4. Title buttons 979 16.3.5. Assign executor 986 16.3.6. Mask (local) 987 16.4. Layer in Sheets 988 16.4.1. Channel Sheet and Fixture Sheet 989 16.4.2. Sequence Content Sheet And Sequence Tracking Sheet 993 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 18 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 17. 18. 19. 20. 16.5. What is the Programmer 994 16.6. Encoder Grouping 997 16.7. Using The Color Picker 999 16.8. Using The Shaper Dialog 1010 16.9. Using The Smart View 1016 16.10. Edit a Channel or a Fixture 1020 Pools in General 1022 17.1. Manage pool objects 1024 17.2. Adjust pool options 1030 17.3. Call Modes 1032 Groups 1034 18.1. Create groups 1036 18.2. Auto Create groups 1038 18.3. Using groups when programming 1042 18.4. Choose copy method 1043 18.5. Change colors in group options for all in order and all out of order 1044 18.6. Group Master on Executors 1046 What Are Presets? 1051 19.1. What Are Special Modes? 1052 19.2. Preset Pools 1054 19.3. Preset Pool "Dynamic" 1056 19.4. Create Presets 1057 19.5. Preset Pool Options 1059 19.6. Create Preset Reference 1062 19.7. Auto Create Presets 1064 19.8. Auto Create Additional Presets 1066 19.9. Embedded Presets 1070 19.10. Edit Presets 1072 19.11. Update Presets 1074 19.12. Delete Presets 1076 Cues and Sequences 1077 20.1. What are cues and sequences 1078 20.2. Looking at the Cue Sequence 1081 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 19 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 21. 22. 23. 20.3. Storing cues 1088 20.4. Store Options and Defaults 1096 20.5. Cue timings 1100 20.6. Renumber cues 1105 20.7. Delete Cues 1107 20.8. Playing back Cues 1109 20.9. Looking at the cue content 1114 20.10. Update cues 1121 20.11. What is Tracking 1124 20.12. What is MIB 1129 20.13. Sequence mini executor 1131 20.14. Commands in cues 1135 Executors 1136 21.1. What are executors 1137 21.2. Executors on the screens 1140 21.3. Assign a function 1145 21.4. Looking at the active executors 1159 21.5. Common executor options 1163 Advanced Sequence Functionality 1167 22.1. Using different view sets in the sheets 1168 22.2. Working with MIB 1171 22.3. Using Cue Modes 1175 22.4. Cue Zero 1177 22.5. Sequence info window 1180 22.6. Looping cues 1182 22.7. Cue path 1185 Advanced Executor Functionality 1188 23.1. Executor Pages 1189 23.2. Channel Pages 1192 23.3. Executor Options 1197 23.4. Masters Window 1206 23.5. Special Masters 1210 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 20 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 23.5.1. Default Masters 1211 23.5.2. Grand Masters 1212 23.5.3. Speed Masters 1213 23.5.4. Rate Masters 1214 23.5.5. Playback Masters 1215 Clone 1216 24.1. Clone In User Interface 1218 24.2. Examples 1231 24.3. Clone Presets 1235 Search and Replace 1241 25.1. Search 1242 25.2. Replace 1246 Image Pool 1250 26.1. Import Images and Videos 1252 26.2. Image Limitations and Guidelines for Symbols 1255 26.3. Supported file formats 1256 26.4. Delete Images and Videos 1257 Layouts 1258 27.1. Create a Layout 1259 27.2. Layout Pool Options 1262 27.3. Edit Layout 1264 27.4. Layout View Options 1271 Worlds, Filters and Masks 1279 28.1. What are Worlds 1280 28.2. Create worlds 1282 28.3. Auto create worlds 1283 28.4. Use worlds when programming 1285 28.5. What are filters 1288 28.6. Create filters 1291 28.7. Use filters when you Store and use At 1293 28.8. Use temporary filters 1295 28.9. What are masks 1299 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 21 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 29. 30. 31. 32. 28.10. Create masks 1301 28.11. Use masks in the sheets and windows 1309 28.12. Apply worlds or filters to executors and sequences 1311 MAtricks 1315 29.1. MAtricks Toolbar 1317 29.2. MAtricks Pool 1323 29.3. MAtricks Interleave 1327 29.4. MAtricks Blocks 1330 29.5. MAtricks Wings 1333 29.6. MAtricks Groups 1335 Chasers 1338 30.1. Create a chaser 1339 30.2. Chaser settings 1340 30.3. Chaser mini executor 1345 Effects 1346 31.1. Use Predefined Effects 1347 31.2. Use Template and Selective Effects 1366 31.3. Create an effect in the programmer 1367 31.4. Create an Effect that Uses Presets 1370 31.5. Create Effect Forms 1374 31.6. Pool Options 1381 31.7. Effects in a Cue 1383 31.8. Assign effect to executor 1384 31.9. Live Edit an Effect 1386 31.10. Running Effects 1388 31.11. Update Effects 1391 31.12. Delete Effects 1392 Bitmap Fixture 1393 32.1. Import bitmap fixture 1394 32.2. Apply bitmap fixture in the layout view 1396 32.3. Control bitmap fixture 1401 32.4. Edit bitmap fixture 1406 32.5. Example for bitmap fixture 1407 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 22 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 32.6. Priorities for bitmap effects 1410 32.7. Disable bitmap for fixtures 1411 XYZ 1412 33.1. XYZ vs. Pan/Tilt 1415 33.2. XYZ and Pan/Tilt in cues and sequences 1416 33.3. Use Stage Markers 1420 33.4. Link Objects to Stage Markers in MA 3D 1424 Remote Controlling the System 1426 34.1. Remote Inputs 1427 34.2. MIDI Show Control (MSC) 1432 34.3. Web Remote 1443 34.4. Telnet Remote 1468 34.5. Decimal – Hex Table 1470 Timecode 1477 35.1. What is Timecode and Timecode Shows 1478 35.2. Record a Timecode Show 1483 35.3. Edit a Timecode Show 1485 35.4. Playing Back a Timecode Show 1500 35.5. Organize The Show with Multiple Timecode Shows 1504 Timer 1506 36.1. Timer Pool 1507 36.2. Timer Pool Options 1512 Agenda 1513 37.1. What is agenda 1514 37.2. Create an appointment in the agenda 1515 Macros 1519 38.1. What are macros 1520 38.2. Manually create a macro 1524 38.2.1. Use variables in macros 1528 38.2.2. Create pop-ups in macros 1533 38.2.3. Conditional expressions 1535 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 23 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 38.2.4. Macro timing 1536 38.3. Record a macro 1539 38.4. Edit a macro 1541 38.5. Command line interaction 1542 38.6. Assign a macro to a key 1545 38.7. Example macros 1551 Plugins 1555 39.1. What is Lua 1556 39.2. Edit Plugins 1557 Partial Show Read 1561 40.1. What is Partial Show Read (PSR) 1562 40.2. How to do a Partial Show Read 1564 RDM 1570 41.1. Turn RDM on 1572 41.2. Match RDM devices 1576 41.3. Auto Patch RDM Devices 1580 41.4. Work with RDM parameters 1582 41.5. Work with RDM sensors 1587 41.6. Configure RDM notifications 1590 41.7. Use the RDM sheet 1596 41.8. Unmatch RDM devices 1597 41.9. Splitters and Mergers that Support RDM 1598 41.10. Turn RDM off 1599 41.11. RDM specific keywords 1603 42. DMX Profiles 1604 43. Other system tools 1607 43.1. Message center 1608 43.2. Help 1611 43.3. Clock 1613 43.4. Sound input window 1618 43.5. VPU pixel mapper view 1620 43.6. Network Dimmer 1621 39. 40. 41. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 24 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 44. 45. 46. 43.6.1. Views 1624 43.6.2. Errors 1631 43.6.3. Readout 1634 43.6.4. Edit Properties of a Rack 1637 43.6.5. Edit a Module 1645 43.7. Desk status 1648 43.8. Performance window 1651 43.9. System monitor 1653 Export and Import 1654 44.1. Export by using command line 1656 44.2. Export by using user interface 1658 44.3. Import by using command line 1661 44.4. Import by using user interface 1662 44.5. Import predefined objects 1664 Update the Software 1666 45.1. Update via setup 1667 45.2. Format a USB stick for Linux 1669 45.3. Update or factory reset via boot menu 1670 45.4. Restart from Linux 1672 Advanced Fixture Types 1673 46.1. Anatomy of a Fixture Type 1674 46.1.1. Module Manager 1685 46.1.2. Instance Manager 1689 46.1.3. Wheel Manager 1691 46.2. Attribute & Encoder Grouping 1693 47. grandMA2 onPC Details 1697 49. Control the MA NDPs 1703 49.1. Add the MA NDPs to the Network Configuration 1704 49.2. Configure the MA NDPs 1706 49.3. Delete the MA NDPs in the Network Configuration 1708 Control the MA Network Switch from a grandMA2 1709 50.1. Add the MA Network Switch to the network configuration 1710 50. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 25 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 50.2. Change IP address of the MA Network Switch 1713 50.3. Enable DHCP client for the MA Network Switch 1715 50.4. Change hostname of the MA Network Switch 1717 50.5. Change switch ID 1719 50.6. Configure ports of the MA Network Switch 1720 50.7. Edit groups of the MA Network Switch 1725 50.8. Edit presets of the MA Network Switch 1729 50.9. Edit Link Aggregation Groups of the MA Network Switch 1732 50.10. Mirror Ports of the MA Network Switch 1734 50.11. Work with the switch configuration 1736 50.12. Disable SNMP 1740 50.13. Change password of the MA Network Switch 1742 50.14. Update firmware of the MA Network Switch 1744 50.15. Reset the MA Network Switch to its factory defaults 1746 50.16. Delete MA Network Switch from the network configuration 1747 Control the MA xPort Nodes 1748 51.1. Add the MA xPort Nodes to the Network Configuration 1749 51.2. Configure the MA xPort Nodes in the Console 1751 51.3. Configure the MA xPort Nodes in a Browser 1754 51.4. Configure the MA xPort Nodes as Splitters or Mergers 1760 51.5. Delete the MA xPort Nodes in the Network Configuration 1762 Console Settings 1763 52.1. Adjust Intensity of Desk Lights 1764 52.2. Change Screen Options 1765 52.3. Local settings 1768 52.4. Wing & Monitor Setup 1772 52.5. Date & Time 1776 53. Shut Down the System 1781 54. Error Messages 1786 55. Technical Data 1790 56. Glossary 1795 51. 52. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 26 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 56. Index © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 1803 27 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - New in the Manual Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. New in the Manual This is an outline of all changes that took place in the latest version compared to the previous version of the manual. After every software update the manual will be updated as well. Topic grandMA3 Screen Layout Description It is possible to run a grandMA3 compact and compact XT in Mode2. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 28 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Introduction Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2. Introduction The grandMA2 represents MA Lighting’s most powerful console and offers the control of conventional light, moving lights, LED fixtures and media from one platform. Equipped with the most up-to-date technology and even some special features (e.g., keyboard drawer and multitouch command screen), the grandMA2 is suitable for all lighting segments. It supplies an intuitive and fast control of all connected fixtures and channels. Furthermore, the grandMA2 fader wing provides up to 60 extra motorized executor faders for an almost unlimited number of pages. Moreover, grandMA series 1-showfiles can be converted to be used with the grandMA2. And for yet easier operation, all command keys can be found in the same place on every console of the grandMA2 series. The grandMA2 offers extremely flexible and comfortable ways of programming, including nearly infinite numbers of presets, cues, pages, sequences and effects. All grandMA2 consoles are optionally available as Silent Version with optimized fan for noise-sensitive environments. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 29 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Introduction Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2.1. About this Manual Navigation in the Help Presentation of Content Navigation in the Help Navigate in the help via: Product Family is displayed in form of a dot. Tree structure is located on the left of the view. Search field is located in the upper right corner of the view. Presentation of Content Display Definition Keys on the console are displayed in an orange font with an orange frame and a black background. Buttons on the screen are displayed within a frame. At Dimmer 1. Open the... 2. Select the... Step-by-step instructions are displayed in a numeric list. Tap... One-step instruction are displayed with the help of bullet points. MA Network Control I Join Session Navigation to specific menus in the console is displayed in bold. Syntax descriptions are underlined and displayed in bold. Command line entry is displayed with the help of the command line. Command line response is displayed in the command line feedback. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 30 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Introduction Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2.2. System Requirements grandMA2 onPC If you want to run the grandMA2 onPC your PC, here´s what it takes. Type Operation system Processor RAM Hard disk Graphic card Resolution Network card Minimum Recommended Windows® 7 Windows® 8 Windows® 8.1 Windows® 10 Windows® 11 all with admin rights CPU Dual Core 2.4 GHz or faster with SSE2 support 2 GB 32 GB available space Any graphic card with hardware acceleration and 512 MB 1600 x 900 or higher 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T 8 GB type SSD 1920 x 1080 1000BASE-T IBM® compatible PC or notebook is necessary. Additional requirements: Make sure your Windows® always runs using the latest service pack and updates. To save a grandMA2 show file as a grandMA3 show file, Windows® 10 is required. For more information see Save as grandMA3. To use the online help and to download the latest version of grandMA2 onPC, you need internet access. To save to a USB stick, you need a USB 2.0 or 3.0 port. We recommend that you visit your PC manufacturer´s website for information about updated drivers and hardware compatibility. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 31 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Introduction Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2.3. Installation of grandMA2 onPC To run the grandMA2 onPC software, it is necessary to copy and install the program files on your PC. It is possible to perform the installation in every root directory or in the standard directory "C:\ProgramData\MA Lighting Technologies\grandma". To make sure that there are no troubles with the installation, deactivate your safety software. 1. Go to www.malighting.com to download the installation file. 2. Start the file by double-clicking on it. The installation program opens and you receive hints and detailed information regarding the installation. Pay attention to the suggested directory and change it if you want to. The installation directory is not modifiable in the grandMA2 onPC. After confirmation, the program files will be copied into the selected directory. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 32 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Introduction Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2.4. Help from MA Technical Support If the grandMA2 is not working as described in the manual, you can take the following steps: Error message: You cannot proceed with the next step of the description and you receive an error message: Refer to Error Messages and repeat the procedure. If the problem is still there, contact the technical support. System is not working: If you cannot proceed with the next step of the description and you do not receive an error message: Contact the technical support and describe the last steps you took. Technical Service and Support MA Lighting and its extensive distributor network offer an unparalleled technical service. Call on our expertise for help with any problem, no matter if it is regarding operation, software features, software installations or trouble shooting. Please send an email (in English or German) to the tech support with your contact details and the technical question. See the email address of the technical support in the footer of this website. This email service is monitored during MA Lighting's regular business hours in Germany from 8.30 a.m. until 5 p.m., Monday through Friday. For emergency services please contact your local MA distributor or the MA Lighting Service Hotline. Call: +49 5251 688865-99. Please note that this is a 24/7 hotline which is used for emergency cases only. Use this hotline only if troubles occur shortly before an upcoming event. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 33 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Safety Information Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. Safety Information This device is conform to the following harmonized standards: EN 60065 (Safety Requirements) , EN 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment Safety) EN 55103-1:2009 (Electromagnetic Compatibility) EN 55103-2:2009 (Electromagnetic Compatibility) 2014/30/EG (Electromagnetic Compatibility) 2011/65/EU (RoHS II) 2014/35/EU (Low Voltage Directive) This device is state-of-the-art technology. However, residual risks cannot be ruled out. To avoid risks, follow the safety instructions. MA Lighting does not cover damages which can be the result of an inobservance of the safety instructions. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 34 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Safety Information Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3.1. Symbols Used The following symbols display possible danger, useful hints and information when using the device. Warning: The warning sign displays possible injury and hazard. Restriction: The restriction sign displays known limitations of functions. Important: The important sign displays important information during the usage of the console. Hint: The hint sign displays additional hints when using the console. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 35 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Safety Information Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3.2. Intended Use This device is intended for control of all kinds of lighting genres such as conventional, moving lights, LEDs, video and media via DMX signal or within a network environment. This device is intended for indoor use only. Every other use is not intended and could lead to injury and damage to property. MA Lighting does not cover damages which can result from misuse of the console. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 36 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Safety Information Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3.3. Dangers Caused by Electric Current Defective device or defective power cable poses a risk of severe or fatal injury due to electrical shock. Follow the safety instructions to avoid the risks caused by electric current. Do not use a damaged power cable. Do not open screwed covers from the housing. Use the device only if it is in a technically perfect condition. A broken device can be repaired only by an authorized dealer. Do not repair the device on your own. Do not make changes to the device, its components, and accessories. Do not expose the device to rain or moisture. Do not submerge the device in water. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 37 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Safety Information Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3.4. General Safety Instructions Follow the safety instructions to avoid injury or material damage: Do not grab inside the device during operation. Device and power cable must be kept away from children under the age of 8. Children are not allowed to play with the device. Disconnect the power supply from electric voltage if it is unattended for a longer period of time. Do not use any liquid or spray cleanser. Use a dry cloth only. Do not block or cover any ventilation holes in the housing. These are essential for the airflow within the unit and protect the device from overheating. Place the device on stable surfaces only. If it is placed on unstable surfaces, it may fall and break. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 38 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4. Device Overview The following chapters provide an overview of the grandMA2 products. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 39 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4.1. grandMA2 console Front Panel grandMA2 full-size front panel​ 1. Screen 4 (grandMA2 full-size) 2. Screen 3 (grandMA2 light & grandMA2 full-size) 3. Screen 2 4. View Buttons 5. Power Key 6. Menu Keys 7. Attribute Encoders 8. Grand Master 9. Dimmer Wheel 10. Trackball 11. Command Area 12. Keyboard (inside) 13. X-Buttons 14. Screen 1 Command Screen 15. 100 mm Fader 16. Button Executors 17. Fader Executors 18. Screen Encoders © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 40 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Rear Panel grandMA2 full-size rear panel grandMA2 full-size rear panel in detail 1. Desk Lamp 2. Power Switch 3. DMX In Female 4. 6 x DMX Out A - F Male 5. DC Remote Control 6. MIDI In 7. MIDI Out 8. LTC / SMPTE In 9. Audio In 10. Reset Button 11. USB 12. MA-Link 13. DVI Right 14. DVI Left © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 41 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 15. Ethernet 2 (= eth1) 16. Ethernet 1 (= eth0) 17. PowerCon Connector © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 42 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4.2. grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) Front Panel grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) front panel 1. Power Button 2. Internal Command Touch Screen 3. Reset Button 4. 2 USB 2.0 connectors Rear Panel © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 43 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) rear panel 1. Ethernet 1 2. Ethernet 2 3. DVI Right 4. DVI Left 5. MA-Link 6. USB 7. Fan 8. PowerCon Out 9. On / Off Button 10. PowerCon In 11. Audio In 12. LTC / SMPTE In 13. MIDI Out 14. MIDI In 15. DC Remote Control 16. 6 x DMX Out 17. 1 x DMX In © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 44 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4.3. grandMA2 fader wing Front Panel grandMA2 fader wing front panel 1. 30 x Fader Executor Buttons 2. Screen Encoder 3. Page Buttons 4. 15 x Fader Executor Buttons and 15 x Executor Buttons 5. 15 x Motorized Executor Fader Rear Panel grandMA2 fader wing rear panel © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 45 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. Connection to a grandMA2 fader wing. 2. Connection to the console or from a grandMA2 fader wing. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 46 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4.4. MA onPC command wing Front Panel MA onPC command wing front panel 1. Screen Encoder 2. Grand Master 3. Dimmer Wheel 4. Command Area 5. 100 mm Fader 6. Page Buttons Rear Panel © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 47 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English MA onPC command wing rear panel 1. Power Connector 2. On / Off Switch 3. USB Type B connector 4. LTC / SMPTE In 5. DMX IN 6. DC Remote Control 7. MIDI Out 8. MIDI In 9. 2 x DMX Out © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 48 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4.5. MA onPC fader wing Front Panel 1. 45 x Fader Executor Buttons 2. 15 x Fader Executor 3. 15 x Button Executor © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 49 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Device Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Rear Panel 1. Power Connector 2. On / Off Button 3. USB Type B Connector 4. USB Type A Connector 5. USB Type A Connector, 5V for desklamp 6. 4 x DMX Out © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 50 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5. System Overview This section takes a look at the different possibilities with a standalone console but also the options when expanding the system. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 51 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.1. Standalone systems If a console is not connected to anything, then it is a Standalone system. It is also a standalone system using a grandMA2 onPC with one or more grandMA2 onPC wings connected. A console is in standalone mode when it is not a part of a session. So a console that is connected to network, but not in a running session is also considered as Standalone. The current status can be seen in the Setup menu (press the Setup key). The right tab will display: Network Standalone. If the console is in a session and you want to set it to Standalone mode, then you can leave the session. This can be done using the GUI or the command line (LeaveSession). In the Standalone mode the console is limited to only controlling the amount of parameters the console / onPC unlocks. You can only use the DMX ports on the console / wings. If DMX is output via an Ethernet connection, then the console needs to be in a session. Enable the Network DMX if Alone button in the Setup->Network->Network Protocols. Even though not connected to anything else, it still needs to run an active session. For more about setting up DMX ports, please have a look at the Configure the DMX ports on MA devices topic. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 52 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2. Network systems When more devices are connected with each other in a session, then it is a networked system. There are so many possible combinations that it does not make sense to try and list them all. The smallest network system is a computer with onPC running a session and connected to a MA 2Port Node onPC 1K. Most systems have 1 console with 1 backup console or onPC and some networked devices to output the DMX. If the devices that translate Ethernet data to DMX are MA nodes, then the DMX output is in sync, no matter where the DMX is output. So a blackout cue on LED fixtures is in sync when some LEDs got signal from the Console and some LEDs from a node somewhere in the system. In all network systems, you have one console or onPC that is the session master. This is the one that is in charge of the communication and the one that is executing commands triggered by remote inputs or from a command in a sequence. It is recommended to use a good network switch when connecting different devices. Besides the consoles, there are a lot of different devices that can be added to the system. Read the sub topics to get a short explanation of the different devices. Learn more about setting up a session here. Learn more about parameter expansion here. Learn more about the considerations in big network systems here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 53 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview – Network systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2.1. What is the Replay Unit (RPU) A grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) is considered as a console in the system. It has the same software and capabilities as the consoles. It is a 19" 3 Unit rack-mount version of the console, without all the user interface and physical controls. It has almost the same connectors on the rear panel as a console (with fewer USB connectors). It functions exactly like a console in the system. For more information see grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) general description and technical data. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 54 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview – Network systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2.2. What is the Network Processing Unit (NPU) A MA Network Processing Unit (NPU) is for parameter expansion and to add DMX ports in a network solution. It is a 19" 3 Unit rack mount processor. It got 8 female DMX ports and 1 female etherCON connector for network. It cannot function as a standalone unit. It has to be connected to a session to do anything. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 55 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview – Network systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2.3. What is the MA Video Processing Unit (VPU)? The MA Video Processing Unit (VPU) is a Media Server that was designed to be fully integrated into the MA system. The MA VPU comes in three sizes: MA VPU plus MA VPU basic MA VPU light There is a second generation of the plus and basic called MK2. The MA VPUs are media servers capable of handling a 3D environment. It has all the normal features for media servers. Effects, Soft edge, Pixel mapping, Warping, and so on. One of the big advantages of the MA VPU is the option to use the pixel mapper internally. This means that fixtures can be positioned in a 3D environment in the console and then the MA VPU software can be used to run complex video content, mapped to the fixtures. The MA VPU is a feature-rich software and hardware and it got its own manual. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 56 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview – Network systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2.4. What is the Network Dimmer Processor (NDP)? The Network Dimmer Processor (NDP) is the processor used to control dimMA dimmer system. The NDP provides access to the dimmers via the MA-Net. Dimmers can be monitored and changed through the setup and configuration from the consoles. It is also possible to see error messages from the dimmers in the consoles. NDPs also have DMX connectors. This allows to control the dimmers using a standard DMX signal. It can receive Art-Net and sACN data as well. It is a device from the grandMA1 system and it has a 100Mbit/s network adaptor. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 57 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview – Network systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2.5. What is MA 3D? The MA 3D is a free visualizer that can connect to the MA system and can simulate lights in a 3D environment. The software needs to be installed on a computer connected to your lighting network. The 3D is invited into a session and it is then considered a member in the session that can be used to position lighting fixtures in a 3D environment. The 3D can be used to preprogram a show and/or have it onsite for Blind and Preview editing. MA 3D can connect to grandMA2 onPC (also free) and does not need parameters to visualize the lighting. You can add a virtual camera dolly and program a moving camera. An object in MA 3D can be used as a surface that can display video or images. It can also display the CITP video stream from a media system. Read more about CITP in the Streaming CITP topic. MA 3D can create screenshots. If a video capture is needed, then additional capture software is needed. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 58 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview – Network systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.2.6. What are the MA nodes? The nodes from MA Lighting work as a translator between the network data and the DMX. A node is connected to the network and it listens to the DMX data in the network. It is configured to handle some specific DMX universes. It can be used to output a DMX universe. It will listen to the DMX data stream on the network and translate that information into a DMX512-A signal. A node can also input a DMX signal into the network. Then it receives a DMX signal and translates it into a network data stream. When nodes are used in a MA-Net2 system, then the advantage is that the DMX ports can be configured from the system and the DMX output is synchronized in the entire network. Nodes can also work with other network protocols. They can run in Art-Net and sACN. Configuration is still done via the grandMA2 software (for example a computer running the grandMA2 onPC software) or from a browser. The older MA nodes from grandMA1 can also run in MA-Net1 mode. Then they can talk with the grandMA1 systems. The older NSPs can be used as a MA 4Port Node in a grandMA2 system. The older NSPs and nodes from grandMA1 only have a 100Mbit/s network card. The new nodes use a Gigabit network adaptor. There is no guarantee that the grandMA1 devices will continue to work with MA-Net2 in the future. They will however always be able to run Art-Net and sACN. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 59 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.3. Parameters vs. DMX channels Most people are used to think in DMX channels when considering how many fixtures can be controlled with system. MA Lighting are/is more concerned with Parameters. What are Parameters Parameters are also called Attributes in the software. A dimmer function is a parameter and a pan function is also a parameter. The software is calculating the different attributes using a higher precision than what is being output via DMX. So the software is calculating the parameter or attribute once and it is then scaled to the amount of DMX channels a fixture uses - typically one or two per attribute. Why counting in Parameters and not DMX It is to your advantage. In the MA world you do not pay extra for using fixtures that are running 16 or 24 bit instead of the 8 bit used by one DMX channel. There might be a need to add more networked nodes or devices to output all the parameters that are allowed to be controlled. Example: A simple moving head with a dimmer might use 5 DMX channels. The channels can be defined like this: Definition: Dimmer Pan Pan Fine Tilt Tilt Fine DMX Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 The Pan and Tilt is one attribute each. Even though both pan and tilt each use two DMX channels it is only counted as one each in the parameter count. This means that the fixture only costs 3 parameters. Definition: Dimmer Pan Pan Fine DMX Channel: 1 2 3 Parameter cost: 1 2 free © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 60 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Tilt Tilt Fine 4 5 3 free This can be a big advantage when there is a lot of fixtures that has a lot of 16-bit (or fine) channels. What about preprograming and parameters? The show can be preprogramed and MA 3D can be used without any parameter unlocking hardware. The lights are still visualized. But if 3-party visualizers are used, then the hardware might be needed to give access to the parameters. MA Lighting is working with many visualizer manufactures to allow them to read the DMX data without hardware. Learn more about parameter expansion here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 61 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.4. Parameter expansion This page is a closer look at how many parameters can be controlled and how it can be expanded. At the bottom of this page there is a link to a page that explains the difference between "Parameter" and "DMX universe". If you have any doubts in this area, you should take the time to read it. Parameter count This section is about the parameter count for single units. Beginning at the top end and working the way down the ranks: grandMA2 full-size: 8 192 parameters. grandMA2 light: 4 096 parameters. grandMA2 ultra-light: 4 096 parameters. grandMA2 replay unit: 4 096 parameters. MA NPU (Network Processing Unit): 4 096 parameters (also with grandMA2 onPC). MA onPC command wing: 2 048 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA onPC fader wing: 2 048 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 8Port Node onPC: 2 048 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 4Port Node onPC: 2 048 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA NSP (in grandMA2 4Port Node mode): 2 048 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 2Port Node onPC 2K: 2 048 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 2Port Node onPC 1K: 1 024 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 2Port Node onPC Pro (old version): 1 024 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 2Port Node onPC (old gray version): 512 parameters (only when connected with grandMA2 onPC). MA 8Port Node (not onPC version): Does not provide parameter expansion. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 62 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English MA 4Port Node (not onPC version): Does not provide parameter expansion. MA 4Port Node WM (Wall Mount) (not onPC version): Does not provide parameter expansion. MA 2Port Node (not onPC version): Does not provide parameter expansion. MA 2Port Node WM (Wall Mount) (not onPC version): Does not provide parameter expansion. MA 2Port Node Rig mount version (old version - not onPC): Does not provide parameter expansion. MA 2Port Node Flush mount version (old version - not onPC): Does not provide parameter expansion. Parameter expansion The MA NPU is the only unit that expands the parameter count when using a grandMA2 console. Every MA NPU added to the network also adds 4 096 parameters! A maximum of 15 MA NPUs can be added to give parameters; depending on the biggest console. There is a maximum limit of 65 536 parameters in a grandMA2 session. The MA NPUs help with parameter calculations. Examples: 1 grandMA2 full-size (8 192 parameters) + 1 NPU (4 096) = 12 288 parameters 1 grandMA2 full-size (8 192 parameters) + 14 NPUs (4 096) = 65 536 parameters (the limit) 1 grandMA2 light (4 096) + 1 NPU (4 096) = 8 192 parameters 1 grandMA2 light (4 096) + 15 NPUs (4 096) = 65 536 parameters (the limit) 1 grandMA2 full-size (8 192 parameters) + 1 grandMA2 light (4 096) = 8 192 parameters (Consoles cannot expand the parameter count so the parameters from the console with the highest number are unlocked) 1 grandMA2 light (4 096) + 15 2Port Node onPC 2K (2 048) = 4 096 parameters (Nodes cannot expand the parameter count, so the parameters from the console is used - onPC nodes cannot give parameters to consoles) 1 grandMA2 light (4 096) + 1 onPC computer with a Command Wing (2 048) = 4 096 parameters (Wings cannot expand the parameter count, so the parameters from the console are used - onPC Wings cannot give parameters to consoles) © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 63 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Using a grandMA2 onPC with wings, nodes and NPU When a grandMA2 onPC is used some MA hardware is needed to unlock parameters. The maximum number of parameters that is allowed in a grandMA2 onPC system is 4 096! Any number of onPC hardware can be used with your computer. Every piece of hardware will add its parameters until the limit of 4 096 parameters is reached. This is the only two rules for parameters with grandMA2 onPC. Remember more units can be added to get more DMX ports. Examples: grandMA2 onPC + MA onPC command wing = 2 048 parameters grandMA2 onPC + MA onPC command wing + MA 2Port Node onPC Pro = 3 072 parameters grandMA2 onPC + MA onPC Fader Wing = 2 048 parameters grandMA2 onPC + MA 2Port Node onPC + MA 2Port Node onPC = 1 024 parameters grandMA2 onPC + MA onPC command wing + Fader Wing + MA 8Port node onPC = 4 096 parameters (you have reached the limit) grandMA2 onPC + MA onPC command wing + MA NPU = 4 096 (you have reached the limit) MA VPU and grandMA2 onPC If a MA VPU is used, it will supply its own parameters and does not affect the limit. Several MA VPUs can be controlled using a grandMA2 onPC. If however a mix of VPUs and other fixtures are used, then some MA hardware is needed to unlock the parameters for the fixtures. Even though the MA VPU does not count in your parameter limit, it is a good idea to patch the MA VPU on a higher universe than the other fixtures. There is a risk that it will steal the parameters from the other fixtures, if it is on a lower universe than the fixtures. Please have a look at DMX Channels vs. Parameters topic for more about the difference between DMX channels and Parameters. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 64 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.5. Big systems There are some limitation to consider when using the grandMA2 in big systems. The following is exploring some of these limitations running one session in a good Gigabit network. There is the general limitation regarding the parameter count: It can control a maximum of 65 536 parameters. Then there is the limit of 256 DMX universes - It is only possible to patch your fixtures in a maximum of 256 universes. The devices are separated into different classes. There is a limit of how many devices of each class can be in one session. Class A are grandMA2 full-size, grandMA2 light, grandMA2 ultra-light, grandMA2 replay unit, grandMA2 onPC and MA NPU. Maximum 31 Class A devices in a session. 8 of the 31 are reserved for Stations (grandMA2 consoles and grandMA2 onPC), the 23 remaining devices can be any Class A device. Class B are MA VPU, MA 3D and MA NDP. Maximum 64 Class B devices in a session. Class C are MA Nodes and MA VPU in "Show mode". Maximum 255 Class C devices in a session. The amount of RAM or memory is important. It is recommended to have a minimum of 8GB in every class A device in the session. If one device has lower memory, then the entire system can only utilize the lowest amount of memory. For instance if one MA NPU only has 4GB, then the entire session can only use 4GB. Memory is related to the size of the show file. If the maximum amount of parameters is used, then the amount of cues that can be stored is lower. User Profiles, the amount of fixtures patched, 3D objects in the show file, bitmaps, and so on all affects the memory use. The current memory use and the free memory can be monitored in the Desk Status window. For big systems it is always recommended to have an entire system running minimum 1 Gbit/s speed. This goes for all devices including the DMX nodes. It is not recommended to use older nodes that only run 100Mbit/s or 10Mbit/s speed. For a synchronized real time DMX output only use MA Nodes. If you are in a situation where you need to build a big system, it is a very good idea to have an experienced MA System Specialist involved in the design and implementation of the system and network. There are a lot of other considerations regarding building a network that can handle the traffic especially if there is a high demand for redundancy. A MA System Specialist has the required knowledge to help with all these considerations. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 65 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English It is not recommended to run more than 3 (very) big sessions in one gigabit network. If more than that is needed, please contact our technical support or a MA System Specialist. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 66 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - System Overview Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5.6. Media systems and CITP Media Systems - Media Servers / Players A media server can be many things. It can be a simple DMX controlled box that can display video and maybe still images. It can also be a big expensive system with multiple synchronized outputs and everything in between and beyond. There is no universal solution that fits all and makes everyone happy. MA VPUs are made to be controlled and programmed from the grandMA2 system. Media servers from other manufactures can be integrated into the MA system. They can be controlled via direct DMX, Art-Net, sACN or other network protocols. Some are even capable of listening to DMX information in MANet2. CITP The CITP protocol suite allows to exchange images, stream videos and configure fixture information. If a 3rd party media system supports the full CITP protocol, then thumbnails can be exchanged for each of the video/image files on the media device. It is also possible to watch a video stream from the media device on a console and on a surface in MA 3D. For more about getting thumbnails via CITP have a look at the CITP connection topic. Have a look at the description of the CITP viewer to learn more about watching a CITP video stream on the console. Some visualizers can also display the CITP video stream from media systems. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 67 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6. First Steps This chapter describes how to prepare the console and your PC to use it. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 68 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.1. Unpack the Device Unpack the device. Remove all packing material, strips and protection films. Keep the packing material for transport. Information: The device was tested for proper function at the factory. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 69 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.2. Check Scope of Delivery The list below shows the scope of delivery. If anything is missing, contact your local distributor. grandMA2 full-size grandMA2 light grandMA2 ultra-light grandMA2 fader wing MA onPC command wing and MA onPC fader wing grandMA2 full-size Built-in keyboard 2 x MA LED desk lamp grandMA2 1 x Dust cover grandMA2 full-size 1 x Quick Start Manual grandMA2 light Built-in keyboard 2 x MA LED desk lamp grandMA2 1x Dust cover grandMA2 light and ultra-light 1 x Quick Start Manual grandMA2 ultra-light 2 x MA LED desk lamp grandMA2 1x Dust cover grandMA2 light and ultra-light 1 x Quick Start Manual grandMA2 fader wing Connecting cable MA-link MA onPC command wing and MA onPC fader wing 1 x Dust cover USB cable 1.9 m Power Cord 1.9 m IECC plug (lockable) open end 1 x Quick Start Manual © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 70 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.3. Position the Device Follow the instructions below: Do not place the device in humid rooms. Place the device onto a stable, flat and dry area. Do not cover the ventilation holes. Do not place the device directly into the sun. Keep a minimum distance of 15 cm ( 5.91 inches) between multi-touch screen surface and radio intercom systems. If you go below the minimum distance, this may lead to unexpected behaviors such as unwanted multi-touch actions or mouse movements. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 71 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.4. Connect Power Warning: If only the powerCon connector is provided, you need to attach a suitable cable to the connector. To attach a suitable cable to the powerCon connector, contact your local dealer. 1. Insert the blue powerCon connector in the powerCon plug and twist it to lock 90 degrees clockwise. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to a suitable power source. The console is connected to power. grandMA2 full-size power connector © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 72 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.5. Connect Desk Lamps The console comes with two MA LED desk lamps. Connect the 4 pin XLR connector to the desk lamp connectors on the rear panel. The desk lamps are connected. grandMA2 full-size desk lamp connectors To adjust the intensity of the desk lamp see adjust desk lights. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 73 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.6. Connect External Screens You can connect up to two external screens or touch screens on a console – right and left. Information: We recommend ELO touch screens with the following specifications: - Certification: Microsoft WIN8 compliant - Connectivity: A USB interface - Video Interface: VGA or DVI or HDMI - Resolution: Monitors are to have a minimum resolution of 1024x768. Requirement: Console is turned off DVI cable Information: If the external screen has a VGA connector, a DVI adapter is necessary for VGA. DVI connectors for external screens 1. Connect the DVI cable for the right external screen with the Right DVI-I connector. 2. Place the external screen on the right, above the internal screen 2. The screen number for the external screen on the right is 5. 3. Connect the DVI cable for the left external screen with the Left DVI-I connector. 4. Place the external screen on the left, beside the external screen on the right. The screen number for the external screen on the left is 6. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 74 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 5. Connect power to the external screens. The external screens are connected. For more information see change screen options. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 75 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.7. Connect USB Mouse and USB Keyboad You can connect an external USB mouse and / or an external USB keyboard to the console. There are 5 USB connectors on the console. Two on the front panel, two on the rear panel and one in the drawer of a grandMA2 light and grandMA2 full-size. The console supports keyboards with US key layout. Information: It is recommended to use a wired keyboard. If you use a wireless keyboard, a proper function is not guaranteed. Connect the USB connector of the USB mouse / or USB keyboard to one of the USB plugs on the front or rear panel of the console. The USB mouse and / or USB keyboard is connected to the console. grandMA2 full-size USB connector front panel © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 76 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English grandMA2 full-size USB connector rear panel © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 77 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.8. Connect DMX You can connect DMX IN and DMX OUT on the console. The console has six DMX OUT ports (A - F) and one DMX IN port. You can configure the DMX ports in the network configuration. For more information see Configure the DMX ports on MA devices. DMX IN 1. Connect one end of a 5 pin XLR DMX cable to one of the DMX connectors. 2. Connect the other end to a suitable DMX device. The console is connected to a DMX device. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 78 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.9. Connect Sound To use a sound trigger, BPM or sound as an effect form, connect a sound source to the console. Information: The signal strength should be a minimum of 20 millivolts. Pin 1: Ground Pin 2 and Pin 3: Balanced Input Connect the 3 pin XLR sound source cable to the Audio IN connector on the rear panel. The sound source is connected to the Audio IN connector. grandMA2 full-size Audio IN connector For more information see adjust sound input and create effect form. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 79 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.10. Connect SMPTE (LTC) To synchronize the console with an SMPTE timecode source, connect an SMPTE source to the console. Information: The supported time formats are: - 24 fps (frames per second) - 25 fps - 30 fps If you send 29.97 or 30 drop frame, it will be interpreted as 30 fps. Information: The signal strength should be a minimum of 200 millivolts. Pin 1: Ground Pin 2: - (minus) Pin 3: + (plus) Connect the SMPTE source to the LTC IN connector on the rear panel. The SMPTE source is connected to the LTC IN connector. grandMA2 full-size LTC IN connector © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 80 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.11. Connect Ethernet The grandMA2 console has two Ethernet ports on its rear panel. Location Ethernet ports Ethernet Port 1 Information: The Ethernet port 1 is called eth0 in the grandMA2 software. Information: The Ethernet port 1 can be used for the following network protocols: - MA-Net2 - ETC Net2 - Pathport - sACN - Shownet - Kinet1 - CITP - PSN Requirement: STP (shielded twisted pair) cable with RJ45 connector, min. Cat 5e. To connect Ethernet port 1: 1. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet 1 port. 2. Connect the other end to a suitable switch. 3. Connect other grandMA2 equipment to the switch and turn on the power on the switch. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 81 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Ethernet is connected to port 1. Ethernet Port 2 Information: The Ethernet port 2 is called eth1 in the grandMA2 software. Information: The Ethernet port 2 can be used for the following network protocols: - Art-Net - CITP Information: The IP address is set by default in a 2.x.x.x range. An IP address is required in a 2.x.x.x or 10.x.x.x range for Art-Net. Requirement: STP (shielded twisted pair) cable with RJ45 connector, min. Cat 5e. To connect Ethernet port 2: 1. Connect one end of a Ethernet cable to the Ethernet 2 port. 2. Connect the other end to a suitable switch. 3. Connect other grandMA2 equipment to the switch and turn on the power on the switch. Ethernet is connected to port 2. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 82 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.12. Connect Analog Remote Control To use the analog remote control, connect a contact closure switch e.g., a light barrier or a push button. Generate a switch that sends between +5 and +15 volts to pin 1 for the console to react to analog input number 1. There are two ways to generate a switch: 1. Take the +5V voltage from pin 21-22. -or2. Take an external voltage (+5V up to +15V), connect the ground of the external voltage source to the common ground pin of the grandMA2 console or MA onPC command wing. Then connect the switch to one input pin 1-16 with a potential free contact (switcher, buzzer, motion detector, or any other switching device) in between. To configure the remote see Remote Controlling the System - Remote Input. Pin layout for grandMA2 consoles: The grandMA2 consoles have a 25 pin D-sub, enabling 16 remote inputs: Pin 1-16 = input Pin 21-22 = + 5V Pin 25 = common ground Pin layout for MA onPC command wings: The MA onPC command wing has a 15 pin D-sub, enabling 12 remote inputs: Pin 1-6 = input channels 1,3,5,7,9,11 Pin 9-14 = input channels 2,4,6,8,10,12 Pin 7 = + 5V Pin 8 = common ground Pin 15 = not used Connect a D-sub plug to the DC remote control connector on the rear panel. The analog remote control is connected to the DC remote control. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 83 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English grandMA2 full-size DC remote control connector MA onPC command wing DC remote control connector © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 84 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.13. Connect grandMA2 fader wing To extend the console by 15 motorized faders and 15 executor buttons, connect a grandMA2 fader wing. Hint: You can connect up to four grandMA2 fader wings to one grandMA2 console. 1. Connect one end of a 15 pin D-Sub cable to the MA-LINK connector on the rear panel. 2. Connect the other end to the grandMA2 fader wing. The grandMA2 fader wing is connected to the console. grandMA2 full-size MA-LINK connector To configure the wings see wing & monitor setup. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 85 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.14. Setup your PC To run grandMA2 onPC with the best result, we recommend to adjust the following settings on your PC. Turn on High Performance Power Plan To turn on the high performance power plan: Click the Start button , and then click Control Panel. In the search box, type power options, and then click Power Options. Under Select a power plan, click Show additional plans, and then click High performance. The high performance power plan is turned on. Optimize High Performance Power Options Turn off everything what can interrupt the grandMA2 onPC. To optimize the power options: 1. Click Change plan settings, and then Change advance power settings. 2. Choose for turn off the hard disk, Never. 3. Choose for USB selective suspend setting, Disabled. 4. Click Save changes. The power options are optimized. Choose Windows® Design Classic To conserve the graphic card resources, select the Windows® Classic design. Click the Start button , and then click Control Panel. In the search box, type personalization, and then click Personalization. Under Basic and High Contrast Themes, click Windows® Classic. The Windows Classic design is selected. Disable the Screen Saver To conserve the graphic card resources, disable the screen saver. Click the Start button , and then click Control Panel. In the search box, type personalization, and then click Personalization. Click Screen Saver, and select in the drop down None. The screen saver is disabled. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 86 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Optimize System Settings To optimize the system settings: 1. Click the Start button , and then click Control Panel. In the search box, type system, and then click System. Click Advanced system settings, and select the tab Advanced, click under Performance, Settings... . 2. Select tab Advanced and click Background service. 3. For low performance graphic cards only: Select tab Visual Effects and change the performance options to best performance. Click Adjust for best performance. The system settings are optimized. Assign grandMA2 onPC to the High Performance Graphic Card Information: Only if the PC has a on-board graphic card and an additional High Performance Graphic card. To assign the grandMA2 onPC software to the high performance graphic card: Open the Control Panel of the high performance graphic card. For more information, see the manual of the high performance graphic card. The grandMA2 onPC software is assigned to the high performance graphic card. Select dedicated AMD Graphic Card Information: Only if you have an integrated Intel HD graphic card and a dedicated AMD graphic card in your computer, it is necessary to select the dedicated AMD graphic card manually. To select the dedicated AMD graphic card: 1. Right mouse click on desktop and select Catalyst Graphics Properties. 2. Click under Power at Switchable Graphics Application Settings. 3. Click at All Applications. 4. Search for grandMA2 onPC and select in the drop down menu under Graphic Settings High Performance. 5. Click Apply. grandMA2 onPC is using the dedicated AMD graphic card. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 87 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 6.15. Turn on the Console the First Time Requirement: The console is placed on a stable surface and is connected to power. 1. Switch on the power switch on the console´s rear panel. 2. Press the power button on the console´s front panel. The console starts to boot and the pop-up Confirm End User License Agreement opens. Pop-up end user license agreement To activate the button I agree in the upper right corner of the pop-up, scroll all the way down. Important: The MA Software package provides the capability to use additional proprietary third-party software, which allows the usage of diverse media content. This is subject to license terms and to responsibility of fulfillment of license terms including proper licensing. If you decide to install the MA Software package along with the third-party software, check the box in the lower right corner. The MA Software package without the third-party software still allows the usage of non-proprietary media software (VP8, VP9). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 88 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Confirm end user license agreement Note: If you should subsequently decide to use third-party software, you can do so by checking the box in Setup: Press Setup , then tap Console – Software Update – End User License Agreement . Eventually, check the box in the lower right corner of the pop-up. Important: Note that you cannot check the box while the session is running. The console has to be in the standalone mode. Now open the gma2_start_show.show.gz by pressing Backup and then tapping Demoshows – Load Show . Select the show, tap Check All and then Load Show . To close the backup menu, tap corner of the menu. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com in the upper right 89 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - First Steps Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English grandMA2 start show on screen 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 90 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7. Keys & Buttons on the Console This chapter describes every key and button on the console along with their functions. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 91 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.1. Key Overview This overview displays shortcuts for a quick execution of commands. Important: For information on how to use the Press this Key Command <<< <<< key in combination with shortcuts see the MA key. Description Goes fast backward and ignores the cue timing. Example <<< Executor 1 Blacks out an executor without timing. <<< <<< <<< <<< Executor 1 Black Sets the master of an executor to 0 while holding the executor. <<< <<< <<< ToZero >>> >>> >>> >>> Flash >>> >>> >>> ToFull Align Align "<" Align Align Align ">" Align Align Align Align Align Align Align Assign Align Align Align Align Align Sets the master level of objects to zero. Goes fast forward and ignores the cue timing. <<< <<< <<< Executor 1 Flashes an executor without timing. >>> >>> Executor 1 >>> Executor 1 Sets the master level of objects to >>> >>> >>> Executor 1 full. Fans from the first object selected to No example the right. Fans from first object selected to the No example left. Align "><" Fans from the center of the selection. No example Align "<>" Fans between first and last objects selected. No example Align Off Switches off the fan function. No example Assign Assigns functions to buttons or opens the assign menu. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Assign Executor 1 Assign Flash Executor 1 92 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Assign Assign Assign Assign Assign Assign Effect Effect Label Labels the objects. Label Cue 1 Appearance Changes the frame color for pool objects and cues. Appearance Cue 1 Assign Form Forms objects. Assign Form 8 Effect 1 At Enters the keyword At into the command line. Channel 1 At 100 At At At Normal Sets the selection to normal value. It is possible to change the normal value in Setup - User - Settings. At press & hold Filter Opens the command "Filter". Blind Blind Fixture 1 At Fixture 2 Normal Fixture 1 No example ButtonPage - Switches on/off the live programmer to black. Switches on/off the second blind programmer. Switches to previous ButtonPage. ButtonPage 1 Switches to first ButtonPage. No example Bt Pg + Ch Pg Ch Pg press & hold Ch Pg + ButtonPage + ChannelPage - Switches to next ButtonPage. Switches to previous ChannelPage. No example No example Channel Page 1 Switches to first ChannelPage. No example ChannelPage + No example Channel Channel Switches to next ChannelPage. Enters the keyword Channel into the command line. Enters the keyword DMX into the command line. Blind press & hold Bt Pg Bt Pg press & hold Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel BlindEdit Dmx DmxUniverse Clear ClearSelection Clear press & hold ClearAll Clear Clear ClearActive Enters the keyword DMXUniverse into the command line. Deselects all fixtures or channels in the programmer. Releases everything and clears the programmer. Deactivates all values in the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com No example No example No example Channel 1 At 50 DMX 2.1 At 50 Unpark DMX Universe 1 No example No example No example 93 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Clear Clear Clear ClearAll Releases everything and clears the programmer. Copies source object to destination object. Copy Copy Copy Copy Clone Cue Cue Cue Cue Part Delete Delete Deletes objects. Remove Loads "Remove" into the programmer. Remove Position Release Loads "Release" into the programmer. Release Fixture 1 Enters the keyword . into the command line to indicate values separated by a dot. Sets the selection at dimmer value zero. The last focus goes a page down in the window. Preset 4.1 No example Copy Cue 1 At 5 Clones source object to destination object. Clone Fixture 1 to 21 If Sequence 1 Enters the keyword Cue into the command line. Enters part cue object into the command line. Store Cue 5 Store Cue 5 Part 2 Delete Sequence 1 Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Delete Executor 11 . . . . Zero Down No command Edit Edit Edit + Next/Previous No command Effect Effect Effect press & hold No command Exec Executor Enters the keyword Executor into the command line. Executor 1 At 100 Fade 5 Exec Exec SpecialMaster Enters the keyword SpecialMaster into the command line. Assign SpecialMaster 3.1 Executor 15 Fd Pg - FaderPage - Switches to previous FaderPage. Loads a cue in the programmer. Loads the next/previous cue in the programmer. Enters the keyword Effect into the command line. Temporarily opens the view Running Effects. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Fixture 1 At 10.5 Fixture 5 Zero No example Edit Cue 1 No example Off Effect 2 No example No example 94 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Fd Pg press & hold Fd Pg + FaderPage 1 Switches to first FaderPage. No example FaderPage + Switches to next FaderPage. Fixes and unfixes an executor for all pages. Enters the keyword Fixture into the command line. Enters the current programmer selection into the command line. No example Fix Executor 1.2 Fix Fix Fixture Fixture Fixture Fixture Selection Full Full Sets selection to dimmer value 100%. Fixture 1 Full Full Full No command Loads the highlight values into the programmer. Fixture 1 Full Full Go - GoBack Jumps back in a sequence list. Go - Executor 2 Go + Go Go + Go + Unpark Go+ Prvw PreviewExecutor Fixture 2 At 50 Park Selection Switches to next cue in the sequence Go Executor 2 with cue timing. Enters the keyword Unpark into the Unpark Selection command line. Steps through a cue list in preview No example mode. Goto Executor 1 Goto Goto Cue 1 (Executor 11) Goto Jumps to a cue. Goto Goto Load Enters the keyword Load into the command line. Group Group Enters the keyword Group into the command line. Group press & hold No command Opens group master view temporarily. World Enters "World" into the command line. World 1 Filter Calls or selects a filter. Select Filter 1 No command Opens help for an object. Help Fixture Load Executor 11 Group Group Group Group Group Help + Object © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Load Cue 1 (Executor 11) Group 2 At 100 No example 95 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English No example Help Please Help Opens the help view temporarily. Help Help CmdHelp Displays all shortcuts in the command window. Highlt Highlight Highlt press & hold No command IF IfOutput IF IF IfActive IF IF IF IfProg IF IF IF IF Learn If Learn Learn press & hold + executor button No command Learn Learn Rate1 List No command Macro Macro Macro Macro Timecode Macro Macro Macro Agenda minus No command minus minus At - 10 Sets the selection to the highlight values. Sets the selection to the highlight values and the highlight value of the dimmer starts to pulse. Selects fixtures with a dimmer value higher than 0%. Selects fixtures with active values in the programmer. Selects fixtures with active or inactive values in the programmer. Selects fixtures which exist in both groups. Learns speed for a chaser or effect. Holding the key Learn and tapping the executor at a certain speed teaches the chaser to run at this particular speed. Sets the rate of an executor back to 1:1. Switches the x-keys to button executors. Enters the keyword Macro into the command line. Enters the keyword Timecode into the command line. Enters the keyword Agenda into the command line and executes the first entry in the agenda list. Sets a relative value when used with spaces. Sets an absolute value when used without spaces. Dimmer goes down by 10 percent. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com No example No example No example IfOutput At 70 thru 100 No example No example Group 1 If Group 2 No example No example Rate1 Executor 1 No example Macro 1 Go Timecode 1 Agenda 1 Group 5 - Fixture 10 Attribute "Tilt" At -22 Fixture 1 At - 10 96 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Move Move Moves source objects to destination objects. Move Executor 1 At 2 Move Move Replace Replaces objects or values. Replace Fixture 1 with 2 Move Move Move Insert Moves objects to a new ID. Next Next Off Off Off Off No command Temporarily opens the Off Menu. Off Off On Enters the keyword On into the command line. On Cue 1 On On On Call Call Cue Thru 2 Oops Oops press & hold Oops Calls the status of the cue in the programmer. Undoes the last action. No example No command Temporarily opens the Oops Menu. No example Page Page Page 3 Page Page ChannelPage Enters the keyword Page into the command line. Enters the keyword ChannelPage into the command line. Enters the keyword FaderPage into the command line. Enters the keyword ButtonPage into the command line. Page Page Page Page Page Page Page FaderPage ButtonPage Selects next fixture or fixture of a selection. Knocks out values or releases executors. No example No example Off Executor 1 On Selection ChannelPage 2 FaderPage 3 ButtonPage 4 Pause Pause Pauses the current cue fade. Pause Executor 1 Pause Pause Park Parks objects. Park Fixture 10 Please Please Executes commands. Please Please No command Activates all attributes for the selection. plus + Functions as an "and". plus plus At + 10 Preset Preset Dimmer goes up by 10 percent. Enters the keyword Preset into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com No example No example Fixture 1 + fixture 2 No example At Preset 4.2 97 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Preset Preset Attribute Enters the keyword Attribute into the command line. Attribute "Tilt" At 50 Preset Preset Preset Gel Calls the keyword Gel from the Swatch Book. At Gel "Manufacturer"."Number or name of color" Previous Previous Selects previous fixture or fixture of a No example selection. All Leaves the Next/Previous MAtricks selection and selects all. Previous + Next Previous + Set + Next MAtricksInterleave Off Turns off MAtricksInterleave. Shows the preview of a cue. Preview does not generate a DMX output. Switches on/off the preview mode. No example No example Preview Cue 1 Prvw Preview Prvw Prvw PreviewEdit Select Select Enters the keyword Select into the command line. Select Executor 1 Select Select Selfix Selects all channels and fixtures of an executor. Selfix Executor 1 Sequ Sequence Enters the keyword Sequence into the command line. Assign Sequence 1 Executor 2 Set MAtricks Toggle Set + Next Set + Previous MAtricksInterleave + Toggles between the entire and the current selection of MAtricks Next/Previous. Toggles MAtricks Interleave to +1. MAtricksInterleave - Toggles MAtricks Interleave to -1. Store Store Enters the keyword Store into the command line. Store press & hold No command Opens the Temporary Store Options. Temp Temp Flashes an executor with timing and executor master level. Temp Executor 3 Temp Temp Toggle Switches on/off an executor. Assign Toggle Executor 101. No example No example No example No example Store Executor 1.10 Fixture 1 Thru 10 Thru Thru Selects several objects. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Fixture 1 Thru 10 At 0 Thru 100 98 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Time Time Time Time Time Time Fade Delay Switches to layer Fade. Switches to layer Delay. No example No example Value Switches to layer Value. No example Top Top Top Top Kill Up No command Update Update View View View View ViewButton View View View ViewPage Jumps to the first cue of a sequence Top Timecode 1 or the beginning of a time code. Releases all executors, which are not Kill Executor 5 kill-protected, on all pages except for the executor you kill. Pages up in the window with the last No example focus. Temporarily opens the Update View. No example Enters the keyword View into the No example command line. Enters the keyword ViewButton into Store ViewButton 1.1 the command line. Switches to a ViewPage. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com ViewPage 2 99 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.2. >>> [GoFastForward] Key The key >>> [GoFastForward] is located in the command area on the right of the key Learn . Location >>> [GoFastForward] key Pressing >>> enters >>> [GoFastForward] keyword into the command line. [Channel]> >>> Pressing >>> >>> enters Flash keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Flash Pressing >>> >>> >>> enters ToFull keyword into the command line. [Channel]> ToFull © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 100 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 101 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.3. <<< [GoFastBack] Key The key <<< [GoFastBack] is located in the command area on the left of the key Learn . Location <<< [GoFastBack] Pressing <<< enters <<< [GoFastBack] keyword into the command line. [Channel]> <<< Pressing <<< <<< enters Black keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Black Pressing <<< <<< <<< enters ToZero keyword into the command line. [Channel]> ToZero © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 102 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.4. . [Dot] Key The key . is located in the command area on the left of the key If . Location key . [dot] Pressing . enters the . into the command line. The . is used as a separator to enter numbers with decimal fractions or to enter hierarchical object IDs. [Channel]> . Pressing . . executes the Zero keyword. The dimmer values of the selected fixtures are set to 0 %. Pressing and holding + . enters the Default keyword into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 103 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Default © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 104 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.5. Align Key The key Align is located in the command area on the right of the key Assign . Location key Align Pressing Align toggles between the five align modes for the encoders. The Align command will be executed. By default, the align mode is off. 1. Align < mode is on. The encoder proportionally adjusts the fixture or channel values. The highest value is on the last fixture or channel of the selection. 2. Align > mode is on. The encoder proportionally adjusts the fixture or channel values. The highest value is on the first fixture or channel of the selection. 3. Align >< mode is on. The encoder proportionally adjusts the fixture or channel values. The highest value is on the first and last (inverted) fixture or channel of the selection. 4. Align <> mode is on. The encoder proportionally adjusts the fixture or channel values. The highest value is on the center of the fixture or channel selection. 5. Align mode is off. The encoder equally adjusts the fixture or channel selection. The Align mode is displayed in the encoder bar. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 105 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English If you choose an other preset type in the preset control bar, the align mode turns off. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 106 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.6. Assign Key The key Assign is located in the command area on the right of the key Prvw . Location key Assign Pressing Assign enters Assign keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Assign Pressing Assign Assign enters Label keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Label Pressing Assign Assign Assign enters Appearance keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Appearance © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 107 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.7. At Key The key At is located in the command area on the right of the key If . Location key At Pressing At enters At keyword into the command line. [Channel]> At Pressing At At executes the Normal command. The values of the selected fixtures or channels are set to their defined normal values. Executing: Normal © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 108 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding At for 2 seconds, opens the pop-up At Filter. Pop-up At Filter If the At key is flashing, an attribute filter is active. Pressing and holding + At enters the Stomp keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Stomp Pressing and holding + At At enters the Extract keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Extract © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 109 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.8. Backg (Background) Key The key Backg (Background) is located in the command area below the key U 4 . Information: The Backg key has no function. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 110 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.9. Backup Key The key Backup is located on the right of the key Setup . Location key Backup Pressing Backup executes Backup keyword and opens the Backup Menu. Pressing Backup Backup executes SaveShow keyword and saves the show data on the currently selected drive. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 111 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.10. Blind Key The key Blind is located in the command area on the left of the key Freeze . Location key Blind Pressing Blind executes the Blind keyword. It toggles Blind on or off. Pressing and holding Blind for 2 seconds executes BlindEdit keyword. It toggles BlindEdit on or off. To change the function of the Blind key see User Settings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 112 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.11. Bt Pg + (Button Page) Key The key Bt Pg + is located on the left of the 100 mm fader. Location key Bt Pg + Pressing Bt Pg + executes the ButtonPage command. The button page switches to the next page. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 113 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.12. Bt Pg - (Button Page) Key The key Bt Pg - is located left the 100 mm fader. Location key Bt Pg - Pressing Bt Pg - executes the ButtonPage command. That is: jumping to the previous ButtonPage. If you press and hold Bt Pg - , you will automatically jump to the first ButtonPage. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 114 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.13. B.O. (Blackout) Key The key B.O. is located in the command area on the right of the key Align . Location key B.O. As long as you press and hold B.O. , the blackout mode is on. For more information see Blackout keyword. The command line stays unaffected. To disable the B.O. key see User Settings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 115 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.14. Channel Key The key Channel is located on the left of the key Fixture . Location key Channel Pressing Channel enters the Channel keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Channel Pressing Channel Channel enters the Dmx keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Dmx Pressing Channel Channel Channel enters the DmxUniverse keyword into the command line. [Channel]> DmxUniverse © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 116 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 117 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.15. Ch Pg + (Channel Page +) Key The key Ch Pg + is located on the left of the 100 mm fader. Location key Ch Pg + Pressing Ch Pg + executes the ChannelPage command. The channel pages are displayed on screen 3 and 4. Channel Page © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 118 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English By pressing Ch Pg + again, you will jump to the next channel page. If the option Link Faders in the fixture sheet is active, the key Ch Pg + jumps to the dynamic channel pages on screen 3 and 4. Dynamic Channel Page © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 119 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.16. Ch Pg - (Channel Page -) Key The key Ch Pg - is located on the left of the 100 mm fader. Location key Ch Pg - © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 120 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing Ch Pg - executes the ChannelPage command. The channel pages are displayed on screen 3 and 4. Channel Page By pressing Ch Pg - again, you will jump to a previous channel page. If the option Link Faders in the fixture sheet is active, the Ch Pg - key jumps to the dynamic channel pages on screen 3 and 4. Dynamic Channel Page If you press and hold the Ch Pg - , you will automatically jump to the first channel page or the first dynamic channel page. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 121 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.17. Clear Key The key Clear is located in the command area right beside the key Update . Location key Clear Pressing Clear executes the Clear keyword. If fixtures are selected in the programmer, pressing Clear deselects the fixtures. If only active values are in the programmer, pressing Clear deactivates all active programmer values. The values are still in the programmer, but they are no longer active. If only inactive values are in the programmer, pressing Clear removes the values in the programmer. If fixtures are selected and active values are in the programmer, pressing Clear once deselects the fixtures. Pressing Clear two times deactivates the values. Pressing Clear three times removes the values in the programmer. Pressing and holding Clear for 2 seconds executes the ClearAll keyword. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 122 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.18. Copy Key The key Copy is located in the command area below the key Del . Location key Copy Pressing Copy enters the Copy keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Copy Pressing Copy Copy enters the Clone keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Clone © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 123 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.19. Cue Key The key Cue is located in the command area on the right of the key Sequ . Location key Cue Pressing Cue enters the Cue keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Cue Pressing Cue Cue enters the Part keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Part © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 124 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.20. Del (Delete) Key The key Del (= Delete) is located in the command area on the right of the key Goto . Location key Delete Pressing Del enters the Delete keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Delete Pressing Del Del enters the Remove keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Remove Pressing Del Del Del enters the Release keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Release © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 125 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.21. Down Key The key Down is located in the command area below the key Set . Location key Down Pressing Down moves the scroll bar of windows or the focus downward. Pressing and holding + Down moves the monitor wing of the console downward. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 126 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.22. Edit Key The key Edit is located in the command area on the left of the key Oops . Location key Edit Pressing Edit enters the Edit keyword into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 127 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.23. Effect Key The key Effect is located on the right of the key View . Location key Effect Pressing Effect enters the Effect keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Effect If a function keyword such as Store is already in the command line, pressing Effect Effect enters the Form keyword into the command line. [Channel]>Form © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 128 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding Effect for about 2 seconds opens the pop-up Running Effects. Pop-up Running Effects Pressing + Effect executes the SyncEffects command. Pressing and holding List + Effect opens the temporary effect pool. Temporary effect pool © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 129 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 130 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.24. [Encoder] Key The key is located between the four attribute encoders and the right screen encoder. Location key Encoder Pressing the key toggles the focus of the right screen encoder between screen 2 and screen 1. Pressing and holding the key opens the encoder settings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 131 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.25. Esc Key The key Esc is located in the command area on the right of the key Time . Location key Esc Pressing Esc deletes unexecuted commands in the command line and closes pop-ups. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 132 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.26. Exec (Executor) Key The key Exec is located in the command area on the right of the key Cue . Location key Exec Pressing Exec enters the Executor keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Executor Pressing Exec Exec enters the SpecialMaster keyword into the command line. [Channel]> SpecialMaster © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 133 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.27. Executor Buttons The executor buttons are located above and below the faders. Location executor buttons Each executor button has a number. By default, the executor buttons interact with the command line. To disable the interaction of the executor with the command line (= Exec CLI), go to Setup I Local Settings. Pressing an executor button on a fader or a button page executes the assigned function. [time] : Executing: Select ExecButton 1.1 [time] : Realtime: Go Executor 1.6 Pressing an executor button on a channel page executes the functions off, on or flash. [time] : Executing: Off ChannelFader 1.1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 134 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.28. Fd Pg + (Fader Page) Key The key Fd Pg + is located on the left of the two 100 mm faders. Location key Fd Pg + Pressing Fd Pg + executes the FaderPage keyword. The fader page switches to the next page. If you are on a channel page, press Fd Pg + to open the fader pages. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 135 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.29. Fd Pg - (Fader Page) Key The key Fd Pg - is located on the left of the 100 mm fader. Location key Fd Pg - Pressing Fd Pg - executes the FaderPage keyword. If you are on a channel page, press Fd Pg - to open the fader pages. If you press and hold the key Fd Pg - for 2 seconds, you will switch over to fader page 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 136 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.30. Fix Key The key Fix is located in the command area on the left of the key Select . Location key Fix Pressing Fix enters Fix keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Fix © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 137 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.31. Fixture Key The key Fixture is located in the command area on the right of the key Channel . Location key Fixture Pressing Fixture enters Fixture keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Fixture Pressing Fixture Fixture enters Selection keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Selection Pressing and holding + Fixture enters FixtureType keyword into the command line. [Channel]> FixtureType © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 138 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 139 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.32. Freeze Key The key Freeze is located in the command area on the right of the key Blind . Location key Freeze Pressing Freeze executes the Freeze keyword and turns on or off the freeze mode. The command line stays unaffected. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 140 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.33. Full Key The key Full is located in the command area on the left of the key Highlt . Location key Full Pressing Full executes the Full keyword. The dimmer values, for the selected fixtures or channels, will be set to 100 % . Pressing Full Full loads the highlight values, for the selected fixtures or channels, into the programmer. + Full executes the FullHighlight keyword. The highlight values, for the selected fixtures or channels, will be loaded into the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 141 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.34. Go + Key (small) The key Go + (small) is located in the command area on the right of the key Pause . Location key Go + (small) Pressing Go + enters the Go keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Go Pressing Go + Go + enters the Unpark keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Unpark © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 142 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.35. Go + (large) Key The large key Go + is located below the large key Go - . Location key Go + (large) Pressing Go + executes DefGoForward keyword for the selected executor. [time] : Macro: DefGoForward © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 143 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.36. Go - Key (small) The key Go - (small) is located in the command area on the left of the key Pause . Location key Go - (small) Pressing Go - enters the GoBack keyword into the command line. [Channel]> GoBack © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 144 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.37. Go - (large) Key The large key Go - is located above the large key Go + . Location key Large Go - Pressing Go - executes DefGoBack keyword for the selected executor. [time] : Macro: DefGoBack © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 145 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.38. Goto Key The key Goto is located in the command area on the right of the key Effect . Location key Goto Pressing Goto enters the Goto keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Goto Pressing Goto Goto enters the Load keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Load Pressing and holding + Goto enters the LoadNext keyword into the command line. [Channel]> LoadNext Pressing and holding + Goto Goto enters the LoadPrev keyword into the command line. [Channel]> LoadPrev © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 146 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 147 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.39. Group Key The key Group is located in the command area on the right of the key Fixture . Location key Group Pressing Group enters the Group keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Group Pressing Group for about 2 seconds opens the master view. Pressing Group Group enters the World keyword into the command line. [Channel]> World Pressing Group Group Group enters the Filter keyword into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 148 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Filter Pressing + Group enters the Layout keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Layout Pressing + Group Group enters the SearchResult keyword into the command line. [Channel]> SearchResult Pressing + Group Group Group enters the Mask keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Mask © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 149 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.40. Help Key The key Help is located on the right of the key Backup . Location key Help Pressing Help enters the Help keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Help Pressing Help Help enters the CmdHelp keyword into the command line. [Channel]> CmdHelp Pressing and holding Help + pressing any other key on the console, for example Fixture , opens the help window to the key pressed. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 150 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.41. Highlt (Highlight) Key The key Highlt is located in the command area on the left of the key Solo . Location key Highlight Pressing Highlt executes the Highlight keyword and turns on or off the Highlight mode. Pressing and and holding Highlt causes the selected fixture or channel to flash. Highlt is flashing between the dimmer default value and the dimmer highlight value. The command line stays unaffected. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 151 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.42. If Key The key If is located in the command area on the left of the key At . Location key If If the command line is empty, pressing If enters the IfOutput keyword [Channel]> IfOutput pressing If If enters the IfActive keyword [Channel]> IfActive pressing If If If enters the IfProg keyword [Channel]> IfProg © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 152 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English pressing If If If If enters the If keyword [Channel]> If into the command line. If the command line contains previous input, the If key toggles. Pressing If enters the If keyword into the command line. Pressing If again enters the EndIf keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Store If Group 5 EndIf © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 153 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.43. Keyboard Keys Keyboard keys are either located in the keyboard drawer or on any external keyboard connected to the console. Press this key ScrLck Pause Up or down arrow Ctrl + C Ctrl + V Shift + left or right arrow Ctrl + left mouse button Shift + left mouse button Function Always sets the cursor into the command line or on pop-ups which are temporarily opened. Locks the desk. If the focus is set on the command line, you can scroll in the command history and bring the entered keywords back into the command line. If the focus is set on a pool, you can scroll up or down in the pool. Copies the text selected. Pastes the text that was previously copied. Selects text. Selects multiple cells in sheets. Selects range of cells in sheets. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 154 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.44. Learn Key The key Learn is located in the command area on the right of the key <<< . Location key Learn Pressing Learn enters the Learn keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Learn Pressing Learn Learn enters the Rate1 keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Rate1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 155 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.45. List Key The key List is located in the command area on the left of the key Store . Location key List Pressing List displays the X-Key labels for the executor buttons 201-220 on the current button page. Button page on screen 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 156 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding + List enters the List keyword into the command line. [Channel]> List Open Temporary Pools The following short cuts open the temporary pool on screen 2 respectively (except for grandMA2 onPC without MA onPC wing). Temporary pools can be identified by the red background color between the objects. Pressing and holding List + Channel opens the temporary channel page pool. Temporary Channel Pool [time] : Macro: Menu ChannelPage © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 157 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding List + Group opens the temporary group pool. Temporary Group Pool [time] : Macro: Menu Group Pressing and holding List + Sequence opens the temporary sequence pool. Temporary Sequence Pool [time] : Macro: Menu Sequence © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 158 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding List + Page opens the temporary executor page pool. Temporary Executor Page Pool [time] : Macro: Menu Page Pressing and holding List + Macro opens the temporary macro pool. Temporary Macro Pool [time] : Macro: Menu Macro © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 159 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding List + Preset opens the temporary preset pool for the selected preset type in the preset control bar. Temporary Dimmer Preset Pool [time] : Macro: Menu Preset Pressing and holding List + View opens the temporary view pool. Temporary View Pool [time] : Macro: Menu View © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 160 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding List + Effect opens the temporary effect pool. Temporary Effect Pool [time] : Macro: Menu Effect © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 161 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.46. MA Key The key is located in the command area below the 0 . Location key MA Press to see all active icons of the message center in the command line. This command shows the icons even if the status is set to No (= empty) in the message center options. For more information on the icons of the message center see icons. For more information on the message center see message center. The following table contains shortcuts that work in combination with the Press this key Command No + number command + number + same No number again command key. Description Selects the preset type in the preset control bar indicated by the preset type number. Toggles through the features of a preset type in the preset type bar. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 162 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Press this key Command + . Default + At Stomp + At + At Extract + Down + Effect + Fix + Fixture + Full + Goto + Goto + Goto + Group + Group + Group + Group + Group + Group + List + Macro + Macro + Macro No command SyncEffects No command Executes the keyword SyncEffects. Switches the Desk Lock on/off. Enters the keyword FixtureType into the command line. Executes the keyword FullHighlight into the FullHighlight command line. Enters the keyword LoadNext into the command LoadNext line. Enters the keyword LoadPrev into the command LoadPrev line. Enters the keyword Layout into the command Layout line. Enters the keyword SearchResult into the SearchResult command line. Mask Enters the keyword Mask into the command line. List Timer Enters the keyword List into the command line. Enters the keyword Timer into the command line. Plugin Enters the keyword Plugin into the command line. Search + Next NextRow + Preset PresetType + Prev PrevRow No command + Store Moves down the monitor wing. FixtureType + Move + Set Description Enters the keyword Default into the command line. Enters the keyword Stomp into the command line. Enters the keyword Extract into the command line. Record Enters the keyword Search into the command line. Executes the keyword NextRow . Enters the keyword PresetType into the command line. Executes the keyword PrevRow . Releases the monitor wing brake to adjust the angle of the monitor manually. Enters the keyword Record into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 163 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Press this key + Time + Time + Time + Up + Update Command No command No command No command No command + View Screen + V key No command Description Opens the effect layer in the encoder bar. Switches to the next effect layer in the encoder bar. Moves up the monitor wing. Lists updates in the command line feedback view. Enters the keyword Screen into the command line. Selects the view page indicated by the V key number. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 164 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.47. Macro Key The key Macro is located in the command area on the right of the key Page . Location key Macro Pressing Macro enters the Macro keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Macro Pressing Macro Macro enters the Timecode keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Timecode Pressing Macro Macro Macro enters the Agenda keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Agenda Pressing and holding + Macro enters the Timer keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Timer © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 165 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding + Macro Macro enters the Plugin keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Plugin Pressing and holding List + Macro temporarily opens the Macro Pool on screen 2 (except for grandMA2 onPC without MA onPC wing). Temporary Macro Pool © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 166 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.48. [Minus] - Key The key - is located on the right of the numeric keys in the command area. Location key [Minus] - Pressing - once enters the [Minus] - keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Pressing - twice subtracts 10 % dimmer value of the selected fixture or channel. [time] :Macro: At - 10 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 167 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.49. Mouse Key The key Mouse is located in the left corner above the trackball. Location key Mouse The key Mouse toggles between the selected trackball sequences. To select the trackball sequence see User Settings. If the key Mouse is: On – the trackball controls the mouse function. Blinking – the trackball controls pan and tilt for the selected fixtures or channels. Off – the trackball has no function. Off and the middle key above the trackball is on – the trackball functions as a dimmer wheel. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 168 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.50. Move Key The key Move is located in the command area on the right of the key Group . Location key Move Pressing Move enters the Move keyword into the command line. As long as the keyword Move is in the command line you can move pool objects by pressing and holding a pool object and move it with your finger to a new position of the pool object - or pressing and holding the key Move and moving pool objects by tapping a pool object and then tapping the new position of the pool object. [Channel]> Move Pressing Move Move enters the Replace keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Replace Pressing Move Move Move enters the Insert keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Insert © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 169 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding + Move enters the Search keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Search © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 170 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.51. Next Key The key Next is located in the command area on the right of the key Set . Location key Next If a pop-up dialog is open, for example the pop-up Choose store method, you can set the focus on the following options by pressing the key Next . Pressing Next executes the Next keyword. The fixture with the lowest fixture ID is selected. [time] : Executing : Next Pressing and holding + Next executes the NextRow keyword. For more information see MAtricks. [time] : Executing : NextRow Pressing Next + Prev executes the All keyword. [time] : Executing : All © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 171 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.52. [Numeric] Keys The numeric keys 0 trough 9 are located in the command area of the console. Location numeric keys Pressing a numeric key enters the number in the line focused. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 172 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding + a numeric key, for example 2 , selects the respective preset type for the number entered in the preset control bar. Select preset type in the preset control bar [time] : Executing: PresetType "POSITION" Pressing control bar. + a numeric key several times changes the attributes in the encoder bar to the selected preset Select attribute in the encoder bar [time] : Executing: Attribute "MP_TR_X" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 173 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.53. Off Key The key Off is located in the command area on the right of the key Select . Location key Off Pressing Off enters the Off keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Off Pressing and holding Off and pressing several executor buttons turns off the executors. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 174 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing Off Off opens the Off Menu. Off Menu © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 175 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.54. On Key The key On is located in the command area on the right of the key Top . Location key On Pressing On enters the On keyword into the command line. [Channel]> On Pressing On On enters the Call keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Call © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 176 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.55. Oops Key The key Oops is located in the command area on right of the key Edit . Location key Oops Pressing Oops deletes the last keyword or number you entered in the command line. If the command line is empty, pressing Oops executes the Oops keyword. The pop-up Confirm Undo opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 177 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pop-up Confirm Undo Pressing and holding the key Oops for about 2 seconds, opens the pop-up Multi-Oops. Pop-up Multi-Oops © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 178 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.56. Page Key The key Page is located in the command area on the left of the key Macro . Location key Page Pressing Page enters the Page keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Page Pressing Page Page enters the ChannelPage keyword into the command line. [Channel]>ChannelPage Pressing Page Page Page enters the FaderPage keyword into the command line. [Channel]>FaderPage Pressing Page Page Page Page enters the ButtonPage keyword into the command line. [Channel]>ButtonPage © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 179 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding List + Page opens the temporary Pages Executor pool on screen 2 (except for grandMA2 onPC without MA onPC wing). Temporary executor page pool © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 180 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.57. Pause (small) Key The small key Pause is located in the command area on the right of the small key Go - . Location key Pause (small) Pressing Pause enters the Pause keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Pause Pressing Pause Pause enters the Park keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Park © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 181 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.58. Pause (large) Key The large key Pause is located above the large key Go - . Location key Pause (large) Pressing Pause executes the DefGoPause keyword. The executors selected will be paused. [time] : Macro : DefGoPause Pressing ends. Pause again executes the DefGoPause keyword again. The pause of the selected executors [time] : Macro : DefGoPause © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 182 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.59. Please Key The key Please is located in the command area below the number pad. Location key Please Pressing Please executes keywords entered into the command line. This is the same function as pressing Enter on an external keyboard or pressing Please on the keyboard in the keyboard drawer. Pressing Please Please activates all attributes of the current fixture or channel selection in the programmer. Fixture sheet with active attributes in the programmer © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 183 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing Please again deactivates all attributes of the current fixture or channel selection in the programmer. Fixture sheet with deactivated attributes in the programmer Important: If values are already active in the programmer, times and effect values in playbacks will not be activated pressing Please Please . If these values are to be taken into the programmer (to be knocked in), press Please Please again. Pressing and holding + Please sets the cursor in the command line. Command line displaying the cursor © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 184 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.60. [Plus] + Key The key + is located next to the numeric keys in the command area. Location key [Plus] + Pressing + enters + [Plus] keyword into the command line. [Channel]> + Pressing + + adds 10 % of dimmer value to the selected fixture or channel. Macro: At +10 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 185 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.61. Preset Key The key Preset is located in the command area on the right of the key Macro . Location key Preset Pressing Preset enters the Preset keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Preset Pressing Preset Preset enters the Attribute keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Attribute Pressing Preset Preset Preset enters the Gel keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Gel Pressing and holding + Preset enters the PresetType keyword into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 186 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> PresetType Pressing and holding List + Preset opens the temporary preset pool on screen 2 for the selected preset in the preset control bar. Temporary preset pool © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 187 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.62. Prev (Previous) Key The key Prev is located in the command area on the left of the key Set . Location Key Prev (Previous) If a pop-up dialog is open, for example the pop-up Choose store method, you can set the focus on the following options by hitting the key Prev . Pressing Prev executes the Previous keyword. The fixture or channel with the highest ID will then be selected. [time] : Executing : Previous Pressing and holding + Prev executes the PrevRow keyword. For more information see MAtricks. [time] : Executing : PrevRow Pressing Prev + Next executes the All keyword. [time] : Executing : All © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 188 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.63. Prvw (Preview) Key The key Prvw (Preview) is located in the command area on the left of the key Assign . Location Key Prvw (Preview) Pressing Prvw enters the Preview keyword into the command line and opens the preview encoder bar. [Channel]> Preview Encoder Bar - Preview Pressing Prvw Prvw executes the PreviewEdit keyword. Preview Edit is on. To close Preview Edit press Prvw Prvw again. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 189 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [time] : Executing : PreviewEdit If there is already a function keyword in the command line, pressing Prvw executes the function keyword with the PreviewExecutor keyword. [time] : Executing : Go PreviewExecutor Pressing and holding Prvw + and pressing an executor button, for example 1 , executes the Preview keyword with the option /add. [time] : Executing : Preview ExecButton 1 /add © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 190 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.64. Select Key The key Select is located in the command area on the left of the key Off . Location Key Select Pressing Select enters the Select keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Select Pressing Select Select enters the SelFix keyword into the command line. [Channel]> SelFix © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 191 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.65. Sequ (Sequence) Key The key Sequ (Sequence) is located in the command area on the left of the key Cue . Location Key Sequ Pressing Sequ enters the Sequence keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Sequence © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 192 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.66. Set Key The key Set is located in the command area below the key Up . Location Key Set Key Set as the Key Enter If a pop-up dialog is open, for example the pop-up Choose store method, the key Set has the function of the key Enter. Pressing Set confirms the selected button in the pop-up. Key Set and MAtricks Pressing Set enables and disables the MAtricks settings. [time] : Executing : MAtricks Toggle If the MAtricks button is green, the MAtricks are enabled. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 193 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Encoder Bar - Enabled MAtricks Pressing and holding Prev + Set executes the MAtricksInterleave -. [time] : Executing : MAtricksInterleave Pressing and holding Next + Set executes MAtricksInterleave +. [time] : Executing : MAtricksInterleave + Pressing and holding + Prev + Set executes MAtricksBlocks -. [time] : Executing : MAtricksBlocks Pressing and holding + Next + Set executes MAtricksBlocks +. [time] : Executing : MAtricksBlocks + For more information see MAtricks. Key Set for Adjustment of Monitor Wing Angle To manually adjust the monitor wing angle, release the torque of the monitor wing engine. Pressing and holding + Set . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 194 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.67. Setup Key The key Setup is located in the command area on the right of the key Tools . Location Key Setup Pressing Setup executes the Setup keyword and opens the setup on the screen which was opened last. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 195 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Setup © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 196 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.68. Solo Key The key Solo is located in the command area on the right of the key Highlt . Location Key Solo Pressing Solo executes the Solo keyword and turns the solo mode on or off. The command line stays unaffected. To disable the Solo key function, see User Settings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 197 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.69. Store Key The key Store is located in the command area on the left of the key . Location Key Store Pressing Store enters the Store keyword into the command line and changes the encoder bar to the store encoder bar. [Channel]> Store Store Encoder Bar © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 198 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding Store opens the pop-up Temporary Store Options. Pop-up Temporary Store Options Pressing and holding and Store enters the Record keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Record © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 199 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.70. Temp Key The key Temp is located in the command area on the left of the key Top . Location Key Temp Pressing Temp enters the Temp keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Temp Pressing Temp Temp enters the Toggle keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Toggle © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 200 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.71. Thru Key The key Thru is located in the command area on the right of the number key 6 in the number pad. Location Key Thru Solely pressing Thru , enters the default keyword and the Thru keyword into the command. [Channel]> Channel Thru If you press Thru after pressing another keyword, only the Thru keyword will be entered into the command line. [Channel]> Fixture Thru © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 201 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.72. Time Key The key Time is located in the command area on the left of the key Esc . Location Key Time Pressing Time enters the Fade keyword into the command line and changes the encoder bar to Fade. Encoder Bar Fade [Channel]> Fade © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 202 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English If Auto is selected in the layer control bar of the fixture or channel sheet, pressing Time changes to the Fade Layer. Layer Control Bar - Fade Layer Pressing Time Time enters the Delay keyword into the command line and changes the encoder bar to Delay. Encoder Bar Delay [Channel]>Delay If Auto is selected in the layer control bar of the fixture or channel sheet, pressing Time Time changes to the Delay Layer. Layer Control Bar - Delay Layer © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 203 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding Time for about 2 seconds changes the encoder bar to Value. Encoder Bar Value If Auto is selected in the layer control bar of the fixture or channel sheet, pressing and holding Time for about 2 seconds changes to the Values Layer. Layer Control Bar - Values Layer If you enter Store or Assign keyword into the command line, pressing then Time enters the Fade keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Store Fade pressing then Time Time enters the OutFade keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Store OutFade pressing then Time Time Time enters the Delay keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Store Delay pressing then Time Time Time Time enters the OutDelay keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Store OutDelay pressing Time Time Time Time Time enters the SnapPercent keyword into the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 204 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Store SnapPercent pressing then Time Time Time Time Time Time enters the CmdDelay keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Store CmdDelay Pressing and holding + Time opens the Effect Layer in the encoder bar. Encoder Bar - Effect Layer Pressing and holding + Time again, changes to the next Effect Layer. If Auto is selected in the layer control bar of the fixture or channel sheet, pressing and holding changes to the next Effect Layer. + Time Layer Control Bar - Effect Layer © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 205 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.73. Top Key The key Top is located in the command area on the right of the key Temp . Location Key Top Pressing Top enters the Top keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Top Pressing Top Top enters the Kill keyword into the command line. [Channel]> Kill © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 206 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.74. Tools Key The key Tools is located in the command area on the left of the key Setup . Location Key Tools Pressing Tools executes the Tools keyword. The menu Tools opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 207 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Tools menu © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 208 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.75. Up Key The key Up is located in the command area above the key Set . Location Key Up If you press the key Up , the scroll bar of the window or pop-up, in which the focus is set, moves up. If you press and hold + Up , the monitor wing of the console moves up. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 209 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.76. Update Key The key Update is located in the command area on the left of the key Clear . Location Key Update Pressing Update , enters the Update keyword into the command line. Pressing Update while a sequence or an effect is running, or while a preset is being called, plus when active different values are in the programmer, opens the pop-up Update. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 210 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pop-up Update Related Links Update Presets Update Cues Update Effects © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 211 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.77. User 1 Key The key User 1 is located on the right of screen 1. Location Key User 1 If you press User 1 , the X-Keys and X-Key labels on screen 1 change to the User 1 page. X-Key Labels on Screen 1, User 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 212 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.78. User 2 Key The key User 2 is located on the right of screen 1. Location Key User 2 If you press User 2 , the X-Keys and X-Key labels change to the User 2 page on screen 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 213 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.79. View Key The key View is located in the command area on the left of the key Effect . Location Key View Pressing View , enters the View keyword into the command line. [Channel]> View Pressing View View , enters the ViewButton keyword into the command line. [Channel]>ViewButton Pressing View View View , enters the ViewPage keyword into the command line. [Channel]>ViewPage © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 214 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pressing and holding and View , enters the Screen keyword into the command line. [Channel]>Screen © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 215 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.80. U1 - U4 keys The U-Keys are located on the right of screen 1. Location U-Keys The U-Keys have a function if function buttons are visible on screen 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 216 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Assign Menu U-Key Function Buttons © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 217 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.81. V1 - V10 Keys The keys V1 through V10 are located on the right of screen 2. Location V-Keys If you press a V-Key , the ViewButton keyword will be executed. The displayed view on the view button will be called. If you press and hold and a V-Key , the ViewPage keyword will be executed. The view page corresponding the V-Key number you have pressed, will be called. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 218 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 7.82. X1 - X20 Keys The X-Keys are located below screen 1. Information: The grandMA2 ultra-light has only X1 - X10. Location X-Key If you press User1 or User2 , the X-Keys will work just like view buttons. If you press List , the X-Keys will work just like executor buttons. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 219 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Keys & Buttons on the Console Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 220 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8. Workspace The chapter workspace deals in general with: 1. Non-modifiable elements of visual display such as: -The executor bar Important: The executor bar cannot be resized, hidden or moved. 2. Modifiable elements of visual display such as: -Windows -Views Important: Windows and views can be resized and moved. 3. Coloring in user interface 4. Input modes such as: -Touch gestures -Keyboard shortcuts © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 221 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1. User Interface This chapter gives you an understanding of the grandMA2 user interface, the different elements such as the command line, and how to work with these elements. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 222 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.1. Screen Layout This topic provides information on the screen layouts of the different screens. Screen 1 The screen 1 or command screen is structured in three 3 areas starting at the bottom and ending at the top. Screen Layout of Screen 1 - Command Screen 1. X-Key Labels to label X-Keys. 2. Command Line to enter keywords, open the command line feedback, or to open the message center. 3. User Defined Area to create and arrange windows. Screen 2 The screen 2 is structured in seven areas. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 223 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Screen Layout of Screen 2 1. Master Section displays the selected executor. 2. User Defined Area to create and arrange windows. 3. Command Line to enter keywords, open the command line feedback, or to open the message center. 4. Preset Control Bar to select a preset type. 5. Encoder Toolbar to control attributes. 6. Time Control to control program time and exec time. 7. View Buttons to recall user defined window arrangements. Screen 3 and Screen 4 (only grandMA2 light or grandMA2 full-size) Screen 3 and screen 4 are structured in three areas. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 224 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Screen Layout of Screen 3 and Screen 4 1. Mini Executor Bar to get information about the content and functions of the executor. 2. User defined area to create and arrange windows. 3. View Buttons to recall user defined window arrangements. Screen 5 and Screen 6 (external screens) The external screens are structured in two areas. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 225 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Screen Layout of Screen 5 and Screen 6 1. User defined area to create and arrange windows. 2. View Buttons to recall user defined window arrangements. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 226 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.2. User-Defined Area The user defined area is available on every screen. To manage windows in the user defined area see manage windows. Empty user defined area © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 227 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.3. Command Line The command line is located in the bottom area of screen 1 and screen 2. Command Line Set the Cursor in the Command Line To enter keywords into the command line set the cursor in the command line first. For more information see Command Syntax and Keywords. To set the cursor into the command line: Tap the command line. - orPress and hold and press Please . Command line with blinking cursor The cursor is blinking in the command line. Open the Pop-Up Commandline Feedback To see command line feedback and history open the pop-up Command Line Feedback. To open the command line feedback: Tap on the left of the the command line. Or tap Command Line in Create Basic Window. For more Information see Create and manage basic window. The window Command Line Feedback opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 228 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pop-Up Commandline Feedback To close the pop-up tap the once again in the command line. Open the Message Center To have an overview of the messages and descriptions of the icons in the command line open the message center. For more information see Message Center. To open the message center: Tap one of the visible icons in the command line. The message center opens above the command line. Message Center To close the message center tap one of the icons in the command line once again. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 229 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Open the Virtual Keyboard To expand the command line by a virtual keyboard: Tap on the right of the command line. The virtual keyboard opens above the command line. Virtual Keyboard To close the virtual keyboard tap in the upper right corner of the window. Change the Default Keyword The default keyword is the keyword displayed in square brackets on the left of the command line. If the default keyword is Fixture and you only enter a number, for example number 1, into the command line, Fixture 1 will be entered into the command line. You can change the default keyword of the command line to: View Effect Goto Page Macro © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 230 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Preset Sequ Cue Executor Channel Fixture Group To change the default keyword: 1. Press a key with a default keyword on it, for example Fixture . 2. Press Please . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 231 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.4. X-Key Labels The X-Key labels are located at the bottom of screen 1. In the middle of the X-Key labels is the page displayed. Three pages are available: User1 User2 Button Page 1 thru 9999. If you press User1 , the X-Key labels displays the function of view button 11.1 - 11.20. If you press User2 , the X-Key labels displays the function of view button 11.21 - 11.40. X-Key Labels for User 1 If you press List , the X-Key labels displays the mini executor bar for the executor buttons 201 - 220 on the current button page. To change the button page, press Bt Pg + or Bt Pg - . X-Key Labels for Mini Executor Bar © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 232 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.5. View Buttons There are two kinds of view buttons in the grandMA2 user interface: View Buttons on the Right Screen Side X-Keys as View Buttons If you tap on a view button, the ViewButton keyword will be executed. For more information about the function of the view buttons, see use view buttons. View Buttons on the Right Screen Side The view buttons are located on the right side of screen 2 through screen 6. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 233 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English View Buttons on the right side of screen 2 trough screen 6. To change the view page, see ViewPage keyword. On screen 2 are the view buttons [viewpage].1 through [viewpage].10. On screen 3 are the view buttons [viewpage].11 through [viewpage].20. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 234 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English On screen 4 are the view buttons [viewpage].21 through [viewpage].30. On screen 5 are the view buttons [viewpage].31 through [viewpage].40. On screen 6 are the view buttons [viewpage].41 through [viewpage].50. Areas of a view button. A view button is structured in three areas: 1. [ViewPage] . [ViewButton] Number along with a screenshot as the view was stored 2. View Pool Number 3. View Pool Label For more information about views, see work with views. X-Keys as View Buttons If you press User1 or User2 , the X-Keys works as view buttons as well. These view buttons are located at the bottom of screen 1. X-Keys as view buttons. If you press User1 , you get view button 11.1 through 11.20. If you press User2 , you get view button 11.21 through 11.40. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 235 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Areas of view button X-Key. The view button X-Key is structured in four areas. 1. View Button Number 2. View Pool Label 3. View Pool Number 4. Screenshot as the view was stored For more information about views, see work with views. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 236 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.6. Master Section The master section is located in the corner on the left of screen 2. It consists of three areas. Areas in the Master Section 1. Selected Executor 2. Function of the Left 100 mm Fader 3. Function of the Right 100 mm Fader The master section is also displayed in the Command Section View along with Program Time and Exec Time. Open the Command Section View via the pop-up Create Basic Window. For more information see Create and Manage Basic Windows. Open the Command Section View © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 237 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Selected Executor The selected executor has two areas. Selected Executor Areas 1. Sequence 2. Cue If you tap at the sequence area, the assign menu opens. If you tap at the cue area, the edit menu opens. For more information, see Mini Executor Bar. Fader Function The two faders display the current fader function of the 100 mm faders. You can move the slider up or down and tap at the function buttons right beside the slider. If you tap in the fader description field, the fader assignment opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 238 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Fader Assignment For more information, see executor - assign a function. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 239 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 240 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.1.7. Time Control The time control is located right beside the encoder bar on screen 2. It is two on-screen faders controlling two different timing elements. They are called Program Time and Exec Time (Executor Time). It could look like this: Time Control The faders can be assigned to any Fader Executor. This will give physical fader control. Please read the Grand Masters topic. The two faders can be used to set a time. The default maximum is 10 seconds. This maximum value can be changed in Setup->User->Settings. The bottom of screen 2 can be changed on the grandMA2 onPC. This will make it fit the hardware on a grandMA2 onPC Command Wing. This will hide the Time Control. Please read the grandMA2 onPC details topic for details about turning this On or Off. The fader can still be assigned to physical faders. The virtual control can be created on any screen using the CMD Section window. This can be found in the Other tab in the Create Basic Windows pop-up. Program Time The Program Time can be used to add a fade time to changes in programmer values. Set the fader to the desired value and activate the Program Time by pressing the On executor key or tap the Set Time button so there is a red marker. Now the set time will be used for all value changes in the Programmer. To deactivate it tap the Set Time button again or press the Off executor key. The red marker should disappear. It is also possible to use the fader as a manual cross fade from old to new values. Tap the Manual Xfade button or press the MFX executor key to activate the crossfade function - a green marker appears. The master will © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 241 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – User Interface Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English move to the lowest position (if it is not already there). Change the value to the new values - the output will not change! Move the fader from the lowest to the highest position to fade into the new values. The green marker will flash while the cross fade is active. Tap or press the same button to deactivate the manual cross fade - green marker disappears. Exec Time (Executor Time) The Exec Time can be used to add a different fade time to changes in cue values. Set the fader to the desired value and activate the Exec Time by pressing the On executor key or tap the Set Time button so there is a red marker. Now all cues will change values using the set time. Delay and individual times are ignored. Cues with Follow or Time triggers use the stored time. To deactivate it tap the Set Time button again or press the Off executor key. The red marker should disappear. It is also possible to use the fader as a manual cross fade from old to new values. Tap the Manual Xfade button or press the MFX executor key to activate the cross fade function - a green marker appears. The master will move to the lowest position (if it is not already there). Run the desired cues - the output will not change! Move the fader from the lowest to the highest position to fade into the new cues. The green marker will flash while the cross fade is active. Tap or press the same button to deactivate the manual cross fade - green marker disappears. An Executor can be set to ignore the Exec Time. This is done in the Executor Options. This will make the Executor run as normal using the stored cue timings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 242 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.2. Encoder Bar The encoder bar is located below the command line on screen 2. You can also open the encoder bar in the user defined area. To open the encoder bar in the user defined area: Tap on an empty space on one of the screens, tap Other , tap Encoder Bar . The encoder bar is open. Encoder Bar Window The encoder bar is structured in two areas: 1. Preset Control Bar 2. Encoder Toolbar © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 243 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Encoder Bar Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.2.1. Preset Control Bar The preset control bar is a part of the encoder bar. You can also turn the preset control bar on or off for the: Fixture Sheet Channel Sheet Sequence Content Sheet Sequence Tracking Sheet Preset Control Bar The preset control bar displays the available presets types in the show, according to the patched fixtures or channels. If only fixture or channels with dimmer attributes are patched in the show, there is only the Dimmer preset type in the preset control bar. The preset control bar follows the fixtures or channels according to the selected world. For more information, see World, Filters, and Masks. Each preset has a preset type number. 1. Dimmer 2. Position 3. Gobo 4. Color 5. Beam 6. Focus 7. Control 8. Shapers 9. Video Green box frame indicates the available preset types to the selected fixture or channel. Gray box frame indicates that this preset types are not available to the selected fixture or channel. Red indicator displays active programmer values to this preset type in the programmer. Select a Preset Type To select a preset type in the preset control bar: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 244 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Encoder Bar Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Tap at the preset box. The preset type is selected. The encoder toolbar changes according to the selected preset type. The preset type number and name are displayed yellow. You can also select the preset type by using the keys, see MA key. Get Active Programmer Values To get active programmer values for a preset type in the programmer for the selected fixtures or channels: Double tap at the preset type in the preset control bar. The values to the preset type for the selected fixtures or channels are active in the programmer. The red indicator is visible. Change values in the programmer You can change programmer values by using the preset type bar for these functions: On Off Park Unpark Remove Release Stomp Default Example To remove all dimmer values for the fixture selection in the programmer: Press Off and tap Dimmer in the preset type bar. The dimmer values are removed from the programmer for the fixture selection. Turn the Preset Control Bar on or off in Sheets Requirement: An open fixture sheet, channel sheet, sequence content sheet, or sequence tracking sheet. To turn the preset control bar on or off in the sheets: Tap at the yellow ball , tap Tools and then tap in the filed below Preset Control On or Off . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 245 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Encoder Bar Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The preset control bar is on or off in the sheet. To save the preset control bar settings, save the setting as default or save the view. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 246 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Encoder Bar Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.2.2. Encoder Toolbar The following topic describes the default encoder toolbar. The encoder toolbar is context sensitive - it changes depending on the focused view. The encoder toolbar is part of the encoder bar and located below the preset control bar. Encoder Toolbar 1. Features of the preset type. If more features are available, swipe to change the feature. 2. Attributes of feature. 3. Displays the value. To change the value, turn the encoder left or right. To open the calculator, tap in the field or press the encoder. 4. Choose the encoder resolution. 5. Choose between value layer or effect layer. 6. Select the layer. For more information, see control fixtures and channels (value layer) or live edit an effect (effect layer). 7. Select the Align mode. For more information to the Align mode, see Align key. 8. Opens the MAtricks Toolbar. For more information, see MAtricks toolbar. 9. Opens the Special Dialog. If its grayed out, there is no special dialog available. Change Encoder Link Setting If the layer fade, delay, or any effect layer is selected, the encoder link button appears in the encoder bar. Encoder Toolbar with Encoder Link Button There are eight encoder link settings available: Requirement: - Selected fixtures or channels. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 247 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Encoder Bar Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English - Selected layer is fade, delay, or any effect layer. Choose the encoder link option you like to have. Link Single: Set the value for the single attribute. Link Single Active: Set the value for the single attribute, only if the parameters are already active in programmer. Link Feature: Set the value for all attributes of the feature. E.g. if you set a delay time for Pan it will also set the time for Tilt. Link Feature Active: Set the value for all attributes of the feature, only if the parameters are already active in programmer. Link All: Set the value for all attributes. Link All Active: Set the value for all attributes, only if the parameters are already active in programmer. Link Filter: Set the value for the attributes matching the selected filter . Link Filter Active: Set the value for the attributes matching the selected filter, only if the parameters are already active in programmer. The encoder link option is saved in the user settings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 248 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.3. Encoder Settings To go to the encoder settings, press and hold the . The pop-up is visible as long as you press the key. The encoder bar settings has two part. The bigger part and the smaller part. Encoder settings - bigger part Encoder settings - smaller part The smaller part is visible at all screens. The bigger part is visible only at screen 2. Adjust dimmer wheel mode The dimmer wheel mode can be set in the encoder settings or in the Setup , tab User, item Settings . You can choose between four different dimmer wheel modes: Additive (= default): Additive keeps the difference between the dimmer values until you reach 0% or 100%, by using the dimmer wheel. After 0% or 100 % are reached, the values will be leveled out. Example: Channel 1 has a value of 50 and channel 2 is at 60. When you use the dimmer wheel to take them both up to 100, and then back down, they both go down from 100 at the same time and at the same level. Incremental: Incremental keeps the difference between the dimmer values always, even if you reached 0% or 100% by using the dimmer wheel. Example: Channel 1 has a value of 50 and channel 2 is at 60. When you use the dimmer wheel to take them both up to 100, and then back down, channel 1 will start coming down first and then channel 2 will follow when channel 1 is at 90. Prop.+ (Proportional positive): When using the dimmer wheel to turn up the dimmer values, the difference in the dimmer values will increase. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 249 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Turning down the values will make all channels reach 0% at the same time. Prop.- (Proportional negative): When using the dimmer wheel to turn up the dimmer values, the difference in the dimmer values will decrease. Turning up to 100% will make all channels reach 100% at the same time. Adjust dimmer wheel resolution The dimmer wheel resolution can be set in the encoder settings or in the Setup , tab User, item Settings . With the dimmer wheel resolution you can set if the dimmer wheel should work: Fine Normal (= default) Coarse Adjust trackball resolution The trackball resolution can be set in the encoder settings or in the Setup , tab User, item Settings . With the trackball resolution you can set if the trackball should work: Fine Normal (= default) Coarse Adjust encoder resolution With the lower buttons of the bigger part of the encoder settings pop-up, you can adjust the encoder resolution. You can set the encoder resolution for each attribute. That means dimmer can be set to fine and pan to normal. You can also set the encoder resolution in the encoder toolbar. Another way to set the encoder resolution is to press Setup , tap Patch & Fixture Schedule , tap Fixture Types , tap Attributes & Encoder Grouping , tap at the preset type and in the table Attributes of Feature is a column Encoder Resolution. There are three different encoder resolutions available: Ultra: An encoder step equates 0.4. Fine: Every second encoder step equates 0.1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 250 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Normal: An encoder step equates 0.5. Disable touch function for screen 1 To disable the touch function on screen 1: Press and hold and tap at Disable Multi Touch . The touch function screen 1 is disabled. Switch dialogs to default screen This function is used to bring the dialog back to their default screen. The defaults for most of the screens is screen 1. Switch dialogs to default screens could be useful if you had external screens connected and moved dialogs maybe to screen 5. Now, you are sitting on a console without external screens and you cannot reach the dialogs. To bring the dialogs back to their default screens: Press and hold and tap at Switch Dialogs to Def. Screen . The will be open the next time on their default screen. Another way to switch the dialog to default screen is, using the Menu Keyword. Clear screen To clear the screen by using the encoder settings pop-up: Press and hold and tap at Clear Screen . The screen on that you tapped the button is cleared. For another way to clear the screen, see user defined area. Clear all screens To clear all screens: Press and hold and tap at Clear All Screens . All screens are cleared. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 251 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 252 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.4. Command wing bar With the command wing bar you control the faders 1 to 6 and the buttons 101 to 106. MA onPC command wing and external screen If you use a MA onPC command wing along with an external screen, open the command wing bar window. Tap in the user defined area, select tab Other and then Command Wing Bar . The command wing bar window is open. Command wing bar window Command wing grandMA2 onPC If you use a grandMA2 onPC along with a MA onPC command wing, turn the command wing bar on. To turn the command wing bar on screen 2 on: 1. Click the yellow ball in the upper left corner of the window one in the grandMA2 on PC. grandMA2 onPC options 2. Click Options... . 3. Click at tab View and select under CmdWing Bar On. The command wing bar is visible at the bottom of screen 2, left beside the encoder bar, in the grandMA2 onPC. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 253 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Command wing bar grandMA2 onPC © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 254 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.5. Command Section The command section is the area used to enter complex commands into the command line using keys. This section is located on the right side of the console. Command section To open the command section on the onPC press Command Overlay and the window Command Overlay opens. Important: Single keys can have several functions depending on how often or how long you press and hold them. For more information on the keys and their commands see Key overview. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 255 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. Example: Pressing Channel 1 At 50 enters the command into the command line. Pressing Please consequently sets the dimmer in channel 1 to 50 percent. 2. Example: Pressing Store Executor 5 Cue 3 enters the command into the command line. Pressing Please consequently stores cue 3 on the executor 5. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 256 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.6. Mini executor bar Mini executor bars are visible at the bottom of screen 3 (grandMA2 light and grandMA2 full-size) and screen 4 (grandMA2 full-size). Furthermore, they are visible in the command wing bar and in the playback windows. The mini executor displays valuable information about the content and functions of the executor. You can assign functions to the executors using the Assign Menu, or you can use the Assign key. For more information, see Assign key.To open the Assign Menu by using the mini executor, tap in the upper area of the mini executor. Tap the upper area to open the Assign menu The look and the information of the mini executors changes, depending on what is assigned to the executor. Mini executor bar or command wing bar For more information, see: Sequence mini executor Assign effect to executor Assign macro to a button Chaser mini executor Group master mini executor © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 257 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.7. Work with views You can store the current size and position of the windows from one or more screens on a view button or in the view pool. You can call them later even if you moved or deleted a window. To export or import stored view, see import user profiles or export user profiles. The view pool All views are stored in the view pool for the current user profile. Assigned views to a view button or an a X-key will be automatically stored on the next empty tile in the view pool. View pool To get an overview about all stored views, open the view pool. Tap in the user defined area, tap at the Pools tab and tap at Views . The view pool is open. For more information about colors in the pools, see system colors. Store custom views in the view pool Requirement: - A created view on a screen that you like to store. For more information, see Mange windows. - An open view pool. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 258 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. Press Store and then tap on a empty tile in the view pool. The Store View Options pop-up opens. Store View Options pop-up 2. Type the view name in the green edit line. 3. Tap at the screens you want to store or if you want to store all screens tap All . 4. Tap Please . The view is store in the view pool. Assign views on a view button Requirement: A created view on a screen that you like to store. For more information, see Mange windows. 1. Press Store . 2. Press either a V-key or a X-key, or tap a view button. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 259 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. The Store View Options pop-up opens. Store View Options pop-up 4. Type the view name in the green edit line. 5. Tap at the screens you want to store or if you want to store all screens tap All . 6. Tap Please . The view is assigned to the view button and stored in the view pool on the next empty tile. Call views Requirement: A stored view. If the view is stored in the view pool, tap on the tile in the view pool. If the view is assigned to a view button, tap on the view button or press the respective V-key or X-key. The stored view is called. Delete views from view buttons Press Delete and tap on the view button or press the respective V-key or X-key. The view is deleted from the view button but still stored in the view pool. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 260 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To delete views from the view pool Requirement: Open view pool. Press Delete and then tap on the view tile in the view pool. The view is deleted from the view pool and from all assigned view buttons. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 261 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.8. Touch gestures The grandMA2 comes with one multi-touch screen (screen 1) and at least one internal TFT wide mode touchscreens (screen 2 to screen 4). Furthermore, you can connect two external touchscreens. You can use the multi-touch function in the special dialogs: Color picker - Fader - Move two or more color faders simultaneously. Shaper - Fader Mode - Move two or more shaper parameter fader simultaneously. If you want to know what we mean when we mention swipe, tap or other ways of interacting with the grandMA2, have a look at this table. Tap Multi state toggle button is indicated by an arrow down Tap once on a button. Opens, select, activates, or toggles whatever you tap. Similar to click with a mouse. Slide to rearrange Move window Tap and briefly drag a window in the new direction. Moves a window. Similar to dragging with a mouse. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 262 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Swipe to open options Swipe button indicated by a small wave Tap and swipe your finger quickly upwards in the wave direction like the wave icon is. Opens the available options © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 263 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Swipe to select Swipe to select in the layout view Tap your finger on the screen and move it from the top left corner to the bottom right corner, like you would draw a rectangle. Select the fixtures or channels in the layout view, fixture sheet, or channel sheet. It defines the selection order. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 264 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.9. Calculator The calculator appears always if you need to enter or edit values. The calculator is a dynamic view. The buttons changes regarding the to be entered value. Calculator for gobo values The title bar displays the attribute, the unit, and sometimes the range of the values. If the fixture or channel has channel functions, the function sets are displayed in different tabs. Below the tabs, on the left side of the calculator, is the green edit line to enter values or ranges, e.g. 1 Thru. The calculator includes always a number pad at the left of the view. On the right side are the function buttons. The applied function has a brown background. Applied calculator function Default calculator buttons The following buttons are in all calculator views available. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 265 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The buttons are located right beside the number pad and they are interacting with the edit line. Back: Tap to delete the next sign left from the cursor. Delete: Tap to delete marked values or the next sign right from the cursor. Home: Tap to go at the beginning of the edit line. End: Tap to go at the end of the edit line. <-: Tap to go one sign back. ->: Tap to go one sign forward. +/-: Tap to insert a prefix. Do not use the - button to enter a negative prefix. Please: Tap to confirm and apply the value. The calculator closes. Attribute function buttons The following buttons are always available for editing attribute values. Off: Tap to clear the values from the programmer. Deactivate: Tap to deactivate the values in the programmer. The value is not active anymore in the programmer. Remove: Tap to enter remove values in the programmer. For more information, see Remove keyword. Release: Tap to enter release values in the programmer. For more information, see Release keyword. Default Link: Tap that the attribute links to their default values. For more information, see Default keyword. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 266 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.10. Info By using the info window, you can easily assign information to an object or view information of an object. You can add object info such as a what a macro does, what fixtures are included in a universe, what device creates a timecode slot, where a cue is used, and so on. Open the info window Tap on an empty space on one of the screens, tap Other , tap Info . The info window opens and views by default the info of the object on the selected executor. This is indicated in the title bar by the button Link Selected . Empty info window The info window is open and views the info to the object the selected executor. Assign info to the object on the selected executor Requirement: Existing object on the selected executor. Open the info window and type the info in the info window (black area). Assigned info in the info window © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 267 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The info is assigned to the object on the selected executor. The pool object has a information icon upper right corner. in the If the sheet style is selected for pool, the info is displayed in the info column. Hint: You can also assign info by using the command line along with the object keyword and the parameter info. See as an example the Preset keyword. Assign info to an object (not selected executor) by using the info window Requirement: Existing pool object. 1. Open the info window and tap in the title bar the button Info . The words Select something appears in the info window and the button in the title bar changes to Not Linked . The Info keyword is in the command line. Select something to assign info in the info window 2. Tap in a pool at the pool object to assign the information. The title bar in the information window displays the pool object label and the pool object number. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 268 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. Type the info in the info window (black area). Assigned info in the info window The info is assigned to the selected object. The pool object has a information icon in the upper right corner. If the sheet style is selected for pool, the info is displayed in the info column. Hint: You can also assign info by using the command line along with the object keyword and the parameter info. See as an example the Preset keyword. Assign info to an object (not selected executor) by using the pool Requirement: Existing pool object. 1. Open the pool of the stored pool object. 2. To turn the pool window into a sheet style, tap at the yellow ball and then tap Sheet Style . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 269 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. Type the info in the info column. Macro pool sheet style The info is assigned to the pool object. View info of the last go Requirement: A recently started sequence or cue. Open the info window and swipe the button in the title bar to select Link Last Go . The info window displays the info to the recently started sequence or cue. View info of the current cue Requirement: A running cue. Open the info window and swipe the button in the title bar to select Link Current Cue . The info window displays the info to the current running cue. If no cue is running, No Info is displayed in the title bar. View info of the next cue Requirement: Selected executor. Open the info window and swipe the button in the title bar to select Link Next Cue . The info window displays the info to the next cue of the selected executor. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 270 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.11. Oops and undo By using the oops functions, you can easily undo actions. Oops / undo the latest action Important: An oopsed / undone action cannot be reversed. To oops / undo the latest actions: 1. Press Oops . The Confirm Undo pop-up opens. Confirm Undo pop-up 2. Tap Ok or press Please . The latest action is undone. Oops / undo more actions Important: After saved changes in the Patch & Fixture Schedule, the Oops list begins of new. Important: An oopsed / undone action cannot be reversed. To oops / undo more actions: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 271 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. Press and hold the Oops key until the Multi-Oops pop-up opens. Multi-Oops pop-up Note: To select more actions, you have to start from the latest action and go backwards. It is not possible to select just one action in the middle of the list and undo them. 2. Select the action you want to undo by tap in the list or turn the screen encoder. The selected actions have a green background. The amount of the selected actions is displayed in the button in the bottom left corner of the window. 3. Tap Undo x Actions . The selected actions are undone. Set oops settings By default, everything the following actions will be list in the oops list: General (Setup settings) Views (View changes) Prog (Programmer Actions) You can customize the oops settings to your need. For example, if you want to have only the programmer actions in the oops list and not every view change, deactivate the views from the oops settings. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 272 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To change the oops settings: 1. Press Setup , tap at User, and tap at Oops Settings . The Oops Settings menu opens. Oops Settings menu 2. Tap at the settings you want to enable or disable. The oops settings are changed and saved in the show file and in the user profile. Revert to a previously saved show file version Every time you saved the show, the previous state of the show file will be saved as a .backup file. The grandMA2 creates up to ten .backup files. After the tenth .backup file is created, the first .backup file will be deleted. This allows to revert a previously saved show file version. 1. Press Backup . The Backup menu opens. 2. Select the drive tab and tap at Load Show . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 273 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. Load Show - Viewing Shows & Backups 2. Tap at the view button until Viewing Shows & Backups or Viewing Backups appears. Now, you can see all saved shows as .show.gz file and their backups as .backup file. 3. Tap at the .backup file you want to revert and select the data you want to load. Hint: If you are not sure what data you have changed, we recommend to load all data. Tap Check All . 4. Tap Load Show . The selected backup is reverted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 274 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.12. Colors This chapter gives you an overview about the different colors used in the grandMA2. The colors are there to gives directly information about something what happened. This could be either the status of values in the programmer, or where are they coming from, and so on. There are a lot of different colors and they gives you a lot of useful information. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 275 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.12.1.System Colors Some system colors can be changed or adjusted in the grandMA2. ID Colors The channel or fixture IDs can have two different colors. Gray: Gray fixture or channel ID Gray fixture or channel IDs indicate fixtures or channel that are not selected. It is the default color. Yellow: Yellow fixture or channel ID Yellow fixture or channel IDs indicate fixtures or channels that are selected. Background Colors of IDs and Names The background color of the IDs and names can have three different colors. Dark Blue: Dark blue background color Dark blue background indicates that the cell can be edited. Black: Black background color Black background indicates that there is no object to be edited. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 276 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Lavender: Lavender background color Lavender background indicates fixtures or channels that are limited by a group master. For more information see group masters. Dark Purple: Dark purple background color Dark purple background indicates fixtures or channels that are limited by an additive group master. For more information see group masters. Blue: Blue background color Blue background indicates fixtures or channels with the option React to Master off. Value Colors and Background Colors of Attributes The values of attributes from fixtures or channels can have six different system colors. Some of the value colors are also displayed as background colors if the layer Value Exec ID or Effect Exec ID is selected. For more information on the layers see control channels and fixtures. Furthermore, values and background can have cue colors. For more information about cue colors see cue colors. Gray: Gray value Gray values indicate default values and effect values in the programmer. Red and White: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 277 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Red value White value Red background Red values and white values indicate that this value is in the programmer. Red background indicates that this value is in the programmer and that it is possible to store this value. This is an active value in the programmer. Hint: It is possible to change the color of the value to a high-contrast color in Setup – User administrator – Settings – Programmer Colors . Pink: Pink value Pink background Pink values or background indicate a selectively assigned effect value from an executor. Yellow: Yellow value © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 278 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Yellow background Yellow values indicate values from an executor, but not from the selected executor. Dark Yellow: Dark yellow value Dark yellow background Dark yellow values or backgrounds indicate tracked values from an executor, but not from the selected executor. Pale Yellow: Pale yellow value Pale yellow background Pale yellow values or backgrounds indicate that MIB was enabled from an executor, but not from the selected executor. Hint: Descending and ascending values and their backgrounds, such as green and cyan, are also displayed in a slightly paler shade if MIB function was enabled. White and Grey: White value and gray background White value along with gray background indicate values in the programmer from another user profile. Dark Blue: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 279 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Dark blue value Dark blue values indicate attributes that cannot be controlled. For more information see TakeControl keyword. Pool Object Number Colors The pool object number colors are used in pool objects. Gray Pool Object Number: Gray pool object number Gray pool object numbers indicate that this pool object is not assigned to a button or an executor. It is not used in the show. Cyan Pool Object Number: Cyan pool object number Cyan pool object numbers indicate that this pool object is assigned to a button or an executor. This pool object is used in the show. Included Preset Types Included preset type markers indicate which preset types are stored in the pool object. Beginning from left, preset type 1 through 9. Included preset type markers appear in preset pools and filter pools. White preset type markers indicate included position preset type © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 280 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.12.2.Marker Colors Markers are color indicators in form of a bar, square, or a thin line. Markers are visible in: Channel Sheet Fixture Sheet Sequence Content Sheet Sequence Tracking Sheet Layout View The name column in the fixture sheet displays a maker summery of all attribute markers of the fixture. There are the following markers there: Red: Red Marker Red markers indicate active programmer values (storable). Pink and Red: Pink and Red Marker First Pink and then a red marker indicate active effect values in the programmer (storable). Big Cyan: Big Cyan Marker Big cyan markers in the fixture sheet indicate preset values in the programmer. Big cyan markers in the sequence tracking sheet indicate preset values in a sequence. Small Cyan (except for the sequence tracking sheet): Small Cyan Marker © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 281 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Small cyan markers indicate preset values from a sequence. Blue: Blue Marker Blue markers indicate parked values – no matter the size of the marker. Big Pink: Big Pink Marker Big pink markers indicate effect values. Small Pink: Small Pink Marker Small pink markers indicate stomped effect values. For more information on this effect see Stomp Keyword. White: White Marker White markers indicate programmer values which cannot be stored. Green: Green Marker Green markers indicate active individual (= storeable) fade times in the programmer. Pink, Red, and Green: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 282 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pink, Red, and Green Marker Pink, red, and green markers in the combination from left to right indicate active effect fade times in the programmer. Orange: Orange Marker Orange markers indicate active individual (= storeable) delay times in the programmer. Pink, Red, and Orange: Pink, Red, and Orange Marker Pink, red, and orange markers in the combination from left to right indicate active effect delay times in the programmer. Small Yellow: Small Yellow Marker Small yellow markers in the fixture sheet, channel sheet, or layout view, indicate values from a sequence. Big Yellow: Big Yellow Marker Big yellow markers in the sequence tracking sheet or sequence content sheet indicate stored values. Gray: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 283 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Gray Marker Gray markers indicate that at least one attribute of a fixture uses a DMX profile. This marker is only visible in output layers. Purple: Purple Marker Purple markers indicate attributes that were calculated in the bitmap fixture. Pool Object Marker Colors The pool object markers are used in pool objects and they indicate which values are stored in the pool object, in the preset pools and in the filter pools. For more information see What are Filters? and Preset Pools. Yellow Pool Object Marker: Yellow Pool Object Marker Yellow pool object markers indicate that attribute values are stored in the pool object. Important: If a pool object just contains values , the yellow marker will not be displayed. Pink Pool Object Marker: Pink Pool Object Marker Pink pool object markers indicate that effect values are stored in the pool object. Green Pool Object Marker: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 284 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Green Pool Object Marker Green pool object markers indicate that individual fade times are stored in the pool object. Orange Pool Object Marker: Orange Pool Object Marker Orange pool object markers indicate that individual delay times are stored in the pool object. Shapes Of Markers Bar: Bar – Marker Shape If a marker is displayed in form of a bar – in red or white – the value is in the programmer. Square: Square – Marker Shape If a marker is displayed in form of a square – no matter the color – the value is in the playback. Thin Line: Thin Line – Marker Shape If a marker is displayed in form of a thin line (here: the thin line in cyan in the upper left corner of the value) – no matter the color – the value is tracked. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 285 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Enable or Disable Markers You can enable or disable the markers. By default, the markers are enabled. To enable or disable the markers in the: Fixtures Sheet Channel Sheet Sequence Content Sheet Sequence Tracking Sheet - Tap the yellow ball , tap Display and then at Enable Marker tap On or Off . - To enable or disable the marker in the Layout View, tap at the yellow ball tap Yes or No . , tap Layout Data and at Marker The markers are enabled or disabled. To save the the settings, save the settings as default or save the view. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 286 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.12.3.Cue Colors The cue colors are value and background colors for the selected executors. The cue colors are visible in the: Fixture Sheet Channel Sheet DMX Sheet (Programmer Colors) Sequence Content Sheet Sequence Tracking Sheet Layout View (only for dimmer values) Encoder Bar (linked to the focused sheet) There are four cue colors available: Magenta: Magenta Value - Magenta Background Magenta values or backgrounds indicates a tracked value from a selected executor. Cyan: Cyan Value - Cyan Background Cyan values or backgrounds indicates altered values in the cue from a selected executor. For dimmer attributes, a cyan value indicates an increasing dimmer value. Green: Green Value - Green Background Green values or backgrounds indicates a decreasing dimmer value from a selected executor. White: White Value - White Background White values or backgrounds indicates the same value is stored a second time (blocked value) from a selected executor. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 287 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Colors Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Change Cue Color Options To change the cue color options in the Fixture Sheet Channel Sheet Sequence Content Sheet Sequence Tracking Sheet tap at the yellow ball , tap Display and then in the field Cue Colors . Requirement for layout view: The layout elements shows dimmer values. To change the cue color options in the layout view, tap at the yellow ball Cue Colors . , tap Tools and in the field To change the cue color options in the DMX sheet, tap at the yellow ball Programmer Colors . , tap Display and then in the field To have no cue colors displayed, tap Off . All values from all user profiles will be displayed in yellow. To have the cue colors from the selected executor always displayed, tap On . All other executors, will be displayed in yellow. Except DMX sheet: To have the cue colors from the selected executor and all other executors in yellow, started by the own user profile, select My Exec . Executors run by other user profiles, will be displayed in gray. For more information to the colors, see system colors. The cue color options are changed. To save the cue color option, save the option as default or save the view. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 288 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.13. Text indicators and symbols This topic provides an overview of the different text indicators and symbols used in the grandMA2. The text indicators display information about actions in form of letters or symbols. This could be either additional information or the priority. There are the following text indicators there: Text indicators in pool objects, preset objects and mini executors Letters Text Description indicator A Effect pool objects with an absolute effect. For more information see effects. Executor page pool objects with an active button page. For more information B (green) see executor pages. Executor page pool object with a non-active button page. For more information B (gray) see executor pages. C Channel page pool object with an active channel page. For more information (green) see channel pages. Channel page pool object with a non-active channel page. For more information C (gray) see channel pages. Macro pool object with deactivated CLI (= Command Line Interaction). For more C (red) information see macros. C (white) Timer pool object as countdown timer. For more information see timers. Sequence pool object with Priority High. For more information see what are U (white) cues and sequences. Sequence pool object with Priority Low. For more information see what are cues D (white) and sequences. F (green) Executor page pool object with an active fader page. F (gray) Executor page pool object with a non-active fader page. G Preset pool object as global preset. For more information see presets. (orange) G (white) Timer pool object as global timer. For more information see timer. H Sequence pool object with Priority HTP (= Highest Takes Precedence). For more (white) information see what are cues and sequences. H Universes pool object with an HTP (= Highest Takes Precedence) DMX in merge. L (white) Timer pool object as local timer. For more information see timer. L (white) Universe pool object with a LoTP (= Lowest Takes Precedence) DMX in merge. L Sequence pool object with Priority LTP (=Last Takes Precedence). For more (white) information see what are cues and sequences. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 289 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Text indicator P R (red) R (green) Description Universe pool object with parked DMX channels. Universe pool object not requested. Effect pool object with a relative effect. For more information see effects. Sequence pool object with Priority Swap. For more information see what are S (white) cues and sequences. S (red) Effect pool object with a selective effect. For more information see effects. S (red) Preset pool object as selective preset. For more information see presets. S (white) Timer pool object as stopwatch. For more information see timer. T (gray) Sequence pool object with tracking. For more information see what is tracking. T (white) Effect pool object with a template effect. For more information see effects. T (red) Macro pool object with deactivated timing. For more information see macros. U Preset pool object with a universal preset. For more information see presets. Symbols Text indicators ! (white exclamation mark) Triangle (white and pointing upward) Triangle (white and pointing downward) Descriptions Sequence pool object with Priority Super. For more information see what are cues and sequences. Priority High in mini executor of a sequence. For more information see sequence mini executor. Priority Low in mini executor of a sequence. For more information see sequence mini executor. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 290 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.14. Icons The following icons are used in the grandMA2 series. Title Bar Icons The title bar provides you with information icons and icons with a function. The following table explains what the icons in title bar mean. Icon Meaning A world is active. For more information, see World Keyword or Worlds, Filters, and Masks. A mask is in use. For more information, see Use Masks in the Sheets. A mask is assigned. For more information, see Use Masks in the Sheets. Go home to the Setup start screen. Opens the change screen pop-up. Deletes the window or closes pop-ups. Opens the virtual keyboard. Closes the virtual keyboard. Zooms in the window. Zooms out the window. Adjusts the zoom in that way that the entire recorded timecode show is visible in the window. Follows the time marker and sets it to the middle of the window. Opens the window options. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 291 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Pool Object Icons The pool objects provides you with information about the object itself. Icon Meaning Pool object is locked. To unlock a pool object, see Unlock Keyword. Pool object is fixed locked by default. It can not be unlocked. Pool object contains additional information. Camera pool object is linked to a camera fixture. For more information, see Camera Pool. Timecode slot pool object with incoming SMPTE timecode. Timecode pool object linked to a timecode slot with incoming SMPTE timecode. For more information, see timecode. Timecode slot pool object with incoming MIDI timecode. Timecode pool object linked to a timecode slot with incoming MIDI timecode. For more information, see timecode. Sequence pool object with input filter. For more information, see cues and sequences. Paused timer pool object. For more information, see timer. Paused timecode slot pool object. For more information, see timecode. Paused timecode pool object. For more information, see timecode. Running timer pool object. For more information, see timer. Running timecode slot pool object. For more information, see timecode. Running timecode pool object. For more information, see timecode. Timer pool object is off. For more information, see timer. Running record for macro pool object. For more information, see record keyword or macros. Blinking: Refresh DMX signal for a universe pool object Permanent: Change DMX values for DMX channels in the universe pool object Universe pool object with running RDM. For more information, see RDM. Universe pool object with RDM on for this universe and global RDM off. For more information, see RDM. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 292 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Command Line and Message Center Icons The command line and the message center provides you with information about the: Network Show Power Chat CITP Some icons can be disabled or enabled in the message center options. For more information, see Message Center. The following table explains what the icons in the command line and in the message center mean. Icon Meaning The console runs from the battery power only. The console is in a standalone mode. For more information, see Create a Session. The console is master of a session. For more information, see Session Control. The console is slave of a session. For more information, see Session Control. Invite is disabled in the Setup - MA Network Control. A new message is received. For more information, see Chat Keyword. Network cable or connection is missing or defect. Receive CITP video. DMX tester output is active. Receive timecode SMPTE signal. Receive timecode MIDI signal. A timecode record is active. For more information, see Timecode Keyword or Record Keyword. There are fixtures or channels in the Patch & Fixture Schedule without a patch address. For more information, see Patching. A patched universe has no output on a DMX port. More DMX channels are patched than available parameters. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 293 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Icon Meaning The Exec CLI (= Command Line Interaction) or the Default Go, GoBack, Pause CLI is off. For more information, see Local Settings. A world is active. For more information, see World Keyword or Worlds, Filters, and Masks. DMX channels are parked. To unpark DMX channels, see Unpark Keyword. Preview is on. For more information, see Preview Keyword. A filter from the filter pool or a command filter is active. For more information, see Filter Keyword or Worlds, Filters, and Masks. Blind mode or blind edit mode is on. For more information, see Blind Keyword. A macro record is active. For more information, see Record Keyword or Macros. A group master or grand master is active. Highlight is active. For more information, see Highlight Keyword. Solo is active. For more information, see Solo Keyword. Backup file server is unavailable. For more information, see Setting up a File Server. A previous available station is missing or the IP address of a station changed. For more information, see Networking. At least two devices with the same IP address are in the network. Double-check the IP addresses. For more information, see Networking. A RDM device sends an alert. For more information, see RDM. A RDM device sends a warning. For more information, see RDM. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 294 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Encoder Toolbar Icons The following table explains what the icons in the encoder toolbar mean. Icon Meaning Executes a GoFastBack. For more information, see <<< GoFastBack Keyword. Executes a GoBack. For more information, see GoBack Keyword. Executes a Pause. For more information, see Pause Keyword. Executes an Off. For more information, see Off Keyword. Executes a Go. For more information, see Go Keyword. Executes a GoFastForward. For more information, see >>> GoFastForward Keyword. Select to draw rectangles in the Layout View. Select to create text boxes in the Layout View. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 295 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.15. Keyboard shortcuts Important: 1. Keyboard shortcuts are only available on a grandMA2 onPC. 2. Keyboards that have a different keyboard layout, as opposed to German keyboards, do not support all default keyboard shortcuts. If this should be the case with your keyboard, adjust the shortcuts affected. To transfer these to other show files and/or stations, use the Import/Export function. For more information on how adjust the shortcuts see export or import keyboard shortcuts. The go to the keyboard shortcuts press the Setup and under tab Console tap Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window The following tables displays the default grandMA2 onPC keyboard shortcuts. Shortcuts for command area keys Key Blind Freeze Prevw Assign Align Shortcut B Alt + F Ctrl + Alt + P Alt + A Ctrl + A © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 296 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Key U1 U2 U3 U4 Fix Select Off Temp Top On <<< Learn >>> Small Go Small Pause Small Go + View Effect Goto Page Macro Preset Sequ Cue Exec Channel Fixture Group Delete Move Copy Full Highlt Solo Backg User1 User2 Time Esc Edit Shortcut Alt + F1 Alt + F2 Alt + F3 Alt + F4 Ctrl + Alt + F Ctrl + S O Ctrl + Alt + T Alt + T Ctrl + O Alt + < Ctrl + L Ctrl + Alt + < < Ctrl + P Ctrl + < V Alt + E Alt + G Alt + P M P Alt + S Alt + C X C F G Ctrl + D Ctrl + M Ctrl + C Ctrl + F H Ctrl + Alt + S Alt + B Ctrl + U Alt + U Ctrl + T Esc E © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 297 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Key Oops Update Clear List Store Please . If At Thru + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Up Down Prev Next Set Shortcut Backspace U Delete L S Shift Enter . I A / (number pad) + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Arrow up Arrow down Arrow left Arrow right End Ctrl + Alt + E Shortcuts for menu keys Key Tools Setup Backup Help Shortcut Ctrl + F12 F12 Ctrl + Alt + B Ctrl + Alt + H © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 298 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Shortcuts for X-keys Key X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 Shortcut F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Ctrl + F1 Ctrl + F2 Ctrl + F3 Ctrl + F4 Ctrl + F5 Ctrl + F6 Ctrl + F7 Ctrl + F8 Ctrl + F9 Ctrl + F10 Shortcuts for master section keys Result Ch Pg+ Ch PgFd Pg+ Fd PgBn Pg+ Bn PgLarge Pause Large GoLarge Go Shortcut Alt + PgUp Alt + PgDown PgUp PgDown Ctrl + PgUp Ctrl + PgDown Alt + Space Ctrl + Space Space © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 299 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Shortcuts for grandMA2 onPC screen buttons Result Extern 1 Extern 2 Executor 1 - 15, 101 - 115 Executor 16 - 30, 116 - 130 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen 4 Shortcut Ctrl + Alt + F5 Ctrl + Alt + F6 Ctrl + Alt + F7 Ctrl + Alt + F8 Ctrl + Alt + F2 Ctrl + Alt + F3 Ctrl + Alt + F4 Reset keyboard shortcuts to defaults To reset the keyboard shortcuts to their defaults: 1. Click Setup and then under tab console click Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . The Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window opens. 2. Click Reset to Defaults . The keyboard shortcuts are reset to their defaults. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 300 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.15.1.Turn on or turn off the keyboard shortcuts Shortcut Button Turn the keyboard shortcuts on Click Shortcut in the grandMA2 onPC or press Insert on your keyboard. The keyboard shortcuts are turned on for the grandMA2 onPC. The shortcuts are displayed in brackets below the keys. Turn the keyboard shortcuts off Click Shortcut in the grandMA2 onPC or press Insert on your keyboard. The keyboard shortcuts are turned off for the grandMA2 onPC. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 301 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.15.2.Edit keyboard shortcuts Important: Keyboard shortcuts are only available on a grandMA2 onPC. You can edit the default keyboard shortcuts and customize them to your needs. 1. Click Setup and then under tab console click Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . The Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window opens. 2. Search for the keyboard shortcut you like to change and make a right mouse click in either the cell of the Hardkey column or in the cell of the PCkey column. If you have clicked in the Hardkey column, the Change Direct Access Shortcut pop-up opens. Change Direct Access Shortcut pop-up Information: Keys that are already assigned to another virtual key code are not listed anymore, and vice versa. If you need a key or virtual keycode what is not listed, you have to modify or delete the keyboard shortcut where it is in use. If the key or virtual keyboard is free, you can assign it. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 302 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English If you have clicked in the PCkey column, the Select Virtual Key Code pop-up opens. Select Virtual Key Code pop-up 3. Click at the Hardkey or PCkey you like to have. The Change Direct Access Shortcut or Select Virtual Key Code pop-up closes. The keyboard shortcut is edited and saved in the show file. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 303 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.15.3.Add or delete keyboard shortcuts Important: Keyboard shortcuts are only available on a grandMA2 onPC. You can add more keyboard shortcuts or delete existing keyboard shortcuts. Add keyboard shortcuts 1. Click Setup and then under tab console click Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . The Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window opens. 2. Choose if you would like to add a shortcut with: - Direct Access - Ctrl Access - Alt Access - Ctrl Alt Access © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 304 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. Click Add below the table you like to add the shortcut. The Add Shortcut pop-up opens regarding to the selected table. Add Direct Access Shortcut pop-up © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 305 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 4. Click at the hardkey you like to add. The Select Virtual Key Code pop-up opens. Select Virtual Key Code pop-up 5. Click at the PCkey you like to have. The Select Virtual Key Code pop-up closes. The keyboard shortcut is added. Delete keyboard shortcuts 1. Click Setup and then under tab console click Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . The Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window opens. 2. Click at the keyboard shortcut you like to delete. 3. Click below the table of the to delete shortcut at Delete . The keyboard shortcut is deleted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 306 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 8.15.4.Export or import keyboard shortcuts Important: Keyboard shortcuts are only available on a grandMA2 onPC. You can export your customized keyboard shortcuts for a later import in another show file. Export keyboard shortcuts 1. Click Setup and then under tab console click Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . The Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window opens. 2. Click Export . The Export Keyboard Shortcuts pop-up opens. Export Keyboard Shortcuts pop-up 3. Select the drive for the exported keyboard shortcuts. 4. If you want to overwrite an existing keyboard shortcuts .xml file, click at the file you want to overwrite. If you want to create a new file, enter the new file name in the green edit line. 5. Click Export . The keyboard shortcuts .xml file is exported. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 307 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Workspace – Keyboard shortcuts Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English If you have exported the keyboard shortcuts .xml file on a drive of your PC, the export file is in the hidden folder C:\ProgramData\MA Lighting Technologies\grandma\gma2_V_3.1.2\shortcuts. If you have exported the keyboard shortcuts .xml file on a USB stick, the export file is in the E:\gma2\shortcuts. Import keyboard shortcuts 1. Click Setup and then under tab console click Edit Keyboard Shortcuts . The Edit Keyboard Shortcuts window opens. 2. Click Import . The Import Keyboard Shortcuts pop-up opens. Import Keyboard Shortcuts pop-up 3. Select the drive from which the keyboard shortcuts are to be imported. 4. Click at the file and click Import . The selected keyboard shortcuts are imported. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 308 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 9. Manage windows This topic deals with windows, sheets, and pools you can create in the user-defined area. Create custom views by moving or adjusting windows. Save settings to default or load settings that were previously saved from the default. There are 6 different tabs that consist of several windows. For more information on the single tabs see the following links: Sheets Channel sheet DMX sheet Fixture sheet Sequence content sheet Sequence executor sheet Sequence tracking sheet RDM sheet Pools Camera Effects Filters Forms Groups Images Layout Macros Masks MAtricks Pages Channel Pages Executor Sequence Timecode Timecode Slots Timer Views Universes Worlds © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 309 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Presets ​P reset pools Playbacks Action buttons Playback big Playback small Running effects Running playbacks Other Agenda CITP video viewer Clock Color picker Command filter Command section Command wing bar Encoder bar Info Layout view Masters Sequence info Smart Stage Timecode view VPU pixel mapper view System ​C ommand line Desk Status Help Message center Network dimmer Performance Plugins Sound input System monitor © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 310 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 9.1. Create and Manage Basic Windows Create Basic Windows You can create a basic window in the user-defined area on every screen. To create a basic window: 1. Tap an empty area of the screen. The pop-up Create Basic Window opens. Open a basic window 2. Select a category in the tabs. 3. Select the window you would like to be displayed. A basic window is created in the user-defined area. Move Windows to Another Position on the Screen You can move windows around in the user-defined area. If you tap and hold and then move a window, its frame is highlighted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 311 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Move window 1. To move a window, tap and hold the blue title bar or the blue area of a pool and move it to its new position. 2. Release the finger from the screen. The window is moved to its new position. Move Menus to Different Screens You can move menus from one screen to another screen. To move a menu to another screen: 1. Tap the screen icon in the title bar of the menu. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 312 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2. The pop-up Change Screen opens. Change scree pop-up 3. Tap the screen number which you would like to move the menu to. The menu opens on the screen selected. Adjust the Size of Windows To adjust the size of a window: 1. Tap and hold the dots in lower right corner of the window. The frame around the window and the dots become brighter. Adjust window size 2. To expand or minimize the window, move your finger. The window size is adjusted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 313 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Save Window Options to Default Save the settings to default in windows with multiple settings. These settings are saved in the user profile. There are two examples on how to save window settings to default: 1. Example 1. Tap in the title bar of the window and adjust the window options. 2. Tap Save to Default in the title bar of the window options. Save to default using the title bar Window settings are saved to default in the user profile. 2. Example 1. Press Setup , tap User , and then Window Settings . 2. Adjust the window settings. Window settings are saved to default in the user profile. Load Window Options From Default Window options that can be saved to default can also be loaded from default. To load window options from default: Tap in the title bar of the window options and tap Load from Default . Window options are loaded from default. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 314 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Manage windows Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 9.2. Clear the Screen or Delete Windows Clear the Screen Clear the entire screen in the user-defined area occupied by different windows. To clear the entire screen: 1. Tap in a window. 2. Tap Delete Window in the title bar. The window is deleted. 3. Tap the screen in place of the window that has just been deleted. The pop-up Create Basic Window opens. 4. Tap Clear Screen . The user-defined area is empty. Hint: Alternatively clear the entire screen by pressing and holding and tapping Clear Screen . Delete Windows To delete windows from the user-defined area: Tap and then tap Delete Window in the title bar of the window. - or Press Del and tap the title bar of the window. The window is deleted in the user-defined area. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 315 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10. Function of the Command Line The usage of the command line is an essential way of communication between the console and its operator. Using reserved words, keywords and numerical identifiers is how the operator tells the console to perform a task. Important: Most of the commands have to be completed with a Please. Type the word Please into the command line or press the key Please in the command section. Example: [Channel]> Delete Group 4 - or Del + Group + 4 + Please Keywords Most commonly used keywords have their own keys. Others may only be accessed by repeatedly pressing a key or press and hold a key. For more information on multiple functions of keys see Key overview. Important: All keywords can be typed into the command line using the keyboard. Moreover, you see the content being typed into the command line in the input field. If you would like to see the commands you ordered the console to fulfill: Click on the left of the command line to open the pop-up Command Line Feedback. Here you will see the history of your commands. Example: [time] : Executing: Delete Group 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 316 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English For more information on how to use the command line in detail see Command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 317 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.1. General Syntax Rules The command line syntax is used to create valid expressions out of keywords. General Rules The general rules are: Important: Basic syntax is: [Function] [Object] All objects have a default function which is used if no function is given. Most functions have a default object or an object type which is used if no object is given. Objects are arranged in a hierarchical tree structure. If an object does not support the function applied, the function will be passed on to a child or parent object. Terminology [Square brackets]: Description of a non-literal content. (Parentheses): Description of an optional content. "Quotation marks": Quotation marks are used to enter a definite name or content. If the line ends after the word in quotation marks, the quotation marks at the end may be omitted. If the name or content is not a keyword and does not contain special characters, the quotation marks can be left out altogether. Capitalization: The console does not distinguish between upper case and lower case. Capitalization is used to improve readability only. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 318 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.1.1.Helping Keywords Helping keywords are used to create a relation between functions and objects. Important: Helping keywords are the prepositions and conjunctions of the console, so to speak. Example: Helping keyword At: [Channel]> Copy Cue 3 At Cue 5 Helping keyword Thru: [Channel]> Delete Effect 4 Thru 6 List of Helping Keywords + [Plus] keyword - [Minus] keyword And keyword At keyword CmdDelay keyword Delay keyword EndIf keyword Fade keyword If keyword Off keyword On keyword Or keyword OutFade keyword OutDelay keyword ​SnapPercent keyword Thru keyword Toggle keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 319 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 320 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.1.2.Object Keywords Object keywords are used to allocate objects in your show file. Important: Object keywords are the nouns of the console, so to speak. Example: [Channel]> Store Fixture 3 - or[Channel]> Delete Preset "Red" Important: Object keywords are object types which are usually used with numbers, IDs, names, and labels. List of Object Keywords Agenda keyword Attribute keyword ButtonPage Keyword Camera Keyword Channel keyword ChannelFader keyword Cue keyword Default keyword Dmx keyword Effect keyword ExecButton1 keyword ExecButton2 keyword ExecButoon3 keyword Executor keyword Fader keyword FaderPage keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 321 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Feature keyword Filter keyword Fixture keyword FixtureType keyword Form keyword Full keyword Group keyword Layout keyword Macro keyword Mask keyword MAtricks keyword Normal keyword Page keyword Part keyword Preset keyword PresetType keyword PreviewExecutor keyword Remote keyword Root keyword Screen keyword Selection keyword Sequence keyword SpecialMaster keyword Timecode keyword Timer keyword User keyword UserProfile keyword View keyword ViewButton keyword ViewPage keyword World keyword Zero keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 322 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.1.3.Function Keywords Function keywords perform a task or a function. These keywords are often followed by objects to which the function or task is to be applied. Important: Function keywords are the verbs of the console, so to speak. Example: [Channel]> Goto Cue 3 - or [Channel]> Delete Preset "Blue" Important: Some functions are global and do not need to be followed by objects, for example Blackout. List of Function Keywords >>> keyword <<< keyword AddUserVar keyword AddVar keyword Align keyword AlignFaderModules keyword All keyword AllRows keyword Assign keyword At keyword Backup keyword Black keyword Blackout keyword Blind keyword BlindEdit keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 323 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Block keyword Call keyword ChangeDest keyword ChannelLink keyword Clear keyword CircularCopy keyword ClearActive keyword ClearAll keyword ClearSelection keyword Clone keyword CmdHelp keyword Copy keyword Delete keyword DeleteShow keyword DisconnectStation keyword DoubleRate keyword DoubleSpeed keyword Edit keyword EndSession keyword Export keyword Extract keyword Fix keyword Flash keyword Flip keyword Freeze keyword Go keyword GoBack keyword Goto keyword HalfRate keyword HalfSpeed keyword Help keyword Highlight keyword If keyword IfActive keyword IfOutput keyword IfProg keyword Import keyword Info keyword Insert keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 324 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Invert keyword InviteStation keyword JoinSession keyword Kill keyword Label keyword Layer keyword Learn keyword LeaveSession keyword List keyword ListFaderModules keyword ListLibrary keyword ListEffectLibrary keyword ListMacroLibrary keyword ListShows keyword ListUserVar keyword ListVar keyword Load keyword LoadShow keyword Lock keyword Login keyword Logout keyword MasterFade keyword MAtricksBlocks keyword MAtricksFilter keyword MAtricksGroups keyword MAtricksInterleave keyword MAtricksReset keyword MAtricksWings keyword Menu keyword MidiControl keyword MidiNote keyword MidiProgram keyword Move keyword NetworkInfo keyword NetworkNodeInfo keyword NetworkNodeUpdate keyword NetworkSpeedTest keyword NewShow keyword NextRow keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 325 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Off keyword On keyword Oops keyword Park keyword Pause keyword Preview keyword PreviewEdit keyword PreviewExecutor keyword PrevRow keyword PSR keyword PSRList keyword PSRPrepare keyword Rate1 keyword Reboot keyword Record keyword SaveShow keyword Select keyword SelectDrive keyword SelFix keyword SetIP keyword Setup keyword SetUserVar keyword SetVar keyword ShuffleSelection keyword ShuffleValues keyword Shutdown keyword Solo keyword Speed keyword StepFade keyword StepInFade keyword StepOutFade keyword Stomp keyword Store keyword StoreLook keyword Swop keyword SwopGo keyword SwopOn keyword Temp keyword TempFader keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 326 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – General Syntax Rules Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Toggle keyword Tools keyword Top keyword Unblock keyword Unpark keyword Update keyword UpdateFirmware keyword UpdateSoftware keyword UpdateThumbnails keyword Version keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 327 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2. All keywords This topic displays a list of all keywords. To view the individual keywords, either use the tree structure of the manual or click the links here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 328 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.1.Special Characters Special characters execute special functions. They can substitute terms or complement the syntax in the command line. For more information see the corresponding characters. Asterisk * At @ Dollar $ Dot . Parentheses ( ) Quotation marks " " Semicolon ; Slash / Square brackets [ ] © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 329 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.2.<<< [GoFastBack] keyword The keyword <<< GoFastBack is a function used to jump quickly to previous step (default without timing can be changed in setup). To execute the keyword <<< GoFastBack type <<< or the shortcut < in the command line. Syntax <<< [Executor-list] <<< [Timecode-list] The time used by this function may be adjusted via the GoFast property found in Setup -> Show -> Playback + MIB Timing. For more information see Working with MIB and Running playbacks. Example [Channel]> <<< Executor 3 Jumps to previous cue on executor 3. Hint: To execute this function you can also use the key <<< on the console. For more information see the key <<<. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 330 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.3.>>> [GoFastForward] keyword The keyword >>> GoFastForward is a function used to jump quickly to next step (default without timing can be changed in setup). To execute the keyword >>> GoFastForward type >>> or the shortcut > into the command line. Syntax >>> [Executor-list] >>> [Timecode-list] The time used by this function may be adjusted via the GoFast property found under Setup -> Show -> Playback + MIB Timing. For more information see Working with MIB and Running playbacks. Example [Channel]> >>> Executor 3 Jumps to the next cue on executor 3. Hint: To execute this function you can also use the key >>> on the console. For more information see the key >>>. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 331 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.4.- [Minus] keyword - [Minus] is a helping keyword with various functions. To execute the keyword - [Minus] type - into the command line. Syntax: - [Minus] is used to remove objects from a list or to indicate a negative value. When used as a relative indicator, with no value given, the value of 1 will be used. When used to indicate a value it can indicate an absolute or relative value. Adding a space between - [Minus] and the value makes it relative. No space makes it an absolute value. E.g., giving a Pan attribute a value of - 10 subtracts 10 degrees from the current location. Giving the Pan attribute a value of -10 sets the pan at -10 degrees. See the difference between adding and not adding a space. Using the numeric keys automatically adds the space. If used as a starting keyword, - [Minus] creates a selection list, which is removed from the current selection. Example: [Channel]> Group 5 - Channel 2 Selects group 5 but not channel 2. [Channel]> At - 10 Subtracts 10% from the current dimmer value of the selected fixtures. [Channel]> - 5 Thru 7 Removes channel 5, 6 and 7 from the current selection. [Channel]> Page Same as Page - 1, which calls previous page. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 332 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Hint: To execute this function you can also use the key - on the console. For more information see the key -. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 333 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.5.+ [Plus] keyword + [Plus] is a helping keyword with various functions. To execute the keyword + [Plus], type + in the command line. Syntax: + [Plus] is used to combine multiple objects in a list or to indicate a relative value. When used as a relative indicator, with no value given, the value of 1 will be used. If used as a starting keyword, + creates a selection list, which will be added to the current selection. Examples: [Channel]> Delete Cue 1 + 2 Deletes cue 1 and 2 from the selected executor. [Channel]> At + 5 Adds 5 % to the current dimmer value. [Channel]> + 5 Thru 7 Adds channel 5, 6 and 7 to the current selection. [Channel]> Page + Same as Page + 1, which calls the next page. Hint: To execute this function, you can also use the key + on the console. For more information see +. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 334 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.6.AddUserVar keyword AddUserVar is a function used to change/extend content of user specific variables. To execute the keyword AddUserVar type AddUserVar or the shortcut AddU into the command line. Syntax: AddUserVar $variablename = numericvalue AddUserVar $variablename = "text" Example: [Channel]> SetUserVar $myname = "John" Sets the variable $myname to John. [Channel]> AddUserVar $myname = " Doe" Sets the variable $myname to John Doe. [Channel]> SetUserVar $mycounter = 5 Sets the variable $mycounter to 5. [Channel]> AddUserVar $mycounter = 6 Sets the variable $mycounter to 11. For more information see the following links: $ [Dollar-sign] ListUserVar Keyword ListVar Keyword SetVar Keyword © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 335 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English SetUserVar Keyword AddVar Keyword AddUserVar Keyword [ ] [Square Brackets] © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 336 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.7.AddVar Keyword To get the AddVar keyword in the command line type AddVar or the shortcut Ad in the command line. Description AddVar is a function keyword to change or extend content of show specific variables. Syntax AddVar $variablename = numericvalue AddVar $variablename = "text" Examples [Channel]> SetVar $myname = "John" - Sets the variable $myname to John [Channel]> AddVar $myname = " Doe" - Sets the variable $myname to John Doe [Channel]> SetVar $mycounter = 5 - Sets the variable $mycounter to 5 [Channel]> AddVar $mycounter = 6 - Sets the variable $mycounter to 11 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 337 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.8.Agenda Keyword To execute the keyword Agenda, type Agenda or the shortcut Ag into the command line. Description Agenda is an object type which holds scheduled tasks to be executed at specific dates and times. Syntax Agenda [ID] Assign Agenda [Object-list]/Start ​Assign Agenda [Object-list]/Time Assign Agenda [Object-list]/Duration Assign Agenda [Object-list]/Repeat Assign Agenda [Object-list]/CMD Assign Agenda [Object-list]/Info ​Assign Agenda [Object-list]/First Assign Agenda [Object-list]/Last Options To receive a list of all options for the keyword Agenda, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Agenda /? Option Option Value Start Absolute, Dawn, Sunrise, Sunset, Dusk Time hh/mm/ss Duration hh/mm/ss Description Sets the start of a task. Sets the time of a task. Sets the duration of a task. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 338 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Option Value None, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Annually, Daily each month, Weekly each month, Daily each year, Weekly each year, Monthly each year, Every 2nd day, Every 3rd day, Every 4th day, Every 5th day, Every 6th day Repeat CMD "Your command" Info "Your info text" First MM/DD/YYYY Last MM/DD/YYYY Description Sets the recurrence of a task. Sets the command of a task. Sets the info regarding a task. Sets the date of the kick off of the first task. Sets the date of the completion of the last task. Example [Fixture]> List Agenda Lists all agenda items stored. [Fixture] > Agenda 1 Executes the command which was stored in agenda 1. Hint: It is also possible to enter agenda into the command line by pressing the key Macro three times on the console. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 339 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English For more information see the key Macro. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 340 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.9.Alert keyword Alert is a keyword which generates an alert message in the message center. To execute the keyword Alert type Alert or the shortcut Ale into the command line. Syntax Alert "text" Typing the keyword Alert into the command line displays an alert message marked in red in the message center. For more information on the icons, the colors of messages, and the center itself see Message center. Example: [Channel]> Alert "coffee break" The text coffee break is displayed in red in the message center. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 341 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.10.Align keyword To toggle through the different align modes press Align . Description Align is a function keyword to change the mode of the attribute encoders. Call the mode by its name or index number. Name Off < > >< <> Index Number 0 1 2 3 4 When activating an Align-mode, the encoders will no longer adjust the whole selection equally, but adjust proportionally according to selection order, either most at the last, most at the first, most at the last & first (inverted), or most at the center of the selection. Syntax: Align [mode] Align Off Example To set the encoders to first align mode type in the command line: [Channel]> Align "<" To turn off any align mode type in the command line: [Channel]> Align 0 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 342 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.11.AlignFaderModules keyword AlignFaderModules is a function used to configure connected external wings. To execute this keyword type AlignFaderModules or the shortcut AlignF into the command line. Note: Wings are fader extensions and are intended to follow the faders built-in in the console. Syntax: AlignFaderModules Entering AlignFaderModules into the command line automatically sets up a surface with connected faders next to each other without overlapping. Command wing with faders 1 to 15 Command wing with faders 16 to 30 Command wing with faders 31 to 45 Example [Channel]> AlignFaderModule If a default surface already exists, this command sets automatically a second surface. For more information on how to set surfaces see the keyword Surface. Hint: It is also possible to configure external wings on the screen via Wing & Monitor Setup. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 343 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English For more information see Wing & Monitor Setup. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 344 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.12.All Keyword To get the All keyword in the command line type All in the command line. Description All is a function used to set the MAtricks property Single X to none (0), which means to reselect all fixtures, (or reselect all columns of fixtures, if Interleave is active). For more information see MAtricks. Syntax All Example To reselects all fixtures or columns type in the command line: [Channel]> All © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 345 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.13.AllButtonExecutors keyword To get the AllButtonExecutors keyword in the command line type AllButtonExecutors or the shortcut AllB in the command line. Description AllButtonExecutors is an alias for all button executors. AllButtonExecutors may be used as an alias to address executor 101 and upwards, on all pages. Syntax [Function] AllButtonExecutors Example To turn off all button executors type in the command line: [Channel]> Off AllButtonExecutors © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 346 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.14.AllChaseExecutors Keyword To get the AllChaseExecutors keyword in the command line type AllChaseExecutors or the shortcut AllC in the command line. Description AllChaseExecutors is used as an alias to address all executors with chasers assigned. Syntax [Function] AllChaseExecutors Example To turn off all executors with chasers type in the command line: [Channel]> Off AllChaseExecutors © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 347 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.15.AllFaderExecutors Keyword To get the AllFaderExecutors keyword in the command line type AllFaderExecutors or the shortcut AllF in the command line. Description AllFaderExecutors is an alias for all fader executors. AllFaderExecutors may be used as an alias to address executor 1 through 90, on all pages. Syntax [Function] AllFaderExecutors Example To turn off all fader executors. [Channel]> Off AllFaderExecutors © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 348 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.16.AllRows keyword To get the AllRows keyword in the command line type AllRows or the shortcut AllR in the command line. Description AllRows is a function used to set the MAtricks property Single Y to none (0), which means to reselect all rows of fixtures in a virtual array created with MAtricksInterleave. For more information see MAtricks. Syntax AllRows Example To reselect all rows of fixtures in an interleave array. [Channel]> AllRows © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 349 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.17.AllSequExecutors Keyword To get the AllSequExecutors keyword in the command line type AllSequenceExecutors or the shortcut AllS in the command line. Description AllSequExecutors is an alias for all executors assigned with a sequence. Syntax [Function] AllSequExecutors Example To turn off all executors with sequences. [Channel]> Off AllSequExecutors © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 350 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.18.And keyword To execute the keyword, type And or the shortcut An into the command line. Description The keyword And is a helping keyword that adds selection or values. Syntax [Function] [Object] [Number] [If] [Object] [Number] [Attribute] And [Object] [Number] [Attribute] Example [Channel]> Delete Cue 1 If Fixture 5 Attribute "Pan" And Fixture 5 Attribute "Tilt" Deletes attributes pan and tilt of fixture 5 in cue 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 351 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.19.Appearance keyword You can change the frame color of pool objects and the background color of cues with the Appearance keyword. Important: Appearance is used directly on objects. Thus, changing the color in all user profiles. To execute this keyword press Assign Assign Assign , type Appearance or the shortcut Ap into the command line. To reset assigned colors repeat the appearance command and select color pop-up Reset in the edit, then tap Please. Syntax Appearance [Object-list] Appearance [Object-list] At [Source-object] Options To see a list of all options of the keyword Appearance in the command line feedback window, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Appearance /? © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 352 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The keyword Appearance has the following options: Option reset color Shortcut Option value r no option value Gel name from the Swatch Book in no the color picker, e.g., medium shortcut amber; or hex value (000000FFFFFF) red r 0-100 green g 0-100 blue b 0-100 hue h 0-360 saturation s 0-100 brightness br 0-100 Description Resets appearance. Sets color appearance. Sets red component of the color appearance (0 by default). Sets green component of the color appearance (0 by default). Sets blue component of the color appearance (0 by default). Sets hue of the color appearance (saturation and brightness 100 by default). Sets saturation of the color appearance (hue 0 by default; brightness 100 by default). Sets brightness of the color appearance (saturation and hue 0 by default). Example: 1 - Change Frame Color of a Single Object Assign preset object 1 a red frame in the preset pool. 1. Press Assign Assign Assign (=Appearance) and tap preset 1 in the preset pool . The Edit Color pop-up opens. 2. Select a red color and tap Please. Preset object 1 has a red frame around it. Hint: Executors display the appearance of objects assigned. To view the appearance of objects on executors, open Playback big. For more information see Executors on the screens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 353 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Example: 2 - Change Frame Color of Several Objects Assign group object 1 thru 5 a blue frame in the group pool. 1. Press Assign Assign Assign (=Appearance) Group 1 Thru 5 Please . The Edit Color pop-up opens. 2. Select a blue color and tap Please. Group objects 1 thru 5 have a blue frame around them. Example: 3 - Change Background Color of Cues Change the background color of cue 1 of the selected executor. For more information see change cue color. Important: Cue color columns have to be enabled in the option menu. 1. Press Assign Assign Assign (=Appearance) Cue 1 Please . The Edit Color pop-up opens. 2. Choose the color and tap Please. Cue 1 of the selected executor has a new background color. Example: 4 - Cue Background Color same as Group Color Cue 1 is to have the same color as group 2. Press Assign Assign Assign (=Appearance) Cue 1 At Group 2 Please . Cue 1 has the same color as group 2. Example: 5 - Use Command Line Only Assign the All preset pool (0) object 1 a red frame using the command line only. Type in the command line: [Channel]> Appearance Preset 0.1 /h=0 /s=100 /br=50 Press Please . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 354 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English - or - [Channel]> ​A ppearance Preset 0.1 /r=100 /g=0 /b=0 Press Please . Pool object 1 has a red frame around it. Example: 6 – Assign the Appearance from Source Object to Destination Object Assign the appearance of one macro to another. Type in the command line: [Channel]> Appearance Macro 2 At Macro 13 Press Please . Macro 2 receives the same appearance as macro 13. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 355 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.20.Asterisk * To get the Asterisk * in the command line press and hold Shift + 8 . Description The Asterisk * is a wildcard character to substitute for any other character or characters in a name. Examples Select all fixtures stored in a group and a name beginning with "Mac". [Channel]> Group Mac* Select all fixtures with a name beginning with "backt" and ending with "blue". [Channel]> Fixture backt*blue © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 356 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.21.Assign keyword Assign is a function used to define relationships between objects or give values to properties. To execute the keyword Assign press the key Assign , type Assign or the shortcut As into the command line. Syntax Assign [Object-list 1] (At) [Object-list 2] Assign [Function] (At) [Object-list] Assign [Helping-keyword] [Value-list] [Object-list] Assign [Object-list] /[property1]=[value] /[property2]=[value] Assign [Object] Options To get a list of all available options for the keyword Assign in the command line feedback window type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Assign /? The keyword Assign has the following options: Option break multipatch reset x y Shortcut b m r noconfirm nc special cue_mode cm Option value 1-8 0 to 10,000 no option value -10,000 to +10,000 -10,000 to +10,000 Description Sets patch break. Sets multi patch slot. Removes existing patch. Sets the x-coordinate. Sets the y-coordinate. Suppresses confirmation no option value pop-up. normal; default; highlight Sets special mode of Preset. assert; xassert; break; xbreak; release Sets cue mode. If no object type is given for the object list, the objects at the current destination are used. If the current destination is root (no destination), the current default object type of the command line is used. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 357 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Hint: Assign is the only function that may be directly proceeded by another function. Example: [Channel]> ​A ssign Dmx 2.101 At Channel 5 Patches DMX address 101 on the second universe to channel 5. [Channel]> ​A ssign Sequence 1 Thru 5 At Executor 6 Thru 10 Assigns Sequence 1 thru 5 to Executor 6 thru 10. [Channel]> ​A ssign Toggle At Executor 101 Assigns a toggle button to Executor 101. [Channel]> ​A ssign Fade 3 Cue 5 Assigns a fade time of 3 seconds to cue 5 of the selected executor. [Channel]> ​A ssign User JohnDoe /password=qwerty Sets the password for JohnDoe to "qwerty". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 358 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> ​A ssign Executor 1 Opens the Assign Menu dialog for executor 1. [Channel]> Assign Group 1 Layout 1 /x=5 /y=2 Assigns group 1 into layout 1 at position x 5 and y 2. [Channel]> Assign Go ExecButton1 1.1 /cue_mode=xassert Assigns Go button with cue mode "xassert" to ExecButton1 of the executor 1 on page 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 359 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.22.At keyword At may be used as a function to apply values or as a helping keyword for other functions to indicate destinations. To execute this keyword press the key At , or type At or the shortcut A into the command line. Syntax At [Value-list] At [Value-type] [Value-list] At [Object-list] [Object-list] At [Value-list] [Object-list] At [Value-type] [Value-list] [Object-list] At [Object-list] [Function] [Object-list] At [Object-list] (as a helping keyword) Options To get a list of all available options for the keyword At in the command line feedback window type the following into the command line: [Channel]> At /? The keyword At has the following options: Option LAYER ignoreselection Shortcut Option value Value; Fade; Delay; EffectForm; EffectBPM; EffectSpeedGroup; EffectLow; EffectHigh; EffectPhase; no EffectWidth; EffectFade; EffectDelay; shortcut EffectID; Auto; Valueonly; Output; IDValueExec; IDEffectExec; IDValueCue; IDEffectCue; DMX is no option value Description Sets destination layer. Ignores current selection. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 360 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Shortcut Option value values v =False; =True valuetimes vt =False; =True effects ef =False; =True disablecolortransform dct no option value prefercolorwheel no option value prefermixcolor pcw pmc no option value prefercolorboth pcb no option value status s =False; =True Description Filters by layer, enables value layer. Filters by layer, enables fade and delay layer. Filters by layer, enables effect layers. Disables color transformation (fetch hard attribute values). Prefers transforming colors to color wheel. Prefers transforming color to MIXColor and color wheel. Prefers transforming color to both MIXColor and color wheel. At with tracking values. At is "the exception that proves the rule". At is one of the few functional keywords which accept objects before the function. As a starting keyword, At is a function that applies values in the programmer to the current selection. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 361 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English If value type Fade or Delay is used, the value list will be applied as individual fade/delay times. Following an object list, At is a function that applies values to the object list. If the object list does not support the At function, the object list is resolved into a selection list and At applies values in the programmer. Following an object list that follows a function, At is a helping keyword for the starting function. Important: When At applies a range/list the values/objects are usually spread across the receiving objects, e.g., Fixture 1 Thru 3 At 0 Thru 100 will set 1 At 0, 2 At 50, and 3 At 100. However, there is one exception to this rule: If the applied range is a list of cues from a tracking sequence, all fixtures will be set to all cues. Thus, you can apply the tracking status of a cue with the At function (At Cue Thru x). Example: [Channel]> ​A t 75 Sets the dimmer attributes of current selection to 75%. [Channel]> ​A t Cue 3 Sets the current selection to the values of Cue 3 from the selected executor. [Channel]> Fixture 2 At Fixture 3 Selects Fixture 2 and sets it to the values of Fixture 3. [Channel]> Executor 3 At 50 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 362 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Sets the fader of Executor 3 to 50%. [Channel]> Attribute "Pan" At 20 Sets the pan attributes of current selection to 20. [Channel]> ​P resetType 2 Thru 9 At Delay 2 Sets individual delay time of 2 seconds to all attributes, except for dimmers, for the current selection. [Channel]> Copy Group 4 At 10 Copies Group 4 to Group 10. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 363 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.23.At @ Character To enter @ into the command line press and hold Shift + 2 . Description The character @ functions as a place holder for user input in front or in the end of a macro line. For more information see Command line interaction. Important: If you enter the character @ in the front of a macro line, you have to disable CLI (= command line interaction) in the macro. For more information see Command line interaction. If CLI is enabled, the macro line does not work. Examples To create a macro that enters Load into the command line type the following into the macro line: Load @ Tap at the macro, then press the executor and select the cue for load. The selected cue is now loaded. To create a macro that enters Attribute Pan At into the command line type the following into the macro line: Attribute Pan At @ Tap the macro and then enter the value. Press Please . To create a macro line that adds Fade 20 to the command line type the following into the macro line: @ Fade 20 After you have entered, for example Fixture 1 Thru 10 into the command line, tap the macro. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 364 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.24.Attribute keyword Attribute is an object type used as reference attributes of a fixture. To execute this keyword type Attribute or the shortcut Att into the command line. Syntax Attribute "Name" Attribute [number] The default function for attributes is Call. Calling attributes will bring them to the encoder and select them in the fixture sheet (blue column header). Pressing the button Preset twice takes over Attributes into the command line. Attributes are organized by Features, which in turn are organized by PresetType. This means that you can also call attributes with the Feature and PresetType keyword using numbers separated by a dot. Important: The attribute number may change when new fixtures and attributes are added to the show file. We recommend you use the unique attribute library name in e.g., macros. Note: By typing "List Attribute" into the command line presents you a list of attributes with their corresponding names and numbers used in the show file. Examples [Channel]> ​Off Attribute 1 Knocks out first attribute (Dim) for current selection. [Channel]> ​A ttribute "pan" At 120 Sets attribute "pan" to 120 degrees for the current selection. [Channel]> Feature 3.1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 365 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Calls the first Attribute of the third Feature. [Channel]> Feature $feature.1 At + 1 Increments the value of the first attribute of the current feature for the current selection. [Channel]> ​P resetType 3.2.1 Calls the first Attribute of the second feature of the third preset type. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 366 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.25.AutoCreate keyword To execute the keyword AutoCreate, type AutoCreate or the shortcut Au into the command line. Description The keyword AutoCreate automatically creates preset objects. Important: To auto create presets, create preset reference first. For more information on AutoCreate in the Setup see Auto create presets. Syntax AutoCreate [Object] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword AutoCreate, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> AutoCreate /? The keyword AutoCreate has the following options: Option Add Merge Shortcut No shortcut m Description Adds new objects. Adds data to existing content. Example [Channel]> AutoCreate FixtureType 2. "PresetReferences" Generates all presets with preset references of fixture type 2 and merges them with the existing presets. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 367 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.26.Backup Keyword To get the Backup keyword in the command line, type Backup or the shortcut Ba in the command line. Description The Backup keyword opens and close the Backup menu. For more information, see Using the Backup Menu. Backup menu Hint: Another way to open and close the Backup menu is to press the Backup key. Syntax Backup Example To open the Backup menu type in the command line: [Channel]> Backup © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 368 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.27.Black keyword Black is a function used to temporary override master level to zero on executing objects. To execute this keyword type Black into the command line. Syntax Black [Executor-list] Black On [Executor-list] Black Off [Executor-list] Description When the Black function is used with an Executor button the Black On command is executed when the button is pressed. The Black Off is executed when the button is released. Examples [Channel]> Black On Executor 1 Overrides master level of Executor 1 to zero. [Channel]> Black Off Executor 1 Returns master level of Executor 1 to the master fader. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 369 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.28.Blackout keyword Blackout is a function used to force zero values on output for dimmer parameter of channels and fixtures. Fixtures with "React to Master" = off in the fixture edit menu do not react to Blackout. As long as Blackout is enabled the "B.O." button is on i.e., it is permanently burning. To execute this keyword press the key B.O. , or type Blackout or the shortcut Bl into the command line. Syntax Blackout Blackout On Blackout Off Blackout is a toggle function. This means that entering Blackout without any helping keyword will toggle Blackout mode on/off. Examples [Channel]> Blackout On Turns on Blackout mode. Blackout On Command line response © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 370 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.29.BlackScreen keyword To execute this keyword, type BlackScreen or the shortcut BlackS into the command line. Description The keyword BlackScreen is used to make single or all screens of the console turn black. It is possible to revert the command for single and all screens of the console: Tap either Show Display or Show All Displays in the lower right corner of the screen. Syntax BlackScreen Options To get a list of all options of the keyword BlackScreen, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> BlackScreen /? The keyword BlackScreen has the following options: Option On Off Shortcut No shortcut No shortcut Description All screens turn black. All screens turn back on. Examples [Channel]> BlackScreen All screens of the console turn black. [Channel]> BlackScreen Off All screens of the console turn back on. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 371 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> BlackScreen 1 Screen 1 turns black. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 372 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.30.Blind keyword Blind is a function that suppresses the output of the live programmer. Programming is possible without a live output. Switching off the blind mode brings back the live programmer including changes made during blind mode. To execute this keyword press the key Blind , or type Blind or the shortcut Bli into the command line. Syntax Blind Blind On Blind Off Description Blind is a toggle function. This means that entering Blind without any helping keyword will toggle Blind mode on/off. Example [Channel]> Blind On Turns on Blind mode (turns off output of programmer). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 373 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.31.BlindEdit keyword BlindEdit is a function used to switch the console between the Live and a separate Blind programmer. To execute this keyword type BlindEdit or the shortcut BlindE into the command line. Hint: Pressing the button Blind for over two seconds takes over the command BlindEdit into the command line. Syntax BlindEdit BlindEdit On BlindEdit Off Description BlindEdit is a toggle function. This means that entering BlindEdit without any helping keyword will toggle between the Live and the Blind programmer. Example [Channel]> ​BlindEdit On Turns BlindEdit on, opens the Blind programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 374 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.32.Block keyword Block is a function used to add data to prevent tracking. Tracking values (magenta colored) are converted to stored values (white colored). To execute this keyword type Block or the shortcut Blo into the command line. Syntax Block [Object-list] If [Selection-list] If [Attribute-list] Options To get a list of all available options for the keyword Block in the command line feedback window type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Block /? The keyword Block has the following options: Option defaultvalues trackingshield Shortcut dv ts Option value no option value no option value Description Removes default values. Uses tracking shield. If the object list does not contain any references to any cues, the Block function is applied to the current cue of the selected executor. If syntax does not contain any selection list filter, all fixtures will be used. If syntax does not contain any attribute list filter, all attributes will be used. Examples [Channel]> ​Block Blocks all parameters in current cue of the selected executor. [Channel]> ​Block Cue 5 If Fixture 4 If Feature "Position" Blocks pan and tilt of Fixture 4 in cue 5 of the selected executor. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 375 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 376 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.33.ButtonPage keyword ButtonPage is an object type representing the button executor part of a page. To execute this keyword type ButtonPage or BP into the command line. Important: ButtonPage enables executors 101 to 190. Syntax ButtonPage [ID] The default function for this object is Call. Calling a ButtonPage will change your physical executors to this page. Important: The ButtonPage keyword currently supports its default function Call only. The command ButtonPage can only call pages which were previously created, e.g., by saving an executor. For more information on the default function for ButtonPage see Call. Example: [Channel]> ​ButtonPage 5 Changes your physical button executors to Page 5. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 377 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.34.Call keyword Call is a function used to apply/engage an object or its content (press 2x button "ON"). To execute this keyword type Call or the shortcut Ca into the command line. If the Call function is used on objects which contain parameters (fixture values) these values will be loaded (added) into the programmer without a selection of the fixtures. If Call is used on other object types, their content will be applied in its context. Syntax Call [Object-list] Call [Object-list] / [option]​ Options To get a list of all available options for the keyword Call in the command line feedback window type into the command line: [Channel]> Call /? The keyword Call has the following options: Option Shortcut status s Option value =False; =True Description Takes all values along with the tracking values actively into the programmer. no option Sets destination layer. value LAYER SCREEN toggle_activation t no option Sets destination screen. value no option value Examples [Channel]> ​C all Preset 3.1 Loads the content of Preset 3.1 into programmer without selecting the fixtures. At universal presets all fixtures supporting these attributes are affected. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 378 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> ​C all Sequence 1 Status of the last cue of sequence 1 is loaded into the programmer without selecting the fixtures. [Channel]> ​C all Cue 3 Takes all values of Cue 3 of the selected executors actively and all values of Cue 1 and 2 non-actively into the programmer. Note: All values which can be stored are called active values; Values which cannot be stored are called nonactive values. [Channel]> Call Cue 3 /status Takes all values along with the tracking values actively into the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 379 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.35.Camera keyword To enter this keyword into the console, type Camera or the shortcut Cam into the command line. Description The keyword Camera is an object keyword. Syntax [Function] Camera [ID] Example [Channel]> Select Camera 1 Displays the front view in the stage view. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 380 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.36.ChangeDest keyword To execute this keyword type ChangeDest or one of the shortcuts – CD or Chang – into the command line. Description ChangeDest is a function used to change the destination of your command line. Syntax CD [Element-index] CD "Element name" CD [Object-type] [Object-ID] CD .. CD / Changing the destination is done by drilling down through a tree-structured database. To display the elements at a given destination use the function List. For more information on the function List see List. Example: [Channel] > ​C D 3 Enters the 3rd element of the current destination: Settings 3 > [Channel] > CD "Edit Setup" Enters the element of the current destination named "Edit Setup": Edit Setup > © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 381 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel] > CD Group Enters the predefined destination Groups: Groups/Global > Edit Setup/Universes > CD .. Exits one level up in the tree structure: Edit Setup > Edit Setup/Universes > CD / Exits all levels up the root (no destination): [Channel] > © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 382 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.37.Channel keyword Channel is an object type used to access fixtures with a Channel ID. To execute this keyword type Channel or the shortcut C into the command line. Syntax Channel [ID] Channel [ID].[Sub-ID] The default function for channel objects is SelFix. This means that entering channels without any specific function will select the channels in programmer. For more information on default function for channel objects see SelFix. Examples [Channel]> ​C hannel 34 Selects Channel 34. [Channel]> ​C hannel 11.5 Selects the fifth subfixture of the fixture Channel 11. [Channel]> ​C hannel 11 Selects all subfixtures of the fixture Channel 11. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 383 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.38.ChannelFader keyword ChannelFader is an object type representing a fader of the ChannelPages. To execute this keyword type ChannelFader or one of the shortcuts – CF or ChannelF – into the command line. Syntax ChannelFader [ID] Important: To use ChannelFader create a ChannelPage first. For more information on how to create a channel page see ChannelPage. The default function for ChannelFader is Call. Calling a ChannelFader will change the executor faders to Channel mode. For more information on call see Call. Example: [Channel]> ​A ssign Fixture 301 At ChannelFader 5 Assigns the dimmer of fixture 301 to fader 5 of the current channel page. [Channel]> ​A ssign Channel 201 Thru 215 At ChannelFader 2.1 Assigns Channel 201 thru 215 to fader 1 thru 15 of channel page 2. [Channel]> ​A ssign Fixture 3.2.1 At ChannelFader 2.11 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 384 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Assigns the first attribute of the second subfixture of Fixture 3 to fader 11 of channel page 2. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 385 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.39.ChannelLink keyword ChannelLink is a function used to toggle the Channel faders to dynamic mode. To execute this keyword type ChannelLink or the shortcut ChannelL into the command line. Syntax ChannelLink ChannelLink On ChannelLink Off ChannelLink [Attribute-List] If no attribute list is given, the ChannelLink mode will be Dimmer (fader controls the dimmer attributes of the current selection). Examples [Channel]> ​C hannelLink Toggles ChannelLink mode on or off. [Channel]> ​C hannelLink PresetType "Position" Toggles ChannelLink mode on for pan and tilt. [Channel]> ​C hannelLink Attribute "Iris" + "Focus" Toggles ChannelLink mode on for iris and focus. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 386 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.40.ChannelPage keyword ChannelPage is an object type representing a page of channel faders. To execute this keyword, type ChannelPage or one of the shortcuts – CP or ChannelP – into the command line. Important: To create ChannelPage, type the command "Store ChannelPage" and the number into the command line or press Ch Pg+ ​. By doing so you automatically jump to a ChannelPage. For more information on Ch Pg+ see the key Ch Pg+. Syntax ChannelPage [ID] The default function of ChannelPage is Call. Calling a ChannelPage will change the executor faders to channel mode. For more information on the default function of ChannelPage see Call. Examples [Channel]> ​C hannelPage 5 Changes your physical faders to ChannelPage 5 [Channel]> ​C hannelPage + Changes your physical faders to the next ChannelPage. [Channel]> ​Delete ChannelPage 2 Deletes ChannelPage 2. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 387 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.41.Chat keyword The keyword Chat generates an information message in the message center. To execute this keyword type Chat into the command line. Syntax Chat "text" Typing the keyword Chat into the command line generates an information message marked in gray in the message center. For more information on the icons, the colors of messages, and the center itself see Message center. Example: [Channel]> Chat "text" The text you typed in in the quotation marks is displayed in gray in the message center. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 388 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.42.CircularCopy keyword CircularCopy is a function used to move attribute values within your current selection. To execute this keyword type CircularCopy or one of the shortcuts – CC or Ci – into the command line. Syntax CircularCopy [offset] CircularCopy moves the attribute values within your currently selected fixtures in accordance with the selection order. This function obeys the At filter. For more information on how to use filters see What are filters. Example: [Channel]> ​C ircularCopy 1 Fixture 1 copies its values to fixture 2, fixture 2 to fixture 3, and the last fixture copies its values back to fixture 1. [Channel]> ​C ircularCopy -2 Fixture 4 copies its values to fixture 2, fixture 3 to fixture 1, and the last fixture copies its values back to fixture 4. Hint: ​-It is also possible to use the Circular Copy in the MAtricks toolbar. For more information see MAtricks toolbar - Circular Copy​. ​-To access the Circular Copy in a window, press Tools . For more Information see the Tools key. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 389 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.43.Clear keyword Clear is a function used to clear selection, active values or programmer. To execute this keyword type Clear or the shortcut Cl into the command line. Syntax Clear The keyword Clear has three functions. Depending on status of the programmer the function will sequentially: 1. Clear selection (unselects all fixtures) 2. Clear active values (deactivates all values) 3. Clear all (empties programmer) For more information on each function of the keyword Clear see ClearSelection, ClearActive and ClearAll. Example: [Channel]> ​C lear Clears selection, active values or programmer depending on the status/content of the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 390 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.44.ClearActive keyword ClearActive is a function used to inactivate all values in programmer. To execute this keyword type ClearActive or the shortcut ClearAc into the command line. Syntax ClearActive The ClearActive function will inactivate any active values in the programmer. Press the button Clear twice to inactivate all values. For more information on further functions of the keyword Clear see ClearAll and ClearSelection. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 391 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.45.ClearAll keyword ClearAll is a function used to empty the entire programmer. To execute this keyword type ClearAll or the shortcut ClearA into the command line. Syntax ClearAll The ClearAll function clears the selection and discards all values in the programmer. Press the button Clear for slightly over two seconds to clear the selection and to discard all programmer values. For more information on how to use further functions of the keyword Clear see ClearActive and ClearSelection. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 392 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.46.ClearSelection keyword ClearSelection is a function used to deselect any selected fixtures. To execute this keyword type ClearSelection or the shortcut ClearS into the command line. Syntax ClearSelection The ClearSelection function clears the selection (deselects all fixtures). To clear the selection press the button Clear once. For more information on further functions of the keyword Clear see ClearActive and ClearAll. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 393 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.47.Clone keyword It is possible to clone from fixture to fixture; from fixture to fixture type; from fixture type to fixture; or from fixture type to fixture type. To execute this keyword, press Copy twice, type Clone or the shortcut Clo into the command line. Note: Cloning to fixtures adds selective data to presets. Cloning to fixture types adds global data to presets. Syntax Clone [Source Selection-list] At [Destination Selection-list] Clone [Source Selection-list] At [Destination Selection-list] If [Scope Object-list] Options To get a list of all options available for the keyword Clone in the command line feedback window, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Clone /? © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 394 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The keyword Clone has the following options: Option Shortcut overwrite o merge m lowmerge lm disablecolortransform dct prefercolorwheel pcw prefermixcolor pmc prefercolorboth pcb noconfirm nc Option value no option value no option value no option value no option value no option value no option value no option value no option value Description Removes and replaces original data of the destination by new data. Adds data to existing content. Adds data to existing content and never destroys the existing content. Disables transformation of color (fetches hard attribute values). Prefers transforming color to color wheel. Prefers transforming color to MIXColor. Prefers transforming color to both MIXColor and color wheel. Suppresses confirmation pop-up. Important: However, using the keyword If may limit the scope of cloning to just cloning parts of your show file. Note: The keyword clone obeys the world and does not change data outside your current world. For more information see World. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 395 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1.Example: Cloning fixtures to fixtures [Channel]> Clone Fixture 1 At Fixture 2 Creates selective data for fixture 2. Fixture 2 now does the exact same thing it did before cloning. Additionally, fixture 2 keeps the data of fixture 1 in case fixture 2 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> Clone Fixture 1 + 2 At Group 10 If Sequence 1 Thru 10 Copies data from fixture 1 and 2 to fixtures in Group 10 within sequence 1 thru 10 only. [Channel]> Clone Fixture 1 At Fixture 2 /merge Creates selective data for fixture 2. Fixture 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture 1. Additionally, fixture 2 keeps its data in case fixture 1 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> ​C lone Fixture 1 At Fixture 2 /overwrite Creates selective data for fixture 2. Fixture 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture 1. 2.Example: Cloning fixture to fixture type © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 396 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Clone Fixture 1 At FixtureType 2 Creates global data for fixture type 2. Fixture type 2 now does the exact same thing it did before cloning. Additionally, fixture type 2 keeps the data of fixture 1 in case fixture type 2 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> Clone Fixture 1 At FixtureType 2 /merge Creates global data for fixture type 2. Fixture type 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture 1. Additionally, fixture type 2 keeps its data in case fixture 1 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> Clone Fixture 1 At FixtureType 2 /overwrite Creates global data for fixture type 2. Fixture type 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture 1. 3. Example: Cloning fixture type to fixture [Channel]> Clone FixtureType 1 At Fixture 2 Creates selective data for fixture 2. Fixture 2 now does the exact same thing it did before cloning. Additionally, fixture 2 keeps the data of fixture type 1 in case fixture 2 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> Clone FixtureType 1 At Fixture 2 /merge © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 397 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Creates selective data for fixture 2. Fixture 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture type 1. Additionally, fixture 2 keeps its data in case fixture type 1 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> ​C lone FixtureType 1 At Fixture 2 /overwrite Creates selective data for fixture 2. Fixture 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture type 1. 4.Example: Cloning fixture type to fixture type [Channel]> Clone FixtureType 1 At FixtureType 2 Creates global data for fixture type 2. Fixture type 2 now does the exact same thing it did before cloning. Additionally, fixture type 2 keeps the data of fixture type 1 in case fixture type 2 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> Clone FixtureType 1 At FixtureType 2 /merge Creates global data for fixture type 2. Fixture type 2 keeps its data in case fixture type 1 should not have any data for specific objects. [Channel]> ​C lone FixtureType 1 At FixtureType 2 /overwrite © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 398 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Creates global data for fixture type 2. Fixture type 2 now does the exact same thing as fixture type 1. Note: It is also possible to clone using the screen. For more information on how to clone on screen see Clone – Clone using screens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 399 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.48.CmdDelay keyword CmdDelay is a helping keyword used to indicate delay times for the cmd link. To execute this keyword type CmdDelay or the shortcut CmdD into the command line. Syntax CmdDelay [Value-list] As a helping keyword for programming functions (e.g., Store) this keyword sets the cmd delay time of the object in question. For more information see key Time. Example [Channel]> ​Store Cue 3 CmdDelay 4 Creates cue 3 and sets its cmd delay time to 4 seconds. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 400 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.49.CmdHelp keyword CmdHelp is a function used to list all keywords in the response window of the command line. To execute this keyword type CmdHelp or the shortcut Cm into the command line. Pressing the key Help twice enters the keyword CmdHelp into the command line. For more information see the key Help. Syntax CmdHelp [filter] This function lists all keywords with their corresponding shortcuts in green. Examples [Channel]> ​C mdHelp Lists all keywords. [Channel]> ​C mdHelp f* Lists all keywords starting with an f. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 401 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.50.Copy keyword Copy is a function used to create copies of an object. To execute this keyword type Copy or the shortcut Co into the command line. Syntax Copy [Object] At [target-ID] Copy [Object-list] At [target-start] Copy [Object] At [target-list] Copy [Object-list] Options To get a list of all options available for the keyword Copy in the command line feedback window type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Copy /? The keyword Copy has the following options: Option overwrite merge status cueonly Shortcut o m s co Option value no option value no option value =False; =True =False; =True Description Replaces existing content. Adds to existing content. Adds tracking status to existing content. Prevents changes to track forward. noconfirm nc no option value Suppresses confirmation pop-up. If no object type is given and the command line destination is root (no destination), the default object type – Cue – is used for this function. If no target is given, the objects will be exported to clipboard.xml. The objects are used with the keyword Paste. For more information see Paste. Examples [Channel]> Copy Group 1 At 5 Copies group 1 to group 5. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 402 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Copy Group 1 Thru 3 At 11 Copies group 1 to group 11; group 2 to group 12; and group 3 to group 13. [Channel]> Copy Group 2 At 6 Thru 8 Copies group 2 to group 6, 7, and 8. [Channel]> Copy 2 At 6 Copies cue 2 to cue 6. [Channel]> Copy Macro 2 At 6 Copies macro 2 to macro 6. [Channel]> ​C opy Cue 5 Exports cue 5 to the temporary xml.-file clipboard.xml. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 403 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.51.CrashLogCopy keyword CrashLogCopy is a function used to copy crash log files from the internal drive to USB flash drive. To execute this keyword type CrashLogCopy or the shortcut CrashLogC into the command line. Syntax CrashLogCopy Example [Channel]> ​C rashLogCopy If there are any crash log files on the internal drive, these are copied to the first USB flash drive. The files are available on your USB in the folder gma2 / temp. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 404 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.52.CrashLogDelete keyword CrashLogDelete is a function used to delete crash log files on the internal drive. To execute this keyword type CrashLogDelete or the shortcut CrashLogD into the command line. Syntax CrashLogDelete Example [Channel]> ​C rashLogDelete If there are any crash log files on the internal drive, these are deleted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 405 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.53.CrashLogList keyword CrashLogList is a function used to list existing crash log files in command line response window. To execute this keyword type CrashLogList or the shortcut Cr into the command line. Syntax CrashLogList Example [Channel]> ​C rashLogList If there are any crash log files, these are listed in the command line response window. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 406 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.54.Crossfade keyword Crossfade is a function that is assigned for executors. To execute this keyword, type Crossfade or the shortcut Cro into the command line. Syntax Assign Crossfade (At) [Executor-list] Crossfade [value] [Executor-list] (Fade [seconds]) Crossfade is a function that gradually activates the next step of an executor in accordance with the position of the fader. Example: [Channel]> ​A ssign Crossfade At Executor 1 Thru 5 Gives fader 1 thru 5 the functionality of Crossfade. [Channel]> ​C rossfade 70 Executor 1 Fade 3 Sets the Crossfade of executor 1 to 70% in 3 seconds. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 407 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.55.CrossfadeA keyword CrossfadeA is a function assigned for executors. To execute this keyword, type CrossfadeA into the command line. Syntax Assign CrossfadeA (At) [Executor-list] CrossfadeA [value] [Executor-list] (Fade [seconds]) CrossfadeA is a function that gradually fades down dimmer attributes of the current step of an executor in accordance with the position of the fader. Depending on the executor option AB/Split this function will either act as a Crossfader for decreasing values or as a Master for the current cue (for dimmer attributes). Example: [Channel]> ​A ssign CrossfadeA At Executor 1 Assigns fader 1 the functionality of CrossfadeA. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 408 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.56.CrossfadeB keyword CrossfadeB is a function that is assigned for executors. To execute this keyword, type CrossfadeB into the command line. Syntax Assign CrossfadeB (At) [Executor-list] CrossfadeB [value] [Executor-list] (Fade [seconds]) CrossfadeB is a function that gradually fades in dimmer attributes of the next step of an executor in accordance with the position of the fader. Depending on the executor option AB/Split this function either acts as a crossfader for increasing values or as a master for next cue (for dimmer attributes). No matter the option, CrossfadeB gradually activates the next step of an executor in accordance with the position of the fader for non dimmer attributes. Example: [Channel]> ​A ssign CrossfadeB At Executor 1 Assigns fader 1 the functionality of CrossfadeB. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 409 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.57.Cue keyword Cue is an object type holding a look on stage. To execute this keyword type Cue or the shortcut Cu into the command line. Syntax Cue [ID.ID] Important: Cue is the only object type that accepts numerical ID as decimal fractions. The ID allowed for cues ranges from 0.001 to 9999.999. In all other objects a dot indicates the ID of a parent or a child object. The default function for cue objects is SelFix. This means that calling cues without any specific function selects the fixtures of the cue. For more information on the default function for cue objects see SelFix. Cues are arranged in sequences and are divided in parts. If only cue ID is entered, you are applying functions to all parts of cues of the sequence assigned to the selected executor. For more information see Sequence. To access cues of unselected sequences/executors add a parent object to the syntax, i.e., Cue 3.001 Executor 1 or Sequence 5 Cue 3.999 Hint: The object order in the command line is irrelevant: Sequence 1 Cue 2 is the same as Cue 2 Sequence 1 Example: [Channel]> Cue 3 Selects fixtures in cue 3 of sequence assigned to selected executor. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 410 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.58.Cut keyword To enter the Cut keyword into the command line, type Cut into the command line. Description Cut is a function used to specify the source objects for a two-step move action. Syntax Cut [Object-list] The given object list is temporarily stored for later use as source objects for the following Paste command. For more information on cut and paste see Paste. Important: Cut & Paste does not work in cue objects. To move cues, use the Move keyword. Example [Channel]> Cut Preset 4.1 Prepares color preset 1 to be moved via the Paste command. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 411 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.59.Default Keyword To execute the keyword Default press and hold + . . You can also type Default or the shortcut D into the command line. Description The Default keyword sets the given attributes for the fixture or channel selection to default values. If no attribute list is given, all attributes of fixture or channel selection will be set to their default values. If individual default values for the fixture or channel are set in the edit menu, the individual default value will be used. If only general default values for the fixture or channel are set in the Patch and Fixture Schedule, the general default values will be used. You can also use the Default Link in the calculator. For more information, see Calculator. Default values are displayed in the fixture or channel sheet in brackets. Fixture sheet color default values Syntax Default Fixture [Fixture ID] Default PresetType [PresetType Number] Channel [Channel ID] Default PresetType "PresetType Name" Examples Set pan and tilt of the fixture selection to their default values. [Channel]> Default PresetType "Position" Set all attributes of fixture 1 to their default values. [Channel]> Fixture 1 Default © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 412 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.60.DefGoBack keyword DefGoBack is a keyword which refers to the selected executor. To execute this keyword type DefGoBack or the shortcut DefGoB into the command line. Syntax DefGoBack DefGoBack calls the previous cue in the selected executor. Example: [Channel]> ​DefGoBack Calls the previous cue in the selected executor. Hint: It is also possible to enter this command by pressing the large Go - button on the console. For more information on the key Go - see Go - (large). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 413 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.61.DefGoForward keyword DefGoForward is a keyword which refers to the selected sequence. To execute this keyword type DefGoForward or the shortcut DefG into the command line. Syntax DefGoForward ​DefGoForward calls the next cue in the selected executor. Example: [Channel]> ​DefGoForward Calls the next cue in the selected executor. Hint: It is also possible to enter this command by pressing the large Go + button on the console. For more information see Go + (large). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 414 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.62.DefGoPause keyword DefGoPause is a keyword which refers to the selected executor. To execute this keyword type DefGoPause or the shortcut DefGoP into the command line. Syntax DefGoPause DefGoPause pauses the current fade between cues and effects in the selected executor if the option "Link effect to rate" is on in the assign menu. Example: [Channel]> ​DefGoPause Pauses the current cue in the selected executor. Note: It is also possible to enter this command by pressing the large Pause button on the console. For more information see Pause (large). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 415 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.63.Delay keyword Delay is a helping keyword used to indicate delay times. To execute this keyword type Delay or the shortcut Dela into the command line. Syntax Delay [Value-list] As a helping keyword for programming functions (e.g., Store) this keyword sets the time of an object. Used as a starting keyword, Delay applies individual timing in the programmer for the current selection and attributes. Examples [Channel]> Store Cue 3 Delay 4 Creates cue 3 and sets its delay time to 4 seconds. [Channel]> Delay 4 Sets individual delay time for the current selection/attributes. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 416 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.64.Delete keyword Delete is a function used to remove data from the show file. To execute this keyword type Delete or the shortcut Del into the command line. Delete is a function used to remove data from your show file. If the object itself cannot be removed, any assignment to the objects will be removed. If no object type or destination is given, the default object type for this function ​– Cue –​ is used. For more information see Cue. If a selection list filter is given, only specified fixtures are deleted from the object list. Syntax Delete [Object-list] / [option] = [option value] Delete [Object-list] [Selection-list filter] Options To get a list of all options available for the keyword Delete in the command line feedback window type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Delete /? The keyword Delete has the following options: Option Shortcut Option value deletevalues dv no option value cueonly noconfirm co nc no option value no option value region r no option value element e condition cnd no option value See messages keyword. Description Deletes values from cue if cue part is deleted. Prevents changes to track forward. Suppresses confirmation pop-up. Deletes a region of elements in layout view. Deletes a certain element in layout view. See messages keyword. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 417 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Examples [Channel]> Delete 7 Deletes Cue 7 in the selected executor. [Channel]> Delete Messages Deletes all messages in the message center. [Channel]> Delete Group 3 Deletes Group 3. [Channel]> Delete World 6 Deletes World 6. [Channel]> Delete Fixture 4 Unpatches fixture 4 (removes assigned DMX objects). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 418 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.65.DeleteShow keyword DeleteShow is a function used to remove show files from hard drives. To execute this keyword type DeleteShow or the shortcut DeleteS into the command line. Syntax DeleteShow [filename] DeleteShow [filename] /noconfirm DeleteShow [filename] /backup DeleteShow [filename] /show Options To get a list of all options available for the keyword DeleteShow in the command line feedback window type the following into the command line. [Channel]> DeleteShow /? The keyword DeleteShow has the following options: Option backup show noconfirm Shortcut b s nc Option value no option value no option value no option value Description Deletes backup files ending in .backup. Deletes show files ending in .show.gz. Suppresses confirmation pop-up. This function deletes show files on the currently selected hard drive. Use wildcards (*) in filename to delete multiple files. If /noconfirm option is included, the deletion of each file needs to be confirmed. To avoid constant confirmation add "nonconfirm" at the end of the command. Example: [Channel]> DeleteShow /backup The corresponding shortcut © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 419 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> DeleteShow /b Deletes show file backups only (file ending .backup). [Channel]> DeleteShow /show The corresponding shortcut [Channel]> DeleteShow /s Deletes show files only (file ending .show.gz). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 420 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.66.DisconnectStation keyword DisconnectStation is a function used to throw stations out of your session. To execute this keyword type DisconnectStation or the shortcuts – DS or Di – into the command line. Syntax DisconnectStation [Station-list] Options To get a list of all options available for the keyword DisconnectStation in the command line feedback window type into the command line: [Channel]> DisconnectStation /? The keyword DisconnectStation has the following option: Option noconfirm Shortcut nc Option value no option value Description Suppresses confirmation pop-up. Example: [Channel]> ​DisconnectStation 192.168.0.10 Disconnects station with IP address 192.168.0.10. [Channel]> ​DisconnectStation 10 Disconnects station with host ID 10 on your Network. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 421 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> ​DisconnectStation Thru Disconnects all stations on your subnet. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 422 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.67.Dmx keyword Dmx is an object type representing the DMX outputs of the console. To execute this keyword type Dmx or the shortcut Dm into the command line. Syntax Dmx [Address] Dmx [Universe].[Address] DMX Tester Entering a DMX address opens the DMX encoder bar which may be used for testing. You may also set a test level directly by combining the DMX address with the keyword At. For more information see At. The DMX tester has priority over the normal output of the console (parked, executors, programmer) and HTP priority with DMX input. Patching Assign [Fixture-list] (At) [DMX start] Assigning fixtures to a DMX start address removes all existing patch for the fixtures, and assigns the new DMX addresses. Assign [DMX-list] (At) [Fixture] Assigning a list of DMX addresses adds them to the existing patch (multi patch) of the fixture. This does not add more fixtures to your grandMA2 3D visualizer. Delete [DMX-list] Deletion of DMX addresses unpatches the fixtures using this addresses. Delete [Fixture-list] Deletion of fixture unpatches all assigned DMX addresses. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 423 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Patching of fixtures with multiple breaks Assign [DMX address] (At) [Fixture] /break=n Assigning a DMX address to a specific break. Examples [Channel]> ​Dmx 2.101 Selects address 101 on second universe in the DMX tester. [Channel]> ​A ssign Dmx 2.101 At Channel 5 Patches DMX address 101 on the second universe to channel 5. [Channel]> Dmx 513 At 100 Sets the first address on the second universe to 100% in the DMX tester. [Channel]> ​Off Dmx Thru Releases all values in the DMX tester. [Channel]> ​A ssign Dmx 1.101 At Fixture 2 /break=1 Patches DMX address 101 to the first break of fixture 2 (i.e., the dimmer of a VL5). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 424 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.68.Dollar $ Character To get the $ character in the command line, press and hold Shift + 4 . Description The $ character indicates variables in the command line. For more information about variables, see use variables. Examples Create and use a variable to turn the chaser executor off. 1. To create the variable enter in the command line: [Channel]> SetVar $mychasers = "Executor 11 Thru 15" 2. To use the variables $mychasers to turn executor 11 through 15 off, enter in the command line: [Channel]> Off $mychasers 3. Press Please . Executor 11 trough 15 are turned off by using the variable $mychasers. For more information to the SetVar keyword, see SetVar keyword. Create and use a variable to login into a user profile. 1. To create the variable enter in the command line: [Channel]> SetVar $myname = "Ben Dover" 2. To use the variable to login into the user profile, enter in the command line: [Channel]> Login $"myname" You are logged in. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 425 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.69.DmxUniverse keyword DmxUniverse is an object type representing the DMX universes of the console. To execute this keyword press the button Channel on the console three times or type DmxUniverse or the shortcut DmxU into the command line. Syntax DmxUniverse [Universe] The keyword DmxUniverse may be used to access DMX universes or all DMX channels of a universe. Example: [Channel]> ​U npark DmxUniverse 1 Thru 4 Unparks all DMX channels of universe 1 thru 4. [Channel]> ​Delete DmxUniverse 2 Unpatches all DMX channels of universe 2. [Channel]> ​Edit DmxUniverse 3 Opens universe editor to change its properties. [Channel]> Move DmxUniverse 2 at 12 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 426 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Moves DmxUnvierse 2 to DmxUniverse 12. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 427 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.70.Dot . Character To get the . dot in the command line, press . . Description The . dot is a separator for decimal fractions and hierarchical object IDs. Two .. dots used along with the keyword ChangeDest, changes the destination one level up. For more information, see ChangeDest keyword. Examples To set the pan attribute to 50.5 degrees, type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "Pan" At 50.5 To go one level backwards in the structure tree, from Edit Setup/Universes to Edit Setup, type in the command line: Edit Setup/Universes> CD .. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 428 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.71.DoubleRate keyword DoubleRate is a function used to double the current rate. To execute this keyword type DoubleRate or the shortcut DoubleR into the command line. Syntax DoubleRate [Object-list] Example: [Channel]> ​DoubleRate Executor 5 Doubles the rate of Executor 5. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 429 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.72.DoubleSpeed Keyword To get the DoubleSpeed keyword in the command line type DoubleSpeed or the shortcut DS in the command line. Description DoubleSpeed is a function to multiply the speed or the executor by 2. Syntax DoubleSpeed [Object-list] Example To double the speed of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> DoubleSpeed Executor 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 430 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.73.Down keyword To execute the keyword Down, press the key Down , type Down or the shortcut Do into the command line. For more information on the key Down see the key Down. Description The keyword Down scrolls down one page in the window you are currently in. Down is a function keyword. Syntax Down Example [Channel]> Down Scrolls down one page in the fixture sheet. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 431 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.74.DropControl keyword Type DropControl or the shortcut Dr into the command line. Description DropControl is used if multiple users are in a session. It drops the exclusive control over channel or attributes in playbacks in a current user profile. The user that executes the keyword DropControl drops the sole control over playbacks in TakeControl fixtures and gains back the control over other playbacks. To take control over fixtures and playbacks see the keyword TakeControl. Syntax DropControl [fixture-list] Example [Channel]> DropControl Regains full control over all playbacks in the current user profile. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 432 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.75.Edit keyword To enter the keyword Edit into the command line, press the key Edit or type Edit or the shortcut E into the command line. Description Edit is a function keyword and it is used to modify values. Syntax Edit [Object] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword Edit, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Edit /? The keyword Edit has the following options: Option noconfirm Shortcut nc Option Value No option value Description Suppresses confirmation pop-up. Examples [Channel]> Edit Effect 2 Opens the effect editor to modify the effect 2. [Channel]> Edit Takes the first cue in the sequence of a selected executor. If the executor is in a certain cue, then this cue is edited. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 433 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.76.Effect keyword To enter the keyword into the console, press Effect or type Effect or the shortcut Ef into the command line. Description The keyword Effect is an object keyword. Syntax [Function] Effect [ID]/[Name]/[Number] Example [Channel]> Move Effect 1 At 37 Moves the effect 1 to the cell 37 of the effect pool. [Channel]> SelFix Effect 1 Selects fixtures in the fixture sheet that can run effect 1 if it is a selective effect. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 434 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.77.EffectAttack Keyword To get the EffectAttack keyword in the command line type EffectAttack or the shortcut EffectA in the command line. Description EffectAttack is a helping keyword used to indicate individual EffectAttack of a pulse width modulation form. For more information on effect attack see effects. Syntax EffectAttack EffectAttack [value list] Examples To switch the encoder to adjust the effect attack layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectAttack To knock out any EffectAttack values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectAttack To set the effect attack for the selection or feature to 50 % of the pulse width modulation width type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectAttack 50 To set the effect attack for "pan" for the selection to 50 % of the pulse width modulation width type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectAttack 50 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 435 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.78.EffectBPM Keyword To get the EffectBPM keyword in the command line type EffectBPM or the shortcut EffectB in the command line: Description EffectBPM is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect speed in BPM (= beats per minute). For more information on effect speed see effects. Syntax EffectBPM EffectBPM [value list] Examples To switch the encoder to adjust the effect speed layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectBPM To knock out any effect speed values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectBPM To sets the effect speed for the selection or feature to 120 beats per minute type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectBPM 120 To set the effect speed for "pan" for the selection to 90 beats per minute type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectBPM 90 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 436 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.79.EffectDecay Keyword To get the EffectDecay keyword in the command line type EffectDecay or the shortcut EffectDec in the command line. Description EffectDecay is a helping keyword to indicate individual EffectDecay of a pulse width modulation form. For more information on effect decay see effects. Syntax EffectDecay EffectDecay [value list] Examples To switch the encoders to adjust the effect decay layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectDecay To knock out any effect decay values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectDecay To set the effect decay for the selection or feature to 50% of the pulse width modulation width type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectDecay 50 To set the effect decay for "pan" for the selection to 50% of the pulse width modulation width type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectDecay 50 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 437 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.80.EffectDelay Keyword To get the EffectDelay keyword in the command line type EffectDelay or the shortcut EffectD in the command line: Description EffectDelay is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect delay times. For more information on effect delay see effects. Syntax EffectDelay EffectDelay [value list] Example: To switch the encoders to adjust the effect delay layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectDelay To knock out any effect delay values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectDelay To set the effect delay for the selection or feature to 4 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectDelay 4 To set the effect delay for "pan" for the selection to 2 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectDelay 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 438 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.81.EffectFade Keyword To get the EffectFade keyword in the command line type EffectFade or the shortcut EffectF in the command line. Description EffectFade is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect fade times. For more information on effect fade times see effects. Syntax EffectFade EffectFade [value list] Examples: To switch the encoder to adjust the effect fade layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectFade To knock out effect fade values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectFade To set the effect fade time for the selection or feature to 4 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectFade 4 To set the effect fade for "pan" for the selection to 2 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectFade 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 439 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.82.EffectForm Keyword To get the EffectForm keyword in the command line type EffectForm or the shortcut EffectF in the command line: Description EffectForm is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect form values. For more information on effect form values see effects. Syntax EffectForm EffectForm [value list] Examples To switch encoders to adjust the effect form layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectForm To knock out any effect form values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectForm To set the effect form for the selection or feature to the 6th form type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectForm 6 To set the effect form for "pan" for the selection to the 6th form type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectForm 6 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 440 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.83.EffectHigh Keyword To get the EffectHigh keyword in the command line type EffectHigh or the shortcut EffectHi in the command line. Description EffectHigh is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect high values. For more information see effects. Syntax EffectHigh EffectHigh [value list] Examples To switch the encoders to adjust the EffectHigh layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectHigh To knock out any EffectHigh values of the programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectHigh To set the EffectHigh value for the selection or feature to 80 type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectHigh 80 To set the EffectHigh for "pan" for the selection to 20 type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectHigh 20 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 441 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.84.EffectHZ Keyword To get the EffectHZ keyword in the command line type EffectHZ or the shortcut EffectH in the command line. Description EffectHZ is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect speed in Hertz. For more information see Effects. Syntax EffectHZ EffectHZ [value list] Examples To switch the encoder to the effect speed layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectHZ To knock out any effect speed values of programmer for the selection or feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectHZ To set the effect speed for the selection or feature to 4 Hertz type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectHZ 4 To set the effect speed for "pan" for the selection to 2 Hertz type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectHZ 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 442 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.85.EffectID Keyword To get the EffectID keyword in the command line type EffectID or the shortcut EffectI in the command line: Description EffectID is a helping keyword to indicate the EffectID layer. The EffectID value cannot be adjusted the same way as other effectlayers. This value is given by calling an Effect. For more information on effects see effects. Syntax EffectID Examples To switch the encoder to display the EffectID layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectID To knock out any EffectID values (effect reference) of the programmer for the selection/feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectID © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 443 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.86.EffectLow Keyword To get the EffectLow keyword in the command line type EffectLow or EffectL in the command line: Description EffectLow is a helping keyword used to indicate individual effect low values. For more information on effects see effects. Syntax EffectLow EffectLow [Value-list] Examples To switch the encoders to adjust the effect low layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectLow To knock out any effect low values of programmer for the selection/feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectLow To set the effect low for the selection/feature to 20 type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectLow 20 To set the effect low for "pan" for the selection to -20 type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectLow -20 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 444 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.87.EffectPhase Keyword To get the EffectPhase keyword in the command line type EffectPhase or EffectP in the command line. Description EffectPhase is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect phases. Syntax EffectPhase EffectPhase [Value-list] Examples To switch the encoders to adjust the effect phase layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectPhase To knock out any effect phase values of the programmer for the selection/feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectPhase To set the effect phase for the selection/feature to 180 degrees type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectPhase 180 To Set the effect phase for "pan" for the selection to 180 degrees type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectPhase 180 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 445 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.88.EffectSec Keyword To get the EffectSec keyword in the command line type EffectSec or EffectS in the command line. Description EffectSec is a helping keyword to indicate individual effect speed in seconds. Syntax EffectSec EffectSec [Value-list] Examples To switches the encoders to adjust the EffectSpeed layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectSec To knocks out any effect speed values of the programmer for the selection/feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectSec To set the effect speed for the selection/feature to 2 seconds per cycle type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectSec 2 To set the effect speed for "pan" for the selection to 4 seconds per cycle type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectSec 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 446 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.89.EffectSpeedGroup keyword To enter the keyword EffectSpeedGroup into the console, type EffectSpeedGroup or the shortcut EffectSp into the command line. Description EffectSpeedGroup calls the effect layer Speed Group. For more information on effect layers see Layers in sheets – Channel sheet and fixture sheet. To change to different layers, press + Time . Syntax EffectSpeedGroup Example [Channel]> EffectSpeedGroup Jumps to the effect layer Speed Group. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 447 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.90.EffectWidth Keyword To get the EffectWidth keyword in the command line type EffectWidth or the shortcut EffectW in the command line. Description EffectWidth is a helping keyword to indicate individual EffectWidth. Syntax EffectWidth EffectWidth [Value-list] Examples To switch the encoders to adjust the EffectWidth layer type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectWidth To knocks out any EffectWidth values of programmer for the selection/feature type in the command line: [Channel]> Off EffectWidth To set the EffectWidth for the selection/feature to 50 % of the cycle type in the command line: [Channel]> EffectWidth 50 To set the EffectWidth for "pan" for the selection to 50 % of the cycle type in the command line: [Channel]> Attribute "pan" At EffectWidth 50 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 448 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.91.Empty Keyword To get the Empty keyword in the command line, type Empty or the shortcut Em in the command line. Description With the Empty keyword, you can assign the function empty to executors. Empty means that the executors is deactivated. For more information, see executors - assign a function. The Empty keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Assign Empty [Executor list] Example To deactivate executor button 101, type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Empty Executor 101 Press Please . Executor 101 is deactivated. The function empty is assigned. Deactivated executor indicated by the empty executor function field © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 449 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.92.EndIf Keyword To get the EndIf keyword in the command line type EndIf or the shorcut En in the command line. Description EndIf is a helping keyword to indicate the end of an If statement. For more information see If keyword. The EndIf keyword enables If statements to be entered in the middle of a syntax. Upon processing, the If statement is moved to the end of the syntax, and is used as a filter/condition. This enables If syntax to be used in conjunction with pool items. Syntax [function] If [object condition/filter] EndIf [object] Example To create preset 1.1 only for group 5 type in the command line: Store If Group 5 EndIf Preset 1.1 Store Preset 1.1 If Group 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 450 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.93.EndSession Keyword To get the EndSession keyword in the command line type EndSession or the shortcut EndS in the command line. Description EndSession is a function keyword to end a session for all session members. The EndSession keyword disconnects all linked devices in the session. It is not possible to join an ended session again. Syntax EndSession / [noconfirm] Options To get a list of all available options to the EndSession keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line [Channel]> EndSession /? The EndSession keyword has the following options. Option noconfirm Shortcut nc Option Value no option value Description Suppresses confirmation pop-up. Examples To end the session for all session members with a confirmation pop-up type in the command line: [Channel]> EndSession To end the session directly without a confirmation pop-up type in the command line: [Channel]> EndSession /noconfirm © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 451 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.94.Escape keyword Important: The keyword Escape is only used within a macro. To cancel commands that have not been executed, press Esc . For more information see the key Esc. To enter the keyword into the console, type Escape or the shortcut Es into the command line. Description The keyword Escape closes modal dialogs within a macro. Syntax Escape © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 452 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.95.ExecButton1 Keyword To get the ExecButton1 keyword in the command line type ExecButton1 in the command line. Description ExecButton1 is an object keyword for the first button of an executor. If you apply a function or reference a property not supported by the ExecButton1 object, the command will be passed on to the parent Executor object. Hint: For Fader Executors, the buttons are numbered from the bottom and upwards; 1 is right below fader, 2 is right above fader, 3 is on the top. Syntax ExecButton1 [Executor] ExecButton1 [Page].[Executor] ExecButton1 [Pagepool].[Page].[Executor] Examples To assign the toggle function to the first button of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Toggle At ExecButton1 5 To delete executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete ExecButton1 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 453 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.96.ExecButton2 Keyword To get the ExecButton2 keyword in the command line type ExecButton2 in the command line. Description ExecButton2 is an object keyword for the second button of an executor. If you apply a function or reference a property not supported by the ExecButton2 object, the command will be passed on to the parent Executor object. Hint: For Fader Executors, the buttons are numbered from the bottom and upwards; 1 is right below fader, 2 is right above fader, 3 is on the top. Syntax ExecButton2 [Executor] ExecButton2 [Page].[Executor] ExecButton2 [Pagepool].[Page].[Executor] Examples To assign the toggle function to the second button of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Toggle At ExecButton2 5 To delete executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete ExecButton2 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 454 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.97.ExecButton3 Keyword To get the ExecButton3 keyword in the command line type ExecButton3 in the command line. Description ExecButton3 is an object keyword for the third button of an executor. If you apply a function or reference a property not supported by the ExecButton3 object, the command will be passed on to the parent Executor object. Hint: For Fader Executors, the buttons are numbered from the bottom and upwards; 1 is right below fader, 2 is right above fader, 3 is on the top. Syntax ExecButton3 [Executor] ExecButton3 [Page].[Executor] ExecButton3 [Pagepool].[Page].[Executor] Examples To assign the toggle function to the third button of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Toggle At ExecButton 3 5 To delete executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete ExecButton 3 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 455 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.98.Executor Keyword To get the Executor keyword in the command line press Exec . You can also type Executor or the shortcut Ex directly in the command line. Description Executor is an object keyword acting as a control handle for other objects. The default function for Executor objects is SelFix. This means that calling executors without any function specified selects the fixtures of the executor in programmer. If you apply a function or reference a property not supported by the Executor object, the command will be passed on its child: Button/fader or the object assigned to the executor. Syntax Executor [ID] Executor [Page].[ID] Executor [Pagepool].[Page].[ID] Assign Executor [ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameters via command line. Parameter AutoFix AutoStart AutoStomp AutoStop BreakingGo Chaser Parameter Description Value Assigns if auto fix is on or off. "on", "off" Page changes will not affect the executor while it is on. Assigns if auto start is on or off. "on", "off" Executor will turn on as soon as the fader is above zero. Assigns if auto stomp is on or off. "on", "off" Effects from other executors do not affect values in this executor. Assigns if auto stop is on or off. "on", "off" Executor will turn off as soon as the fader reaches zero (ignores off-time). Assigns if Loop Breaking Go is on or off. For more "on", "off" information see Looping Cues. "on", "off" Assigns if the executor is a chaser or not. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 456 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Parameter Description Value on = AB XFade off = Split XFade Crossfade "on", "off" Assigns if the executor is an AB XFade or a Split XFade. For more information see Advanced executor functionality Executor options. Assigns if CMD (= command) disable is on or off. For more CmdDisable "on", "off" information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. EffectSpeed "on", "off" Assigns if "Link Effect To Rate" is on or off. Assigns if ignore exec time is on or off. For more IgnoreExecTime "on", "off" information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns if kill protect is on or off. For more information see KillProtect "on", "off" Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns the action that is executed if the master fader is "on", "off", MasterGo above zero. For more information see Common executor "go", "top" options. Assigns if MIB always is on or off. For more information see MIBAlways "on", "off" Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns if MIB never is on or off. For more information see MIBNever "on", "off" Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. e.g. "3" (= OffTime 3 Assigns executor off time in seconds. seconds) Assigns if off on overwritten is on or off. OoO "on", "off" For more information see Executors - Common executor options. "1 - 50" Assigns the executor to the specified playback master. For PlaybackMaster 0 = No more information see Advanced executor functionality Playback special masters - playback masters. Master Assigns if Auto Prepos is on or off. For more information Prepos "on", "off" see Advanced executor functionality - executor options. Parameter © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 457 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Parameter Priority RateMaster Restart SoftLTP Speed Speedmaster Parameter Value "super" or 0 "swap" or 2 "htp" or 3 "high" or 4 "ltp" or 5 "low" or 6 0 - 16, 0 = Rate Individual "First" "Current" "Next" "on", "off" "Mul2" "Mul4" "Mul8" "Mul16" "Mul32" "Normal" "Div2" "Div4" "Div8" "Div16" "Div32" 0 - 16, 0 = Speed individual SwopProtect "on", "off" TriggerIsGo "on", "off" Width 1-5 Wrap "on", "off" Description Assigns the executor priority. For more information see Cues and sequences - Playing back cues. Assigns the rate master. For more information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns the restart mode. For more information see Common executor options. Assigns if soft LTP is on or off. For more information see Cues and sequences - Playing back cues. Assigns the speed factor. For more information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns the speed master. For more information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns if swop protect is on or off. For more information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns if trigger is go is on or not. For more information see Advanced executor functionality - Executor options. Assigns the width of the executor. For more information see Executors - Assign a function - Change the Width of Executors. Assigns if Wrap Around is on or off. For more information see What is tracking. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 458 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Examples To remove the fifth executor on the current page type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete Executor 5 To set the fader of executor 5 to 50 % type in the command line: [Channel]> Executor 5 At 50 To delete cue 3 of the sequence assigned to executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete Cue 3 Executor 5 To select the second executor on page 4 type in the command line: [Channel]> Select Executor 4.2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 459 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.99.Exit keyword To enter the keyword Exit into the console, type Exit or the shortcut Exi into the command line. Description Exit disconnects the connection to Telnet. For more information see the keyword Telnet. Syntax Exit Example [Channel]> Exit Disconnects Telnet. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 460 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.100.Export Keyword To get the Export keyword in the command line type Export or the shortcut Exp in the command line. Description Export is a function keyword to transfer data from the show file to the libraries in the console. If no filename is entered to the keyword, one .xml file will be created for each object in object list, with file names generated based on object name/properties. The Export keyword writes to the current selected hard drive. For export to an USB stick select it at the Backup Menu, or type "selectdrive 4" in the command line - 4 is for the first USB stick. For commonly exported object types, the files will be organized in folders according to object type, e.g. Effectfolder, Macro-folder, FixtureType (library-folder). Object types without a dedicated folder will be placed in the importexport folder. Syntax Export [Object-list] ["filename"] / [option] = [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the Export keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line: [Channel]> Export /? The Export keyword has the following options. Option Shortcut Option Value condition cnd See messages keyword. noconfirm nc no option value overwrite o no option value path p for example "/data/ma/actual/gma2/ImportExport" schema not no option value available Description See messages keyword. Suppress the confirmation popup. Replaces existing file in the folder. Specifies the path for the to be exported file. Exports MA .xml schema definition. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 461 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Shortcut Option Value html, csv, default (= xml with style sheet for timecode, messages, sequence, fixture, layer, and layers) style transform t no option value Description Specifies the style of the exported file. Transforms the file into the defined style. Examples To create an .xml file labeled mymacros in the macro folder with macro 1 thru 10, type in the command line: [Channel]> Export Macro 1 Thru 10 "MyMacros" To create an .xml file labeled based on Effectname in the effect directory with effect 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> Export Effect 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 462 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.101.Extract Keyword To get the extract keyword in the command line type Extract or the shortcut Ext in the command line. Description Extract is a function that applies hard values in the programmer and breaks any referenced links. The Extract function used the same syntax as the At keyword. For more information see At keyword. Extract works recursively and breaks references also in subobjects, for example, a preset in a cue in an extracted sequence. Extract will obey the At filter and the program time. Syntax Extract [Object list] Examples To set the fixture selection to the preset "drummer". later changes to preset "drummer" will update the values, type in the command line: [Channel]> At Preset "drummer" To set the fixture selection to hard values of preset "drummer". later changes to preset "drummer" will not affect the values, type in the command line: [Channel]> Extract Preset "drummer" To break the references (converts attributes to hard values in the programmer) for the fixture selection type in the command line: [Channel]> Extract Selection To set the fixture selection to the hard values of Cue 4 type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 463 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Extract Cue 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 464 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.102.Fade Keyword To get the Fade keyword in the command line press Time . Another way is to type Fade or the shortcut Fa directly in the command line. Description Fade is a helping keyword to indicate fade times. As a helping keyword for playback functions (for example Goto), this keyword sets the time used to execute the function. As a helping keyword for programming functions (for example Store), this keyword sets the fade time of an object. Used as a starting keyword, Fade applies individual timing in the programmer for the current selection and attributes. Hint: As long as the command line starts with a function, the fade keyword and value may appear anywhere in the command line. Syntax Fade [Value-list] Examples To crossfade to cue 3 in the selected executor in 4 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> Goto Cue 3 Fade 4 To create cue 3 in the selected executor and set its fade time to 4 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> Store Cue 3 Fade 4 To set the fade time of cue 2 in the selected executor to 3 seconds type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Fade 3 Cue 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 465 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To set the individual fade time of 2 seconds to the current selection/attributes type in the command line: [Channel]> Fade 2 To set the fixture selection to 50 % and give them an individual fade time of 2 seconds to the selected attributes type in the command line: [Channel]> At 50 Fade 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 466 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.103.FadePath Keyword To get the FadePath keyword in the command line type FadePath or the shortcut FadeP in the command line. Description FadePath is an object type representing the possible transition paths of a cue part. Syntax FadePath [ID] Example To assign a high-low fadepath to the main part of cue 4 type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign FadePath 7 At Cue 4 Part 0 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 467 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.104.Fader Keyword To get the Fader keyword in the command line type Fader in the command line. Description Fader is an object keyword representing the fader of an executor. If you apply a function or reference a property not supported by the fader object, the command will be passed on to the parent executor object. Hint: Even though button executors do not have a physical fader, they still have a virtual fader assigned as a master. Syntax Fader [Executor] Fader [Page].[Executor] Fader [Pagepool].[Page].[Executor] Examples To assign the speed functionality to the fader of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Speed At Fader 5 To set the level/position of fader of executor 5 to 50 % type in the command line: [Channel]> Fader 5 At 50 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 468 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.105.FaderPage Keyword To get the FaderPage keyword in the command line press Page Page Page (= FaderPage). Another way is to type FaderPage or one of the shortcuts FP or FaderP directly in the command line. Description FaderPage is an object keyword representing the fader executor part of a page. The default function for this object is Call. Calling a FaderPage changes the physical executors to that page. If you apply a function not supported by the FaderPage object, the function will be passed on to the executor child objects of the FaderPage. Syntax FaderPage [ID] FaderPage [Pagepool].[ID] Example To change the physical fader executors to page 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> FaderPage 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 469 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.106.Feature Keyword To get the Feature keyword in the command line type Feature or the shortcut Fe in the command line. Description Feature is an object keyword representing features of a fixture. The default function for features is Call. Calling features brings them to the encoders, and select them in the fixture sheet (yellow column header). Features are organized by PresetType, which means that you can also call features with the PresetType keyword. Features contains attributes, which means that you can also call attributes with the Feature keyword, using dot separated numbers. Important: The feature number may change when new fixtures and attributes are added to the show file. It is recommended to use the unique feature name, for example macros. Syntax Feature [number] Feature "Name" Feature [Feature].[Attribute] Examples [Channel]> Feature 2 Calls the second feature type in the command line. [Channel]> List feature © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 470 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Shows a current list of all feature numbers and names in the command line feedback view. [Channel]> Feature "Gobo1" Calls feature "Gobo1" type in the command line. [Channel]> Feature "Position".2 Calls the second attribute of the feature "Position" type in the command line. [Channel]> Feature $feature.2 Calls the second attribute of the current feature type in the command line. [Channel]> PresetType "gobo".2 Calls the second feature of the preset type gobo type in the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 471 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.107.Filter Keyword To execute the keyword Filter in the command line press Group Group Group (= Filter). Another way is to type Filter or the shortcut Fil directly in the command line. Description Filter is an object keyword representing attribute filter and layer filter from the filter pool. The default function for this object is Call. Calling a filter applies the filter temporary and limits the next programmer action. Selecting a filter limits all programmer actions until filter 1 is selected. For more information see worlds, filters, and masks. Syntax Filter [ID] Examples [Channel]> Filter 4 Calls filter 4 (next programmer action uses this filter). [Channel]> Select Filter 5 Selects filter 5 (all programmer actions use this filter). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 472 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.108.Fix Keyword To get the Fix keyword in the command line press Fix . You can also type Fix directly in the command line. Description Fix is a function keyword to fix objects on a page. Fix is a toggle function. This means that using Fix without any helping keyword toggles the fixing of the objects on and off. Syntax Fix [executor list] Fix On [executor list] Fix Off [executor list] Examples To fix executor 1 through 5 on the current page type in the command line: [Channel]> Fix On Executor 1 Thru 5 To toggle executor 3 from changing page, or not to changing page, type in the command line: [Channel]> Fix Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 473 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.109.Fixture Keyword To get the Fixture keyword in the command line press Fixture . Another way is to type Fixture or the shortcut F in the command line. Description Fixture is an object keyword to access fixtures with a fixture ID. The default function for fixture objects is SelFix. This means that entering fixtures without any function specified selects the fixtures. Syntax Fixture [ID] Fixture [ID].[Sub-ID] Examples To select fixture 34 type in the command line: [Channel]> Fixture 34 To select the fifth subfixture of the fixture cluster fixture 11 type in the command line: [Channel]> Fixture 11.5 To select all subfixtures of the fixture cluster fixture 11 type in the command line: [Channel]> Fixture 11 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 474 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.110.FixtureType Keyword To execute the keyword FixtureType press FixtureT into the command line. and Fixture or type FixtureType or one of the shortcuts FT or Description FixtureType is an object keyword for the fixture types in the show file. Fixture types also contain global data in presets. Important: Most edits and command line actions with the keyword FixtureType has to be done while in the Edit Setup mode. For more information, see ChangeDest keyword. Hint: Fixture types are displayed at the bottom of channel and fixture sheets. Syntax FixtureType [ID] Examples Edit Setup/Layers 4/Dimmer 2> Assign FixtureType 2 At 1 Thru 4 Assigns fixture type 2 to fixtures 1 through 4. [Channel]> Clone FixtureType 2 at 3 if Preset "Color".* Clones global color presets of fixture type 2 to fixture type 3. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 475 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.111.Flash Keyword To execute the keyword Flash press >>> >>> (= Flash). Another way is to type Flash or the shortcut Fla in the command line. Description Flash is a function used to temporary overwrite master level to full on executing objects without using times. When the Flash function is used with an executor button, the Flash On command is executed when the button is pressed and the Flash Off is executed when the button is released. If this function is used without the helping keywords On/Off, the function will toggle between on or off. If the executor is not On when this function is applied, the executor will be temporary activated with zero timing. Syntax Flash [Executor-list] Flash On [Executor-list] Flash Off [Executor-list] Examples [Channel]> Flash On Executor 1 Overwrites the master level of executor 1 to full and starts first cue. [Channel]> Flash Off Executor 1 Returns master level of executor 1 to the master fader and sets executor to off if it was not on. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 476 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.112.FlashGo keyword To execute the keyword FlashGo, type FlashGo or the shortcut FlashG into the command line. Description FlashGo executes the keyword Flash and jumps into the next cue. For more information see the keyword Flash. Syntax FlashGo [Executor-list] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword FlashGo, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> FlashGo /? The keyword FlashGo has the same options as the keyword Goto. For further information see the keyword Goto. Example [Channel]> FlashGo Executor 1 Overwrites master level temporarily and jumps into the next cue. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 477 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.113.FlashOn keyword To execute the keyword FlashOn, type FlashOn or the shortcut FlashO into the command line. Description FlashOn activates the cue and ignores the fade times and the master level. Syntax FlashOn [Executor-list] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword FlashOn, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> FlashOn /? The keyword FlashOn has the same options as the keyword Goto. For further information see the keyword Goto. Example [Channel]> FlashOn Executor 1 Activates the cue of the executor and ignores its fade times. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 478 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.114.Flip Keyword To get the Flip keyword in the command line type Flip or the shortcut Fl in the command line. Description Flip is a function keyword to access the different pan/tilt combinations that points a moving head in the same direction. Flip adds 180 degrees to the pan value of the fixtures and inverts the tilt angle. If the fixture reaches its physical end stop, the pan and tilt value will be set to the smallest possible value. Flip points the fixture in the same direction but with another pan/tilt combination. If no selection list is entered, Flip is applied to the fixture selection. If no flip number is entered, the function toggles through the different possible combinations. Syntax Flip [flip number] [selection list] Examples To set the pan and tilt of the fixture selection to the next pan/tilt combination that points in the same direction, type in the command line: [Channel]> Flip To set the pan and tilt of group 7 to the second of the pan/tilt combination that points in the same direction, type in the command line: [Channel]> Flip 2 Group 7 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 479 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.115.Form Keyword To execute the keyword Form type Form or the shortcut Fo into the command line. Description Form is an object type with shapes used for dynamic effects. Forms are used as source for effects to generate dynamic values. Hint: Forms are generated and edited in the form pool. Syntax Form [ID] Form [ID].[subID] Example [Channel]> At Form 10 Sets the first attribute of the current feature to Form 10, "Ramp Plus". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 480 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.116.Freeze Keyword Important: If the Freeze keyword is entered in the command line by pressing the Freeze key, the keyword will be directly executed. To execute the keyword Freeze directly press Freeze . Another way is to type Freeze or the shortcut Fre directly into the command line. Description Important: If Freeze is on, programmer values have a higher priority as playbacks. Only executor priority "Super" has a higher priority than Freeze. Freeze is function keyword to change the priority of the programmer. Freeze is a toggle function. This means that entering Freeze without any helping keyword toggles the Freezemode on/off. Syntax Freeze Freeze On Freeze Off Example [Channel]> Freeze On Turns the freeze mode on. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 481 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.117.Full Keyword Important: If you enter the Full keyword in the command line by pressing the Full key, the keyword will be directly executed. To get the Full keyword in the command line press Full . The Full keyword will be directly executed. Another way is to type Full or the shortcut Fu directly in the command line. Description Full is an function keyword to set the dimmer values to 100 %. The default function is At. This means that entering Full without any object sets the dimmer attributes of the current selection to 100 %. Syntax Full Example To select channel 53 and set the dimmer to 100 % type in the command line: [Channel]> Channel 53 Full © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 482 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.118.FullHighlight keyword To execute the keyword FullHighlight, press + Full or press Full twice. It is also possible to type Fullhighlight or the shortcut FullH into the command line. Description Fullhighlight takes all highlight values of the fixtures that are currently selected into the programmer. Syntax Fullhighlight Example [Channel]> Fullhighlight Takes the highlight values actively into the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 483 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.119.Gel keyword To get the Gel keyword in the command line press Preset Preset Preset . Another way is to type Gel or the shortcut Ge into the command line. Description The keyword gel provides the opportunity to edit or apply swatch book colors via command line. Syntax Gel "Swatch name"."Gel Name" Gel "Swatch name"."Key" Gel [Swatch Id].[Gel Id] Gel [Swatch Id] Gel "Swatch name" Examples [Channel]> At Gel "Lee"."Mauve" Sets the color of the selected fixtures to Lee´s color Mauve. [Channel]> At Gel "Lee". "126" Sets the color of the selected fixtures to Lee´s key 126 in swatch book. [Channel]> At Gel 7.44 Sets the color of the selected fixtures to the 44th color of the seventh swatch book. [Channel]> Export Gel 7 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 484 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Exports the "Lee" swatch book. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 485 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.120.Go Keyword To get the Go keyword in the command line press Go . Another way is to type Go in the command line. Description Go is a function keyword to activate the next step of an executing object. If the target object have steps, it will go to the next step. If the object is step-less it will start running forward. Syntax Go [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available options to the Go keyword type in the command line: [Channel]> Go /? The Go keyword has the following options: cue_mode cm Normal Option Value Shortcut N cue_mode cm Assert A cue_mode cm XAssert XA cue_mode cm Release R userprofile upr "Name of the user profile", e.g. "Klaus" not available Option Option Value Shortcut Option Description Normal Go mode. Go with assert in the original timing. Go with assert in the cuetiming of current cue. Go finishes the fade-in and switches the executor off. Normal Go mode with specified user profile. Examples To go to the next step of executor 3 type in the command line: [Channel]> Go Executor 3 To start macro 2 type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 486 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Go Macro 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 487 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.121.GoBack Keyword To get the GoBack keyword in the command line press Go - . Another way is to type GoBack or the shortcut GoB in the command line. Description GoBack is a function keyword to activate previous step of an executing object. If the target object has steps, it will go to the previous step. If the object is stepless, it will start running backwards. Set the default fade time for GoBack in the Setup I Show I Playback & MIB Timing I GoBack. Syntax GoBack [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available options to the GoBack keyword type in the command line: [Channel]> GoBack /? The GoBack keyword has the following options: cue_mode cm Normal Option Value Shortcut N cue_mode cm Assert A cue_mode cm XAssert XA cue_mode cm Release R userprofile upr "Name of the user profile", e.g. "Klaus" not available Option Option Value Shortcut Option Description Normal GoBack mode. GoBack with assert in the original timing. GoBack with assert in the cuetiming of current cue. GoBack finishes the fade-in and switches the executor off. Normal GoBack mode with specified user profile. Example To go to the previous step of executor 3 type in the command line: [Channel]> GoBack Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 488 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 489 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.122.Goto Keyword To get the Goto keyword in the command line press Goto . Another way is to type Goto or the shortcut Got in the command line. Description Goto is a function keyword to jump in a list. Set the fade time for Goto in the Setup I Show I Playback & MIB Timing I Goto. Syntax Goto [Cue object] [Executor object] / [Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available options to the Goto keyword type in the command line: [Channel]> Goto /? The Goto keyword has the following options: cue_mode cm Normal Option Value Shortcut N cue_mode cm Assert A cue_mode cm XAssert XA cue_mode cm Release R userprofile upr "Name of the user profile", e.g. "Klaus" not available Option Option Value Shortcut Option Description Normal Goto mode. Goto with assert in the original timing. Goto with assert in the cuetiming of current cue. Goto finishes the fade-in and switches the executor off. Normal Goto mode with specified user profile. Examples To go to cue 3 of the selected executor type in the command line: [Channel]> Goto Cue 3 To go to cue 5 of executor 4 type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 490 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Goto Cue 5 Executor 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 491 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.123.Group Keyword To get the Group keyword into the command line, press Group or type Group or the shortcut G in the command line. Description Group is an object type that contains a collection of fixtures and a selection sequence. The default function for the group keyword is SelFix. This means that calling groups without any function specified selects the fixtures of the group. For more information see SelFix keyword. Syntax Group [ID] Example [Channel]> Group 3 Selects the fixtures stored in group 3. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 492 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.124.HalfRate Keyword To get the HalfRate keyword in the command line type HalfRate or the shortcut HalfR in the command line. Description HalfRate is a function keyword to divide the current rate by 2. Syntax HalfRate [Object-list] Example To halves the rate of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> HalfRate Executor 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 493 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.125.HalfSpeed Keyword To get the HalfSpeed keyword in the command line type HalfSpeed or the shortcut Ha in the command line. Description HalfSpeed is a function keyword to divide the current speed by 2. Syntax HalfSpeed [Object-list] Example To halves the speed of executor 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> HalfSpeed Executor 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 494 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.126.Help Keyword To get the Help keyword in the command line press Help . Another way is to type Help or the shortcut H directly in the command line. Description Help is a function keyword to open the help window. Syntax Help Help [keyword] Help "Search text" Examples To open the help window type in the command line: [Channel]> Help To open the help to the Fixture keyword type in the command line: [Channel]> Help Fixture © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 495 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.127.Highlight Keyword Important: If you enter the Highlight keyword in the command line by pressing the Highlt key, the keyword will be directly executed. To get the Highlight keyword in the command line press Highlt . The Highlight keyword will be directly executed. Another way is to type Highlight or the shortcut Hi directly in the command line. Description Highlight is a function to apply the defined highlight values on selected fixtures. Highlight is a toggle function. This means entering Highlight without a helping keyword toggles the Highlight mode on or off. If Highlight is on the highlight icon is displayed in the command line. For more information see icons. For more information see Highlight key. Syntax Highlight Highlight On Highlight Off Examples To turn on the highlight mode type in the command line: [Channel]> Highlight On © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 496 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.128.IdentifyFaderModule keyword To execute the keyword, type IdentifyFaderModule or the shortcut Id. Description IdentifyFaderModule defines which module corresponds to which wing. That is, the wing starts to flash. The flashing automatically stops after approximately 10 seconds. Syntax IdentifyFaderModule [Number] Example [Channel]> IdentifyFaderModule 1 Wing 1 starts to flash. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 497 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.129.If Keyword To get the If keyword into the command line as a starting function, press If If If If (= If). To get the If keyword into the command line as a helping keyword, press If or type If or the shortcut I in the command line. Description The If keyword as a function keyword deselects fixtures not in the entered selection list. As a helping keyword keyword to the Clone function, If sets the scope of the cloning. For more information see clone keyword and clone or replace fixtures. As a helping keyword keyword to other operational functions, If sets a filter for the operation. To end an if statement in the middle of a longer syntax, use the EndIf keyword. Syntax If [Selection-list] Clone [Selection-list] At [Selection-list] If [Object-list] [General syntax] If [Object-list] Examples To deselect fixtures not in group 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> If Group 5 To select fixtures which are a part of group 3 and group 5 type in the command line: [Channel]> Group 3 If Group 5 To delete channel 4 from cue 3 type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete Cue 3 If Channel 4 To delete fixture 4 and attribute "pan" from cue 3 type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 498 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Delete Cue 3 If Fixture 4 Attribute "pan" To delete attribute "pan" of fixture 4 from cue 3 type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete Cue 3 If Fixture 4 If Attribute "pan" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 499 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.130.IfActive Keyword To get the IfActive keyword in the command line press If If (= IfActive). Another way is to type IfActive or the shortcut IfA in the command line. Description IfActive is a function keyword to select fixtures with active values in the programmer. If no filter is entered IfActive selects all fixtures with active values in programmer. If a filter is entered, IfActive selects fixtures which are in the filter and have active values in programmer. Syntax IfActive IfActive [filter] Examples To select all fixtures with active values in the programmer type in the command line: [Channel]> IfActive To select only fixtures of group 5 which have active values in programmer type in the command line: [Channel]> IfActive Group 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 500 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.131.IfOutput Keyword To get the IfOutput keyword in the command line press If . Another way is to type IfOutput or the shortcut IfO directly in the command line. Description IfOutput is a function keyword to select fixtures based on their current output. IfOutput selects fixtures that have values originating from the object list, or with dimmer attribute values, fade or delay times within the range of the value list. If no argument is entered, the fixtures with a dimmer value above zero will be selected. Syntax IfOutput IfOutput [Object-list] IfOutput At [Value-list] IfOutput At Fade [Value-list] IfOutput At Delay [Value-list] Examples To select all fixtures with a dimmer value above zero type in the command line: [Channel]> IfOutput To select all fixtures currently using the color preset "Red" type in the command line: [Channel]> IfOutput Preset "color"."Red" To select all fixtures with dimmer value between 50 % and 75 % type in the command line: [Channel]> IfOutput At 50 Thru 75 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 501 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.132.IfProg Keyword To get the IfProg keyword in the command line press If If If (= IfProg). Another way is to type IfProg or IfP in the command line. Description IfProg is a function keyword to select fixtures with values in the programmer. If no filter is entered, IfProg selects all fixtures with values in programmer. If a filter is entered, IfProg selects the fixtures which are in the filter and have values in programmer. Syntax IfProg IfProg [filter] Examples To select all fixtures with values in the programmer type in the command line. [Channel]> IfProg To select only the fixtures of group 5 which have values in programmer type in the command line: [Channel]> IfProg Group 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 502 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.133.Image keyword To execute the keyword, type Image or the shortcut Ima into the command line. Description The keyword Image is an object keyword. It is used to handle images via command line. It can be used in bitmap fixtures. Syntax Image [ID] [Function] Image [ID] Examples [Channel}> Edit Image 14 Opens the image viewer to edit image 14. [Channel]> At Image 16 Takes the images into the programmer if a bitmap fixture is selected. [Channel]> Delete Image 14 Deletes the image 14 in the image pool. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 503 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.134.Import Keyword To get the Import keyword in the command line type Import or the shortcut Im in the command line. Description Import is a function keyword to bring data from external .xml and .xmlp libraries into the show file. The Import command loads data into the current command line destination after the existing objects, if no destination object is given. The Import command will look for files on the currently selected hard-drive. Important: Importing FixtureTypes is only allowed in the Edit Setup. Syntax Import "filename" [destination-object] / [option] = [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the Import keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line [Channel]> Import /? The Import keyword has the following options. Option Shortcut Option Value noconfirm nc quiet q path p Description Suppresses the no option value confirmation pop-up of the import. Suppresses the feedback of the import in the no option value command line feedback window. for example Specifies the path for the "/data/ma/actual/gma2/importexport" to be imported file. Examples To import a generic dimmer as a new fixture type in the show file type in the command line: EditSetup/FixtureTypes 3> Import "generic@dimmer@00" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 504 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To import macros from the file MyMacros.xml after the last used macro ID type in the command line: Macros/Global 1> Import "MyMacros" To import macros from files with names starting with "macr" type in the command line: Macros/Global 1> Import "macr*" To import the effect MyCoolEffect.xml as Effect 101 type in the command line: [Channel]> Import "MyCoolEffect" Effect 101 To import "MyMacro" as Macro 20 from the importexport folder of a gma2 console type in the command line: [Channel]> Import "MyMacro" At Macro 20 /path = "/data/ma/actual/gma2/importexport" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 505 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.135.Info Keyword To get the Info keyword in the command line type Info or the shortcut In in the command line. Description Info is a function keyword to add or display user info to an object. If text is included to the command, this will be set as the info for the objects. If no text is included to the command, existing info will be displayed in the Info window and the Commandline Feedback window. Syntax Info [Object-list] "Some info to add" Info [Object-list] Examples To add a info to group 3 type in the command line: Info Group 3 "these fixtures are in the backtruss" To get the info of group 3 displayed in the command line feedback window type in the command line: Info Group 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 506 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.136.Insert Keyword To get the Insert keyword in the command line press Move Move Move (= Insert). You can also type Insert or the shortcut Ins in the command line. Description The Insert keyword is a function keyword to insert pool objects between two other already taken pool objects. The following pool objects will be moved to the next empty destination. When the Insert keyword is in the command line by pressing Move Move Move , you can insert pool objects by drag and drop. Syntax Insert [Object-list] At [Destination Start-ID] Example To insert Group 5 between Group 8 and 9, type in the command line: [Channel]> Insert Group 5 At 9 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 507 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.137.Interleave keyword To execute the keyword Interleave, type Interleave or the shortcut Int into the command line. Description Interleave is used to set ranges in the MAtricks or to create a virtual array of the fixtures selected. The keyword Interleave is a synonym for the keyword MAtricksInterleave. For more information see MAtricksInterleave. Syntax Interleave [Number] Example [Channel]> Interleave 10 If you selected from fixture 11 to 100, pressing the key Next selects fixture 11, 21, 31 etc. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 508 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.138.Invert Keyword To enter the Invert keyword into the command line, type Invert or the shortcut Inv into the command line. Description Invert is a function to invert the selection status of fixtures. Invert acts in the fixtures that were selected. If a fixture is selected, using this keyword deselects the fixtures. If a fixture was not selected, using the keyword Invert selects the fixtures. If no selection list is given, Invert functions on all fixtures and channels. Syntax Invert [Selection-list] Example If fixtures 1, 3 and 5 were already selected, Invert selects fixtures 2, 4 and 6. [Channel]> Invert Fixture 1 Thru 6 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 509 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.139.InviteStation Keyword To get the InviteStation keyword in the command line type InviteStation or one of the shortcuts IS or Invi in the command line. Description InviteStation is a function keyword to bring other stations into the session. InviteStation asks stations on the list to join the session. If they accept the invitation, your show file will be uploaded to them and they will become part of the session. Syntax InviteStation [Station-list] Examples To invite the station with IP-address 192.168.0.10 type in the command line: [Channel]> InviteStation 192.168.0.10 To invite the station with Host ID 10 on your network type in the command line: [Channel]> InviteStation 10 To invite all stations on your network type in the command line: [Channel]> InviteStation Thru © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 510 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.140.Item3D keyword To enter the keyword into the command line, type Item3D or the shortcut It into the command line. Description Item3D is an object keyword used to modify 3D objects in grandMA 3D. For more information see 3D objects. Syntax [Assign] Item3D [ID] [Delete] Item3D [ID] Example [Channel]> Delete Item3D Thru Deletes all unused 3D objects in a show. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 511 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.141.JoinSession Keyword To get the JoinSession keyword in the command line type JoinSession or one of the shortcuts J or JS in the command line. Description JoinSession is a function used to join or create a session. If no option is given the recent entered settings in the MA Network Control will be used. Syntax JoinSession [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the JoinSession keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> JoinSession /? The JoinSession keyword has the following options: Option Option Shortcut Option Value Examples Description password pw sessionnumber s sessionname n "1234" "1" "FOH" Enters the session password. Enters the session number. Enters the session name. Example To join the session called FOH with the session name and the password 1235 type in the command line: [Channel]> JoinSession 1 "FOH" /pw = "1235" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 512 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.142.Kill Keyword To get the Kill keyword in the command line press Top Top (= Kill). You can also type Kill or the shortcut K in the command line. Description Kill is a Go+ function that additionally will turn off all other executor objects. Kill works as an ordinary Go+ function on the executors it is applied, but will additionally send an Off command to all other executors - if they are not protected by kill protect - function (see Assign executor menu). Syntax Kill [Executor-list] /[Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available options to the Kill keyword type in the command line: [Channel]> Kill /? The Kill keyword has the following options: cue_mode cm Normal Option Value Shortcut N cue_mode cm Assert A cue_mode cm XAssert XA cue_mode cm Release R userprofile upr "Name of the user profile", e.g. "Klaus" not available Option Option Value Shortcut Option Description Normal Kill mode. Kill with assert in the original timing. Kill with assert in the cuetiming of current cue. Kill finishes the fade-in and switches the executor off. Normal Kill mode with specified user profile. Example To go to next cue on executor 1 and turn off other executors type in the command line: [Channel]> Kill Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 513 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.143.Label Keyword To get the Label keyword in the command line press Assign Assign (= Label). You can also type Label or the shortcut L in the command line. Description Label is a function used to give names to objects. If multiple objects are labeled, and the name contains a free-standing number, the number will be enumerated for each object. If no name is given, you will be prompted with a dialog to enter the name. Syntax Label [Object-list] "Name" For more information on quotes see Special Characters - Quotes. Examples To label group 4 as "All Studiocolors" type in the command line: [Channel]> Label Group 3 "All Studiocolors" To label Fixture 1 thru 10 as "Mac700 1", "Mac700 2" an so on type in the command line: [Channel]> Label Fixture 1 Thru 10 "Mac700 1" To rename the color-preset "Red" to "Dark Red" type in the command line: [Channel]> Label Preset "color"."Red" "Dark Red" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 514 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.144.Layer Keyword To get the Layer keyword in the command line type Layer or the shortcut Laye in it. Description Layer is a function keyword to change the working layer of the attribute encoders. The layer can be called by its name or by its layer ID (1-9). Layer ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Layer Name Value Fade Delay EffectForm EffectSpeed EffectSpeedgroup EffectLow EffectHigh EffectPhase EffectWidth EffectFade EffectDelay EffectAttack EffectDecay EffectID Syntax Layer [layer ID] Layer [layer name] Examples To switch the encoder to adjust delaytime layer type in the command line: [Channel]> Layer 3 To switch the encoders to adjust EffectForm layer type in the command line: [Channel]> Layer EffectForm © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 515 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 516 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.145.Layout Keyword To get the Layout keyword in the command line press + Group (= Layout). You can also type Layout or the shortcut Lay in the command line. Description Layout is an object-type representing a layout of fixtures and other objects. The default function for Layout objects is Select. This means that calling Layouts without any function specified selects the Layout, and any Layout Views with Link Selected enabled shows this Layout. Syntax Layout [ID] Examples To select Layout 3 for display in the Layout View, type in the command line: [Channel]> Layout 3 To create Layout 5 and add the fixture selection to this layout, type in the command line: [Channel]> Store Layout 5 To add Group 5 as a button in Layout 4, type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Group 5 Layout 4 To add the selected bitmap effect to Layout 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> At Layout 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 517 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.146.Learn Keyword This page describes the syntax and how to use the learn command. To go to the learn command press Learn on the console. Learn is in the command line now. [Channel]> Learn Description With the learn command you set the speed by tapping for: Chaser Effects Master rate Master speed Syntax Learn [Object-list] Examples Here are a few examples how you can use the learn command. Example 1 Let´s assume you will set the speed of a chaser. Press and hold Learn and press the executor button of the chaser several times in that speed you like to have it. The chaser learns the speed of the tapping of the executor button. Example 2 Let´s assume you will set the speed of an effect. Press and hold Learn and press the executor button of the effect several times in that speed you like to have it. The effect learns the speed of the tapping of the executor button. Example 3 Let´s assume you will set the speed of the master rate. Press and hold Learn and press the executor button of the master rate several times in that speed you like to have it. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 518 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The master rate learns the speed of the tapping of the executor button. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 519 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.147.LeaveSession Keyword To get the LeaveSession keyword in the command line, type LeaveSession or one of the shortcuts LS or Le in the command line. Description The LeaveSession keyword is a function keyword to leave the current session. Syntax LeaveSession Example To leave the current session, type in the command line: [Channel]> LeaveSession © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 520 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.148.List Keyword To get the List keyword into the command line, press and hold + List . You can also type List or the shortcut Li in the command line. Description The List keyword displays show data in the command line feedback window. You can list any object, for example: Cues of the selected executor Groups Presets Messages If the list does not specify any type of object, the data from the current destination will be displayed. The List keyword is a function keyword. Syntax List [Object-list] / [Option]= [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available option to the List keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> List /? Option Shortcut Option Option Value Description condition cnd See Messages command. filename f Name of file The option condition is only valid in combination with the Messages command. Creates a csv file in the reports folder with the List data. Examples To list all cues of the selected executor in the command line feedback window type in the command line: [Channel]> List Cue To list the first ten groups of the groups pool in the command line feedback window type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 521 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> List Group Thru 10 To list all attribute names existing in the show file in the command line feedback window type in the command line: [Channel]> List Attribute To list all color presets starting with the letter m in the command line feedback window type in the command line: [Channel]>List Preset "color"."m*" - or [Channel]>List Preset 4. "m*" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 522 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.149.ListEffectLibrary Keyword To get the ListEffectLibrary keyword in the command line, type ListEffectLibrary or the shortcut ListEf in the command line. Description The ListEffectLibrary is a function keyword to displays the .xml files in effects folder of the selected drive in the command line feedback window. To change the drive, see SelectDrive keyword. Syntax ListEffectLibrary [filter] Example To list all effect .xml files starting with My, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListEffectLibrary "My*" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 523 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.150.ListFaderModules Keyword To get the ListFaderModules keyword in the command line, type ListFaderModules or the shortcut ListF in the command line. Description The ListFaderModules keyword is a function keyword to display all available internal and external wings (= executor modules) in the command line feedback window. Syntax ListFaderModules Example To get all available internal and external wings displayed in the command line feedback window, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListFaderModules © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 524 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.151.ListLibrary Keyword To get the ListLibrary keyword in the command line, type ListLibrary or the shortcut ListL in the command line. Description The ListLirbrary keyword is a function keyword to display the fixture type library in the command line feedback window. Syntax ListLibrary [filter] Example To get all fixture types from the fixture type library displayed in the command line feedback window starting with Martin, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListLibrary "Martin*" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 525 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.152.ListMacroLibrary Keyword To get the ListMacroLibrary keyword in the command line, type ListMacroLibrary or the shortcut ListM in the command line. Description The ListMacroLibrary is a function keyword to displays the .xml files in macro folder of the selected drive in the command line feedback window. To change the drive, see SelectDrive keyword. Syntax ListMacroLibrary [filter] Example To list all macro .xml files starting with My, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListMacroLibrary "My*" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 526 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.153.ListOops Keyword To get the ListOops keyword in the command line, type ListOops or the shortcut ListO in the command line. Description The ListOops keyword is a function keyword to get the Oops list in the command line feedback window displayed. The Oops list displays all oopsable actions. Syntax ListOops Example To get all oopsable actions in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListOops © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 527 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.154.ListOwner Keyword To enter the keyword ListOwner into the console, type ListOwner or the shortcut ListOw into the command line. Description ListOwner is used as a troubleshooting keyword in case of a multi user access conflict. If a multi user access conflict occurs, execute the ListOwner keyword. The ListOwner keyword lists the users currently editing the same in a session and hence causing the conflict. Syntax ListOwner Example [Channel]> ListOwner The command feedback displays all the owners which to show the reason for the conflict. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 528 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.155.ListPluginLibrary Keyword To get the ListPluginLibrary keyword in the command line type ListPluginLibrary or the shortcut ListP in the command line. Description The ListPluginLibrary is a function keyword to displays the .xml files in the plugins folder of the selected drive in the command line feedback window. To change the drive, see SelectDrive keyword. Syntax ListPluginLibrary [filter] Example To list all plugin .xml files starting with My, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListPluginLibrary "My*" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 529 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.156.ListShows Keyword To get the ListShows keyword in the command line, type ListShows or the shortcut ListS in the command line. Description The ListShows keyword is a function keyword to display the show files on the selected drive in the Command Line Feedback window. Syntax ListShows [Filter] Examples To get all show files in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListShows To get all show files beginning with f in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListShows f* © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 530 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.157.ListUpdate Keyword Important: If you enter the ListUpdate keyword in the console, by press and hold + Update , the keyword will be directly executed. You can also use the command line along with the keyboard and type the word ListUpdate in. To get the ListUpdate keyword in the command line, press and hold + Update . You can also type ListUpdate one of the shortcut LU or ListUp in the command line. Description The ListUpdate keyword is a function keyword to get the objects in the command line displayed that can be updated. Hint: Another way to get the objects displayed that can be updated is press Update if the Update key is highlighted. Syntax ListUpdate Example To get the objects displays that can be updated if a sequence is running and you have values in the programmer, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListUpdate © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 531 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.158.ListUserVar Keyword To get the ListUserVar keyword in the command line, type ListUserVar or the shortcut ListUs in the command line. Description The ListUserVar keyword is a function keyword to get the user specific variables and their values in the Command Line Feedback window displayed. Syntax ListUserVar [Filter] Examples To get all user specific variables in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListUserVar To get all user specific variables beginning with f in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListUserVar f* © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 532 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.159.ListVar Keyword To get the ListVar keyword in the command line, type ListVar or the shortcut ListV in the command line. Description The ListVar keyword is a function keyword to get the variables and their values in the Command Line Feedback window displayed. Syntax ListVar [Filter] Examples To get all variables in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListVar To get all variables beginning with f in the command line feedback window displayed, type in the command line: [Channel]> ListVar f* © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 533 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.160.Load Keyword To get the Load keyword into the command line, press Goto Goto or type Load in the command line. Description The load keyword is a function keyword used to prepare an executor to jump to another cue rather than jumping to the next cue when a Go+ is performed on the executor. Syntax Load [Cue object] [Executor object] Example To load cue 3 on the selected executor, type in the command line: [Channel]> Load Cue 3 Cue 3 is loaded. To indicate that a cue is loaded, a red Loaded 3 (= Cue 3) starts flashing. Selected executor - cue 3 loaded To load cue 5 on executor 4, type in the command line: [Channel]> Load Cue 5 Executor 4 To select from a list which cue to load on executor 3, type in the command line: [Channel]> Load Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 534 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.161.LoadNext To execute the keyword LoadNext, type LoadNext or the shortcut LoadN into the command line. Description LoadNext is a function keyword. If an executor stands in a cue, LoadNext loads the next cue. If a cue was already loaded, LoadNext loads the subsequent cue of the cue that was already loaded. Syntax LoadNext [Executor object] Example [Channel]> LoadNext Executor 2 If executor 2 has loaded cue 5, LoadNext loads cue 6. "Loaded 6" starts flashing in red at the bottom of the sequence. For more information see the keyword Load. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 535 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.162.LoadPrev keyword To execute the keyword LoadPrev, type LoadPrev or the shortcut LoadP into the command line. Description LoadPrev is a function keyword. If an executor stands in a cue, LoadPrev loads the previous cue. If a cue was already loaded, LoadPrev loads the preceding cue of the one that was already loaded. Syntax LoadPrev Examples [Channel]> LoadPrev Executor 2 If the executor 2 stands in cue 5, LoadPrev loads cue 4. "Loaded 4" starts flashing in red at the bottom of the mini executor. If cue 4 was loaded on the executor 2, LoadPrev loads cue 3. "Loaded 3" starts flashing in red at the bottom of the mini executor. For more information see the keyword Load and the keyword LoadNext. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 536 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.163.LoadShow Keyword To go to the LoadShow keyword, type LoadShow or the shortcut Loa in the command line. Description The LoadShow keyword loads a show from the selected drive. For more information, see SelectDrive keyword. If the show file does not exist on the selected drive, a new empty show file will be loaded. If the console is in a session, the show file will be uploaded to all connected stations. The LoadShow keyword is a function keyword. Syntax LoadShow "Showname" / [Option] Options To get a list all available options to the LoadShow keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> LoadShow /? © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 537 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The LoadShow has the following options: Option full Option shortcut Description f Clears the following data if from a new show will be loaded. Loads the following data if from an existing show will be loaded. - Show data - Global Settings - Network Protocols - User Profiles - Time Config - Local Settings - Network Config globalsettings g localsettings l network n noconfirm nc nodata nosave protocols save timeconfig user Clears the global settings if from a new show will be loaded. Loads the global settings if from an existing show will be loaded. Clears the local settings if from a new show will be loaded. Loads the local settings if from an existing show will be loaded. Clears the network configuration if from a new show will be loaded. Loads the network configuration if from an existing show will be loaded. Suppress the warning pop-up that asks if you want to save the show file first. No Keeps the current show data in the new show (column one in shortcut the setup). available ns Does not save the current show file. Clears the network protocols if from a new show will be loaded. p Loads the network protocols if from an existing show will be loaded. s Saves the current show file. t Clears the time config. u Clears the user profiles. Examples To load the show file with the file name "Macbeth", type in the command line: [Channel]> LoadShow "Macbeth" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 538 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To load the show file with the file name "Macbeth" and clear the - Show data - Global Settings - Network Protocols - User Profiles - Time Config - Local Settings - Network Config , type in the command line: [Channel]> LoadShow "Macbeth" /full © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 539 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.164.Locate Keyword To get the Locate keyword in the command line, type Locate or the shortcut Loca in the command line. Description The locate keyword is a function keyword to locate assigned objects on executors. The page will change to that page where the object is assigned and a HERE is displayed. To turn locate off, repeat the Locate keyword with no object. Syntax Locate [Object] Locate Example To locate sequence 1 and see where it is assigned, type in the command line. [Channel]> Locate Sequence 1 Executor with located sequence 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 540 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.165.Lock Keyword To get the Lock keyword in the command line, type Lock or the shortcut Loc in the command line. Description The lock keyword is a function keyword to lock objects. A locked object is indicated by a yellow lock icon . A locked cue is indicated by a black background and a red font in the sequence executor sheet. A locked executor or sequence is indicated by a red executor number or red sequence number in the mini executor bar. A locked object can not be changed or deleted. Syntax Lock [Object-list] Lock Off [Object-list] Example To lock cue 3 of the selected executor, type in the command line: [Channel]> Lock Cue 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 541 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.166.Login Keyword To get the Login keyword in the command line, type Login or the shortcut Log in the command line. Description The Login keyword is a function keyword to login another user. Syntax Login Login "User-name" "password" Example To logout the current user and login as user Jimmy Page with the password mac, type in the command line: [Channel]> Login "Jimmy Page" "mac" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 542 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.167.Logout Keyword To get the Logout keyword in the command line, type Logout or the shortcut Logo in the command line. Description The logout keyword is a function keyword to logout the current user and change to the guest user. Syntax Logout Example To logout the current user and change to the guest user, type in the command line: [Channel]> Logout © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 543 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.168.Lua Keyword To get the Lua keyword in the command line type Lua into the command line. Description This keyword is used to execute commands written in the script language Lua. After entering Lua into the command line, type in the script language Lua version 5.3. The grandMA2 will directly execute the commands written in Lua. Syntax Lua "Lua code" ​E xample [Channel]> Lua "gma.feedback('hello world')" "hello world" is displayed in the command line feedback in yellow. For more information see Plugins. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 544 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.169.Macro Keyword To go to the Macro keyword, press Macro . You can also type Macro in the command line or the shortcut Ma. Description The Macro keyword is an object keyword access Macros. The default function for macro is Go +. This means calling macros without any function specified starts the macro. For more information, see Macros. Syntax [Function] Macro [ID] [Function] Macro [Macro-pool]. [ID].[macro-line] Assign Macro [Macro-pool]. [ID].[macro-line] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameters for the macro object via the command line. Parameter Parameter Value Name "Macro name" CLI "On", "Off" Timing "On", "Off" "Information Text" Info Description Assign the macro name. Assign if the command line interacts with the macro or not. Assign if the macro follows the timing or not. Assign additional information to the macro object. The following table displays the assignable parameters for the macro lines via the command line. Parameter Parameter Value CMD "A valid command" "Go", "Follow", "0.000 Wait 9999.000" Info "Information Text" Disabled "Yes", "No" Description Assign the command executed by the macro line. Assign a delay time or a go or follow after the macro line is executed. Assign additional information to the macro line. Assign if the macro line is disabled or not. Examples To start macro 5, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 545 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Macro 5 To set the wait time of macro 3 line 4 to go, type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Macro 1.3.4 /wait="Go" To store a new empty macro 2, type in the command line: [Channel]> Store Macro 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 546 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.170.ManualXFade keyword To enter the keyword ManualXFade, type ManualXFade or the shortcut Man into the command line. Description ManualXFade activates the function Crossfade of the Special Masters "Exec Time" and "Program Time". The green marker starts flashing if Crossfade is active. For more information see Time control. Syntax ManualXFade SpecialMaster [ID] ​E xample [Channel]> ManualXFade SpecialMaster 2.3 Activates the ManualXFade mode for the Special Master "Exec Time". [Channel]> Off SpecialMaster 2.3 Deactivates the Special Master "Exec Time". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 547 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.171.Mask Keyword To execute the keyword Mask press and hold and Group Group Group or type Mask into the command line. Description The Mask keyword is an object keyword to access Masks in the Mask pool. The default function is Select. For more information, see worlds, filters, and masks. Syntax [Function] Mask [ID] Examples: [Channel]> Mask 3 Selects mask 3 in the mask pool. [Channel]> Mask "My Mask" Selects mask with the name "My Mask". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 548 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.172.Master Keyword To get the Master keyword in the command line, type Master or the shortcut Mas in the command line. Description The Master keyword is a function keyword to assign an executor the function master. Master is a function that will scale the output of intensity-values of an executor, according to the position of the fader. Syntax Assign Master (At) [Object-list] Example To assign executor 28 as a master, type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Master Exec 28 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 549 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.173.MasterFade Keyword To get the MasterFade keyword in the command line, type MasterFade or the shortcut MasterF in the command line. Description MasterFade keyword is a function to adjust the on and off fade time of chasers and effects, and the off fade time for sequence executors. Syntax Assign Masterfade (At) [Executor-list] Masterfade [value] [Executor-list] (Fade [seconds]) Set the Masterfade to a negative value, to link the Master fade to the default Off time Example [Channel]> ​A ssign Masterfade At Executor 1 Thru 5 Gives fader 1 thru 5 Masterfade functionality. [Channel]> ​Masterfade 5 Executor 1 Sets the on and off fade time of executor 1 to 5 seconds. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 550 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.174.MAtricks Keyword To get the MAtricks keyword in the command line type MAtricks or the shortcut MAt in the command line. Syntax MAtricks [ID] MAtricks On MAtricks Off MAtricks Toggle Description The MAtricks keyword acts as an object type and as a mode. Used with an ID, MAtricks represents MAtricks objects stored in the MAtricks pool. With the helping keywords On, Off and Toggle, MAtricks may temporary be enabled/disabled. Calling an MAtricks will enable the MAtricksmode. For more information on MAtricks see MAtricks. Examples To store the current MAtricks settings as MAtricks 2 in the MAtricks pool type in the command line: [Channel]> Store MAtricks 2 To recall the MAtricks settings stored in MAtricks 3 type in the command line: [Channel]> MAtricks 3 To temporary disable the MAtricks mode type in the command line: [Channel]> Matricks Off © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 551 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.175.MAtricksBlocks Keyword To get the MAtricksBlocks keyword in the command line type MAtricksBlocks or one of the shortcuts MB or MAtricksB in the command line. Description MAtricksBlocks is a function to set the MAtricks Blocks values. With the function MAtricksBlocks, x fixtures are treated as one block when aligning or sub selecting. For more information on MAtricks see MAtricks. Syntax MAtricksBlocks [block-size] MAtricksBlocks [block-size x].[block-size y] MAtricksBlocks + x | - x MAtricksBlocks Off Examples To set the block size 2 columns wide type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksBlocks 2 To set the block size 2 columns wide and 3 rows high (if MAtricksInterleave is active) type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksBlocks 2.3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 552 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.176.MAtricksFilter Keyword To get the MAtricksFilter keyword in the command line type MAtricksFilter or one of the shortcuts MF or MAtricksF in the command line. Description MatricksFilter is a function keyword to set the Matricks filter values. With the function MatricksFilter, fixtures of the current selection that matches the given filter, will be sub selected. For more information see MAtricks. Syntax MatricksFilter [filter number] MatricksFilter "filter name" MatricksFilter + | MatricksFilter Off Examples To select the second filter (EvenID), only Channels/fixtures with last digit 2/4/6/8/0 will be actively selected type in the command line: [Channel]> MF 2 To select the "OddID" filter, only channels/fixtures with last digit 1/3/5/7/9 will be actively selected type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksFilter "OddID" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 553 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.177.MAtricksGroups Keyword To get the MAtricksGroups keyword in the command line type MAtricksGroups or one of the shortcuts MG or MAtricksG in the command line. Description MAtricksGroups is a function keyword to set the Align Groups. With the MAtricksGroups function the distribution of aligned values may be limited to n fixtures, for then to be repeated. For more information see MAtricks. Syntax MAtricksGroups [group size] MAtricksGroups [group size x].[group size y] MAtricksGroups + x | - x MAtricksGroups Off Examples To set the aligning for four fixtures always type in the command line: [Channel]> MAtricksGroups 4 To repeat the aligning for every sixth column an every third row of an interleave array type in the command line: [Channel]> MAtricksGroups 6.3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 554 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.178.MAtricksInterleave Keyword To get the MAtricksInterleave keyword in the command line type MAtricksInterleave or one of the shortcuts MI or MAtricksI in the command line. Description MatricksInterleave is a function keyword to create a virtual array of the fixture selection. With the function MatricksInterleave the selection is wrapped onto a new row for every n'th fixture, creating a virtual array. For more information see MAtricks. Syntax MatricksInterleave [array width] MatricksInterleave [column].[array width] MatricksInterleave + | MatricksInterleave Off Examples To select the first column of a 2 column wide array = first of every second fixture = "Odd" type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksInterleave 1.2 To increase the array width type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksInterleave + © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 555 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.179.MAtricksReset Keyword To get the MAtricksReset keyword in the command line, type MAtricksReset or one of the shortcuts MR or MAtricksR in the command line. Description The MAtricksReset is a function keyword to turn off all active MAtricks settings. Syntax MatricksReset Example To turn off all active MAtricks settings, type in the command line: [Channel]>MatricksReset © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 556 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.180.MAtricksWings Keyword To get the MAtricksWings keyword in the command line type MAtricksWings or one of the shortcuts MW or MAtricksW in the command line. Description MAtricksWings is a function keyword to set the MAtricks Wings value. With the MAtricksWings the fixture selection is splitted in x parts and each part is mirroring the previous part. For more information see MAtricks. Syntax MAtricksWings [parts] MAtricksWings + | MAtricksWings Off Example To divide the fixture selection in two parts and the second part mirrors the adjusted values type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksWings 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 557 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.181.MediaServer keyword To enter the keyword, type MediaServer or the shortcut Med into the command line. Description The keyword MediaServer is an object keyword and is used in connection with CITP. For more information see Streaming CITP. Syntax MediaServer [Id] Example [Channel]> List MediaServer Thru Displays all defined CITP Mediaservers in the Command Line Feedback window © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 558 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.182.Menu Keyword To go to the Menu keyword type Menu or the shortcut Men in the command line. Description With the Menu keyword you can open and close menus. If the Menu keyword is used without an On or Off keyword, it toggles. Syntax Menu [On or Off keyword] "[menu name]" / [option] Options To get the list of the available options to the Menu keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line: [Channel]> Menu /? The Menu keyword has the following options: Option Shortcut Description list li Lists all menus you can open by using the Menu keyword. Switches all dialogs back to their default screen. For more information, reset r see encoder settings. Examples Open the Setup. [Channel]> Menu "setup" The Setup opens. List all menus you can open by using the Menu keyword. [Channel]> Menu /list The command line feedback window lists all menu you can open by using the Menu keyword. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 559 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.183.Message Keyword To get the Message keyword in the command line, type Message or the shortcut Mes in the command line. Description The Message keyword is a function keyword to create Messages in the system monitor. This is useful if you want to export the system monitor as an .xml file and you will set specific markers in the system monitor. Syntax Message "message text" Example To enter in the system monitor a message "test marker 1", type in the command line: [Channel]> Message "test marker 1" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 560 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.184.Messages Keyword To get the Messages keyword in the command line, type Messages in the command line. Description With the Messages keyword you can list messages in the command line feedback window. export messages as a messages.xml file. delete messages from the message center, for example, from previous show files. For more information to export files, see general export function. The Messages keyword is an object keyword. Syntax [Function] Messages / Condition = [Condition] [Operation Syntax] [Condition Value] Conditions The Messages keyword can only be used with the option condition. The short cut for condition is cnd. The following table displays the supported condition values. Important: String comparison with wild cards are possible. Values are case-insensitive. Condition "new", "unread" Condition Value 'true', 'false', 'yes', 'no' 'YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss', 'YYYY-MM-DD', 'hh:mm:ss' "time" (= When the date is used standalone, the time will be set to message 00:00:00, for example, 2016-03-20T00:00:00. receive time) When the time is used standalone, the date of today will be set, for example, 2016-03-20T12:05:00. "sender" message sender user profile name "station" message sender station IP + type "msg" message © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 561 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Condition "type" (= message type) "cat" (= message category) Condition Value 'Info', 'Warning', 'Alert', 'Error' 'General', 'Power', 'Network', 'Show', 'Chat', 'CITP', 'RDM', 'Backup Server', 'Blind', 'CITP Traffic', 'DMX Tester Output', 'Exec CLI', 'Filter', 'Highlight', 'IP Conflict', 'Macro', 'Masters', "subcat" (= 'Missed Stations', 'Network', 'Parameters', 'Parked', 'Patch', message 'Power', 'Preview','RDM Alert','Session', 'Solo', 'Stage', subcategory) 'Timecode(MIDI)', 'Timecode(SMPTE)', 'Unassigned Ports', 'World', 'Global Autofix', 'Exec. Time', 'Prog. Time', 'Rate 1', 'Speed 1', 'Default Go', 'RDM Warning' The following table displays the supported operation syntax via command line. Important: If you use operation syntax, the operation has to be surrounded by spaces. "condition1 = 'conditionvalue1'" Operation and or not greater (only for condition time and type) less (only for condition time and type) greater or equal (only for condition time and type) less or equal (only for condition time and type) equal (only for condition time and type) Syntax "and", "&" "or", "I" "not", "!" ">" "<" ">=" "<=" "=" Examples List all messages in the command line feedback window, with the condition type and condition value alert. [Channel]> List Messages /cnd = "type = 'alert'" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 562 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Export all warning, alert, and error messages before 12:45 as a messages.xml. [Channel]> Export Messages /cnd="(type >= 'warning' or time <= '12:45:00') and !(new = 'true')" Delete all alert messages from the message center. [Channel]> Delete Messages /condition="type = 'alert'" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 563 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.185.MidiControl Keyword To get the MidiControl keyword in the command line, type MidiControl in the command line or the shortcut MidiC. Description The MidiControl keyword is a function keyword to transmit MIDI control change messages via the MidiOut port. If no MIDI channel is given, the MIDI channel of the MIDI Show Control in the Setup is used. Syntax MidiControl [controller] [value] MidiControl [midichannel].[controller] [value] Example To transmit a value of 64 for controller 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> MidiControl 1 64 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 564 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.186.MidiNote Keyword To use to the MidiNote keyword, type MidiNote or the shortcut Mn in the command line. Description With the MidiNote command, you send MIDI Note messages via the Midi Out port at the back of the console. For more information, see Device Overview. If a MIDI channel is entered in the command, the entered MIDI channel will be used. If no MIDI channel is entered, the MIDI channel in the Setup -> Midi Show Control is used. If a velocity is entered in the command, the entered velocity will be used. If no velocity is entered, a velocity full (127) will be used. If the Off command is used, a MidiNote Off is sent. For more information on the configuration of MIDI Remotes see Remote Inputs Setup. Syntax MidiNote [note] MidiNote [midichannel] . [note] MidiNote [note] [velocity] MidiNote [midichannel] . [note] [velocity] MidiNote [note] Off MidiNote [midichannel] . [note] Off MidiNote [note] [velocity] Off MidiNote [midichannel] . [note] [velocity] Off Example Let´s assume, you will send a MIDI note on a specific cue to trigger a sound station. Requirements: Connected sound station device e.g. computer on the MIDI Out connector. Stored cue in a sequence on an executor. Open the sequence executor sheet and type in the CMD (= command) column the following syntax: MidiNote 12 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 565 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Sequence Sheet with MidiNote command The MIDI note will be send if the cue is executed and will trigger the connected sound station. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 566 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.187.MidiProgram Keyword To get the MidiProgram keyword in the command line, type MidiProgram in the command line or the shortcut MidiP. Description The MidiProgram keyword is a function keyword to transmit MIDI program change messages via the MidiOut port. If no MIDI channel is given, the MIDI channel of the MIDI Show Control in the Setup is used. Syntax MidiProgram [program] MidiProgram [midichannel].[program] Examples To transmit a program change of 12. [Channel]> MidiProgram 12 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 567 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.188.Model Keyword To get the Model keyword in the command line, type Model or the shortcut Mod in the command line. Description The Model keyword is an object keyword to access 3D models. Syntax [Function] Model Examples To list all 3D model of the show file in the command line feedback window, type in the command line: [Channel]> List Model To assign a 3D model to a fixture, type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Model 2 At Item3d 10 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 568 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.189.Move Keyword To get the Move keyword into the command line, press Move . You can also type Move or the shortcut Mo in the command line. Description The Move keyword is a function keyword to move objects and give them a new object ID. If the destination is already taken, the object that was moved and the destination object will swap. Syntax Move [Object-list] At [Object start] Move [Object-list] At [Object-list] Important: If the destination is a list, the number of elements in the destination list must be the same as in the source list. Example To move group 5 at group 9, type in the command line: [Channel]> Move Group 5 At 9 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 569 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.190.Move3D Keyword To go to the Move3D keyword, type Move3D in the command line or use the shortcut Move3. Description The Move3D keyword moves 3D objects in the Stage View. If the Move3D keyword is used without values, the selected fixtures will be reset to zero. If the option relative is used, the move function uses the relative position. Move3D is a function keyword. Syntax Move3D At [x y z] /relative Example Move the selected 3D object in the Stage View. [Channel]> Move3D At 2.5 -5 3.3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 570 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.191.NetworkInfo Keyword To get the NetworkInfo keyword in the command line, type NetworkInfo or the shortcut Net in the command line. Description The NetworkInfo keyword is a function keyword to display information about the network in the command line feedback window. Syntax NetworkInfo / [Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available option to the NetworkInfo keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> NetworkInfo /? type type t t Option Value No option value. Undefined Console type t NPU type t 3D type t Video type t Node type t NDP type type type t t t No option shortcut available. No option shortcut available. Remote Bridge Switch No option value. No option value. Option Option Shortcut number g ipv4 ipv6 Description Displays only the devices in my session. Displays only undefined devices. Displays only consoles. Displays only MA NPUs (Network Processing Unit). Displays only MA 3Ds. Displays only MA VPUs (Video Processing Unit). Displays only MA Nodes. Displays only NDPs (Network Dimmer Processor). Displays only MA Remotes. Displays only bridges. Display only MA Network Switches. Displays the ipv4 addresses in the command line feedback window. Displays the ipv6 addresses in the command line feedback window. Example To get information about the network, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 571 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> NetworkInfo The network info is displayed in the command line feedback window. Command Line Feedback Window - NetworkInfo © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 572 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.192.NetworkNodeInfo Keyword To get the NetworkNodeInfo keyword in the command line, type NetworkNodeInfo or the shortcut NNI or NetworkN. Description The NetworkNodeInfo keyword displays all in the network available MA Nodes in the command line feedback window. To get only the MA Nodes of the session, use the option number. For more information, see Configure DMX ports. Syntax NetworkNodeInfo / number Example To get information about all in the network available MA Nodes, type in the command line: [Channel]> NetworkNodeInfo Command Line Feedback Window - NetworkNodeInfo © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 573 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.193.NetworkNodeUpdate Keyword To execute the keyword NetworkNodeUpdate, type NetworkNodeUpdate or one of the shortcuts NNU or NetworkNodeU into the command line. Description NetworkNodeUpdate is a function keyword used for the update of the following MA Nodes: MA 2Port Node onPC MA 2Port Node Pro MA 2Port Node Flush Mount It is also possible to update the ports of the grandMA 1 series via Setup – MA Network Configuration – 2Port SW Update . For more information see Adding devices to your session. Important: The keyword NetworkNodeUpdate is only used for the MA nodes of the grandMA1 series. To update the xPort nodes of the grandMA2 series use the keyword UpdateSoftware or see Update via setup. Syntax NetworkNodeUpdate Example [Channel]> NetworkNodeUpdate Automatically updates all nodes of the grandMA1 series. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 574 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.194.NetworkSpeedTest Keyword To get the NetworkSpeedTest keyword in the command line, type NetworkSpeedTest or the shortcut NetworkS in the command line. Description Important: Do not use the NetworkSpeedTest keyword in show situations.The NetworkSpeedTest keyword blocks all other network traffic and DMX traffic for some seconds. The NetworkSpeedTest keyword checks the current network performance in the network of the following MA devices in the session: grandMA2 consoles grandMA2 replay unit grandMA2 onPC MA 3D MA VPU (Video Processing Unit) MA NPU (Network Processing Unit) Use the NetworkSpeedTest keyword as a troubleshooting tool. NetworkSpeedTest UDP (=User Datagram Protocol) packets will be send at port 29998. The result of the NetworkSpeedTest is displayed in the MAnet Speed Test pop-up. MAnet SpeedTest pop-up The console what sends the command is not listed in the MAnet SpeedTest pop-up. In the MAnet SpeedTest pop-up are five columns: IP: Displays the IP address of the tested network device. Time: Displays the duration between sending and receiving the packets. In a 1000 Mbit network the time for a console should be 0.1 s. Sequence Errors: Displays of how many packets the order was swapped. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 575 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Data Errors: Displays how many packets are damaged. Packets Received: Displays the percentage of correctly delivered packages. In a 1000 Mbit network the received packets should be 100%. If this is not the case, the reason could be a bad network connection or an overloaded device. Syntax NetworkSpeedTest / [Option] Options To get a list of all available option to the NetworkSpeedTest keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> NetworkSpeedTest /? Option noconfirm data Option Shortcut nc d Description Suppress the danger and warning pop-up. Network speed test at UDP port 29999. Example To perform a network speed test of the MA devices in the network for troubleshooting: 1. Type in the command line: [Channel]> NetworkSpeedTest A danger pop-up asks if you really want to perform the network test. 2. Tap Ok . A continue pop-up asks that the network traffic will disrupt for some seconds. 3. Tap Ok . The network speed test will be performed and the MAnet SpeedTest pop-up displays the result. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 576 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.195.NewShow Keyword To get the NewShow keyword in the command line, type NewShow in the command line or use the shortcut New. Description The NewShow keyword is a function keyword to create new shows. Syntax NewShow "Showname" / [Option] Options To get a list all available options to the NewShow keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> NewShow /? The NewShow keyword has the following options: Option full Option shortcut Description f globalsettings g localsettings l network n noconfirm nodata nosave protocols save timeconfig user nc No shortcut available ns p s t u Clears the: - Show data - Global Settings - Network Protocols - User Profiles - Time Config - Local Settings - Network Config Clears the global settings. Clears the local settings. Clears the network config. Suppress the warning pop-up that asks if you want to save the show file first. Keeps the current show data in the new show (column one in the setup). Does not save the current show file. Clears the network protocols. Saves the current show file. Clears the time config. Clears the user profiles. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 577 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Examples To create a new show file with the file name "Macbeth", type in the command line: [Channel]> NewShow "Macbeth" To create a new show file with the file name "Macbeth" and clear the - Show data - Global Settings - Network Protocols - User Profiles - Time Config - Local Settings - Network Config , type in the command line: [Channel]> NewShow "Macbeth" /full © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 578 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.196.Next Keyword Important: If you type the Next keyword in the console, by press the Next key, the keyword will be directly executed. You can also use the command line along with the keyboard and type the word Next in. To get the Next keyword in the command line and directly execute it, press Next . You can also type Next or the shortcut N in the command line. Description If no fixtures or channels are selected and the default keyword is Fixture or Channel, the Next keyword selects the fixture with lowest fixture or channel ID. If only one fixture selected and the default keyword is Fixture or Channel, the Next keyword selects the fixture with the next fixture or channel ID. If multiple fixtures or channels are selected, the Next keyword selects the next fixture or channel in the selection order. For more information, see MAtricks. Syntax Next Example To step thru the fixtures of the fixture selection in the selection order, press Next . Fixture selection is fixture 1 thru 7, current selected with next is fixture 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 579 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.197.NextRow Keyword To get the NextRow keyword in the command line type NextRow or the shortcut NextR in the command line. If fixtures are selected in the fixture sheet and single y is defined for MAtricks, press and hold execute NextRow directly. + Next to Description NextRow is a function keyword to increase the MAtricks property single y. If MAtricksInterleave is active, NextRow will increases the MAtricks Single y property, effectively subselecting fixtures row by row. For more information see MAtricks. Syntax NextRow Example To select the first row of 4 fixtures type in the command line: [Channel]> MatricksInterleave 4 [Channel]> NextRow © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 580 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.198.Normal Keyword Important: If you enter the Normal keyword in the console, by double press the At key, the keyword will be directly executed. You can also use the command line along with the keyboard and type the word Normal in. To get the Normal keyword in the command line and directly execute it, press At At . You can also type Normal or the shortcut No in the command line. Description With the Normal keyword you set the dimmer of the fixtures to the defined Normal value. To change the Normal percent, see user settings. Normal is an object keyword. Example To set the dimmer of the selected fixtures to the defined Normal value of 60 percent, press At At . The selected fixtures have a dimmer value of 60 percent in the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 581 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.199.Off Keyword To get the Off keyword into the command line, press Off . You can also type Off or the shortcut Of in the command line. Description The Off keyword can be a function keyword or a helping keyword. With the Off keyword as a function keyword you can: Stop an executor. Knock out parameters of the programmer. Knock out selections of the programmer. Knock out active attributes of the programmer. With the Off keyword as a helping keyword you indicate the end of a temporary function, or the disabled state of a toggling function. Syntax Off [Object-list] (function keyword) [Function] Off [Object-list] (helping keyword) [Function] Off (helping keyword) Examples To knockout the parameters of cue 1 of the selected executor from the programmer, type in the command line: [Channel]> Off Cue 1 To knockout the parameters of fixture 1 and 3 from the programmer, type in the command line: [Channel]> Off Fixture 1 + 3 To indicate a released flash executor 1.2.4, type in the command line: [Channel]> Flash Off Executor 1.2.4 To turn off highlight, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 582 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Highlight Off © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 583 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.200.On Keyword To get the On keyword in the command line press On or type On in the command line. Description The On keyword can be a function keyword or a helping keyword. With the On keyword as a function keyword you can: Start or restart an executor. Activate parameters in the programmer. Activate selections in the programmer. Activate attributes in the programmer. With the On keyword as a helping keyword you indicate the start of a temporary function, or the enabled state of a toggling function. Syntax On [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] (function keyword) [Function] On [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] (helping keyword) [Function] On (helping keyword) Options To get a list of all available options to the On keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> On /? The On keyword has the following options: cue_mode cm Normal Option Value Shortcut N cue_mode cm Assert A cue_mode cm XAssert XA cue_mode cm Release R userprofile upr "Name of the user profile", e.g. "Dominik" not available Option Option Option Value Shortcut Description Normal on mode. On asserts the original timing. On asserts the cuetiming of current cue. On finishes the fade-in and switches the executor off. Normal On mode with specified user profile. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 584 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Examples To activate the parameters of cue 1 from the selected executor, type in the command line: [Channel]> On Cue 1 To activate the parameter of fixture 1 and 3 in the programmer, type in the command line: [Channel]> On Fixture 1 + 3 To flash executor 1.2.4, type in the command line: [Channel]> Flash On Executor 1.2.4 To turn highlight on, type in the command line: [Channel]> Highlight On © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 585 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.201.Oops Keyword To get the Oops keyword in the command line, type Oops or the shortcut O in it. Description The Oops keyword is a function keyword to undo the last: Command line actions Fixture selections Programmer actions Oops can undo the last 100 actions. For more information, see Oops and undo. Syntax Oops / [Option] Options To get a list of all available option to the Oops keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> Oops /? Option noconfirm clear Option Shortcut nc c Description Suppress the confirm undo pop-up. Clears the oops list in the oops pop-up. Examples To undo the recent done action, type in the command line: [Channel]> Oops The confirm undo pop-up opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 586 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Confirm undo pop-up To undo the recent done action and suppress the confirm undo pop-up, type in the command line: [Channel]> Oops /noconfirm © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 587 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.202.Or keyword To enter the keyword, type Or into the command line. Description Or is a helping keyword and is usually used along with the keyword If. For more information see keyword If. Syntax [Function] [Object-list] [If] [Object-list] Or [Object-list] Example [Channel]> Delete Cue 1 If Channel 2 or 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 588 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.203.OutDelay Keyword To get the OutDelay keyword in the command line by using the command keys, it is necessary to press another function key before, e.g. Store and then press Time Time Time Time (= OutDelay). You can also type OutDelay or the shortcut OutD in the command line. Description The OutDelay keyword is a helping keyword to set an outdelay time. Out delay is a waiting time for getting smaller dimmer values. Syntax [Function] OutDelay [Value-list] Examples To store cue 3 with an outdelay time of 4 seconds, type in the command line: [Channel]> Store Cue 3 OutDelay 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 589 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.204.OutFade Keyword To get the OutFade keyword in the command line by using the command keys, it is necessary to press another function key before, e.g. Store and then press Time Time (= OutFade). You can also type OutFade or the shortcut Ou in the command line. Description The OutFade keyword is a helping keyword to set an outfade time. Indicate out fade times for getting smaller dimmer values. Syntax [Function] OutFade [Value-list] Examples To store cue 3 with an outfade time of 4 seconds, type in the command line: [Channel]> Store Cue 3 OutFade 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 590 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.205.Page Keyword To get the Page keyword in the command line, press Page . You can also type Page or the shortcut Pag in the command line. Description The Page keyword is an object keyword to access pages. The default function is Call. For more information, see Call keyword. If you apply a function not supported by the page object, the function will be passed on to the executor child objects of the page. Syntax [Function] Page [ID] Assign Page / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameter by using the command line. Parameter Name Info Parameter Value "Page name" "Page info" Description Assign name of the page. Assign information to the page. Examples To change to page 5, type in the command line: [Channel]> Page 5 To pause all executors on page 3, type in the command line: [Channel]> Pause Page 3 To assign an information to page 3, type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Page 3 / Info = "This are all my executors on page 3" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 591 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To call a page by using the page name, type in the command line: [Channel]> Page "song name" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 592 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.206.Parentheses ( ) Character To get the ( ) parentheses in the command line, press and hold Shift + 9 or Shift + 0 . Description With the ( ) parentheses you create pop-up dialog in macros, to get user input. The user will be prompted with the text inside the round brackets, and a text input field. The macro line will be executed with the user input. For more information, see create pop-ups in macros. Example Create a macro line with a pop-up that asks for the cue number and stores the cue. Enter in the macro line: Store Cue ("Please enter the cue number to store") If the macro is running, the pop-up opens and expect user input. Macro pop-up © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 593 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.207.Park Keyword To get the Park keyword in the command line, press Pause Pause (= Park). You can also type Park in the command line. Description The Park keyword is a function keyword to lock DMX output values of attributes. You can also lock DMX output values of a fixture selection, or group of attributes for the current selection. If no value is given, the attribute is parked at current value. Hint: Parked DMX channels are indicated by a blue marker. For more information, see marker colors. Hint: To unpark previous parked values, use the Unpark keyword. Syntax Park [Selection-list] (At [Value] ) Park [Attribute-list] (At [Value] ) Park [DMX-list] (At [Value] ) Examples To park the current values of fixture 5, type in the command line: [Channel]> Park Fixture 5 To park the pan attributes of the fixture selection, type in the command line: [Channel]> Park Attribute "pan" To park channel 1 through 10 at 100 %, type in the command line: [Channel]> Park Channel 1 Thru 5 At 100 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 594 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To park DMX channel 1.2 type in the command line: [Channel]> Park DMX 1.2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 595 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.208.Part Keyword To get the Part keyword in the command line, press Cue Cue (= Part). You can also type Part or the shortcut P in the command line. Description The Part keyword is an object keyword to segment cues in parts. Parts are useful to assign and edit different timings of groups of fixture parameters. Syntax [Function] Part [ID] Example To create a second part of cue 3 for the selected executor, type in the command line: [Channel]> Store Cue 3 Part 2 To move part 2 of cue 2 at part 3 of cue 2 for the selected executor, type in the command line: [Channel]> Move Cue 2 Part 2 At Cue 2 Part 3 To delete part 2 of cue 1 for the selected executor, type in the command line: [Channel]> Delete Cue 1 Part 2 The choose delete cue part method pop-up opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 596 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Choose delete cue part method pop-up To move the fixture or channel values to the main cue tap, move values to default cue part . Timings will be deleted. To delete the part with all values tap, delete values of cue part . The part is deleted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 597 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.209.Paste Keyword To get the Paste keyword in the command line, type Paste or the shortcut Pas in the command line. Description With the Paste keyword, you will paste previous copied content from the clipboard.xml, or move previous Cut object-lists. If no object type is given and the command line destination is root (no destination) the default object is Cue. For more information, see Cut keyword and Copy keyword. The Paste keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Paste [start object] Example To move group 1 at group 5, type in the command line: [Channel]> Cut Group 1 [Channel]> Paste Group 5 To copy cue 5 at cue 15: [Channel]> Copy 5 [Channel]> Paste 15 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 598 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.210.Pause Keyword To get the Pause keyword in the command line, press the small Pause . You can also type Pause or the shortcut Pau in the command line. Description The Pause keyword is a function keyword to pause: Crossfades between cues Chaser executors Timers Selective effect executors Timecode shows Macros Pause is a toggle function between pause on and pause off. Syntax Pause [Object-list] Pause On [Object-list] Pause Off [Object-list] Example To pause the running chaser executor 3, type in the command line: [Channel]> Pause Executor 3 To start running again paused chaser executor 3, type in the command line: [Channel]> Pause Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 599 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.211.Plugin Keyword To get the Plugin keyword in the command line, type Plugin or the shortcut Pl in the command line. Description The Plugin keyword is an object keyword to access Plugins. The default function for the Plugin keyword is Go+. Plugin 1 is a predefined plugin and not editable. For more information, see Plugins. Syntax [Function] Plugin [ID] Assign Plugin [ID] /[Parameter]=[Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameter via command line. Parameter Name Parameter Value "Create Sequence" ExecuteOnLoad "Yes", "No" "Additional Information" Info Description Assign the plugin name. Assign if the plugin be directly executed during show upload. Assign additional information. Examples 1. To executor plugin 2, type in the command line: [Channel]> Plugin 2 2. Press Please . Plugin 2 is executed. 1. To change the name of plugin 2 to "Create Sequence", type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Plugin 2/name="l_mCreateSequence" 2. Press Please . Plugin 2 has the name "Create Sequence". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 600 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.212.PMArea Keyword To get the PMArea (= Pixel Mapper Area) keyword in the command line, type PMArea or the shortcut PM in the command line. Description The PMArea keyword is an object keyword to access pixel mapper areas and pixel mapper outputs. You can store, copy, and delete pixel mapper setups. For more information, see MA VPU pixel mapper. The default function for the PMArea keyword is SelFix. For more information, see SelFix keyword. Syntax [Store / Copy / Delete] PMArea [pixel mapper area ID].[pixel mapper output ID] / [option] Assign PMArea [pixel mapper area ID].[pixel mapper output ID] / [parameter] = [parameter value] Options To get a list of all available options to the PMArea keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> PMArea /? Option Option Option Value Shortcut merge m no option value overwrite o no option value remove r no option value autoalign aa no option value x (only if the option autoalign is used) y (only if the option autoalign is used) no shortcut 1.000...500.000 available no shortcut 1.000...500.000 available Description Adds to the existing content. By default, the 3D coordinates will be used. Replace the existing content. By default, the 3D coordinates will be used. Removes the selected content. Ignores the 3D position data and stores as a matrix (equal to the layout view). Defines the position of the x axis in the pixel mapper area. Defines the position of the y axis in the pixel mapper area. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 601 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option axis 3dcoordinates noconfirm Option Shortcut no shortcut available no shortcut available nc Option Value Description All possible combination with + and -, e.g. +x+y, +x+z Defines the horizontal and vertical axis. no option value no option value Uses the 3D position coordinates of the fixture. See Patch & Fixture Schedule. Suppress the storing output popup. Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameter for pixel mapper areas via command line. Parameter Parameter Value Name "Area 1" DimX[m] 1.000...500.000 DimY[m] 1.000...500.000 Description Assign the pixel mapper area name. Assign the dimension of the x axis in meter. Assign the dimension of the y axis in meter. The following table displays the assignable parameter for pixel mapper outputs via command line. Parameter Name RenderIP Camera ResX[Px] ResY[Px] VirtOut Protocol Priority Parameter Value Description Assign the pixel mapper "Output 1" output name. "192.168.0.4" Assign the VPU IP address. Assign one of the patched "Camera 4" cameras. Assign the resolution of the x 1...4096 axis in pixel. Assign the resolution of the y 1...4096 axis in pixel. Assign if the camera, and "None", "Virtual Output 1"... resolution in pixel should be "Virtual Output 16" use for a virtual output. "Art-Net", "sACN", "MA-Net2" Assign the protocol. "Super", "Swp", "HTP", "High", Assign the pixel mapper "LTP", "Low" priority. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 602 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Parameter Art-NetMode (only if the protocol is Art-Net) Art-NetStartAddress (only if the protocol is Art-Net) sACNMode (only if the protocol is sACN) sACNVersion (only if the protocol is sACN) sACNPriority (only if the protocol is sACN) Parameter Value "Broadcast", "Unicast", "Auto" Description Assign the Art-Net mode. 1...128 : 0..F : 0..F Assign the Art-Net start address. "Multicast", "Unicast" Assign the sACN mode. "Final", "Draft" Assign the sACN version. 0...200 Assign the priority. The highest number has the highest priority. TTL = Time to live sACN TTL (only if the protocol is sACN) sACN Start (only if the protocol is sACN) Delay(ms) (only if the protocol is sACN or Art-Net) FrameDelay (1/30s) 0...255 Assign the number of routers (hops) that multicast traffic is permitted to pass through before expiring on the network. For each router (hop), the original specified TTL is decremented by one (1). When its TTL reaches a value of zero (0), each multicast datagram expires and is no longer forwarded through the network to other subnets. 0...63999 or "Original" Assign the sACN universe. Original uses the same as patched. 0.000...2.500 Assign the packet delay. 0...8 Assign the frame delay. Examples To store the selected fixtures in the existing pixel mapper area 1 output 2 with a horizontal +x axis and a vertical +z axis, type in the command line: [Channel]> Store PMArea 1.2 /axis=+X+Z /noconfirm © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 603 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To assign the pixel mapper area 1 the name "Sunstrips", type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign PMArea 1 /name="l_mSunstrips" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 604 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.213.Preset Keyword To get the Preset keyword in the command line, press Preset . You can also type Preset or the shortcut Pres in the command line. Description With the Preset keyword you can: Select the fixtures stored in a preset. At a preset to the fixture or channel selection. If no fixtures or channels are selected in the programmer, the default function is SelFix. For more information, see SelFix keyword. If fixtures or channels are selected in the programmer, the default function is At. For more information, see At keyword. Syntax Preset [ID] Preset [Preset-type].[ID] Preset "Name" Assign Preset [ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameters via command line. Parameter Parameter Value Name "PresetName" "Normal", "Default", Special "Highlight", "Stage" "additional Info information" Description Assign the preset pool name. Assign the special mode. For more information, see What are special modes? Assign additional information. Assigned information are displayed in the info window. Examples Select the fixtures stored in preset 5 of the selected preset type, e.g. dimmer. [Channel]> Preset 5 Sets current selection to the second preset of preset type 3 (gobo). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 605 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> At Preset 3.2 Select all fixtures stored in any preset with the label "DarkRed". [Channel]> Preset *."DarkRed" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 606 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.214.PresetType Keyword To get the PresetType keyword in the command line, press and hold + Preset . You can also type PresetType, PresetT, or PT in the command line. Description With the PresetType keyword you can: Call PresetTypes and select them in the preset type bar. Select PresetTypes in the fixture sheet. A selected preset type is indicated by a yellow font in the column header. Activate PresetTypes for the selected fixtures in the programmer. Store only values of the given preset type. Preset types contains features and attributes, which means that you can also call features and attributes with the PresetType keyword, using dot-separated numbers. Syntax PresetType [PresetType Number] PresetType "PresetType Name" PresetType [PresetType Number] . [Feature Number] PresetType [PresetType Number] . [Feature Number] . [Attribute Number] [Function Keyword] PresetType [PresetType Number] . [Feature Number] Examples Call preset type 3 in the fixture sheet and in the preset type bar. [Channel]> PresetType 3 Call preset type color in the fixture sheet and in the preset type bar. [Channel]> PresetType "Dimmer" Call preset type 3, feature 1, in the fixture sheet and in the encoder bar. [Channel]> PresetType 3.1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 607 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Activate the second color feature for the selected fixtures. [Channel]> On PresetType "Color".2 Call the second feature of the current selected preset type. [Channel]> PresetType $preset.2 Call preset type 3, feature 2, attribute 1, in the fixture sheet and in the encoder bar. [Channel]> PresetType 3.2.1 Store only the pan/tilt values for the fixture selection. [Channel]> Store If PresetType Position If Selection © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 608 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.215.Preview Keyword To go to the Preview keyword, press Prvw . You can also type Preview in the command line. Description The Preview keyword creates a preview of the programmed output without having an actual DMX output. Preview loads the given cue or part in Previeweditor and enables this editor. (PreviewEdit On) If no cue is given, the current cue of the selected executor will be used. The Preview keyword is a function keyword. Hint: If the console is in the preview editor, the Prvw key is blinking and the title bar from the sheets changes into red. Hint: To leave the preview editor, press Esc or Off Prvw or Prvw Prvw on the console. Syntax Preview [cue-object] / [option] = [option value] Preview [part-object] Preview Next Preview Previous Options To get a list of all available options to the preview keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> Preview /? The preview keyword has the following options. Option add Option Option Description Shortcut Value not available False, True Additional preview playback. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 609 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Option Shortcut Option Value autoupdate au False, True keepselection ks keepprogrammer kp Description Every programmer value updates automatically. False, True Keeps selection when entering preview. Keeps programmer content when entering False, True preview. Examples Load cue 5 from the selected executor in the preview editor. [Channel]> Preview Cue 5 Load cue 5, part 2 of the selected executor in the preview editor. [Channel]> Preview Cue 5 Part 2 Load current cue of executor 3 in the preview editor. [Channel]> Preview Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 610 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.216.PreviewEdit Keyword To go to the PreviewEdit keyword, press Prvw Prvw (= PrvwEdit). You can also type PreviewEdit in the command line or use the shortcut PreviewEd. To close the PreviewEdit, press Prvw Prvw again. Description The PreviewEdit toggles between the live programmer and the blind preview editor. The PreviewEdit keyword is an object keyword. Syntax PreviewEdit PreviewEdit On PreviewEdit Off Example Turn the preview editor on. [Channel]>PreviewEdit On The preview encoder bar is displayed. The title bar of the fixture sheet, channel sheet, and layout view is red. The Prvw key is flashing. Preview Encoder Bar © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 611 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.217.PreviewExecutor Keyword To execute the PreviewExecutor keyword, enter a functional keyword and press Prvw . For example Go + Prvw (= Go PreviewExecutor). To enter the PreviewExecutor keyword into the command line you can also type PreviewExecutor or use the shortcut Pre. Description Requirement: A sequence loaded in the preview editor. The PreviewExecutor keyword is an alias for sequence in the preview editor. The PreviewExecutor keyword is an object keyword. Syntax [Function] PreviewExecutor Examples Requirement: Selected sequence in the preview editor. Run the next cue in PreviewEditor with timing. [Channel]> Go PreviewExecutor Requirement: Selected sequence in the preview editor. Store cue 5 in the preview sequence. [Channel]> Store Cue 5 PreviewExecutor © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 612 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.218.Previous Keyword To go to the Previous keyword, press Prev . You can also type Previous in the command line or use the shortcut Previo. Description The Previous keyword has multiple functions. If no fixture or channel is selected, the fixture or channel with the highest ID will be selected. If one fixture or channel is selected, the fixture or channel with the previous ID will be selected. If MAtricks are active, the Previous keyword has special functions depending on the selected MAtricks options. For more information, see MAtricks. Syntax Previous Example Select the last fixture of the selected group 5 in the selection order. [Channel]>Previous © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 613 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.219.PrevRow Keyword To go to the PrevRow keyword, press and hold + Prev . You can also type PrevRow in the command line or use the shortcut PrevR. Description If MAtricksInterleave is on, PrevRow reduce the Single Y value by one. If Single Y was at 0, the last Single Y value will be used. For more information, see MAtricks. The PrevRow keyword is a function keyword. Syntax PrevRow Example Select the last row of fixtures, if MAtricksInterleave is on. [Channel]> PrevRow © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 614 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.220.Profile Keyword To get the Profile keyword in the command line, type Profile or the shortcut Pro in the command line. Description The Profile keyword is an object keyword to access DMX profiles and DMX profiles points. For more information, see DMX profiles. Syntax [Function] Profile [DMX Profile ID].[DMX Profile Point ID] Assign Profile [DMX Profile ID].[DMX Profile Point ID] /[Parameter]=[Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameter for DMX profiles via command line. Parameter Name Parameter Value "80%" Description Name of the DMX profile. The following table displays the assignable parameter for DMX profile points via command line. Parameter Parameter Value X 0...1 Y 0...1 Description Assign the x position in physical values of the point. Assign the y position in physical values of the point. Example To export DMX profile 1 from the grandMA2 onPC to the folder C:\ProgramData\MA Lighting Technologies\grandma\gma2_V_3.1\importexport: 1. Type in the command line: [Channel]> Export Profile 1 2. Press Please . The DMX profile 1 is exported as a .xml file. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 615 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.221.Protocol Keyword To go to the Protocol keyword, type Protocol in the command line or use the shortcut Prot. Description The Protocol keyword is an object keyword to access the network protocols. You can store or delete network protocols and assign parameters. For more information, see Network DMX Protocols. Syntax [Function] Protocol [Network Protocol ID] . [Row ID] Assign Protocol [Network Protocol ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Assign Protocol [Network Protocol ID] . [Row ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] The following table displays the available network protocol along with their ID. Network Protocol Art-Net ETC Net2 Pathport sACN Shownet Kinet1 ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameter by use the command Assign Protocol [Network Protocol ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value]. Network Protocol Parameter Parameter Value Art-Net, sACN, Kinet1 OutActive "On", "Off" Art-Net, sACN, Kinet1 InActive "On", "Off" Art-Net MaxUnicast 0...10 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Description Assign if the output is set to on or off. Assign if the input is set to on or off. Only if the mode is OutputAuto: Assign the maximal amount of members until Art-Net switches from unicast to broadcast. 616 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Network Protocol Parameter Art-Net, ETC Net2, Pathport, sACN, Shownet, Info Kinet1 ETC Net2, Pathport, Shownet ETC Net2, Pathport, Shownet Active LocalStart Parameter Value Description "Information text" Assign additional information. "On", "Off" Assign if the console transmit or hide the network protocol. 1...256 Assign the DMX universe to transmit or receive the network protocol. ETC Net2 and Pathport: 1...64 ETC Net2, Pathport, Shownet Amount ETC Net2, Pathport, Shownet ExternStart 1...64 ETC Net2 Groups 1...6 Shownet: 1...256 or "None" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Assign the amount of DMX universes to transmit the network protocol. Assign the transmitted or received DMX universe. ETC Net2 uses multicast groups to simplify and optimize the transmission. Assign the group to transmit to. 617 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Network Protocol Parameter Parameter Value Description Assign the priority to decide who a node should listen to in a conflict. ETC Net2: The lowest number has the highest priority. ETC Net2: 1...20 ETC Net2, Shownet, Priority Shownet: 0...16 Shownet: A DMX512 slot can be patched to multiple Netslots with each Netslot assigned to a different priority. The DMX512 slot outputs the level of the Netslot with the highest priority if HTP is not selected. TTL = Time to live ETC Net2, Pathport TTL 0...255 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Assign the number of routers (hops) that multicast traffic is permitted to pass through before expiring on the network. For each router (hop), the original specified TTL is decremented by one (1). When its TTL reaches a value of zero (0), each multicast datagram expires and is no longer forwarded through the network to other subnets. 618 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The following table displays the assignable parameter by use the command Assign Protocol [Network Protocol ID] . [Row ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value]. Only available for: Art-Net sACN Kinet1 Network Protocol Parameter Art-Net, sACN Mode Parameter Value Art-Net: "OutputBroadcast", "OutputUnicast", "OutputAuto", "Input" sACN: "OutputMulticast", "OutputUnicast", "InputMulticast", "InputUnicast" Art-Net, sACN DestinationIP "1.2.3.4" Art-Net, sACN, Kinet1 LocalStart 1...256 Art-Net, sACN, Kinet1 Amount 1...256 Art-Net Art-Net Art-Net Network Subnet Universe 1...128 0...15 0...15 Art-Net, sACN Delay(ms) 0.000...5.000 sACN sACNUniverse 1...64000 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Description Assign the output or input mode. Only if the mode is OutputUnicast. Assign the the destination IP address. Assign the DMX universe to transmit or receive the network protocol. Assign the amount of DMX universes to transmit or receive the network protocol. Assign the network. Assign the subnet. Assign the universe. Only if the mode is an output mode. Assign the milliseconds between the packets. Assign the sACN universe. 619 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Network Protocol Parameter Parameter Value sACN Priority 0...200 or "None" sACN Protocol "Final" or "Draft" sACN TTL 0...255 sACN, Kinet1 Info "Information text" Kinet1 ExternStart 0...255 or "None" Kinet1 IPAddress "1.2.3.4" Description Assign the priority to decide who a node should listen to in a conflict. The highest number has the highest priority. Assign a sACN protocol. Some equipment have implemented the draft version of sACN before the final release. TTL = Time to live Assign the number of routers (hops) that multicast traffic is permitted to pass through before expiring on the network. For each router (hop), the original specified TTL is decremented by one (1). When its TTL reaches a value of zero (0), each multicast datagram expires and is no longer forwarded through the network to other subnets. Assign additional information. Assign the transmitted universe number. Assign the IP address. Example Set the sACN output to active. [Channel]> Assign Protocol 4 /outactive=on © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 620 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Send grandMA2 universe 10 to Art-Net universe 9. Important: Art-Net universe 0 is the first Art-Net universe. [Channel]> Assign Protocol 1.1 /mode=outputauto /localstart=10 /amount=1 /network=1 /subnet=0 /universe=9 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 621 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.222.PSR Keyword To go to the PSR keyword, type PSR in the command line. Description Requirement: The partial show read is prepared. The PSR keyword executes a partial show read for the specified object. The PSR keyword is a function keyword. For more information, see Partial Show Read (PSR). Syntax PSR [Object] If [Object-list] /[Option] Options To get a list of all available options to the PSR keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> PSR /? The PSR keyword has the following options. Option merge overwrite Short Cut m o Description Adds to existing content. Replaces existing content. Examples Partial show read on sequence 1. [Channel]> PSR Sequence 1 Partial show read on sequence 1, if channel 1 through 3 are used. [Channel]> PSR Sequence 1 If Channel 1 Thru 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 622 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.223.PSRList Keyword To use to the PSRList keyword, type PSRList or the shortcut PSRL in the command line. Description The PSRList keyword lists all available and changed objects of the show file which can be inserted. The PSRList keyword displays the same as the partial show read pop-up tree. For more information, see Partial Show Read (PSR). Command Line Feedback - PSRList Sequence The PSRList keyword is a function keyword. Syntax PSRList [Object type] Example Requirement: A prepared partial show read. Show all available and changed sequences of the show file which can be inserted. [Channel]> PSRList Sequence © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 623 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.224.PSRPrepare Keyword To use to the PSRPrepare keyword, type PSRPrepare or the shortcut PSR in the command line. Description PSRPrepare prepares a showfile for PartialShowRead. The PSRPrepare keyword used standalone opens the Partial Show Read Prepare Window. For more information, see Partial Show Read (PSR). The PSPPrepare keyword is a function keyword. Syntax PSRPrepare [filename] / [option] Options To get a list of all available options to the PSRPrepare keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> PSRPrepare /? The PSRPrepare keyword has the following options. Option usemine mergeother useother Short Cut u mo uo Description Uses the current setup. Merges with the new setup. Overwrites the current setup and uses the new setup. Example Open the Partial Show Read Prepare Window for the demo dimmer and more show. [Channel]> PSRPrepare "demo dimmer and more.show.gz" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 624 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.225.Quotation Marks " " Character To enter " " quotation marks into the command line press and hold Shift and " . Description With " " quotation marks you can enter text strings into the command line. Important: If you do not enter text strings using " " quotation marks, the console interprets the text strings as a command, which can lead to incorrect results. Examples To label a macro by using the command line enter into the command line: [Channel]> Label Macro 3 "on" Macro 3 is labeled as "on". To assign an info text for cue 1 enter into the command line: [Channel]> Assign Cue 1 /info="run after music stops" Cue 1 contains the information "run after music stops". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 625 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.226.Rate Keyword To get the Rate keyword into command line type Rate. Description The Rate keyword is a function to adjust the Rate of an executor. Syntax Assign Rate (At) [Executor-list] Rate [value] [Executor-list] (Fade [seconds]) Example To assign a rate fader for a sequence on executor 6. [Channel]> Assign Rate Exec 6 Set the rate for a sequence on executor 1 and 5 to 2. [Channel]> Rate 2 Executor 1 + 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 626 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.227.Rate1 Keyword To get the Rate1 keyword in the command line, press Learn Learn (= Rate1). You can also type Rate1 or the shortcut Rat in the command line. Description The Rate1 keyword resets the rate to 1:1. The Rate1 keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Rate1 [Object-list] Example Reset the rate of executor 5 back to 1:1. [Channel]> Rate1 Executor 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 627 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.228.RdmAutomatch Keyword To get the RdmAutomatch keyword in the command line, type RdmAutomatch or the shortcut RdmA in it. Description Requirements: - MA Fixture is not matched - MA Fixture and RDM Fixture have the same DMX address - MA Fixture Type has no or the same RDMFixtureType ID as the RDM Fixture - MA Fixture Type has the same DMX footprint as the RDM Fixture - All Subfixtures of the MA Fixture are in the current World and Filter The RdmAutomatch keyword automatches RDM Fixtures. Possible objects are: Channel Fixture FixtureType RDMFixtureType Group Sequence Cue Executor Preset (only selective Presets) Selection World If no object is given, the current selection will be used. RdmAutomatch is a function keyword. For more information, see RDM. Syntax RdmAutomatch [Object List] Examples To automatch the selected fixtures, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmAutomatch © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 628 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To automatch the fixtures used in group 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmAutomatch Group 1 To automatch only the fixtures used in group 1 and also used in sequence 2, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmAutomatch Group 1 If Sequence 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 629 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.229.RdmAutopatch Keyword To get the RdmAutopatch keyword in the command line, type RdmAutopatch in the command line or use the shortcut RdmAutop. Description Requirements: - MA Fixture is matched - MA Fixture is patched - MA Fixture and RDM Fixture have the same universe The RdmAutopatch keyword patches the RDM fixtures to the DMX address in the setup. Possible objects are: Channel Fixture FixtureType RDMFixtureType Group Sequence Cue Executor Preset (only selective Presets) Selection World If no object is given, the current selection will be used. RdmAutopatch is a function keyword. For more information about, see RDM. Syntax RdmAutopatch [Object List] Examples To autopatch the selected fixtures, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmAutopatch To autopatch the fixtures used in group 1, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 630 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> RdmAutopatch Group 1 To autopatch only the fixtures used in group 1 and also used in sequence 2, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmAutopatch Group 1 If Sequence 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 631 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.230.RdmFixtureType Keyword To get the RdmFixtureType keyword in the command line, type RdmFixtureType or the shortcut Rd in the command line. Description The RdmFixtureType is an object keyword to access Rdm fixtures with a Rdm fixture type ID. To get the RdmFixtureType ID, go to Setup -> Patch & Fixture Schedule -> RDM Devices. The RdmFixtureType ID is displayed in the information field. Hint: To get the RdmFixtureType ID you can also enter in the command line, CD RDM_Data.RDM_Fixture_Types. Then enter in the command line List, press Please , and open the command line feedback window. For more information, see RDM. Syntax [RDM Function] RdmFixtureType [ID] Examples To automatch RDM fixture type 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmAutomatch RdmFixtureType 1 To unmatch RDM fixture type 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmUmatch RdmFixtureType 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 632 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.231.RdmInfo Keyword To get the RdmInfo keyword in the command line, type RdmInfo or the shortcut RdmI in the command line. Description The RdmInfo keyword opens the RDM info pop-up with the actual RDM information to the entered fixture or channel. The RdmInfo keyword is a function keyword. For more information, see RDM. Syntax RdmInfo [Channel / Fixture] [ID] RdmInfo [Channel / Fixture] [ID] / [screen] [ID] Examples To open the RDM Info pop-up for fixture 3, type in the command line: [Channel]> RDMInfo Fixture 3 The RDM Info pop-up opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 633 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English RDM Info pop-up To open the RDM Info pop-up for fixture 3 on screen 3: 1. Type in the command line: [Channel]> RDMInfo Fixture 3/screen = 3 2. Press Please . The RDM Info pop-up opens on screen 3. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 634 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.232.RdmList Keyword To get the RdmList keyword in the command line, type RdmList or the shortcut RdmL in the command line. Description The RdmList keyword generates a list of the received RDM data. The list is displayed in the command line feedback window. If no fixture or channel ID is given, all RDM data will be listed. The RdmList keyword is a function keyword. Syntax RdmList [Channel / Fixture] [ID] / [Option] = [Option value] Options To get a list all available options to the RdmList keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmList /? The RdmList has the following options: Option shortcut Option filename f multipatch m Option value e.g. "data" e.g. 3 Description Generates the RDM list in the temp folder called data.txt. If no filename is given, the filename is called RDM.txt. Generates the RDM list only for the third multipatch fixture. no e.g. shortcut Generates the RDM list for this specific UID. "43500F019FCB" available UID Examples To get the RDM list of fixture 3 in the command line feedback window, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmList Fixture 3 To get the RDM list of fixture 3 in the command line feedback window and as a .txt file called RDM Fixture 3 in the temp folder, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 635 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> RdmList Fixture 3 / filename = "RDM Fixture 3" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 636 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.233.RdmSetParameter Keyword To get the RdmSetParameter keyword in the command line, type RdmSetParameter in the command line or use the shortcut RdmS. Description With the RdmSetParameter keyword you can set RDM parameters by using the command line. If no Unique ID is given, the fixture selection will be used. The RdmSetParameter keyword is a function keyword. Syntax RdmSetParameter [Parameter ID ] [Parameter Value] / [Option] = [Option value] Parameter ID (= PID) You can enter the PIDs in the command line by using the PID name or the PID hex number. Important: If you enter manufacturer specific PIDs or PID values in the command line, it is necessary to use the hex value. A manufacturer specific PID name or PID value name can not be processed from a grandMA2 command line. The following table lists the supported PIDs along with the command line and the parameter value. The PIDs will be processed only, if the RDM device supports the PID. PID name PID hex PID value name value CLEAR_STATUS_ID 0x0032 No value. DEVICE_HOURS 0x0400 32 bit number. DEVICE_LABEL 0x0082 ASCII text label. Up to 32 characters. PID value hex Description value Clears the status --message queue. Retrieves or sets the --number of hours of operation. Provides a means of --setting a descriptive label for each device. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 637 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English PID name PID hex PID value name value DEVICE_POWER_CYCLES 0x0405 Power Cycle Count (32-bit) DISPLAY_INVERT Off 0x0500 On Auto DISPLAY_LEVEL 0x0501 Display Level DMX_PERSONALITY 0x00E0 DMX_START_ADDRESS 0x00F0 DMX512 Address (16-bit). FACTORY_DEFAULTS 0x0090 False True IDENTIFY_DEVICE 0x1000 Off, Stop On, Start LAMP_HOURS 0x0401 Lamp Hours (32-bit) Current Personality # of Personalities PID value hex Description value Retrieves or sets the number of power-up cycles. Some devices may only support the --GET_COMMAND for this operation and not allow the device’s power-up cycles to be set. Retrieves or changes the 0x00 display invert setting. 0x01 Invert is often used to 0x02 rotate the display image by 180 degrees. Manufacturer specific. See Retrieves or changes the fixture display intensity setting. manual. Sets the responder’s DMX512 personality. Many devices such as moving lights have --different DMX512 personalities. Many RDM parameters may be affected by changing personality. Sets the DMX512 start --address Reverts the device to its 0x00 factory default user 0x01 settings or configuration. Physically identifies the 0x00 device represented by 0x01 the UID. Retrieves the number of lamp hours or to sets the --counter to a specific start value. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 638 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English PID name PID hex PID value name value LAMP_ON_MODE 0x0404 LAMP_STATE 0x0403 LAMP_STRIKES 0x0402 LANGUAGE 0x00B0 PAN_INVERT 0x0600 PAN_TILT_SWAP 0x0602 PERFORM_SELFTEST POWER_STATE REAL_TIME_CLOCK RECORD_SENSORS PID value hex Description value Retrieves or changes the LAMP_ON_MODE_OFF 0x00 current Lamp On Mode. LAMP_ON_MODE_DMX 0x01 The Lamp On Mode LAMP_ON_MODE_ON 0x02 defines the conditions LAMP_ON_MODE_AFTER_CAL 0x03 under which a lamp will Manufacturer-Specific Modes 0x80 – 0xDF be struck. LAMP_OFF 0x00 LAMP_ON 0x01 LAMP_STRIKE 0x02 Retrieves or changes the LAMP_STANDBY 0x03 current operating state LAMP_NOT_PRESENT 0x04 of the lamp. LAMP_ERROR 0x7F Manufacturer Specific States 0x80 – 0xDF Retrieves the number of lamp strikes or to sets Lamp Strikes (32-bit) --the counter to a specific start value. 2 character alpha code for Changes the language --ISO 639-1 of the messages. Off On 0x00 0x01 Retrieves or changes the pan invert setting. Off On SELF_TEST_OFF 0x1020 Manufacturer Tests SELF_TEST_ALL POWER_STATE_FULL_OFF POWER_STATE_SHUTDOWN 0x1010 POWER_STATE_STANDBY POWER_STATE_NORMAL Year (16-bit), Month, Day, 0x0603 Hour, Minute, Second 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x01 – 0xFE 0xFF 0x00 0x01 0x02 0xFF Retrieves or changes the pan/tilt swap setting. Executes any built in self-test routine that may be present. 0x0202 Sensor Number --- --- © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com Retrieves or changes the power state. Retrieves or set the realtime clock in a device. Instructs devices such as dimming racks that monitor load changes to store the current value for monitoring sensor changes. 639 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English PID name RESET_DEVICE SENSOR_VALUE TILT_INVERT PID hex PID value name value Warm Reset 0x1001 Cold Reset Sensor #, Present Value (16bit), Lowest Detected Value 0x0201 (16-bit), Highest Detected Value (16-bit), Recorded Value (16-bit) Off 0x0601 On PID value hex Description value 0x01 Resets the responder. 0xFF --- Retrieves or reset sensor data. 0x00 0x01 Retrieves or changes the tilt invert setting. Options To get a list all available options to the RdmSetParameter keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmSetParameter /? The RdmSetParameter has the following options: Option shortcut Option multipatch m No shortcut available UID Option value 0 = multipatch for all fixtures 1 = multipatch for one fixture and so on e.g. "43500F019FCB" Description Sets the multipatch index. Sets the RDM UID to send RDM Parameter to the device. Examples To set the DMX start address to 3 of a RDM device, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmSetParameter dmx_start_address 3 / UID = 43500F019FCB To invert the display of a RDM device for the selected fixture, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmSetParameter display_invert 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 640 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.234.RdmSetpatch Keyword To get the RdmSetPatch keyword in the command line, type RdmSetPatch or the shortcut RdmSetPat in it. Description With the RdmSetPatch keyword you set the DMX address of a RDM fixture by using the command line. If no Unique ID is given, the fixture selection will be used. The RdmSetPatch keyword is a function keyword. For more information, see RDM. Syntax RdmSetPatch [DMX address] / [Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list all available options to the RdmSetPatch keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmSetPatch /? The RdmSetpatch has the following options: Option shortcut Option multipatch m No shortcut available UID Option value Description 0 = for all multipatches and the fixture 1 = multipatch for the first multipatch fixture and so on Sets the multipatch index. e.g. "43500F019FCB" Sets the RDM UID to send RDM Parameter to the device. Examples To set the fixtures of the current fixture selection to the DMX address 25, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmSetPatch 25 To set the fifth multipatch fixture of the current fixture selection to the DMX address 25, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 641 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> RdmSetPatch 25 / multipatch = 5 To set the DMX address of the fixture with the UID 43500F019FCB to 25, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmSetPatch 25 / UID = 43500F019FCB © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 642 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.235.RdmUnmatch Keyword To get the RdmUnmatch keyword in the command line, type RdmUnmatch or the shortcut Rdm in the command line. Description The RdmUnmatch keyword unmatches previous matched RDM devices in the show file. If no object is given, the current selection will be used. Possible objects are: Channel Fixture FixtureType RDMFixtureType Group Sequence Cue Executor Preset (only selective Presets) Selection World The RdmUnmatch keyword is a function keyword. Syntax RDMUnmatch [Object-List] Examples To unmatch the selected fixtures, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmUnmatch To unmatch the fixtures used in group 1, type in the command line: [Channel]> RdmUnmatch Group 1 To unmatch the fixtures used in group 1 and in sequence 2, type in the command line: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 643 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> RdmUnmatch Group 1 If Sequence 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 644 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.236.Reboot Keyword To go to the Reboot keyword, type Reboot in the command line or use the shortcut R. Description The Reboot keyword, shutdown the station and boot it up again. If the station is a session member, the reboot a confirmation pop-up opens on the local station. If the confirmation is missing, after 10 seconds the reboot function will be executed. The Reboot keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Reboot / [option] Reboot [station-list] / [option] Options To get the list of the available options to the reboot keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line. [Channel]> Reboot /? The reboot keyword has the following options. Option save nosave noconfirm force Option Shortcut s ns nc f Description Saves the show file before reboot. Do not saves the show file before reboot. Suppress reboot confirmation pop-up. Forces a reboot. Examples Reboot the current console. [Channel]> Reboot © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 645 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Reboot a station with the IP address 192.168.0.32 in the network. [Channel]> Reboot 192.168.0.32 Hint: To be faster, type only the part of the IP address in the command line what is differently. If the console which sends the command has the IP address 192.168.0.11, the command Reboot 32 is enough. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 646 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.237.Record Keyword To get the Record keyword in the command line, press + Store (= Record). You can also type Record or the shortcut Rec in the command line. Description The Record keyword records real time actions as timecodes or macros. For more information, see record a timecode show or record a macro. It toggles between start and stop. The Record keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Record [Object] Examples Start to record executor actions as timecode 1. [Channel]> Record Timecode 1 Stop all running timecode records from the timecode pools. [Channel]> Record Timecode Start to record command line actions as macro 5. The macro record icon is visible in the command line, if in the message center options for macro status yes selected is. The keys Learn and Macro are flashing. [Channel]> Record Macro 5 Stops all running macro records from the macro pools. [Channel]> Record Macro Record the receiving timecode as trig time by calling the cue, if the selected trigger is timecode. The timecode record icon is visible in the command line. [Channel]> Record Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 647 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Turn off the timecode executor record from executor 1. [Channel]> Record Off Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 648 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.238.Release Keyword To go to the Release keyword, press Delete Delete Delete (= Release). You can also type Release in the command line or use the shortcut Rel. Description The Release keyword enters release values in the programmer for attributes by the given object list, filtered by the current selection. Release values used with a store merge, release previous tracked values from the tracking list and the fixtures uses their default values. If you release an object, the release is applied to the value layer. If you release an effect, the release is applied to the effect layer for the running effect attributes. The effect form release is used. Syntax Release [Object-list] Release [Effect-list] Examples Enter release values in the programmer for all attributes of the fixture selection in the value layer. A (R) is displayed in the value layer. [Channel]> Release Selection Enter release values in the programmer for pan and tilt attributes of the fixture selection. [Channel]> Release PresetType "position" Enter release values in the programmer for the running effect 4 . [Channel]> Release Effect 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 649 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Hint: To enter release values in the programmer for effects you could also type in the command line, At Form 2. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 650 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.239.ReloadPlugins Keyword Important: The creation and use of plugins can go deeper into the system as the normal use of a console. Therefore the technical support team of MA Lighting may not be able to help you in all circumstances when using complex LUA plugins. LUA plugins might have to be rewritten when migrating show files to future grandMA2 software version. To go to the ReloadPlugins keyword, type ReloadPlugins or the shortcut Relo in the command line. Description The ReloadPlugins keyword restarts the LUA engine. The restart of the LUA engine is necessary after you did any changes regarding LUA because this could change how the LUA behaves. You may want to test the integrity of the LUA system to make sure that it behaves as expected also next time you load the show. This is important as the saved show file does not contain a snapshot of the LUA memory, it only contains the inbuilt functions and the code in the defined plugins. When the show file is loaded, the LUA engine and plugins code are (re)loaded, which may result in a different state than when you switched off the console or saved the show. The ReloadPlugins keyword is a function keyword. Hint: Double-check the executed command in the system monitor. Syntax ReloadPlugins Example Restart the LUA engine after LUA programming. [Channel]> ReloadPlugins © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 651 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.240.Remote Keyword To go to the Remote keyword, type Remote in the command line or use the shortcut Rem. Description The Remote keyword is an object keyword to access the remote input types. You can store or delete remote input types and assign parameters. For more information, see What are Remote Inputs? and Set up Remote Inputs. Syntax [Function] Remote [Remote Input Type ID] . [ID] Assign Remote [Remote Input Type ID] . [ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] The following table displays the available remote input types along with their remote input type ID. Remote Input Type Analog Remote MIDI Remote DMX Remote Remote Input Type ID 1 2 3 If you store a remote input type, the IDs needs to be in an order and beginning from 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 652 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameter via the command line, using the Assign keyword. Parameter name Only for analog remote: input Only for MIDI remote: note Only for MIDI remote: channel Only for DMX remote: DMX Parameter Value "remote name" Description Assign the remote name. 1...64 Assign the input from the conntected DC remote control. 0...1023 Assign the MIDI note. 1...16 or "All" Assign the MIDI channel. 1.001 to 256.512 [universe]. [dmx address] Assign DMX universe and address. type "None", "Exec", "CMD", "Hardkey" Only for DMX remote: "Programmer" Assign the type of action the console does when the contact is active. page 0...9999 or "current" For type Exec. Assign the executor page number. Current is for the active page. 1...220 For type Exec. Assign the executor number. "Button 3", "Button 2", For type Exec. Assign the button or fader the "Button 1", "Fader" console should activate. "every hardkey", e.g. "X1", For type Hardkey. Assign the hardkey the "Go", "List" console should activate. "a command" e.g. "Group For type CMD. Assign the command the 1" console should execute. "additional information" Assign additional information. executor button keycode cmd info Examples Store new DMX remote. [Channel]> Store Remote 3.1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 653 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Assign an existing remote a DMX address, a remote type and a command. [Channel]> Assign Remote 3.1 /dmx=5.1 /type=cmd /cmd="Group 1" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 654 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.241.RemoteCommand Keyword To go to the RemoteCommand keyword, type RemoteCommand in the command line or use the shortcut RemoteC. Description The RemoteCommand keyword executes commands at a specific console. RemoteCommand is a function keyword. Syntax RemoteCommand [IP address] "Command" Examples Call view 3 at the station with the IP address 192.168.0.4. [Channel]> RemoteCommand 192.168.0.4 "View 3" Start macro 4 only on a specific console. [Channel]> RemoteCommand 192.168.0.4 "Macro 4" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 655 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.242.Remove Keyword To go to the Remove keyword, press Delete Delete (= Remove). You can also type Remove in the command line or use the shortcut Remov. Description The Remove keyword enters remove values in the programmer for attributes by the given object list, filtered by the current selection. Remove values used with a store merge function, removes previous stored values. If a stored value is removed, values from the previous cue will be tracked again. The remove values are applied to all layers by default. Syntax Remove [Object-list] Remove [Effect-list] Examples Enter remove values in all layers for all attributes of the current selection. [Channel]> Remove Selection Enter remove values for pan and tilt in all layers for the current selection, or for all fixtures if no selection. [Channel]> Remove PresetType "position" Enter remove values for dimmer attribute for fixture 1. [Channel]> Remove Fixture 1 If PresetType 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 656 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.243.RemoveIndividuals Keyword To get the RemoveIndividuals keyword in the command line, type RemoveIndividuals or the shortcut Removei in the command line. Description RemoveIndividuals is a command used to delete individual values of effects and effect lines. Syntax RemoveIndividuals [Object-list] Important: If you type the command into the command line, a warning pop-up appears. Note that removing individual settings of an effect alters the effect altogether. For more information see the example in Use predefined effects. Example: [Channel]> RemoveIndividuals Effect 1 Thru 10 Removes the individual values in effect 1 through 10. [Channel]> RemoveIndividuals Effect 1.11.2 /nc Removes the individual values in the second effect line of the effect 11 without confirmation. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 657 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.244.Replace Keyword To get the Replace keyword in the command line, press Move Move (= Replace). You can also type Replace or the shortcut Rep in the command line. Description The replace keyword replaces object and values. For more information, see search and replace. The replace keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Replace [search for objects] With [replace with objects] ( If [search in objects] ) Examples Add 10° to all pan values in all cues and presets. [Channel]> Replace Attribute "Pan" At - 270 Thru 270 With - 260 Thru 280 Subtract 10 % from all dimmer values in all cues from sequences 3. [Channel]> Replace Attribute "Dim" At 0 Thru 100 With 0 Thru 90 If Sequence 3 Replace the individual fade time of 5 by 10 for attribute tilt. [Channel]> Replace Attribute "Tilt" Fade 5 with Fade 10 Hint: If you would like to replace two fixtures with each other, use a third fixture. See the examples below this box. Replace fixtures with each other in three steps: 1. Replace fixture 2 with 3. [Channel]> Replace Fixture 2 with 3 2. Replace fixture 1 with 2. [Channel]> Replace Fixture 1 with 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 658 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. Replace fixture 3 with 1. [Channel]> Replace Fixture 3 with 1 Delete a specific fixture from everywhere where it is linked to. [Channel]> Replace Fixture 1 With © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 659 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.245.ResetDmxSelection Keyword To go to the ResetDmxSelection keyword, type ResetDmxSelection in the command line or use the shortcut ResetD. Description The ResetDmxSelection keyword clears the selection in the DMX tester. ResetDmxSelection is a function keyword. Syntax ResetDmxSelection Example Reset DMX Selection in the DMX tester. [Channel]> ResetDmxSelection © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 660 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.246.ResetGuid keyword To execute the keyword, type ResetGuid or the shortcut Rese into the command line. Description ResetGuid resets the identifiers that are unique in every object. This command is mainly used with the Partial Show Read. For more information see How to do a PSR. Important: Note that once executed, there is no opportunity to reverse this command! Once the command was entered into the command line and Please was pressed, the following pop-up appears: Attention pop-up – keyword ResetGuid To reset the identifiers, tap Ok . To abort the execution of the command, tap Cancel or the in the upper right corner of the pop-up. Syntax ResetGuid ​E xample [Channel}> ResetGuid Resets the identifiers of the objects. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 661 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 662 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.247.Restart Keyword To go to the Restart keyword, type Restart in the command line or use the shortcut Res. Description The Restart keyword restarts the application. This is the same as close the program and open it again. A restart is necessary after an IP address change. The Restart keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Restart Restart [IP address] / [option] Options To get the list of the available options to the restart keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line. [Channel]> Restart /? The restart keyword has the following options. Option save nosave noconfirm force Option Shortcut s ns nc f Description Saves the show file before restart. Do not saves the show file before restart. Suppress restart confirmation pop-up. Forces a restart. Examples Restart the application of the console. [Channel]> Restart © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 663 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Restart the application of the console with the IP address 192.168.0.32 in the network. [Channel]> Restart 192.168.0.32 Hint: To be faster, type only the part of the IP address in the command line what is differently. If the console which sends the command has the IP address 192.168.0.11, type Restart 32 only. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 664 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.248.Root Keyword To go to the Root keyword, type Root in the command line or use the shortcut Roo. Description The Root keyword access the root in the object tree. Important: We recommend to use the actual root index name. If you use root index numbers, it is necessary to double-check after every release if the root index number is still valid. If the root index number changed, you need to adjust the macros. The Root keyword is an object keyword. Syntax Root [root-index] Root [root-index] . [sub-index] Root [root-index] . [sub-index] . [sub-sub-index] etc Examples Change the destination of the command line to DMX_Protocols/Art-Net. [Channel]> ChangeDest Root DMX_Protocols.Art-Net Export all live setup layers from the grandMA2 onPC to the folder C:\ProgramData\MA Lighting Technologies\grandma\gma2_V_3.1\fixture_layers. [Channel]> Export Root LiveSetup.Layers Hint: Another way to export layers is, press Setup I tap Patch only (Live) I tap Export Layer . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 665 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.249.Rotate3D Keyword To go to the Rotate3D keyword, type Rotate3D in the command line or use the shortcut Ro. Description The Rotate3D keyword rotates 3D objects in the Stage View. If the Rotate3D keyword is used without values, the rotation of the selected fixtures will be reset to zero. If the option relative is used, the rotate function uses the relative rotation position. Rotate3D is a function keyword. Syntax Rotate3D At [x y z] /relative Example Rotate the selected 3D object in the Stage View. [Channel]> Rotate3D At 2.5 -5 3.3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 666 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.250.SaveShow Keyword To go to the SaveShow keyword, type SaveShow in the command line or use the shortcut Sa. Description The SaveShow keyword saves the show on the selected drive. For more information, see SelectDrive Keyword. If no show name is entered, the show will be saved with the current show name. If already an other show file exist with the entered show name, the console asks if you want to overwrite the existing show file or cancel. The SaveShow keyword is a function keyword. Syntax SaveShow "Showname" /noconfirm The option noconfirm suppress the save show confirmation pop-up. Examples Save the show as "Macbeth". [Channel]> SaveShow "Macbeth" Save the show. [Channel]> SaveShow Hint: To save the show file by a shortcut, press Backup Backup . © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 667 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.251.Screen Keyword To get the Screen keyword in the command line, press + View (= Screen). You can also type Screen or the shortcut Scr in the command line . Description The Screen keyword represents the screens. The Screen keyword is an object keyword. Syntax Screen [screen-number] Screen [screen-number].[window-number] Example Clear screen 2 to get an empty screen. [Channel]> Delete Screen 2 Hint: Another way to clear the screen is, press and hold the key and tap Clear Screen . Assigns mask 5 to the third window of the second screen. [Channel]> Assign Mask 5 Screen 2.3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 668 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.252.Search Keyword To get the Search keyword in the command line, press + Move (= Search). You can also type Search or the shortcut Sea in the command line. Description The Search Keyword searches for objects and values in the show. For more information see search and replace. Information: If you search only for a value, it will be searched for dimmer attributes. The Search keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Search [search for objects] ( At [search values] ) If [search in objects] Example Search for places in which fixtures 1 through 10 are used, e.g. presets, groups, or sequences. Type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Search Fixture 1 Thru 10 A search pop-up opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 669 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Search results For more information on the search function and further examples see Search. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 670 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.253.SearchResult Keyword To get the SearchResult keyword in the command line, press and hold + Group Group (= SearchResult). You can also type SearchResult or the shortcut SR in the command line. Description The SearchResult keyword opens the world search result after an executed search command. The search result world includes only the fixtures or channels from the last search command. Fixture Sheet World Search Result To close the SearchResult world, select another world in the world pool. To select all fixtures from the last search command, use the SelFix SearchResult. Hint: You can also use the Selfix Search Result button and/or the World Search Result button in the title bar of the search result pop-up. The SearchResult keyword is a function keyword. Syntax SearchResult SelFix SearchResult Search [object-list] If SearchResult Examples Opens the search result world with the fixtures from the last search command. [Channel]> SearchResult © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 671 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Select only the fixtures from the last search result. [Channel]> SelFix SearchResult Search in the last search result for fixtures with the attribute green at 20. [Channel]> Search Fixture Thru Attribute "G" At 20 If SearchResult © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 672 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.254.Select Keyword To get the Select keyword in the command line, press Select . You can also type Select or the shortcut Se in the command line. Description The Select keyword, selects objects as default objects. The selected executor is the target for all executor related commands, e.g. Store Cue 4. The selected executor is displayed in the master section in indicated by green color. The selected executor is displayed in the Sequence Executor and Sequence Tracking Sheet, if the Link Mode is Link Selected. The selected layout is displayed in the Layout View, if the Layout Selection is Link Selected. For more information, see layouts. The selected mask is used by any sheet (except DMX sheet), if the option Follow Selected Mask is On. The selected filter is used by any action involving fixture parameters, e.g. store or delete a cue. The selected timer is displayed in the clock, if the option Select Timer is Link Selected. The selected timecode slot is displayed in the clock, if the option Select TC Slot is Link Selected. The selected timecode is displayed in the timecode view, if the option Timecode is Link Selected. The selected camera is displayed in the stage view and in the MA 3D, if the Camera Selection is Link Selected. Syntax Select [Executor-object] Select Layout [ID] Select Mask [ID] Select Filter [ID] Select TimecodeSlot [ID] Select Timecode [ID] Select Timer [ID] Select Camera [ID] Examples © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 673 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Select executor 5 as the default. [Channel]> Select Executor 5 Select layout 2 in the layout view. Requirement: Layout Selection is set to Link Selected. [Channel]> Select Layout 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 674 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.255.SelectDrive Keyword To get the SelectDrive keyword in the command line, type SelectDrive or the shortcut SD in the command line. Description The SelectDrive keyword select the drive in the Backup Menu, for the following functions: SaveShow LoadShow Import Export If the SelectDrive keyword is executed standalone, the available showfile drives, mounted USB-sticks and earlier software installations will be listed along with their ID in the command line feedback window. If a read only media (like older installations) is selected, write functions will change the selected drive to 1 (Internal). The SelectDrive keyword is a function keyword. Syntax SelectDrive [ID] Examples Display all available drives in the command line feedback window. [Channel]> SelectDrive Load demoshow "demo dimmer and more". [Channel]> SelectDrive 2; LoadShow "demo dimmer and more" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 675 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.256.Selection Keyword To go to the Selection keyword, press Fixture Fixture (= Selection). You can also type Selection in the command line or use the shortcut Selecti. Description The Selection keyword represent the current channels and fixtures selection in the programmer. The Selection keyword is an object keyword. Syntax Selection Example Knockout all programmer values of the current fixture selection from the programmer. [Channel]> Off Selection © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 676 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.257.SelFix Keyword To go to the SelFix keyword, press Select Select (= SelFix). You can also type SelFix in the command line or use the shortcut SelF. Description The SelFix keyword creates fixture selections in the programmer. If fixtures are only selected, the SelFix keyword adds additional fixtures to the selection. If fixtures are selected and active in the programmer, the SelFix keyword replaces the selection by the SelFix selection. If the exact same SelFix command is used multiple times in a row, the second command starts to activate values in the programmer, the third deactivates the values in the programmer. SelFix is the default function for the most objects, e.g. Fixture or Channel. SelFix is a function keyword. To clear the selection, press Clear . Syntax SelFix [Object-list] Examples Select all fixtures or channels stored in a sequence on executor 1. [Channel]> SelFix Executor 1 Select all fixtures stored in preset 1. [Channel]> SelFix Preset 1 Select all fixtures used in effect 3. [Channel]> SelFix Effect 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 677 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.258.Semicolon ; Character To get the ; semicolon in the command line, press ; . Description The semicolon separates multiple commands. Important: In front and after the ; semicolon has to be a space. If the space is missing, the console executes the first command and the further commands will be dropped. Example To turn off executor 5 and delete group 3, enter in the command line: [Channel]> Off Executor 5 ; Delete Group 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 678 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.259.Sequence Keyword To get the Sequence keyword in the command line, press Sequ . You can also type Sequence or the shortcut Seq in the command line . Description The default function of the sequence keyword is SelFix. If the Sequence keyword is used with an ID, all fixtures in the sequence will be selected. If the Sequence keyword is used with a function, the function will be passed on to the object child cue. Syntax Sequence [ID] Sequence [Sequence pool].[ID] Example Select all fixtures used in sequence 5. [Channel]> Sequence 5 Block all cues of sequence 5. [Channel]> Block Sequence 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 679 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.260.SetHostname Keyword To get the SetHostname keyword in the command line, type SetHostname in the command line. Description The SetHostname keyword, sets the station name of the console. Important: The SetHostname keyword works only on grandMA2 consoles. It is not possible to change the station name in a grandMA2 onPC. The station name on a grandMA2 onPC is the computer name.To change the station name on a grandMA2 onPC you need to change the computer name. The SetHostname keyword is a function keyword. Syntax SetHostname "text" Example Change the host name to grandMA2. [Channel]> SetHostname "grandMA2" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 680 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.261.SetIP Keyword To execute keyword SetIP type SetIP into the command line. Description The SetIP keyword changes the IP address of the Ethernet interfaces of the console or station. If SetIP is used standalone, the command line feedback window lists the available Ethernet interfaces with their IP addresses. A grandMA2 console has two network interfaces, eth0 and eth1, which are on the back of the console labeled as Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2. Important: To apply the changed IP address, a reboot is necessary. Hint: Another way to change the IP address of the Ethernet-interfaces of the console or station is, press Setup I tap MA Network Configuration I column IP ETHERCON 1(ETH0) or IP ETHERCON 2 (ETH1). For more information see Networking - Set the IP address in onPC. Syntax SetIP [network interface] [IP address] / [option] = [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the SetIP keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line [Channel]> SetIP /? The SetIP keyword has the following options. Option mask dhcp gateway Shortcut m not available not available noconfirm nc Option Value e.g. 255.0.0.0 no option value e.g. 192.168.0.1 no option value Description Sets the subnet mask of the Ethernet adapter. Enables DHCP for the Ethernet adapter. Sets the default gateway for the Ethernet adapter. Suppress the SetIP confirmation pop-up. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 681 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Example: [Channel]> SetIP eth0 192.168.0.5 Sets the IP address of the first Ethernet interface. [Channel]> SetIP eth0 /DHCP Activates DHCP client which takes over the IP address automatically from the server. [Channel]> SetIP eth1 2.0.0.10 /mask=255.0.0.0 Sets IP address and network mask for the second Ethernet interface. [Channel]> SetIP Lists available Ethernet interfaces along with their IP addresses in the command line feedback window. Important: Do not use DHCP on eth1, unless you are a skilled network operator. For more information on what DHCP is see the Glossary. For more information on how to use DHCP see Using DHCP in MA devices. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 682 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.262.SetNetworkSpeed Keyword To go to the SetNetworkSpeed keyword, type SetNetworkSpeed in the command line or use the shortcut SNS. Description The SetNetworkSpeed keyword, changes the port speed of the first network adapter of grandMA2 consoles and MA NPU. It makes sense to reduce the port speed, if grandMA series 2 devices are together with grandMA series 1 devices. Important: To apply the changed port speed by using the SetNetworkSpeed keyword, a restart is necessary. If you do not restart the device, the new port speed is not applied. Hint: To double-check the link speed, use the NetworkInfo keyword or press Setup I column Network I tap MA Network Control I column Link Speed. The SetNetworkSpeed keyword is a function keyword. Syntax SetNetworkSpeed 100 [IP address] SetNetworkSpeed 1000 [IP address] Example Set the port speed of the first network adapter to 100 Mbit. [Channel]> SetNetworkSpeed 100 192.168.0.32 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 683 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.263.Setup Keyword To get the Setup keyword in the command line, type Setup or the shortcut Set in the command line. Description The Setup keyword opens or closes the setup menu. Open Setup Hint: Another way to open or close the Setup is, press the Setup key. The Setup keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Setup Example Open the setup menu. [Channel]> Setup © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 684 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 685 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.264.SetUserVar Keyword To get the SetUserVar keyword in the command line, type SetUserVar or the shortcut SetUs in the command line. Description The SetUserVar keyword sets user profile specific variables. For more information, see Macros - Use Variables. Syntax SetUserVar $variablename = numericvalue SetUserVar $variablename = "text" SetUserVar $variablename = ("text") SetUserVar $variablename = nothing Hint: To see the set user variables in the command line feedback window, use the ListUserVar keyword. Examples Create a macro in the macro pool that asks "Cue number to store?", stores and labels the cue for the selected executor. 1. Open the Macro Pool. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 686 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2. Press Edit and tap on a empty macro pool tile. The Edit Macro pop-up opens. Edit Macro Pop-Up 3. Tap Add . The Edit CMD pop-up opens. Edit CMD (= Command) Pop-Up 4. Type SetUserVar $CueNumber = ("Cue number to store?") 5. Type Store Cue $CueNumber 6. Type Label Cue $CueNumber The macro is ready to use. Delete a variable. [Channel]> SetUserVar $CueNumber = © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 687 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 688 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.265.SetVar Keyword To go to the SetVar keyword, type SetVar in the command line or use the shortcut SetV. Description The SetVar keyword sets global show variables. Every user profile can use these variables. For more information, see Macros - Use Variables. Syntax SetVar $variablename = numericvalue SetVar $variablename = "text" SetVar $variablename = ("text") SetVar $variablename = nothing Hint: To see the set variables in the command line feedback window, use the ListVar keyword. Examples Create a macro in the macro pool that asks "Which song?", and opens the respective page. 1. Open the Macro Pool. 2. Press Edit and tap on a empty macro pool tile. The Edit Macro pop-up opens. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 689 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Edit Macro Pop-Up 3. Tap Add . The Edit CMD pop-up opens. Edit CMD (= Command) Pop-Up 4. Type SetVar $Songname = ("Which song?") Important: Quotes are necessary to indicate a text string. If you do not indicate a text string by quotes, the console interprets the text as commands. 5. Type Page $"Songname" The macro is ready to use. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 690 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Delete a variable. [Channel]> SetVar $CueNumber = © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 691 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.266.ShuffleSelection Keyword To get the ShuffleSelection keyword in the command line, type ShuffleSelection or the shortcut Shuf in the command line . Description The ShuffleSelection keyword mix-up the order of the selected fixture or channel. Hint: Another ways to shuffle the selection is, - go to the Tools menu and tap a Shuffle Selection Order or - use the predefined macro ShuffleSelection. Syntax ShuffleSelection Example Mix-up the order of the selected fixtures or channels. [Channel]> ShuffleSelection © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 692 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.267.ShuffleValues Keyword To get the ShuffleValues keyword in the command line, type ShuffleValues or the shortcut ShuffleV in the command line . Description The ShuffleValues keyword mix-up the values of the selected fixtures or channels. Hint: To deselect attributes from the shuffle values keyword, press and hold the At key and use the At filter. Hint: Another way to shuffle values is, open the Tools menu and tap Shuffle Values . The ShuffleValues keyword is a function keyword. Syntax ShuffleValues ( If [Attribute list] ) Example Mix up the values of the fixture selection. [Channel]> ShuffleValues Mix up the pan and tilt values of the fixture selection. [Channel]> ShuffleValues If PresetType "Position" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 693 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.268.Shutdown Keyword To go to the Shutdown keyword, type Shutdown in the command line or use the shortcut Sh. Description The shutdown keyword switches the grandMA2 console off or close the grandMA2 onPC. A shutdown needs a confirmation at the local station. The shutdown can be canceled on a remote station within 10 seconds. Syntax Shutdown Shutdown [station-list] / [option] Options To get the list of the available options to the shutdown keyword in the command line feedback window, type in the command line. [Channel]> Shutdown /? The shutdown keyword has the following options. Option save nosave noconfirm force Option Shortcut s ns nc f Description Saves the show file. Do not saves the show file. Suppress shutdown confirmation pop-up. Forces a shutdown. Examples 1. Switch station off, by using the IP address. [Channel]> Shutdown 192.168.0.10 2. Switch station off, by using the host ID of the network. [Channel]> Shutdown 10 3. Switch current console off. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 694 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Shutdown © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 695 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.269.SnapPercent Keyword To get the SnapPercent keyword in the command line by using the keys, it is necessary to press another function key before, e.g. Store and then five times Time . You can also type, SnapPercent or the shortcut Sn in the command line. Description Important: To use the SnapPercent it is necessary that attributes of the fixture types must have Snap On. Go to the Patch & Fixture Schedule I Fixture Types. Select a fixture type and click Edit , in the column Snap select On. With the SnapPercent keyword, you set a snap time in percent. The snap time is a delay time for not fading attributes, eg. gobo or colorwheel. Hint: To see the assigned snap percent, press Edit and then the executor button. The edit executor pop-up opens. In the table is a column snap percent, what displays the assigned snap percent. Syntax SnapPercent [Value-list] Examples Store a cue with a snap percent of 4. [Channel]> Store Cue 1 SnapPercent 4 Assign a snap percent to an existing cue. [Channel]> Assign Cue 1 SnapPercent 4 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 696 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.270.Slash / Character To get the slash / in the command line, press / . Description The slash separates entered object properties or parameter options. The slash along with the function ChangeDest changes the destinations to the root level. For more information, see ChangeDest keyword. The slash along with a keyword and a question mark displays all available options to the keyword in the command line feedback window. Syntax [keyword] /? Assign [object-list] /parameter = parameter value [commandline-syntax] /option1 /option2 /option3 = value Examples To display the available options to the copy keyword in the command line feedback window: 1. Type in the command line: [Channel]> Copy /? 2. Press Please . The copy options are displayed in the command line feedback window. Figure 1: Command line feedback window - copy options To change the parameters for cue 5 on the selected executor: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 697 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 1. Type in the command line: [Channel]> Assign Cue 5 /mib = early /trig = follow 2. Press Please . The parameters are assigned to cue 5 on the selected executor. To exit the structure tree and go back to the root level: 1. Type in the command line: [Edit Setup/Universes]> CD / 2. Press Please . You are back in the root level. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 698 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.271.Solo Keyword To get the Solo keyword in the command line, type Solo or the shortcut So in the command line. If you press Solo , the command will be directly executed. Description The Solo keyword forces zero values for intensity output for attributes of all unselected fixtures or channels. Only the selected fixtures or channels will have intensity output for attributes. To remove a fixture from the solo function, go to the Setup I Patch & Fixture Schedule. In the column React to Master remove the On. If Solo is used standalone, it toggles between Solo On and Solo Off. If Solo is on and in the message center options yes is selected for Solo the status, the solo icon the command line. is visible in The Solo keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Solo Solo On Solo Off Example Turn Solo on. [Channel]> Solo On © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 699 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.272.SpecialMaster Keyword To enter the keyword SpecialMaster, press Exec Exec (= SpecialMaster). Type SpecialMaster into the command line or use the shortcut SM. Description Specialmaster is an object type that holds predefined objects for global control. For more information on the 5 special master groups see Special masters. Syntax SpecialMaster [ID] SpecialMaster "GroupName" . "Name" Examples [Channel]> SpecialMaster "grandmaster" . "grand" At 50 Sets the grand master level to 50 %. [Channel}> Assign SpecialMaster 2.4 At Executor 15 Tuns the executor 15 into a fader to control the volume of the sound output. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 700 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.273.Square Brackets [ ] Character To enter square brackets [ ] into the command line press [ or ] . Description Square brackets [ ] are used in macros. For more information see macros. Using square brackets in macros sets a conditional expression which has to have the solution "True" to be able to execute the following commands. The expression takes user defined variables and logical operators. a==b a>b a<b a<=b a>=b a equals b a greater than b a less than b a less than or equals b a greater than or equals b Important: The two arguments a and b are treated as text strings and not as numbers – character by character. For example "61" is considered to be greater than "599", as 6 is greater than 5. Examples To turn off page 3 only if $myvar equals 5, type into the macro line: [$myvar==5]Off Page 3 To goto Cue 1 if $var is less than 5, and goto Cue 35 if $var is greater or equals 5, type into the macro line: Goto Cue [$var<5]1 [$var>=5]35 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 701 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.274.Speed Keyword To get the Speed keyword, type Speed or the shortcut Spee in the command line. Description With the Speed keyword, you assign faders the function speed. Speed adjust the effect speed in the cues and the speed of a chasers for the selected executor. The unit for the value is depending on the selected speed mode (BPM/Hz/Sec) in the Setup I User I Settings I Speed Mode. For more information see executors - assign a function. The Speed keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Assign Speed [Executor-list] Speed [Value] [Executor-list] Examples Requirement: A sequence or a chaser is assigned to the executor 28. After executing this command you are able to control the speed of the sequence or the chaser with a fader. [Channel]> Assign Speed Exec 28 Requirement: A sequence or a chaser is assigned to the executor 3. Sets speed of the sequence or chaser to 120. [Channel]> Speed 120 Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 702 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.275.StepFade Keyword To get the StepFade keyword, type StepFade or the shortcut Ste in the command line. Description With the StepFade keyword, you assign executors as a step fader. A step fader controls the fade time between the steps of a chaser. For more information, see executors - assign a function. The StepFade keyword is a function keyword. Syntax StepFade [Executor-list] Examples Assign executor 28 as a step fader. [Channel]> Assign StepFade Exec 28 Set the stepfade to 50 % on executor 3. [Channel]> StepFade 50 Exec 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 703 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.276.StepInFade Keyword To get the StepInFade keyword, type StepInFade or the shortcut StepI in the command line. Description The StepInFade keyword assigns executors as a step in fader. A step in fader controls the step in time of each step of a chaser. For more information, see executors - assign a function. Syntax StepInFade [Executor-list] StepInFade [Percent] Examples Assign existing executor 28 as a step in fader. [Channel]> Assign StepInFade Exec 28 Set the step in fade level to 50 % on executor 3. [Channel]> StepInFade 50 Executor 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 704 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.277.StepOutFade Keyword To get the StepOutFade keyword, type StepOutFade or the shortcut StepO in the command line. Description With the StepOutFade keyword, you assign executors as a step out fader. A step out fader controls the step out time of each step of a chaser. For more information, see executors - assign a function. The StepOutFade keyword is a function keyword. Syntax StepOutFade [Executor-list] StepOutFade [Percent] Examples Assign executor 28 as a step out fader. [Channel]> Assign StepOutFade Exec 28 Set the step out fader level to 50 % on executor 3. [Channel]> StepOutFade 50 Exec 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 705 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.278.Stomp Keyword To get the Stomp keyword in the command line, press and hold + At (= Stomp). You can also type Stomp in the command line or use the shortcut Stom. Description The Stomp keyword applies values and stops running effects. Stomp will be applied only if an effect is running. If no effect is running, stomp can not be applied. If you stomp channels, fixtures, or groups, all attributes of the selection will be stomped. If you stomp attributes, features, or preset types, the given attributes for the current fixture or channel selection will be stomped. If you stomp attributes, features, or preset types, without any fixture or channel selection, all fixtures or channels with running effect will be stomped. If you stomp a running effect, a stomp will be applied and added to the affected parameters. Syntax Stomp [Selection-list] Stomp [Attribute-list] Stomp [Value-list] Stomp [Object-list] Examples Set the dimmer attributes to 75 % and stop running dimmer effects of the current fixture selection. [Channel]> Stomp 75 Move the current fixture selection to preset "drummer" and stop the current running circle effect. [Channel]> Stomp Preset "drummer" Select fixture 2, set its dimmer to zero and stop the current running dimmer effects. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 706 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Fixture 2 Stomp 0 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 707 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.279.Store Keyword To go to the Store keyword, press Store . You can also type Store in the command line or use the shortcut S. Description The store keyword, stores functions in the show file. If no object-type or destination is given, the object-type Cue will be used for the sequence of the selected executor. Store is a function keyword. Syntax Store [object-list] "Name" / [option] = [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the store keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> Store /? The store keyword has the following options. Option Shortcut addnewcontent an not auto available cueonly co effects ef embedded e global g keepactive ka Option Option Value Description False, True False is the same as originalcontent. Stores preset values with the default preset scope. Prevents changes to track forward. Filters or enables effect layer. Creates embedded preset. Stores preset with global values. Keeps values active. Merges the new values into the existing values. New values have a higher priority and will overwrite existing values. If no new value is given, the values of the existing cue stays. Suppress stores confirmation pop-up. Stores the original content of the preset, effect, or cue. False is the same as addnewcontent. no option value False, True False, True False, True no option value False, True merge m no option value noconfirm nc no option value originalcontent or False, True © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 708 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Option Option Value Shortcut overwrite o no option value presetfilter False, True selective p not available not available s source so tracking t trackingshield universal ts u remove screen useselection values valuetimes x y no option value Description Removes stored values in the cue and stores the new values. Sets preset filter on or off. Removes stored values for attributes with active programmer values. 1..6 Stores view with selected screen. no option value Prog, Output, Dmx In Stores preset with selective values. False, True Defines data source. Stores with tracking. False is the same as cueonly. Use tracking shield for store. Stores preset with universal values. no option value no option value Active, Allforselected, use Sets selection. Activeforselected, All, Look v False, True Filters or enables value layer. vt False, True Filters or enables value times layer. x coordinate in not Sets the x coordinate in the layout view. the layout view, available For more information, see Layouts. e.g. -9.17441 y coordinate in not Sets the y coordinate in the layout view. the layout view, available For more information, see Layouts. e.g. 7.93822 Example 1. Store cue 7 in the sequence of the selected executor. For more information, see Store Cues. [Channel]> Store 7 2. Store dimmer preset 3 with all attributes and keep the values active in the programmer. For more information, see Store Presets. [Channel]> Store Preset 1.3 /presetfilter=false /ka © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 709 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 3. Store the programmer values as cue 1 through cue 10 and cue 20 through cue 30. [Channel]> Store Cue 1 Thru 10 + 20 Thru 30 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 710 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.280.StoreLook Keyword To go to the StoreLook keyword, type StoreLook in the command line or use the shortcut StoreL. Description StoreLook stores all dimmer values from all fixtures in the show. If the dimmer value is bigger than 0, it stores additional all further attributes. If the dimmer value is 0, it stores only the dimmer value because there is no further visible output. Hint: To exclude channels or fixtures from StoreLook, deactivate React to Master in the Patch & Fixtures Schedule. For more information, see What are the store options?. StoreLook is a function keyword. Syntax StoreLook [object] / [option] = [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the storelook keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> StoreLook /? The storelook keyword has the following options. Option append cueonly effects merge Option Option Shortcut Value no option a value co False, True ef False, True no option m value Description Adds new cue. Prevents changes to track forward. Filters or enables effect layer. Adds to existing content. originalcontent or False, True Stores the original content of the preset, effect, or cue. False is the same as addnewcontent. overwrite no option value Replace existing content. o © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 711 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option release remove source statusmerge tracking trackingshield values valuetimes Option Option Shortcut Value no option rea value no option r value Prog, so Output, Dmx In no option sm value t False, True no option ts value v False, True vt False, True Description Releases content. Removes content. Defines data source. Adds tracking status to existing cue. Stores with tracking. False is the same as cueonly. Use tracking shield for storelook. Filters or enables value layer. Filters or enables fade and delay layer. Example Store all dimmer values from all fixtures in the show as cue 1 on executor 1. [Channel]> StoreLook Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 712 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.281.Surface Keyword To go to the Surface keyword, type Surface in the command line or use the shortcut Su. Description The Surface keyword, loads a created surface form the Wing & Monitor Setup. The default function for this object is Call. Call a Surface activates the settings of the given surface. Surface 1 is non-editable and configures all fadermodules and screens 1:1. The Surface keyword is an object keyword. Syntax Surface [ID] Example Load surface 2 from the wing & monitor setup. [Channel]> Surface 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 713 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.282.Swop Keyword To go to the Swop keyword, type Swop in the command line or use the shortcut Sw. Description The Swop keyword temporary overrides the master level of executors to full and set all other master levels to zero. If Swop is assigned as an executor button function, pressing the executor button is Swop On, release the executor button is Swop Off. The executor is off after releasing the executor button. If Swop is used standalone, Swop toggles between Swop On and Swop Off. To protect an executor from the swop function, assign Swop Protect in the Assign Menu. To open the Assign menu, press Assign , then the executor button, tap Options and then tap under Protect Swop Protect . The Swop keyword does not react to any assigned timing. Syntax Swop [Executor-list] Swop On [Executor-list] Swop Off [Executor-list] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword Swop, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Swop /? The keyword Swop has the same options as the keyword Goto. For further information see keyword Goto. Examples Override master level of executor 1 to full and all other master levels to zero. [Channel]> Swop Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 714 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Returns the master level to the master fader position and turns the executor off. [Channel]> Swop Off Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 715 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.283.SwopGo Keyword To go to the SwopGo keyword, type SwopGo in the command line or use the shortcut SwopG. Description The SwopGo keyword temporary overrides the master level of executors to full and all other master levels to zero, and goes to the next cue. If SwopGo is assigned as an executor button function, pressing the executor button is SwopGo On, release the executor button is SwopGo Off. The executor stays tuned on. If SwopGo is used standalone, it toggles between SwopGo On and SwopGo Off. To protect an executor from the swop function, assign Swop Protect in the Assign Menu. The SwopGo keyword do not react to any assigned timing. Syntax SwopGo [Executor-list] SwopGo On [Executor-list] SwopGo Off [Executor-list] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword SwopGo, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> SwopGo /? The keyword SwopGo has the exact same options as the keyword Goto. For further information see keyword Goto. Example 1. Step to the next cue, override master level of executor 1 to full and all other master levels to zero. SwopGo Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 716 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2. Returns the master level to the master fader position. The executor stays on after releasing the executor button. SwopGo Off Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 717 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.284.SwopOn Keyword To go to the SwopOn keyword, type SwopOn in the command line or use the shortcut SwopO. Description The SwopOn keyword temporary overrides the master level of executors to full and all other master levels to zero. If SwopOn is assigned as an executor button function, pressing the executor button is SwopOn On, release the executor button is SwopOn Off. The executor stays tuned on. If SwopOn is used standalone, SwopOn toggles between SwopOn On and SwopOn Off. To protect an executor from the swop function, assign Swop Protect in the Assign Menu. The Swop keyword do not react to any assigned timing. Syntax SwopOn [Executor-list] SwopOn On [Executor-list] SwopOn Off [Executor-list] Options To get a list of all options of the keyword SwopOn, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> SwopOn /? The keyword SwopOn has the exact same options as the keyword Goto. For further information see keyword Goto. Example 1. Override master level of executor 1 to full and all other master levels to zero. [Channel]> SwopOn Executor 1 2. Returns the master level to the master fader position. The executor stays on after releasing the executor button. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 718 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> SwopOn Off Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 719 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.285.SyncEffects Keyword To get the SyncEffects keyword in the command line, press and hold + Effects (= SyncEffects). You can also type SyncEffects in the command line or use the shortcut Sy. Description The SyncEffects keyword starts all running effects synchronous. Hint: You can also use the Sync Effects button in the Special Dialog I Effect Value. Syntax SyncEffects Example Synchronize the PWM (= Pulse-width modulation) effect for the selected fixtures. [Channel]> SyncEffects © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 720 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.286.TakeControl Keyword To go to the TakeControl keyword, type TakeControl in the command line or use the shortcut Ta. Description TakeControl is a keyword used if multiple users are in a session. The TakeControl keyword, takes the exclusive control of channels or attributes from fixtures, for the current user profile. All other users can not start these fixtures or channels anymore as playback. The fixtures or channels are still controllable in the programmer. The user who executes the TakeControl command has only the control about playbacks with the Takecontrol fixtures. The control about all other playbacks is lost. Fixture Sheet with controllable (gray font) and not controllable (dark blue font) attributes from playbacks For more information about the system colors, see Colors. To drop the control of the fixtures or channels back, use the DropControl keyword. Syntax TakeControl [fixture-list] TakeControl [channel-list] TakeControl [sequence-list] © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 721 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Example Take the exclusive control of fixture 1 through 10 for the current user profile. All other fixtures are not controllable from playbacks anymore. [Channel]> TakeControl Fixture 1 Thru 10 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 722 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.287.Telnet Keyword To go to the Telnet keyword, type Telnet in the command line or use the shortcut Tel. Description Important: The telnet receiver needs to read the commands without a telnet login. If the telnet receiver asks for a login, the command can not be processed. The Telnet keyword sends Telnet commands via grandMA2 command line directly to a telnet receiver. The Telnet keyword is a function keyword. For more information, see What is Telnet remote?. Syntax Telnet [IP address] : [Port] "String" Example The telnet receiver starts an specific function, if the receiver gets the command "Artist1". [Channel]> Telnet 192.168.0.1 : 23 "Artist1" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 723 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.288.Temp Keyword To get the Temp keyword in the command line, press Temp . You can also type Temp in the command line or use the shortcut Te. Description The Temp keyword turns an executor on, as long as you hold the executor button. The Temp keyword follows cue timing, off timing and the position of the master fader from the executor. If you keep the hands off from the executor button, the executor is off again. The Temp Off keyword will be executed. The Temp keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Temp [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] Temp On [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] Temp Off [Object-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] Options To get a list of all available options to the Temp keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> Temp /? The Temp keyword has the following options: cue_mode cm Normal Option Value Shortcut N cue_mode cm Assert A cue_mode cm XAssert XA cue_mode cm Release R userprofile upr "Name of the user profile", e.g. "Dominik" not available Option Option Option Value Shortcut Description Normal temp mode. Temp state asserts the original timing. Temp state asserts cuetiming of current cue. Temp finishes fade-in and switches the executor off. Normal temp mode with specified user profile. Examples © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 724 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English To turn executor 1 temporary on, type in the command line: [Channel]> Temp On Executor 1 To turn executor 1 temporary off, type in the command line: [Channel]> Temp Off Executor 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 725 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.289.TempFader Keyword To get the TempFader keyword in the command line, type TempFader or the shortcut TempF in the command line . Description The TempFader keyword, is a function that crossfades the cue on when pulled up, and crossfades the cue off when pulled down. For more information, see executors - assign a function. Syntax Assign TempFader [Executor-list] TempFader [Value] [Executor-list] Examples Assign executor 28 as a temp fader. [Channel]> Assign TempFader Exec 28 Set the temp fader to 50 % for the selected executor. [Channel]> TempFader 50 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 726 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.290.Thru Keyword To go to the Thru keyword, press Thru . You can also type Thru in the command line or use the shortcut T. Description The Thru keyword reference a range of objects / values. If the start or end is not defined, it will be used the first or last available object / values. Syntax [Start of range] Thru [End of range] Example 1. Select fixture 3 through 6. [Channel]> Fixture 3 Thru 6 2. Select all fixture from the beginning through 10. [Channel]> Fixture Thru 10 3. Delete all cues, beginning with cue 3, from the selected executor. [Channel]> Delete Cue 3 Thru 4. Select all fixtures. Press Thru (= Fixture Thru). [Channel]> Fixture Thru 5. Turn off all executor from the current page. [Channel]> Off Thru 6. Start executors from 4.2 to 5.9. [Channel]> Go Page 4 thru 5 Exec 4 thru 5 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 727 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Hint: Calling x.y Thru a.b is not a supported range, e.g., "Go Executor 4.2 Thru 5.9" because you cannot call executor ranges across pages. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 728 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.291.Timecode Keyword To get the Timecode keyword in the command line, press Macro Macro (= Timecode). You can also type Timecode in the command line or use the shortcut TC. Description The Timecode keyword, select the timecode by default. With the Timecode keyword, you can store play (go) record edit label assign rewind (top) timecode shows. The Timecode keyword, is an object keyword. For more information, see Timecode. Syntax [Function] Timecode [ID] Assign Timecode [ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameters by using the Assign keyword. Parameter Name Length Parameter Value "Timecode show name" "Intern" (-1), "Link Selected" (0), "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8" 0s to 255h59m58.96s Offset 0s to 255h59m58.96s Slot Description Assign the timecode show name. Assign the timecode show to a timecode slot. Assign the timecode show length in total. Assign an offset to the timecode show, to move the entire timecode show forward. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 729 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Parameter Parameter Value Description Only for timecode shows syncing to the internal clock. Assign, if the timecode show runs: Runs "Endless Repeat" (0), "No Repeat" (1), 2..1000 Endless (Endless Repeat) Once and stop (No Repeat) A specific number of times (number between 2 and 1000) Assign, if the playbacks running during a timecode show: SwitchOff "Playbacks Off", "Keep Playbacks" Turns off (Playbacks Off) Stays on (Keep Playbacks) when the timecode show turns off. Assign, if the timecode show will: StatusCall "On", "Off" Sync with the timecode signal instantly (on) Execute the signal when they are reached (off) TimeUnit "1/100 Seconds", "24 FPS", "25 FPS", "30 FPS" WhenEnding "Stop", "Pause" WhenStopping "Do Nothing", "Rewind" AutoStart (only available with external timecode slot) "Off", "On" User Bits 0 .. FFFFFFFF, 0 .. 4294967296 Info "Information Text" Assign the time unit for the graphic display mode. Only for timecode shows syncing to the internal clock. Assign what happens when the timecode show runs out of recorded time. Assign what happens when the timecode show is stopped. Only available when syncing to an external source. If a timecode signal is received, the timecode show switches from the off mode into the play mode. Only available when syncing to an external source. Assign user bits in hex or decimal to distinguish several timecode streams. Assign additional information. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 730 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Examples Store new timecode show 2 in the timecode pool. [Channel]> Store Timecode 2 Record executor action for timecode show 2. [Channel]> Record Timecode 2 Pool Object Record Timecode Play timecode show 2. [Channel]> Go Timecode 2 Pool Object Go Timecode Rewind timecode show 2. [Channel]> Top Timecode 2 Label timecode show 2 in the timecode pool. The Enter Name for Timecode pop-up opens. [Channel]> Label Timecode 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 731 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Enter Name for Timecode pop-up Assign timecode show 1 the timecode slot 3. [Channel]> Assign Timecode 1/Slot = 3 Timecode slot 3 is assigned to timecode show 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 732 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.292.TimecodeSlot Keyword To get the TimecodeSlot keyword, type TimecodeSlot or the shortcut TimecodeS in the command line. Description TimecodeSlot is an object type representing the 8 different possible timecode streams. The default function of the TimecodeSlot keyword is Select. Syntax TimecodeSlot [ID] Examples Select timecode slot 3. [Channel]> TimecodeSlot 3 Timecode Slot 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 733 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.293.Timer Keyword To get the Timer keyword in the command line, press and hold You can also type Timer in the command line. + Macro (= Timer). Description With the Timer keyword you can edit, start, pause, restart, switch off, select, lock, unlock, and assign timers. Timer 1 is a predefined stopwatch and not editable. For more Information see Timer pool. The Timer keyword is an object keyword. Syntax [Function] Timer [ID] Assign Timer [ID] / [Parameter] = [Parameter Value] Parameter The following table displays the assignable parameters via command line. Parameter Name TimerMode WhenRestarting TimeUnit ExecTrigger Parameter Value "Timername" "Stopwatch", "Countdown" "Continue", "Reset" "Seconds", "1/10 Seconds", "1/100 Seconds", "24 FPS", "25 FPS", "30 FPS" "LinkSelected-Start", "Not Linked", "LinkLastGo-Start", "LinkSelectedToggle", "LinkLastGo-Toggle" AlertType (only if timer mode is countdown) "None", "Popup", "Popup & Beep", "Command", "Command & Popup", "Command, Popup & Beep" AlertRange (only if timer mode is countdown) "Local", "Global" Countdowntime (only if timer mode is countdown) 0.01S .. 23H59M59.99S © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 734 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Examples Edit timer 4. The Edit Timer pop-up opens. [Channel]> Edit Timer 4 Edit the timer Countdown Assign a countdown time of 20 seconds to the existing timer 4. [Channel]> Assign Timer 4 /countdowntime = 20 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 735 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.294.ToFull Keyword To get the ToFull keyword in the command line, press >>> >>> >>> (= ToFull). You can also type ToFull or the shortcut ToF in the command line. Description The ToFull keyword sets the masterlevel of objects to 100 %. ToFull is a function keyword. Important: ToFull adjusts only masterlevels to 100 % and NOT e.g. speedmaster or crossfader. To set all faders to 100 %, use the At keyword. Syntax ToFull [Executor-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] ToFull SpecialMaster [ID] / [Option] = [Option Value] Examples Sets the masterlevel of executor 1 to 100 %. [Channel]> ToFull Executor 1 Sets the grandmaster to full. [Channel]> ToFull SpecialMaster "grandmaster" . "grand" - or [Channel]> ToFull SpecialMaster 2.1 Sets the fader of executor 1 with cue mode assert to full. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 736 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> ToFull Executor 1 / cm = A © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 737 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.295.Toggle Keyword To go to the Toggle keyword press Temp Temp (= Toggle). You can also type Toggle in the command line or use the shortcut Tog Description The Toggle keyword acts as an on or off keyword, depending of the on/off-status of the object or function/mode it is applied to. If object or function/mode is on, it turns it off. If object or function/mode is off, it turns it on. For further information see the keywords On and Off. Toggle is a function and helping keyword. Syntax Toggle [Object-list] [Function/Mode]Toggle Options To get a list of all options of the keyword Toggle, type the following into the command line: [Channel]> Toggle /? The keyword Toggle has the exact same options as the keyword Goto. For further information see the keyword Goto. Examples To turn the running executor 4 off by using the toggle keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> Toggle Executor 4 To turn the running sequence 1 off by using the toggle keyword, type in the command line: [Channel]> Toggle Sequence 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 738 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.296.Tools Keyword To go to the Tools keyword, type Tools in the command line or use the short cut To. Description The Tools keyword opens or closes the tools menu. Tools menu The Tools keyword is a function keyword. Hint: Another way to open the Tools menu is, press the Tools key. Syntax Tools Example Open the tools menu. [Channel]> Tools © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 739 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 740 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.297.Top Keyword To go to the Top keyword, press Top or type Top in the command line. Description The Top keyword jumps to the beginning of the cue list or sets the timecode marker at the beginning of the timecode show. The Top keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Top [Executor-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] Top [Timecode-list] Options To get a list of all available options to the top keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> Top /? The top keyword has the following options. Important: The cue mode options along with the top keyword are only necessary if the cue zero mode is set to on, all, dimmers only, or effects. For more information, see Using cue modes. Option Option Option Value Shortcut cue_mode cm Normal cue_mode cm Assert cue_mode cm XAssert cue_mode cm Release cue_mode cm Break Option Value Description Shortcut Goes to the top of the sequence and N calls the first cue normal. Goes to the top of the sequence and A calls the first cue with an assert. Goes to the top of the sequence and XA calls the first cue with a xassert. Goes to the top of the sequence and R calls the first cue and release it. Goes to the top of the sequence and B calls the first cue and sets a break before the cue. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 741 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Value Description Shortcut Goes to the top of the sequence and XBreak XB calls the first cue and sets a xbreak before the cue. "Name of the Goes to the top of the sequence and not user profile", e.g. calls the first cue with specified user available "Dominik" profile. Option Option Value Shortcut Option cue_mode cm userprofile upr Examples Go to the top of the cue list on executor 5. [Channel]> Top Executor 5 Go to the top of the cue list on executor 5 in 3 seconds. [Channel]> Top Executor 5 Fade 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 742 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.298.ToZero Keyword To go to the ToZero keyword, press <<< <<< <<< (= ToZero). You can also use the command line and type ToZero or use the shortcut ToZ. Description The ToZero keyword sets the masterlevel of objects to zero. ToZero is a function keyword. Important: ToZero sets only masterlevels to zero and NOT e.g. speedmaster or crossfader. To set all faders to zero, use the At keyword. Syntax ToZero [Executor-list] / [Option] = [Option Value] ToZero SpecialMaster [ID] / [Option] = [Option Value] Examples Sets the masterlevel of executor 1 to zero. [Channel]> ToZero Executor 1 Sets the grandmaster to zero. [Channel]> ToZero SpecialMaster "grandmaster" . "grand" - or [Channel]> ToZero SpecialMaster 2.1 Sets the fader of executor 1 with cue mode assert to zero. [Channel]> ToZero Executor 1 / cm = A © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 743 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 744 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.299.Unblock Keyword To go to the Unblock keyword, type Unblock in the command line or use the shortcut UB / Unb. Description The unblock keyword convert blocked values in cues (displayed white) into tracking values (displayed magenta). If the selected executor is on, the unblock keyword will be applied for the current cue of selected executor. If the selected executor is off, the unblock keyword will be applied for all cues of the selected executor. If unblock does not contain any selection-list, all fixtures will be used. If unblock does not contain any attribute-list, all attributes will be used. Unblock is a function keyword. Syntax Unblock [Object-list] If [Selection-list] If [Attribute-list] / [Option] Options The following table displays the available Unblock options. Option defaultvalues Shortcut dv Description Removes the default values. Examples Unblock all values after programming from the selected executor. The selected executor is off. [Channel]> Unblock Unblock all values from the current cue. The selected executor is on. [Channel]> Unblock Unblock all values from feature position, fixture 1 in cue 3. [Channel]> Unblock Cue 3 If Fixture 1 If Feature "Position" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 745 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Unblock all default values from sequence 1. [Channel]> Unblock Sequ 1 /dv © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 746 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.300.Unlock Keyword To use to the Unlock keyword, type Unlock in the command line or use the shortcut UL / Unl. Description With the unlock keyword, you can unlock previous locked objects. Information: A yellow lock indicates a locked object what can be unlocked. A red lock indicates a locked object what is fixed by default. It can not be unlocked. Locked Pool Objects The Unlock keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Unlock [Object-List] Examples 1. Unlock cue 3 to edit the cue. [Channel]> Unlock Cue 3 2. Unlock world 3 to edit the world. [Channel]> Unlock World 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 747 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.301.Unpark Keyword To go to the Unpark keyword, press the small Go + twice (= Unpark). You can also type Unpark in the command line or use the shortcut Unp. Description With the Unpark keyword, you can unpark previous parked DMX channels. Information: Parked channels are displayed with a blue indicator. The park icon in the command line indicates that there are DMX channels parked. Syntax Unpark [Selection-list] Unpark [Attributes-list] Examples 1. Unpark previous parked DMX channels. [Channel]> Unpark DMX 1.1 Thru 1.10 2. Unpark all fixtures and channels. [Channel]> Unpark DmxUnivers Thru 3. Unpark PresetType Dimmer, of the current fixture selection. [Channel]> Unpark PresetType Dimmer 4. Unpark Fixture 2. [Channel]> Unpark Fixture 2 Related Links Park Keyword Go + Key (small) Command Line © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 748 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.302.Up Keyword To go to the Up keyword type Up in the command line. Description The Up keyword scrolls one page up in focused window. It is the same as press the Up key on the console. See Up Key. The Up keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Up Example Scroll one page up in the fixtures sheet. [Channel]> Up © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 749 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.303.Update Keyword To go to the Update keyword, press Update . You can also type Update in the command line or use the shortcut Upd. Description The update keyword, updates functions in its source objects. Update is a function keyword. Syntax Update [object-list] / [option] = [option value] Options To get a list of all available options to the update keyword, type in the command line [Channel]> Update /? The update keyword has the following options. Option Shortcut addnewcontent an not auto available cueonly co effects ef embedded e global g keepactive ka noconfirm nc Option originalcontent or presetfilter screen selective source Option Value Description False, True False is the same as originalcontent. Updates preset values with default preset scope. Prevents changes to track forward. Filters or enables effect layer. Creates embedded preset. Updates preset with global values. Keeps values active. Suppress update confirmation pop-up. Updates the original content of the preset, effect, or cue. False is the same as addnewcontent. Sets preset filter on or off. no option value False, True False, True False, True no option value False, True no option value False, True p False, True not 1..6 available s no option value Prog, Output, Dmx so In Updates view with selected screen. Updates preset with selective values. Defines data source. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 750 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Option Option Option Value Shortcut tracking t False, True trackingshield universal ts u useselection use values valuetimes v vt no option value no option value Active, Allforselected, Activeforselected, All, Look False, True False, True Description Update tracking. False is the same as cueonly. Use tracking shield for update. Updates preset with universal values. Sets selection. Filters or enables value layer. Filters or enables value times layer. Example 1. Update current cue of the selected executor, according to the update defaults. For more information, see Update a Cue. [Channel]> Update 2. Update cue 4 with values that originates from cue 4, as cue only. [Channel]> Update Cue 4 /originalcontent /cueonly 3. Update color preset 2 with global values, keep them active in the programmer, and without confirmation popup. For more information, see Update Presets. [Channel]> Update Preset 4.2 /global /keepactive=true /noconfirm © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 751 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.304.UpdateFirmware Keyword To go to the UpdateFirmware keyword type UpdateFirmware in the command line or use the shortcut UpdateF. Description Important: The update firmware process can take up to 60 seconds. To double-check if the update firmware process is still running, use the Version keyword. If the update process is still running, the version keyword will display it. If not, the version keyword function is as usual. You can also use the system monitor window, Create Basic Window -> System -> System Monitor. With the UpdateFirmware keyword, you update the firmware of the hardware components at the console. This is useful if you have hardware issues. If the UpdateFirmware does not solve the issue, contact the MA tech support. See the email address of tech support in the footer of this website. The UpdateFirmware keyword is an object keyword. Syntax UpdateFirmware Example Update the hardware components of the firmware. [Channel]> UpdateFirmware © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 752 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.305.UpdateSoftware Keyword To go to the UpdateSoftware keyword, type UpdateSoftware in the command line or use the shortcut UpdateS. You can also update the software in the Setup. For more information, see update the software. Description Requirement: An inserted USB stick with a .update file for the appropriate device or program in the root directory. Download the latest software on www.malighting.com. With the UpdateSoftware keyword, you can update the software of every MA device or program in the network. The UpdateSoftware keyword is a function keyword. Syntax UpdateSoftware [IP address] Example Update the MA 4Port Node with the IP address 192.168.0.32 in the network. [Channel]> UpdateSoftware 192.168.0.32 Hint: To be faster, type only the part of the IP address in the command line what is differently. If the console which sends the command has the IP address 192.168.0.11, then type UpdateSoftware 32. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 753 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.306.UpdateThumbnails Keyword To go to the UpdateThumbnails keyword, type UpdateThumbnails in the command line. Description The UpdateThumbnails keyword updates the thumbnails of the media servers. For more information on media servers see the keyword MediaServer. Syntax UpdateThumbnails MediaServer [RowID] The row ID is the row in the window CITP Network Configuration. For more information see Thumbnail exchange. Example Update the thumbnails of media server, row 2. UpdateThumbnails MediaServer 2 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 754 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.307.User Keyword To use to the User keyword, type User the shortcut Us in the command line. Description The User keyword displays user details in the command line feedback window. Name Password UserProfile Rights LoggedIn Info Command Line Feedback List User The User keyword is an object keyword. For more information, see create user profiles and user. Syntax User [ID] Example List user details of user 1. [Channel]> List User 1 List all user details. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 755 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> List User © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 756 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.308.UserProfile Keyword To execute the keyword UserProfile, type UserProfile or the shortcut UPR into the command line. Description The keyword UserProfile displays the user profiles in the command line feedback. Number Name Used LoggedIn Info Subtrees in parantheses UserProfile is an object keyword. Keyword UserProfile For more information see create user profiles. Syntax UserProfile [ID] Examples Lists all user profiles that are available. [Channel]> List UserProfile Lists user profile 1. [Channel]> List UserProfile 1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 757 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Hint: User profiles can be limited to a specific world. There are three commands that generate the same result: Assigns the user profile 2 to world 1. [Channel]> Assign UserProfile 2 At World 1 [Channel]> Assign World 1 UserProfile 2 [Channel]> Assign UserProfile 2/World=1 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 758 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.309.Value Keyword To go to the Value keyword, type Value in the command line or use the shortcut Va. Description With the value keyword you can: Search values Replace values Change to value layers Syntax Value [Value-List] [Function] [Object-List] Value [Value-List] [Function] [Value-List] Examples Search fixtures and channels with dimmer value 50. [Channel]> Search Value 50 Replace value 50 at channel 1 through 10 with value 60. [Channel]> Replace Channel 1 Thru 10 Value 50 With 60 Change to the value layer. [Channel]> Value © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 759 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.310.Version Keyword To go to the version keyword, type Version in the command line or use the shortcut Ve. Description The version keyword gives you access to version details of the console or software in the commandline feedback window. It displays the following details. version number build date build time vhash showfile showpath current user parameter count The version keyword is a function keyword. Syntax Version Example To see the version details of the console or the software. Type Version in the command line and press Please . [Channel]> Version © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 760 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Version details in the commandline Feedback pop-up The version details are displayed in the commandline feedback pop-up. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 761 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.311.View Keyword To get the View keyword in the command line, press View or type View in the command line. Description The view keyword calls views on a screen. With the option /screen you select on which screen the view will be called - or which screens will be stored in a view. Syntax View [ID] View [ID] / screen = [ID] View [ID] / [option] = [option value] Options The following table displays the assignable options along with the Assign keyword. Option Name Info Option Value View name, e.g. "Stage Extern". Additional information to the view, e.g. "all I need". Examples Call view 2 from the view pool on that screen where it is stores from. [Channel]> View 2 Call view 5 on screen 2. [Channel]> View 5 /screen = 2 Store the content of screen 2, 3, and 4 at view object 5. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 762 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Store View 5 /screen = 234 Assign view 2 the name Stage Extern. [Channel]> Assign View 2/name = "Stage Extern" © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 763 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.312.ViewButton Keyword To go to the ViewButton keyword, press View View (=ViewButton). You can also use the commandline and type ViewButton or use the shortcut VB. Description The ViewButton keyword calls the assigned function on the view button. The call function works only if the assigned object supports a call. The ViewButton keyword is an object keyword. Syntax ViewButton [ID] ViewButton [ViewPage].[ID] Example Delete the assigned function of view button 4 from the current view page. [Channel]> Delete ViewButton 4 Label the assigned view button 5 at view page 2. [Channel]> Label ViewButton 2.5 "Layout" Store a view at key X1. [Channel]> Store ViewButton 11.1 Related Links ViewPage Keyword View Key V-Keys X-Keys © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 764 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.313.ViewPage Keyword To go to the ViewPage keyword, press View View View (=ViewPage). The commandline shortcut is VP. Description The ViewPage keyword calls the view pages. There are 11 view pages available. This is the same as press and hold the and a V-Key. The ViewPage keyword is an object keyword. Syntax ViewPage [ID] Example Call view page 2. [Channel]> ViewPage 2 Related Links View Key 1 - 10 View Key © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 765 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.314.WebRemoteProgOnly Keyword To go to the WebRemoteProgOnly keyword, type WebRemoteProgOnly in the command line or use the shortcut W. Description The WebRemoteProgOnly keyword, selects in the web remote fixture sheet the option Prg Only (= Programmer Only). The WebRemoteProgOnly is a function keyword. Syntax WebRemoteProgOnly Example Select function Prg Only in the web remote fixture sheet. [Channel]> WebRemoteProgOnly © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 766 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.315.With Keyword To go to the With keyword, press Move Move (= Replace), enter search for object values, press Move (= With) again. You can also type With in the command line or use the shortcut Wi. Description The With keyword is necessary for the replace function. The With keyword is a helping keyword. Syntax With replace_with_objects [IF search_in_objects] Example 1. Add 10 degrees to all pan values for all cues and presets. [Channel]> Replace Attribute "Pan" At - 270 Thru 270 With - 260 Thru 280 2. Replace dimmer value 50 by dimmer value 55 in the programmer, in all sequences, and cues. [Channel]> Replace PresetType 1 At 50 With 55 3. Replace dimmer value 50 by dimmer value 55 only in the programmer. Information: This command structure works only, if you type the command by using the keyboard. If you type the command by using the command keys, the At key will interrupt the replace command. [Channel]> Replace At 50 With 55 If Programmer Related Links Search and Replace Replace Keyword Move Key © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 767 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.316.World Keyword To go to the world keyword, type World in the command line. Description The world keyword call worlds along with its filter, and limit the access to the parameters in the word. World 1 is fixed by default and includes all parameters (fixtures and attributes) in the show. World is an object keyword. Syntax World [ID] Examples Call a world. [Channel]> World 4 Label a world. [Channel]> Label World 4 "All Fixtures" Related Links World, Filters, and Masks © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 768 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – All keywords Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.2.317.Zero Keyword Important: If you enter the keyword Zero into the console by pressing two times the key . , the keyword will be directly executed. You can also type the keyword Zero into the command line. To execute this keyword, double-press the . on the console, type Zero or the shortcut Z into the command line. Description The keyword Zero sets the intensity of the dimmer to zero: If fixtures or channels are selected In a selection of fixtures or channels From an executor This keyword is a helping keyword. Syntax Zero Examples Sets the intensity of the selected fixtures or channels to zero. [Channel]> Zero Sets the intensity of fixture 1 trough 10 to zero. [Channel]> Fixture 1 Thru 10 Zero Sets the master of executor 1 to zero. [Channel]> Executor 1 Zero © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 769 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.3. Work with Lists There are several lists you can work with: Object list Selection list Executor list Attribute list Station list For more information see the the single topics on the existing lists. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 770 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.3.1.Object List An object list is a list of objects of the same type. Syntax [Object-type1] [ID1] [Object-type1] [ID1] [Object-type1] [ID2] [Object-type1] [ID1] + [ID2] [Object-type1] [ID1] Thru [ID2] - [ID3] [Object-type1] [ID1] Thru [Object-type1]​ Thru [ID1] [Object-type1]​ Thru [Object-type1]​​ "Name" [Object-type1]​ "Nam*" If no object type is given, the list contains items of your current destination. If no object type is given and the current destination is root – no destination – the list contains the default object types for the function applied. If no object type is given and no function is applied, the list contains the current object type default of the command line. Example: [Channel] > Fixture 3 Thru 6 Selects fixture 3 through 6 (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). [Channel]> Fixture Thru 3 Selects fixture 1 through 3 (1, 2, 3). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 771 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Delete 3 Thru Deletes cue 3 and the following upper cues. [Channel]> Channel Thru Selects all channels. [Channel]> Channel 1 Channel 5 Selects channel 1 and 5. [Channel] > Fixture mac* Selects all fixtures with a name starting with mac. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 772 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.3.2.Selection List A selection list is a list of fixtures. Syntax [Object] [Object-type1] [ID1] [Object-type1] [ID1] + [Object-type2] [ID2] [Object-type1] [ID1] Thru [Object-type2] [ID2] [Object-type1] [ID1] Thru [Object-type2] [ID2] - [Object-type 3] [ID3] [Object-type1] [ID1] Thru [Object-type1] Thru [ID1] [Object-type1] Thru [Object-type1] "Name" [Object-type1] "Nam*" Important: In a selection list, contrary to the object list, each object type is broken down to its corresponding fixture objects. These fixture objects form the selection list. If an object type is missing, the object type that was entered last will be used. If no object type is given altogether, the current object type default of the command line will be used. If there is no ID before or after Thru, the first or last available ID will be used. If there is no ID for an object type, the current, active or next ID will be used, depending on the function applied. If the reference of an object type is nonexclusive, significant parent objects will be broken down by user defaults and currently selected or active objects. Example: [Channel]> Fixture 3 + Channel 6 Selects fixture 3 and channel 6. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 773 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> Cue Thru 3 - Channel 4 Selects fixtures in first 3 cues, but does not select channel 4. [Channel]> Group 3 + Cue 4 Selects fixtures in group 3 and fixtures in cue 4. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 774 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.3.3.Executor List An executor list is an object list of executors. Syntax Executor [list] Page [list] FaderPage [list] ButtonPage [list] Important: An executor list has the same syntax as an object list. Each object type is broken down to executor objects. These executor objects form the executor list. Example: [Channel]> Pause Page 1 Thru 3 Pauses executors on pages 1, 2, and 3. [Channel]> Delete Executor 10 Thru 13 Deletes executors 10 through 13 of the current page. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 775 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.3.4.Attribute List An attribute list is an object list of attributes. Syntax Attribute [list] Feature [list] PresetType [list] Important: An attribute list has the same syntax as an object list. Each object type is broken down to attribute objects. These attribute objects form the attribute list. Example: [Channel]> On Feature "GOBO1" Activates attributes in feature "GOBO1". [Channel]> Off Attribute 8.1.1 Thru 4 Knocks out the first 4 shaper attributes out of the programmer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 776 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Function of the Command Line – Work with Lists Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 10.3.5.Station List Syntax [IP-address] [IP-address] Thru [IP-address] [Host-ID] [Host-ID] Thru [Host-ID] Important: The IP address is a 32-bit dotted decimal notation consisting of four numbers ranging from 0 to 255 and separated by dots, for example 192.168.0.101. The host ID is a unique part of the IP address within a network. The host ID usually comprises the last three decimal numbers of the IP address. The host ID of the IP address 192.168.0.101 is 101 and the network ID is 192.168.0. If the beginning or the end of the command Thru is missing, the first or the last occurrence will be used. Example: [Channel]> SetIP ethO 192.168.0.101 Sets the IP address. [Channel]> Shutdown 1 Thru 4 Shuts down all the devices with the host IDs 1, 2, 3, and 4. For more information on how to set the IP address see SetIP. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 777 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11. Using the Backup Menu The Backup Menu is where show files are managed. It is also here shows are saves and loaded. What is show file management Show file management is the handling of show files. Shows can be saved internally in the console, and there is also the option to save on USB sticks and file servers. Being able to save the show and load it again is a vital part of modern lighting consoles. Show files can also be deleted to make more room on the hard drive or just to clean the console. A show file can only be moved forward. A show saved on a USB stick that was programmed in a previous version can be loaded in a newer version. If the show is then re-saved on the stick in this new version, then it cannot be taken back to the old software. If this is important then it is needed to load the show and save it with a new name. Then the old version is not saved as the new version and it can still be accessed by an older version. Show file content The show files contain all the data needed to run the show. This includes all the Users and User Profiles in the show. It also contains any 3D models that are used in MA 3D. If MA VPUs (= Video Processing Unit) are used, then the programming of the MA VPU is of cause store in the show, but the Media Files are not. Make sure they are backed up on an external device - just in case. The backup menu and the different tabs The Backup Menu can be opened by pressing the Backup key or using the dedicated command: [Channel]> Menu "Backup" The Backup Menu is organized in two section. The top section is for manual show file management. The bottom part is the Backup Options. This is what it could look like: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 778 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Backup Menu The top part have a title bar that shows the file name and saved date of the current show. It also shows the current software version. There is also the button that can be used to move the menu to a different screen and finally the button to close the menu. Below this there are different tabs. There is always minimum three called "Internal", "Demoshows" and "Templates". There might be more. Each software version installed will have its own tab. This allows the option to load a show from a previous version. It is not possible to save a show from a newer software version in one of the tabs from previous versions. If a USB stick is connect to the console/onPC, then it will get its own tab. Select this tab will change the default storage drive to the USB stick. Read the Using a USB stick to learn more about specific USB stick handling. If a file server is added to the system, then this will also get its own tab. This tab can be selected to save or load shows using the storage space on the server. Read the Setting up a file server to learn more about server setup. The selected tab is then the selected "drive" and the location where shows will be saved. The selected drive can also be selected using the command line - it is a command called SelectDrive or just SD - read more about it here. Internal This tab is the hard drive in the console or onPC. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 779 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English If you are working on an onPC solution, then the SelectDrive command can be used without setting a drive number to see the storage location in the computer. The internal drive can do everything except ASCII Show Read. If the console is updated then the current Internal tab is made a tab with the version number. A full install that formats the drive will delete all show files and remove all previous version tabs. Demoshows The demo show tab is a read only tab. It is only possible to load shows from the demo tab. It is possible to do a Partial Show Read from the shows in this folder. If the console is updated, then the shows in this folder will be overwritten. Templates The templates tab functions as the Demoshows with the exception that updating the console software will not overwrite the shows in the tab. A format and install still deletes the shows in this tab! The idea behind this tab is that a place that have basically the same rig but do many shows, can copy a show with the patch and basic setup in this folder. This can then be loaded and stored as a new show in the Internal tab. Thus protecting the basic show from accidental changes. It is only possible to copy the shows into this tab using a FTP connection. Server tab If a working connection is set up to a file server, then an extra tab with the defined name will appear. This functions as the internal tab. This tab is only visible on the console that is the master in the session. grandMA2 onPC as Master does not support server backup Read here for more about setting up a File Server. USB tabs When a compatible USB stick is connected, then it gets its own tab named after the name of the USB stick. It works as the internal tab with the addition that it is possible to do an ASCII Show Read. Doing a Quick Save will store the show on the USB stick and on the Internal drive. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 780 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Read here for more info about USB sticks and what advice and restrictions there might be. Version tabs Previous versions installed on the console or computer will have their own tab. Shows can be loaded and delete in these tabs. Backup Options The backup options allows access to setup a file server and activate Auto Save. The server setup can be complicated, so it has it own help topic - please read about it here. Auto Save Auto Save can be set up to automatically store show file after a certain amount of time. The default setting is "Off". The other options are 15, 30, 60 and 120 minutes. If auto save is activated - by selecting a time interval - then a count down can be seen next to the label. When the count down reaches Zero, then it will save the show on the selected drive/tab. If a tab is selected that does not allow for saving, then it will save in the Internal drive. Read the following pages to read about the different operations that can be done in the tabs. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 781 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.1. Create a new show Several tabs in the backup menu offers the option to start a new show. It is not possible in the read only tabs. The New Show pop-up Pressing the new show button in the backup menu opens a pop-up that could look like this: New Show pop-up In this pop-up it can be chosen what show information from the currently loaded show will be cleared or removed. In the top it is possible to write the name for the new show. Pressing the opens an on-screen keyboard. Below the name there are different boxes that can be selected. This is the different parts of the show file. The idea is that when a new show is started there is the option to keep some of the existing data from the currently loaded show. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 782 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Clear Show Data This is activated as a default. The show data is the patch and fixture schedule, stored sequences, presets, groups, effects, and so on. Basically everything that is in a pool somewhere and the imported 3D elements. Clear Time Config The time configuration is the current time, location, daylight savings settings and NTP (Network Time Protocol) setup. If this is cleared then the console will reset the location to the default location (The parking lot outside McFIT Fitnessstudio in Würzburg, Germany) and take the time from the computer Bios. Clear Global Settings The global settings are the ones found in Setup -> Console -> Global Settings. The settings here are shared in the session and includes enabling and disabling the Remote and Telnet, RDM, WYSIWYG, and so on. Clear Local Settings The local settings are the ones found in Setup -> Console -> Local Settings. These settings only affects the local console and not all consoles in a session. It includes settings like the console language and LED background light settings. Clear Network Protocols Network protocols are the settings for outputting DMX via an Ethernet connection. It includes ArtNet, sACN, ETCNet2, KiNet1, Pathport and Shownet. These settings are found in Setup -> Network -> Network Protocols. Clear Network Config Network configuration is the settings for what devices should be in the session and the DMX port setup. Clear User Profiles User profiles keep all the data that is connected to the users. Clearing this data leaves only the Administrator and Guest users and the Default user profile. There is a Clear All button that selects all the above boxes. When the desired selection is made, then tap the Please button in the pop-up. New show using the command line It is possible to create a new show using the command line. The command is called NewShow. Read more about it here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 783 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.2. Loading a show A show can be loaded from any tab in the Backup Menu. Using the GUI When Load Show is tapped in the Backup Menu then it will open a pop-up like this: Load Show pop-up Here is a list of the shows in the selected tab. On the right side it is possible to choose what data that will be loaded from the selected show. The idea is that it is possible to load just a small part of a different show into the currently loaded show. Show Data This is activated as a default. The show data is the patch and fixture schedule, stored sequences, presets, groups, effects, and so on. Basically everything that is in a pool somewhere and the imported 3D elements and their location in the 3D stage. If the Show Data is loaded and not the User Profiles (read below), then the existing User Profiles will be overwritten with the ones from the show being loaded and it will add the additional User Profiles from the show. It will not add Users. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 784 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Time Config The time configuration is the time, location, daylight savings settings and NTP (Network Time Protocol) setup. Global Settings The global settings are the ones found in Setup -> Console -> Global Settings. The settings here are shared in the session and includes enabling and disabling the Remote and Telnet, RDM, WYSIWYG, and so on. Local Settings The local settings are the ones found in Setup -> Console -> Local Settings. These settings only affects the local console and not all consoles in a session. It includes settings like the console language and LED background light settings. Network Protocols Network protocols are the settings for outputting DMX via an Ethernet connection. It includes ArtNet, sACN, ETCNet2, KiNet1, Pathport and Shownet. These are found in Setup -> Network -> Network Protocols. Network Config Network configuration is the settings for what devices should be in the session and the DMX port settings on the Consoles, onPC Wings and NPU's. User Profiles User Profiles keep all the data that is connected to the Users. Loading this data will delete all the Users and User Profiles in the current show and load all the Users and User Profiles from the show file being loaded. There is a Check All button that selects all the above boxes. As a default only the main show files are displayed, but it is possible to also choose to load data from a backup version of the show. In the picture above there is a button called "Viewing Shows". This is a button with three different modes: Viewing Shows: This only shows a list of the main show files. Viewing Shows & Backups: This shows the main show files and the backup files. Viewing Backups only: This only shows the backup files. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 785 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English All columns in this pop-up can be sorted in ascending or descending order. This can be done by pressing the Edit key and then the column title. If a mouse or trackball is connected, then it is also possible to right click the column title. In the title bar it is possible to toggle the information button. It looks like this (active): . When it is active then the information about the selected show are displayed at the bottom. It is information about the different software versions it has been through and when it was last saved in those versions. It is also possible to see the information that has been saved into the show by the users. Read more about this in Save Show topic. When the desired show file and the wanted data type is selected, then tap the Load Show button. It is possible to cancel the load process by tapping the Cancel button or the big X in the upper right corner on the pop-up. Hint: Executing onPC.exe with parameter -s allows to specify a show file for loading. Example: <path>/gma2onpc.exe -s:my_showfile ​Loads the show file my_showfile.show.gz from the gma2/shows folder of the corresponding software version. Using the Command Line Show files can be loaded using the command line. The command is called LoadShow. Read more about it here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 786 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.3. Saving a show Using the GUI The Save Show button immediately saves the show using the current show name. There is a green input line in the top part of the Backup Menu. This is used to add information to the show file. This info is visible when loading or deleting a show file and can be used to mark different version or information to the saves. It creates a backup of the previous saved show. Each show file (or unique file name) can have 10 backups. So it is possible to load a backup from ten saves ago. Using the command line A show file can be saved with the same name using the command line. The command is SaveShow. Read about it here. Using the Quick Save function There is also a fast way to save the show. It is called "Quick Save". When the backup menu is not open then press the Backup key twice (like a double click on a mouse) will perform the Quick Save. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 787 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.4. Saving a show with a new name The current show can be saved using a new name. Using the GUI Pressing the Save Show as button opens the "Please enter filename" pop-up where a new name, for the show file, can be typed. Pressing the button will open the on-screen keyboard. When pressing Please/Enter the the show file is save using the entered name. The save action can be canceled by pressing the X in the upper right corner of the pop-up. Using the Command Line The show file can also be saved, with a new name, using the command line. The command is SaveShow [new name]. Read about it here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 788 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.5. Deleting a Show Show can be deleted in all the tabs except the "Demoshows" and "Template" tabs. Using the GUI Pressing the Delete Show(s) button in the Backup Menu opens a pop-up like this: Delete Show(s) pop-up This pop-up lists all the show in the tab. The currently active show cannot be deleted. More than one show can be selected. A selected show gets an orange background. Each time a line is tapped it will toggle the selected status. In the title bar the information button can be toggled. It looks like this (active): . When it is active then information can be seen about the selected show. It is information about the different software versions it has been through and when it was last saved in those versions. As a default the list of show only show the different main shows, but you can also choose to see the backups. In the picture above, there is a button called "Viewing Shows". This is a button with three different modes: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 789 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Viewing Shows: This only shows a list of the main show files. Viewing Shows & Backups: This shows the main show files and the backup files. Viewing Backups only: This only shows the backup files. Tapping the Delete Show(s) button will delete the selected show files. Deleting shows can be canceled by tapping Cancel or the closing X in the upper right corner. Using the Command Line Show files can be deleted using the command line. The command is called DeleteShow. Read more about it here. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 790 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.6. Using a USB stick There are different things to keep in mind when using a USB stick. Here is a list of good advice for the USB stick. Do not use a big stick. Do not go above 16Gb. Name the stick, but do not use a space in the name. Underscore or Dash are ok. It should be formatted in FAT32. If the stick have been in a Mac or PC make sure it has not been configured as something other than a "removable disk". This is not rules in all software versions. But it is a list of advice that have been gathered by limitations in different software version. So maybe not rules, but at least a good advice. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 791 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.7. Setting up a file server The session Master can be connected to a file server in the network. There are three different server systems that can be use. Each type is described below. Generally you need to tap the Setup Server button in the Backup Menu. Then select the type wanted in the drop down menu called "Connection Type". If the console succeeds connecting to the server, then it will create a new tab with the label you provide in the setup (read below). Restriction: grandMA2 onPC cannot be a session Master and connect to a server. Restriction: Consoles needs enough free memory to mount a file server. It will most likely not be able to successfully connect using a console with only 2GB RAM. Restriction: The server tab is only available for the master in the session. FTP In the FTP setup you need to connect to a FTP server (using port 21). The pop-up looks like this (empty): © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 792 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English File Server Configuration pop-up - FTP mode Here you need to fill out the green input fields. The following is a short description of the different fields. Label: This is the text written on the tab used to select the server as a location or "drive". Server Name/IP: This is the name or IP address of the server. Subdirectory: Here it is possible to add a subdirectory in the server location. Leave it empty to use the location chosen in the server. Inside this location there will be created a gma2 folder and several folders will be create inside this. It is just like using a USB memory stick. Username: It is recommended to have a username and password on the FTP server. This input field can be used to write the username. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 793 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Password: This field is to write the password for the FTP server. When all fields are filled out correctly, then tap the Please button. If the console can mount/connect to the server, a new tab will appear in the Backup Menu and other places where it is possible to select a tab to store or export/import objects. Shared Folder (windows) The Shared Folder option for windows. A folder on the Windows computer needs to be shared for this to work. It is a good idea to have this folder on the primary drive on the computer The File Server Configuration pop-up looks like this (empty): File Server Configuration pop-up - Shared Folder mode © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 794 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Many of the input fields are the same as in the FTP setup - read above for the description. The "Subdirectory" is however replaced with "Sharename". Here you need to input the folder name. The location of the shared folder is also needed if it is not directly in the root of the hard drive. When you are happy with your setting, then tap Please to mount the server. If successful then a tab will appear with the label specified. NFS The NFS file share system was developed by Sun Microsystems. It is mostly used in Unix and Unix-like (For instance Linux) operating system. There are less input fields with NFS. The pop-up looks like this (empty): File Server Configuration pop-up - NFS mode The Label and Server Name/IP are the same as above. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 795 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The special input field for NFS is NFS Export Path. It is the path or directory in your server where the files will be stored. When you are happy with your setting, then tap Please to mount the server. If successful then a tab will appear with the label specified. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 796 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.8. Partial Show Read Partial Show Read is a function used to import elements from one show into a different show. The setup of the two shows are compared and you can choose what setup is wanted or a mix can be chosen. After the comparison - called initialization - then access is granted to a new menu where different wanted elements can be chosen for import. The actual process is more complex, but this is the idea. Please read the Partial Show Read chapters to learn more about it. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 797 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.9. ASCII Show Read The grandMA2 can currently import shows from Strand, Transtechnik, and ADB consoles, that have made an ASCII export of the show. The import will read the ASCII file and and create fixture profiles based on the text. It does not import fixture profiles from the library. ASCII importing does not give you a perfect show. You can get the setup and the show data, but might need to make a lot of adjustments to have a show that look the same. It is only possible to import an ASCII show from the USB tab in the Backup Menu. When the ASCII Show Read button is selected in the tab, then a ASCII file needs to be selected. The Overview After a file have been selected, then the ASCII Show Read pop-up is displayed. This pop-up is separated into different tabs. The first one is called Overview and could look like this: ASCII Show Read pop-up - Overview In the overview the console manufacturer and console type that made the export can been seen. It is also possible see the show file name from the ASCII file. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 798 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English In the Overview tab it can be decided where the Default Sequence should be. And if should be created and assigned to an Executor and Executor page. It can be decided if the submasters from the ASCII file are wanted and what page they are desired. It can be chosen from what group number the inhibits from the ASCII file are wanted. It is also possible to choose the first sequence number from the Effects. And if they should be assigned to Executors and then the first Executor page. Effects from ASCII shows are imported as sequences. Attribute Before importing any data, you need to make sure the attributes from the ASCII file matches the attributes in the grandMA. This can be matched and changed in the Attribute tab. It could look like this: ASCII Show Read pop-up - Attribute If it is empty then you can try to press the Default button. Now the attributes from the ASCII file can be matched with the grandMA2 attributes. If this is not matched correctly show data will be lost. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 799 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Selecting one of the MA attribute allows this to be changed to any of the existing attributes in the MA. Attributes that does not exist can be created in the Attributes and Encoder Grouping window. Adjusting the settings When the attributes matches, then you need to make sure the settings match the ASCII show file. The settings are the ones in the lower right corner. Page Width setting The first setting is the Page Width - it does not have anything to do with the ASCII file, but it has to do with the console. If you are working on a grandMA2 light or grandMA2 ultra-light, then you might want to set the width to 15. If you are working on a grandMA2 full-size, then you could set the width to 30. Those are the two options. Universe size setting Some older consoles are set to only have 500 DMX channels per Universe. This Universe setting allows you to change if the patch should be regarded as 500 or 512 DMX channels. Patch setting Some consoles allowed an alternative DMX address. This Patch setting allows you to import the primary patch "Patch 1" or the secondary patch "Patch 2". If you are in any doubt, then just leave this setting at "Patch 1". Link setting The Link setting has two options: "Go" or "Toggle". This decides whether the triggered effects gets a Go or Toggle commend in the CMD column in the Default sequence. All Effects are sequences that are executed from the CMD column. Effects priority setting The Effect Prio. setting have two options: "LTP" or "High". The imported effects will use the setting chosen here. Remember that Effects are imported as sequences and depending on your settings in the Overview they are assigned to Executors. It is always possible to change the priority later if needed. Importing the Setup and Data When the settings are correct then you can import setup and show data. This can be done all at once by tapping the Complete button. This will load the Setup and the Show Data. This is good if you know that it will work and there are no errors. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 800 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English It is also possible to do it in two steps. If the Setup Only button is tapped, then the fixture schedule and the patch is displayed. Then you can check that all is there and the patch is ok, simply by opening the setup. Restriction: If the Setup is not correct, then the Show Data will not import correctly. After you have checked the setup, then go back to the ASCII Show Read in the Backup Menu. You might be asked for the show file again. Please select the same file. Now tap the Data Only button, this imports the Show Data. Using the Setup Only and Data Only buttons also allows you to import the separate parts. For instance if you only need the setup and patch from a show or if you already have everything patched and just need the show data. The Data Only import is looking for the ID numbers when it imports. So if a fixture exists and is correctly patched then the data will import. Log files Importing from the show file will create different log files. These files can be seen in the three remaining tabs. The log files also exists in the "temp" folder in the consoles structure. To get to them a FTP connection is needed. Read about it in the FTP Connection to Console and NPU topic. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 801 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 11.10.grandMA2 to grandMA3 Show File Converter A grandMA2 show file saved as a grandMA3 show file exports the following elements: 1. Patch (Fixture Types, Attributes, and Fixtures). 2. DMX Profiles. 3. DMX Universes. 4. Multipatch Fixtures. 5. Presets with values that include timings. 6. Sequences, Cues, and Cue Timings. 7. Groups, Worlds and Filters. 8. Timecodes. 9. Layouts. 10. Macros. 11. DMX-, MIDI-, and Analog Remotes. 12. Special Masters are converted into Masters in grandMA3. 13. Object appearances are converted into the grandMA3 appearance pool. 14. Executors and Pages are converted. 15. Selective effect pool objects are converted into preset pool 22 (All 2). This pool will be renamed to Effects. grandMA2 effects will be converted into acceleration and deceleration values. 16. Barndoor attributes are converted to shaper attributes in grandMA3 for visualization. 17. Infos in objects are converted to notes in grandMA3. Known Limitations Embedded presets are not convertible, yet. Only the simple predefined forms of effects in grandMA2 are convertible, yet. Effect data in presets and presets that contain only timings without values are not convertible, yet. Only executors that have sequences or selective effects assigned are converted. Fixture types with more than 8 192 channel sets in an attribute do not convert the channel sets after the 8 192th channel set. The grandMA2 Xkeys X5 , X6 , X15 , and X16 are not converted. The option "Save to grandMA3" is not supported on grandMA2 onPC running in the Parallels Desktop application. Macro commands can not be converted. Macro syntax have to be verified manually by the user in grandMA3. Type and target of remotes are not converted. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 802 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Save as grandMA3 Important: The option "Save as grandMA3" works only on a grandMA2 onPC or in Mode2 on a grandMA3 console. For more information, see Mode2. If the button Save as grandMA3 x.x.x is not visible, the system requirements for this feature are not fulfilled. For more information, see system requirements. Requirements: A created grandMA2 show file. To save the currently open grandMA2 show file as a grandMA3 show file, follow the steps below: 1. Open the Backup menu, tap Backup or press Backup . The Backup menu opens. Backup © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 803 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Using the Backup Menu Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 2. Tap Save as grandMA3 x.x.x (x.x.x is a place holder for the installed grandMA3 version number). A popup opens. Pop-up 3. Tap Ok to confirm the pop-up. The current grandMA2 show file is saved in C:\ProgramData\MALightingTechnology\gma3_x.x.x\shared\shows. When saving on an USB stick, the grandMA2 show file is saved in D:\grandMA3\shared\shows. Now, this show file can be opened in the grandMA3 software. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 804 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 12. Single User and Multi User systems The grandMA2 system can handle small and big systems, with one or many user at the same time. This section deal with the difference between a system with a single user and one with multiple users. There is a topic about how to create User Profiles and Users. A page about the different User Settings. And finally a look at different ways to login. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 805 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 12.1. What is the difference between a single-user and a multi-user system When talking about a system, we often actually mean a session. An Ethernet network can have several sessions running. A session can have one, some or many MA devices as members or listeners. This page is attempt to describe some of the differences between the two systems. Single User session In a single user session there is one operator/programmer. This person might have one or several stations (consoles or onPC). When there is only one user, then all stations are logged in as the same user. This have also been called a "Full Tracking Backup". The stations are all in sync and share the different views and the programmer content is the same on all stations. This is useful for the single operator. If one station fails, then the operator can move to the other station and continue working without loosing anything. This operator will usually have full rights to the entire system. Multi User session In a multi user session, there are several operators. They might use the same stations and take turns (working in shifts or at different phases of the process). It can also be a system with multiple users working at the same time on different stations. For this setup the operators need to create more Users and most likely more User Profiles. Each operator will then log into the station using their User and may control the complete system or just a part of the system. The stations share the show file and the Executors are all in sync, but the users can have different views on the screens and their programmer is not shared - the output is. Sometimes the systems are a combination; There are several operators (Multi User), but each operator have two (or more) stations logged in with their User (Full Tracking Backup). In a Multi User system, you can have users with different operator rights. There are several levels of rights. They span from complete access to only being allowed to change the view. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 806 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The User Profiles can also be limited to only a specific world. This would only allow the user to access a part of the fixtures. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 807 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 12.2. Create user profiles and users The user system is divided into two different parts - The User and the User Profile. A User have a User Profile assigned. Many Users can have the same User Profile assigned. Each User have their own programmer and can have different selected elements (Executors, Worlds, Filters, and so on). But if they use the same User Profile, then the Users share the Views and View Button assignment and a lot of other settings. User & Profiles Setup The User & Profiles Setup is where you control the Users and the User Profiles. It can be opened by pressing Setup and then User & Profiles Setup in the Console section. Or by typing Menu UserProfiles in the command line. This is what it look like: User & Profiles Setup This menu offers a lot of information and some possibilities. But the main purpose of this menu is to create Users and User Profiles. The main part of this menu is separated into two sections. The top section is about the User and the bottom part is about the User Profile. The general background color rule applies here. A cell with a black background cannot be edited. Gray background allows you to edit the cell content. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 808 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English There are two Users and one User Profile that is in all shows and cannot be delete or changed. It is the Administrator and Guest users. When a User is logged in, then some settings are locked and cannot be changed and if changes are made to a user that is logged in, then that user might need to login again before the changes are applied. In the title bar you can see what user is currently logged in on the station you are standing or sitting in front (in the image above is "administrator"). Button explanation There is a set of buttons at the bottom of the menu. They change depending on what is selected. This is a short description of them: Add [Profile/User] - This will create a new user or user profile (depending where the focus last was). Delete [Profile/User] - This will delete the selected user or user profile (the one with the white frame). Cut [Profile/User] - This will move the selected user or user profile in the clipboard - ready to be pasted somewhere. Copy [Profile/User] - This will make a copy of the selected user or user profile into the clipboard - ready to be pasted somewhere. Paste [Profile/User] - This will paste the user or user profile from the clipboard to the selected location. Import [Profile/User] - This allows you to import a previously exported user profile. Export [Profile/User] - This will export the selected user profile. A pop-up might appear asking where it should be exported: the internal memory or to any detected USB sticks. Login - Pressing this button will login the station with the user selected in the User list. Column explanation Each of the two sections have some columns. This is a short explanation of the columns in the UserProfile section: No. - This is the profile number. It cannot be edited. Name - This is the name of the profile. Used - This is for information. Here you can see how many users have this profile assigned (read below). Logged In - Here you can see how many stations are currently logged in with a user with this profile. World - A world can be assigned to a User Profile. This will only allow access to the fixtures and attributes in this specific world. Read more below. Info - Here you can type some information text. This is a short explanation of the columns in the Users section: Name - This is the name of the user - this is the name used when logging in. Password - Passwords can be added to a User. This password needs to be type when logging in. Leave this empty if you do not want a password. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 809 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English UserProfile - All Users need to have one of the UserProfiles assigned. Editing this cell will open the Select User Profile pop-up. Rights - Here you can select the level of rights the user should have. Editing this cell will open the Select Rights pop-up. Please read the section below to learn more. Logged In - Here you can see how many stations are currently logged in with this user. Info - Here you can type some information text to the user. User rights There are seven different levels of user rights. When editing the Rights cell in a User, then you will get a small pop-up that lists the following users: Admin - This is full rights to change everything in the console, system and show. Setup - This will limit access to some of the elements in the console. The user cannot access the User & Profile Setup! There are other console settings that can be accessed. Program - In this level the user cannot do major changes to the Fixture Schedule. It only gives access to the "Patch Only". Most programming operations can be done. Presets - This level allows to update existing presets. But the user cannot edit the cue content. Playback - This level allows to playback and run a programmed show. But the user cannot store anything. None - With this user right it is not allowed to use a programmer. The user is allowed to run executors and change views. You can only change the rights when the user is not logged in. Assigning worlds to User Profiles Assigning a world to a User Profile will limit the Users assigned to this User Profile to only use the assigned World. It is not possible for the user to change world. The default option is None. This means that the user is not limited. Editing a cell in the World column will open up a small Select World pop-up. This will list the None option and all the created worlds in the show file. Selecting the "Full 1" world will give the user access to every fixture and attribute, but the user is locked from changing world. Worlds can be assigned using the command line. To assign world number 4 to user profile number 3 use the following command: [Channel]> Assign World 4 UserProfile 3 © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 810 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Create a new User Profile and a User To create a new user with a new user profile you will need to do the following (you need to be logged in as a user with Admin rights): 1. Press the Setup key. 2. Tap the User & Profiles Setup . 3. Tap the cell with "New" in the lowest "UserProfiles" section - you might need to scroll down. 4. Tap the Add Profiles button. 5. Change the Name of the user profile to something that makes sense. 6. Tap the cell with "New" in the top "Users" section - you might need to scroll down. 7. Tap the Add User button. 8. Change the Name of the user to something that makes sense. 9. Add a password if you want one. 10. Select the User Profile you just created. 11. Change the user Rights if you need to. 12. Tap the Login button if you want to login immediately as this new user. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 811 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 12.3. User specific settings There are a lot of settings that follow the User (Profile). Most are found in Setup and in the User tab. In the User tab you can also see the name of the currently logged in user. Defaults The default section contains all the settings used when creating different elements. It is separated into four sub sections. Sequence Defaults The sequence defaults are the settings used when storing cues. It is mainly the different timings used for fades and delays. It also has the default trigger. Follow this link to read more about the Sequences. Preset Defaults The Preset defaults contain four different settings. They are not described here, please read the Presets topics instead. Layout Defaults Tapping the Layout Defaults will open the settings for the Layout View on the entire screen. Follow this link to read more about the Layouts. Command At Defaults This section only have one setting. It is the preferred color engine when using the Color Picker or when grabbing a color from a different fixture. Window Settings This section keeps all the user settings for the different windows. The settings can be changed here, but it could make more sense to change them in the actual sheets and windows. There you open the options and in the title bar of the options, you can tap the Save to Default button. These are the settings that are stored to default. Read about the different settings in each of the help pages describing the different windows. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 812 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Grand Master & Misc. Keys This section contains settings for some of the hard keys. Many of the keys can be disabled, including the Grand Master fader. The keys that can be disabled are: Blackout, Solo, Highlight, Channels Page + (Ch Pg +) and Channel Page - (Ch Pg -). As mentioned it is also possible to disable the Grand Master fader. This will force the physical fader at full. It is still an option to assign the Grand Master function to one of the executors. If the Grand Master is moved on one of the other executors, then the physical Grand Master will still move. Moving the physical Grand Master will make the fader jump back when it is released. There is a setting called Link Fader & Button Page, this will always change the Executor Fader and Executor Button pages together, when it is turned On. Then it does not matter if you use the one or the other sets of page keys, they will change to the same page. The last option here is Blind. It has three different options: Disabled - This disables the Blind key. BlindEdit only - This setting only gives access to the BlindEdit mode. You still need to keep the key pressed for a second to enter the BlindEdit mode. Enabled - This is the default setting. This gives access to both the normal Blind and the BlindEdit mode. Oops Settings The Oops key gives access to undo certain things. It can remember 100 steps backwards. The oops'able elements are divided into three different sections: General, Views and Programmer. You can activate if the oops function should use all of these sections or just some of them. Many users turn off the Views section. Then some of the 100 steps are wasted on view changes. Store Options This is where the store options are saved. These are the settings used when storing cues or presets. All the settings are not described here. Please read the Cues and Sequences and Presets topics instead. Settings This section contains different settings all related to the User (Profile). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 813 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English MessageBox on all screens - This can be On or Off. When this is On, the message boxes will appear on all screens. Default MixColor Readout - There are two options here: RGB or CMY. This is used to select the default color system. If you mostly deal with RGB colors or CMY colors, then it is possible to change what sheets and encoders displays. Speed Mode - Selects the speed mode in Effects, Bitmap Effects and Speed Groups. Tapping it opens the Select Speed Mode pop-up. Here the options are: Hz (Hertz) BPM (Beats Per Minute) Sec (Seconds) Select Speed Mode pop-up © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 814 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Trackball Function - Opens the Select Trackball Function pop-up. Here you can select the mode sequence for your trackball when you press the Mouse key. The trackball can have four different modes: Off - no function Mouse - normal trackball mouse function Pan/Tilt - this will move the selected moving lights Wheel - emulates the level wheel Select Trackball Function pop-up Trackball Resolution - Opens the Select Trackball Resolution pop-up. This is used to select the default resolution of the trackball. This can also be change on the fly by pressing the (encoder) key and holding it, then selecting one of the resolutions in the pop-up - more about the Encoder key following the link.There are three different resolutions: Fine (0.1% of the range) Normal (1% of the range) Coarse (5% of the range) Select Trackball Resolution pop-up © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 815 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Trackball Rotation - This is used to rotate the orientation of the trackball in the pan/tilt mode. It opens a Trackball Rotation pop-up: Trackball Rotation pop-up Here you can press the small green circle and rotate the orientation of the trackball. When you are happy, press the "Please" button to confirm the choice. There are four quick options that allow for fast selection of one out of four quarters on the circle. Pressing the yellow X in the upper right corner cancels any changes. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 816 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Dimmer Wheel Mode - Tapping this opens the Select Dimmer Wheel Mode pop-up. This is used to select the wheel mode of the level wheel. There are four options: Additive - This will allow you to use the level wheel to set the value of dimmers. It will keep the individual levels until reaching 0% or 100%. Then it will level them out. For example: fixture 1 has a value of 50 and fixture 2 is at 60. When using the level wheel to take them both up to 100, and then back down, they both go down from 100 at the same time and at the same level. Incremental - This will basically do the same as 'Additive', but it remembers the individual values going beyond 0% and 100%. For example: fixture 1 has a value of 50 and fixture 2 is at 60. When using the level wheel to take them both up to 100, and then back down, fixture 1 will start coming down first and then fixture 2 will follow when fixture 1 is at 90. Prop. + (Proportional positive) - When using the level wheel to turn up the value the individual difference in value will increase. Turning down the values will make all channels reach 0% at the same time. Prop. - (Proportional negative) - When using the level wheel to turn the values up the individual difference in value will decrease. Turning up to 100% will make all channels reach 100% at the same time. Select Dimmer Wheel Mode pop-up Dimmer Wheel Resolution - This is used to select the default resolution of the Level Wheel. This can also be change on the fly by pressing the (Encoder) key and holding it, then selecting one of the resolutions in the pop-up - more about the Encoder key following the link.There are three different resolutions: Fine (0.1% of the range) Normal (1% of the range) Coarse (5% of the range) Select Dimmer Wheel Resolution © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 817 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Channel Page Width - Opens the Select Channel Page Width pop-up. Here the width of the channel pages can be selected. The options are: Default - This will add the amount of your current console. Half Page (15 faders) - This will scale down a grandMA2 full-size or grandMA2 onPC to match a grandMA2 light or grandMA2 ultra-light. Full Page (30 faders) - This will not add more faders to your grandMA2 light or grandMA2 ultra-light, but it will spread it out as if it was a grandMA2 full-size. Select Channel Page Width pop-up This cannot add more faders to your console. If there only are 15 faders then you do not get 30 - but you can scale down a grandMA2 full-size. Dynamic Channel Page Shows Only Selected - When this is On then the console will only display the selected fixtures in "Dynamic Channel Pages" - read more about the Dynamic Channel Pages in the Channel Pages topic. At Normal Percent - Here you can define what percent should be considered "At Normal". This is used when the At key is pressed twice. Single Digit Value - All numeric value input below 10 will be a multiplication of 10; for example: channel 1 at 5 = channel 1 gets value 50. Max. Program Time - This is the maximum allowed Program time for the Program Time Special Master. Follow this link Time Control to read more about the Program Time. Max. Exec Time - This is the maximum allowed Executor time for the Executor Time Special Master. Follow this link Time Control to read more about the Executor Time. Special Fader Buttons - Here you can Enable or Disable the extra buttons above the 100mm faders. Follow this link Master Section to read more about this area. Disable View Button and View CLI - With this option activated Views and Viewbuttons will not interact with the command line anymore. For example hitting the store button to store a group and realizing you have to change the View to get a group pool would not accidently store a view. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 818 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Patch Column Readout is absolute DMX address - This will set the Patch columns to display the absolute DMX address instead of a universe and address split. For example with this On you will see the DMX address "2.1" (universe.address) as "513". XKeys always for Exec - When this is On, then the X-Keys (below screen 1) will always work as the Executor Buttons. It will not automatically follow the content on the lower part of screen 1. 3D Items Unit - This will change the units in the MA 3D (and Stage View). There are two options: Scale - The visible number will be a scale of the item size. Size(m) - The visible number will be in meters. CurrentChannelPage - This is this users current Channel Page. CurrentFaderPage - This is this users current Executor Fader Page. CurrentButtonPage - This is this users current Executor Button Page. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 819 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English EncoderLink - The encoder link is used when working in the Fade, Delay and Effect layers. It has several options: Single - Only sets the value for the attribute you change. Single Active - Same as above, but limited to parameters that are already active in programmer. Feature - Sets the value for all attributes in the selected feature. For example if you set a delay time for 'Pan' it will also set the time for 'Tilt'. Feature Active - Same as above, but limited to parameters that are already active in programmer. All - This sets the value for all attributes. All Active - Same as above, but limited to parameters that are already active in programmer. Filter - Sets the value for the attributes selected in the current filter from the filter pool or at filter. Filter Active - Same as above, but limited to parameters that are already active in programmer. Select Encoder Link pop-up Programmer Colors - This setting allows to change between two different set of visual color feedback regarding the programmer. The two options are Standard and High Contrast. Read about the in the System Colors topic. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 820 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 12.4. Login on a station There are two ways to log into a station. Before logging in, you will need to know a User name. To learn more about the Users and the creation of Users and User Profiles, please read the Create User Profiles and Users topic. Important: There are two default users in every show file. You can always login as "Guest" with limited access or as Administrator (password: admin) with full access. Log in using the GUI The main way to login using the GUI is to press the Tools key and the Login button. This will open this pop-up on all screens: Login screen A valid user name and (if there is a) password needs to be typed in. One other option is when in the User & Profile Setup (follow link above) then you can select a User and tap the Login button in the lover right corner. Log in using the command line Login can also be done using the Login command. Follow the link to read the details about it. The general use is that "Login" is typed followed by the user name and the password (if any) and then executes the command with Please/Enter. Example: If you wanted to log in as administrator then you would type: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 821 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Single User and Multi User systems Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English [Channel]> login administrator admin © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 822 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13. Networking This section is about networking in grandMA2. There is a short description of what is networking. There are some useful information about setting IP addresses in Consoles and in grandMA2 onPC. MA devices communicate and connect in a session. There is a section describing all the relevant topics about sessions. The network can be used to get DMX in and out of system. There is a section about CITP. There is a topic about PosiStageNet or PSN. It is a protocol used to exchange real-time position values. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 823 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.1. What is networking Networking in grandMA2 can be a lot of things. Generally when we talk about network, we are talking about the Ethernet connections on the consoles and devices. To make any connections, the devices will need an IP addresses and physically connection using good Ethernet switches. Expand the system by adding more MA devices MA devices can be connected to expand the system. This allows for: more synchronized DMX ports to the system more parameters allowing control of more lights create backed up systems that ensures a running show controlling MA VPU media server giving output to big or small screens incl. sound output and much more Sessions When moving beyond the standalone console, sessions are needed. A session is like a chat room for MA devices. A device can be added to a session and then the device is a part of that system. It is possible to create 31 different sessions in one Ethernet network. One session can handle a maximum of 65 536 parameters (read more about parameters vs. DMX channels following this link). The network limit in a Gigabit network is currently 3 maxed out session in one network. Connect to third party hardware You can also use the network to communicate with third party equipment. grandMA2 support many of the industry standard network protocols for sending (and in some instances receive) DMX data using the Ethernet network. They include Art-Net III, sACN, Pathport, ETC-Net2, Shownet, and Kinet. grandMA2 also supports CITP and PSN. CITP is used for streaming video and image exchange over network. PSN is a 3D position protocol capable of exchanging real world position values from tracking systems. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 824 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.2. Set the IP address in the console An IP address in a matching range is needed to be able to connect devices. This page is about setting a static IP address in the console. If you need to set the IP in the onPC, please follow this link. If you have a network using DHCP, then you can might want to allow a DHCP server to set the IP address in the console. You can read more about this in the Using DHCP in MA devices topic. There are three ways to set the IP address in the console. No matter what way you choose, you will need to reboot the console for the change to take affect. Set the IP address using the command line Use the SetIP command to see and change the IP addresses of the console. This command can be used to change both Ethernet connectors and even set a gateway. Follow the link to read about using the command. Set the IP address using MA Network Control You can change the IP address in the console by pressing Setup and then MA Network Control . Here it is only possible to change the IP address of Ethernet connector number 1, when the console is not connected to a session. In the title bar of the menu you can see the current status of the console. If it says anything other than "Standalone", then you need to tap Leave Session . When the console is standalone, then tap the green input field next to "Station IP". Then type the new IP address and reboot. Set the IP address using MA Network Configuration You can change the IP addresses in the console by pressing Setup and then MA Network Configuration . In this menu you need to select the Consoles tab. Here are all the consoles in your system listed. Selecting a cell with an IP address in the table and pressing the screen encoder will give open an input box that allows changes to the IP address. Each console have two IP addresses - one for each Ethernet connector on the back. The second IP address should always be an Art-Net address. The Art-Net addresses have two ranges that are allowed - one starting with 2 and one starting with 10. Other manufacturers and networks specifiers often uses the "10" range for their primary address scheme. For this reason it is a good practice to keep the Art-Net in the "2" range. That could avoid problems in networks that are not only MA devices and not completely under your control. There is a column for activating DHCP. Read more about DHCP in the Using DHCP in MA devices topic. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 825 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.3. Set the IP address in the onPC To change the IP address in the onPC, you first need to set the IP address in your computer. You can only set the IP address equivalent to the Ethernet connector 1. If you need the onPC to output or input Art-Net, then it is not necessary to give the computer an IP address in the Art-Net range. MA onPC will automatically generate one. If you create an IP address in the Art-Net range, then the onPC will not generate one, but use the one you have set. This can be done on an secondary Ethernet adaptor or the same. The onPC will automatically use the adaptor with the Art-Net range to transmit the Art-Net data. You need to set the IP address in the computer before opening the onPC program - or restart the program after the IP address have been changed in the computer. If you are using DHCP, then you will need to make sure that the IP range is the same on all the MA devices that needs to be connected. Set the IP address using the command line When you have set the IP address in the computer, then you can use the SetIP command to set the IP address. It is important that you write the same IP address as the one set in the computer. Follow the link to read more about using the SetIP command. Set the IP address using the GUI You can select the IP address by pressing the Setup key and then MA Network Control . Here you can only select the IP address when the onPC is not connected to a session. In the title bar of the menu you can see the current status of the onPC. If it says anything other than "Standalone", then tap Leave Session . When the onPC is standalone, then you can open the drop down box next to "Station IP". Here you can select the IP address set in Windows. Remember that onPC needs to restart before it uses the selected IP address. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 826 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.4. Using DHCP in MA devices The grandMA2 supports the use of DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Use the normal procedure for setting static IP addresses in your devices, if you do not know what DHCP is. DHCP is enabled as a default when you do a full install. It can also be enabled on Consoles, NPU, and DMX Nodes from the Setup->Network->MA Network Configuration. Read more about this in the Adding devices to your session topic. The device will look for a DHCP server in the network during the boot process. If a DHCP server is not found, then the device will assign an IP address in the APIPA (Automatic Private IP Addressing) range. This address will begin with 169.254.x.y. DHCP can also be used to define a gateway address. This can also be done with static address, but only when using the SetIP keyword in the command line. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 827 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.5. Session control To connect MA devices you need to create a session. MA Network Control Sessions and Stations (consoles and onPC) relation to sessions are controlled in MA Network Control found in the Setup menu. It can be opened it by pressing Setup and then tap MA Network Control . It could look like this: Menu MA-Net Control The left side of this menu displays the different sessions in the network. There can be a maximum of 31 sessions. Each session needs a unique session number (between 1 and 31). There is always a line in the session control that "holds" the stations that are not currently in a session. This line is called Not connected. The right side of the menu lists the different stations that are in the session selected on the left side (including the "Not connected"). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 828 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Master and Connected In a session there is always one station that have the Master role. If there is more stations in the session, then the others will have the Connected role. The Master is the one that transmit DMX on the network. It is also the console that executes the commands that are triggered by the sequences. If you are using MIDI, then it is important to know that the Master is the one that will transmit the MIDI information, and the station that needs the MIDI signal. The Master is also the one that will upload the show file to new devices added to the network. The Master and the Connected stations are all equal members in the session any one can run cues and they share all the information. If you save the show on one station it is saved on all stations. If one session member changes the show while in a session, then all members will get the new show. Station priorities You can control what station gets the Master role using the Station Priority setting. If one station has the "High" priority, then this station will be the Master. There are four different priorities: Never: A station with this priority will connect to a session, but it cannot create a session, and if it is the only station left then the session will end! Low: A station with this priority will connect to a session. It will only be the Master if there is no one else with a higher priority. Normal: This is the default priority. High: In the ideal system you will have one station that have the high priority. It is only possible to change the priority when a station is not connected to a session. Speed and Link Speed The session list will display the session number, name, IP address of the master and a Speed. This speed can be Fast or Slow. A Fast session means that the session is running at maximum speed and data packets are sent as fast as possible and in burst. A Slow session means that data packets are being cued up and sent at a slower rate. Then older hardware (grandMA1 era) - with slower network cards - have a chance to keep up. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 829 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The session speed is automatically changed if the master detects older hardware directly behind the network adapter and only when the station is switched on - when the first device is a gigabit switch, it is always fast. The only way to manually change the speed is to limit a Ethernet connection to 100Mbit in the switch or in the station. Each station also have a Link Speed column. Here it shows directly the Mbit speed connection for the station. You can change what the network card in the console is set to using the SetNetworkSpeed command. Please read the following pages to learn about creating sessions and adding more devices to the session. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 830 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.5.1.How to create a session To create a session you need to give your station (console or onPC) a valid IP address. If you are using an onPC then your station will get the Hostname from the computer name. On a console you can change the stations Hostname by tapping the green input field. Giving your station a meaning full name can help locating the console or onPC in bigger systems. Next you will need to select a session number that is not already used. Valid numbers are from 1 through 31. You can also give your session a name. This can be very useful in networks with more than one session. If you do not specify a session name, then the name from the show file is used. A session can also have a password. Please read the Protect the session and your station topic to learn more about this. Now you can tap the Create Session button. Your station will create a session and upload the show file to all devices that are linked to your session. Read more about this in the Adding devices to your session. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 831 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.5.2.Protecting the session and station In a networked solution multiple stations and devices might be connected to the same network. This can give some unfortunate situations. Password protect the session Anyone who connects to the network can choose to join your session. This will give a show upload. The system stops DMX output while the show upload is running. This can be catastrophic in a live situation. It can be prevented that unwanted stations join the session by giving the session a password. A running session cannot get a password. Passwords needs to set before the session is created. If a session has a password, then there will be a "PW" in front of the session name. A session member can invite stations without having to type the password on the invited stations. Disable invite Default settings allow a different station to invite a station where a user might be working on something else. This means that a different show file would be pushed to that station and unsaved work is lost - this might be unfortunate. This can be prevented by Disable Invite in MA Network Control. In the upper right corner, of the MA Network Control menu, there is a button. This can have two states: Invite Enabled: The station can be invited into a session. Invite Disabled: The station cannot be invited into a session. Autojoin Autojoin is a function that is related to devices and stations in the session. If a device - assigned to the session reboots, then Autojoin will tell the device to rejoin the session when it is done rebooting. This however can prompt a show upload - same as when a station joins the session. If this happens when a cue is suppose to run, then it can be catastrophic to the show. Of course if the system is one console and one NPU and all DMX comes from the NPU, then it is very important to get the NPU back as soon as possible. But there might be situations (typically in bigger setups), where it is more desirable to miss a section of the fixtures, until it is an optimal time to do the show upload, than having all the fixtures freeze while the show uploads. It is up to the user to decide what the system should do by toggling Autojoin in the MA Network Control - it is the second button from the top on the right side. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 832 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English It is not all devices that prompts a show upload. Nodes are generally just listening to the network traffic, and do not need a show upload. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 833 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.5.3.Adding devices to the session MA devices can be added to the session. This will expand the system and allow for bigger systems where it is possible to control more lights (more parameters). Devices like 3D visualizers, Media servers, Networked dimmers, MA Nodes, and MA Network Switches can also be added. It is all controlled in MA Network Configuration. This can be found by pressing Setup and then tap MA Network Configuration . It could look like this: MA Network Configuration - The Console tab The configuration is divided into sections or tabs. The tabs represent each device type. There are tabs for: Consoles onPC NPU 3D VPU NDP Dimmer DMX Nodes (MA Nodes only) Network Switch (MA Network Switch only) Consoles and grandMA2 onPCs are called Stations and are connected to a session using the MA Network © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 834 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Control. They cannot be invited or forced to connect from this interface, but the DMX ports and timecode can be configured. Stations in the session will also appear in the MA Network Configuration. Status colors The devices in the MA Network configuration can have different colors to help identify problems and status of the devices in the network. Hostname, Offset and Bridge The background color of the Hostname, Analog Offset, MIDI Offset and Bridge can have different colors. Red: The device is not present in the network or it is already connected to a (different) session. Gray / Black: The device is in the network, but is not in any session. The background is black for Stations - gray for all other devices. Dark green: The device is in the network and is connected to the same session as you. Bright green: This is the device you currently using, and it is in a session. Version number The version number has a default white text color and it can have a red color. The red color indicates that the device has an incompatible software version number and it cannot be used in the session. To add a device to the session, make sure the first three ranges of the version number match the other devices. Consoles The consoles tab offers the possibility to configure the ports on a console that is connected to the network. At the bottom of the screen there are some buttons: Add - Pressing this will open a small pop-up that lists all the available consoles in your network. If there are no consoles, that are not already added, then the list will be empty. Not adding any actual consoles, will create an "empty" console with the 0.0.0.0 IP address. Delete - Tapping this button will delete the selected console. You cannot delete your own console. Add Present - This will automatically add all the consoles that are present in the network. Remove Absent - This will remove the consoles from the list, that are not present in the network. Remove Non-Members - This will remove the consoles from the list, that are not a member of your session. When you have added a console to the list, then you get a table where the rows are the different consoles (if there are more than one). The columns are different settings. All the settings with a gray background color can be changed. If the console is not connected to the session, then the changes might not be made in the console. The columns are: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 835 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English IP ETHERCON 1 (ETH0) - This is the IP address of the number 1 EtherCon connector on the back of the console. Changing this number will change the IP address on the console and requires a reboot. DHCP ETHERCON 1 (ETH0) - Editing this cell will give a "Yes". This enables DHCP for Ethernet port 1 and will prompt a reboot. Read more about DHCP in the Using DHCP in MA devices topic. IP ETHERCON 2 (ETH1) - This is the IP address of the number 2 EtherCon connector on the back of the console. This connector is for Art-Net and should have an Art-Net compatible IP address. Changing this number will change the IP address on the console and requires a reboot. Hostname - This is the hostname of the console. This is only for information. It can only be changed in the MA Network Control. Type - This displays the type of console. XLR A to XLR F - These are the female DMX connectors on the back of the console. Editing this cell will open a pop-up that allows you to change the settings. It is described in details in the Getting DMX in and out of the system topic. XLR In - This is the male DMX port on the back of the console. Editing, works just as the female connectors see above. MIDI TC - Choose which Timecode slot the incoming MIDI timecode should be sent to. Please read the Timecode topic for more details about Timecode slots. SMPTE TC - Choose which Timecode slot the incoming LTC/SMPTE timecode should be sent to. Please read the Timecode topic for more details about Timecode slots. Version - This is the software version the console is currently running. Memory Complete/Free - This displays the amount of memory (RAM) in the console and how much of that is not used. If the console uses all the available memory then it will stop working. You will also need an extra memory capacity to connect to a file server. x64 - Here it is displayed if the console is running the 64 -bit version of Linux or the 32-bit. A "Yes" indicates that it is 64-bit. Analog Offset - Here remote analog inputs, on the back of the console, can be offset. This can be useful if there are more consoles and you need more analog remote inputs than the 16 a single console offers. The session can handle 64 unique remote inputs. To reach numbers above 16 (the number of inputs on the console) then you will need to offset the input on one or more consoles. An offset of 16 will map physical input number 1 to remote number 17. MIDI Offset - This is the same as the analog remotes, but for MIDI Notes. Most MIDI systems support 128 notes (0-127). But the MA system can handle 1024 MIDI remote inputs. In combination with the 16 different channels, this allows you to map 16.384 unique MIDI remote inputs! Link Speed - This is the current connection speed between the console and the switch. Bridge Mode - The Bridge is not currently implemented. Bridge IP - The Bridge is not currently implemented. grandMA2 onPC grandMA2 onPCs are considered "Stations" and can only be added to a session in the MA Network Control. The onPC section has the same buttons at the bottom as the console section - plus two more. They are called Identify Fader 1 and Identify Fader 2. Each grandMA2 onPC can have one MA onPC command wing and two MA © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 836 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English onPC fader wings connected. They are all connected through USB connectors. If you connect two MA onPC fader wings, then you need to tell the computer which fader wing is number 1 and which one is number 2. This is done by tapping one of the Identify buttons and then pressing any button on the corresponding fader wing. Repeat the previous described steps for the second fader wing. It is not needed to do this for the command wing. When a grandMA2 onPC is added to the network, then you will see that one grandMA2 onPC takes three rows in the table part - one row for each possible wing. There are not all the same columns in the onPC section as in the console section. Please read the description of the columns in the Console section above. There are some small differences: There is only one Ethernet column - this is the primary connection used to communicate with other MA devices. Changing the number here won´t change the IP address on the computer. If you want to output Art-Net from your computer, then it is very recommended to add another Ethernet port. This could be done with a USB (3.0/3.1) to Ethernet dongle. Then give this Ethernet adaptor an IP address in the Art-Net range. Your onPC will then use this Ethernet adaptor to transmit the Art-Net. The MA onPC command wing has a male DMX port labeled "DMX In". This is "XLR C" in the configuration table. Normally it is possible to use any DMX port as input or output but there is a limitation on the Command wing. It is only possible to use the "DMX A" and "DMX In" for inputting DMX to your system from the MA onPC command wing. MA NPU The MA NPUs (Network Processing Unit) are added and connected to the session in the MA Network Configuration. At the bottom of this section you have the same buttons as the Console section and you can use these buttons to add MA NPUs that are in the network. When the MA NPU exists in the table, then you can edit the Session Member column. This is a toggle cell. It can be empty or it can be "Yes". If it is yes, then the MA NPU is told to join the session. If a different session also would like the MA NPU to join their session, then the MA NPU will join the session it sees first in the network. The MA NPU cannot output or receive Art-Net, so there are only columns for one IP address including the DHCP column. Changing the IP number in the IP column, will change the IP address in the MA NPU and it will restart. The MA NPU has 8 DMX ports. They can all be changed in the table. Here they are called "XLR A" to "XLR H". Read the description of the columns in the Console section above. MA 3D The MA 3D visualizer is an integrated part of a MA system. It is a visualizer that communicate with the stations and changes made to the setup will automatically be visible in the MA 3D. It has the same buttons at the bottom of the screen as the console. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 837 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English When a MA 3D visualizer is added to the table then you will have the same Session Member column as the MA NPU and the process is the same. When connecting a MA 3D it can be chosen which User it should follow. The users in the show each have a Stage view. The MA 3D is connected to the Stage view, so changing the angle or location of the virtual camera in the Stage view or the MA 3D visualizer, they will both follow along. A MA 3D visualizer will also follow the user into Blind and Preview mode and show the blind and preview output instead of the live output. The MA 3D only have one IP address column and no DHCP column. It is the IP address of the computer running the software. Changing the number here will not change the IP address in the computer. MA VPU The MA VPU (Video Processing Unit) has some extra buttons at the bottom of the screen. Besides the standard buttons, it also got: Edit - This will open an editor for the selected MA VPU. Here many of the settings in the MA VPU can be changed. Backup Manager - If a MA VPU is set as a Backup, then tapping this button allows to setup the relationship between the main and backup MA VPU. Content Distribution - Pressing this button will distribute the content from the MA VPU set as distributor to the MA VPUs set as receivers. Make a Screenshot - Pressing this button will trigger a screenshot creation in the MA VPU. Global VPU settings - Tapping this button will open the Global MA VPU settings. For a short explanation of the other buttons please have look at the Console section. There are also some special columns in the MA VPU table: Layer - This is the layer in the Patch and fixture schedule that have the configuration of VPU layers, Masters and Cameras. Content - Here it can be set if the MA VPU has some special settings regarding the central distribution of content. Backup VPU - Here it can be toggled if the MA VPU is a backup or main MA VPU. There is only one IP address column - it is the primary IP address used to communicate with the other MA devices. The MA VPU has a secondary IP address for Art-Net. This can only be set on the MA VPU. MA VPUs run on windows computers and changing the IP address in the table will not change the IP address in the MA VPU. DHCP is only possible to activate in the MA VPU Network Settings. For details about the MA VPU or any of the things mentioned above, please have a look the VPU Manual. MA NDP MA NDP (Network Dimmer Processors) are the processors in the discontinued dimMA system. They connect like the NPU or VPU. They are invited to be a part of a session in the Session Member column. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 838 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English It has the standard buttons at the bottom. There are some special columns for the MA NDP: Session - This displays the session number the MA NDP is currently a part of. MA NDPs can run independent from a station created session (using the DMX ports), then this column will display the session ID the NDP created by it self. Rack number - This is the rack number the MA NDP is controlling. You can set this number and the MA NDP will then use the configuration for that Rack number. XLR A & XLR B - These two DMX ports are the outputs from the MA NDP. Here you can see which universe they are set to output. Restriction: Please be careful when changing the settings in your MA NDPs and dimMA system. DMX Nodes DMX nodes are the different nodes from MA. There are 2, 4 and 8 port versions in different variations. Restriction: If the Node is connected to a managed switch, then the port where the node is connected needs to be set to Auto-negotiate for the speed/connection method. There are two special buttons in this section - besides the standard buttons at the bottom: Identify - Pressing this button will flash the display and LEDs on the grandMA1 era nodes and turn the background color green in the grandMA2 era nodes. 2Port SW Update - The software update process is different for the grandMA1 era 2 Port Nodes. To update those they need to be selected in the table and then tap this button. In the new (grandMA2 era) nodes there are two IP addresses with the option to activate DHCP on the Ethernet port. One will be used for all MA communication. The secondary IP address is the Art-Net address - it will be used if the mode of the node is changed to Art-Net. The grandMA1 era Nodes only have one IP address that can be defined - It will automatically change the IP address to a valid Art-Net address if the mode is changed. Speaking of modes. There is a Mode column. Here it is possible to select different modes for the node: MA-Net1 (only in the older Nodes) - This will switch the node to connect with the grandMA1 system. MA-Net2 - This is the mode needed to have full control and synchronized DMX output from a MA2 system. This is also needed for the onPC nodes to unlock parameters in an onPC system. Please read more in the Parameter Expansion topic. Art-Net - This will switch the node to Art-Net mode and use the secondary IP address. And a Network number in the Session ID/Network column needs to be assigned. Use the number 1 for Art-Net I and Art-Net II and the first 256 universes in Art-Net III. If you are in doubt, set it to 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 839 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English sACN - This will switch the node to sACN mode. None - This will disable the node. Adding DMX Nodes to the session is different then all the other elements we have looked at so far. They are not invited to join what ever session you are currently in, they are assigned to listen to a specific session number this is done in the Session ID/Network column. They hold their own configuration - it is not a part of the show file. It can however be imported or exported. Please read the Getting DMX in and out of the system topics for more about the DMX configuration. Since it is possible to have up to 8 DMX ports, then there are "XLR A" to "XLR H" columns. The column called Light Mode allows for control of the backlight in the displays (and the Data LEDs in the old grandMA1 nodes). The Light Intensity column is only for the grandMA1 nodes. Three different levels of intensity in the LEDs and display can be set. There is a column called Local. This can turn On or Off (empty cell) the local yellow menu hardware button on the grandMA2 nodes. The last column is called Remote. This can turn On or Off (empty cell) the web remote access to the node. Only available in the grandMA2 nodes. Network Switch MA Network Switches can be added to the system. They are not members of any session. But can be added to allow changing the configuration from a station in the network. The MA Network Switch has a lot of settings and controlling or configuring it from the console/onPC is all described in the Control the MA Network Switch section. Bridge The Bridge is not implemented, so there is nothing to do in this tab. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 840 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.5.4.How to end or leave a session A single station can be removed from a session or the entire session can be ended. Leave a session Leaving the session can be done using the LeaveSession command. This will remove the station, where the command is executed, from the session. You can also open the MA Network Control (in Setup) and tap the Leave Session button. This only takes one console out of the session - the one you are operating. If there are other stations in the session, then the session will continue. If your station was the last one, then the session will end. Disconnect / Dismiss a station A station can be removed from the session by using the DisconnectStation command. You can also open the MA Network Control (in Setup) select the station you want to remove and tap the Dismiss Session button. This will take the selected station out of the session. End Session You can end the session your are a part of using the EndSession command. You can also open the MA Network Control (in Setup) and tap the End Session button. Ending a session will dismiss all stations and the session is no longer running. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 841 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.5.5.Session Collision You might experience a Session Collision at some point. It is a situation that occurs when two stations believe that they are the master of the same session. This can happen if you have a faulty network cable, a bad switch or someone who manually unplugs and replugs network cables. When this happens, then the session is divided into two parts. One of the stations that have left the original session, will become master - if it was not already. The other part are the stations that are left in the original session. The session needs a master console, so if the station that left was the master, then one of the remaining stations will become the new master. When the two parts are reconnected, then you have a situation with two stations that think they are the masters. The system cannot automatically decide what is the right thing to do in this situation. So you get a big warning and are forced to make a decision. It could look like this: Session Collision pop-up It shows the session number and name, plus the IP address of the console you have session collision with and finally the session speed. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 842 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Session control Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English At the bottom of this pop-up you have three buttons: Join Other Session: Pressing this will throw away the show file in the part of the session you are in, and join the other part (thus getting their show file). Take Over Session: This will throw away the show file in the other part, and force the stations in that part to join your part (and getting your show file). Leave Session: This will make the stations in your part leave the session and the other part will continue the session with their show file. This can be useful if both parts have made something important. The part that left the session can store the show file. This stored show can then be the source for a partial show read or elements can be exported and later imported into the running show. This big window will stay on all screens until someone presses one of the buttons. If you are working in a multi user environment, it might be good idea to talk about what to do if a session collision should appear - before it happens! © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 843 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.6. Getting DMX in and out of the system All the 5-pin XLR connectors in a grandMA2 system is a DMX port. A DMX port can (almost) always be an output, an input or turned off. What the DMX ports are doing and how they are configured is handle in the MA Network Configuration. All this is described in the Configure the DMX ports on MA devices. A different way to get DMX in and out of the system is using Ethernet protocols like Art-Net and sACN. Other Ethernet protocols are output only. The grandMA2 system can transmit ETC-Net2, Pathport, Shownet and Kinet1. Read more about configuring Ethernet protocols on the Network DMX protocols topic. The What affects my DMX output topic explains a little bit about the different situations that affects the DMX output in a system. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 844 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.6.1.Setting up DMX ports on MA devices If there is only one station (console or onPC) in the system, then only the DMX ports on the station can be used. If a session is running and other MA devices are in the session, then it is also possible to change the settings on the DMX ports on those devices. The operation is the same no matter the size of the system. It is done from the MA Network Configuration. This can be done by pressing the Setup key and then the MA Network Configuration button under "Network". The MA Network Configuration is separated into different sections. One for each type of MA device. Read more about these section and adding devices in the Adding devices to your session topic. The station you are using is always in the system, no matter if it is a console or onPC. All devices that have a DMX port will have columns for each port. The columns can be named from "XLR A" to "XLR H". The consoles also have a "XLR In". They could look like this: DMX Ports in the MA Network Configuration If the mode or the universe of a port needs to be changed, then select the relevant cell in the window and edit the cell. This can be done by tapping the the screen encoder, if you are on a console. It is also possible to right click if a mouse or trackball is connected. Or press Edit followed by the cell you want to edit. When editing a DMX port cell, a pop-up like this appears: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 845 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Configure DMX port pop-up - DMX node version Port Mode The "Port Mode" is a drop down list that has the following options: Off - The DMX port is turned off and the device will not input or output any DMX. In - The DMX port is functioning as an DMX input. It will merge values into the universe number typed in the green universe field - If "DMX In Merge" is activated in the Setup->Show->Patch only->DMX List. Out - The DMX port is outputting the DMX universe set in the green universe field. All DMX ports can be an Input or an Output. It is just a matter of maybe adding a XLR gender changer to the physical connector. The exceptions are: grandMA2 onPC Command Wing: The connector called "DMX B" / "XLR B" can NOT be input! MA NSP in Art-Net mode or 4-port mode: The connector called "DMX A" / "XLR A" and "DMX B" / "XLR B" can NOT be input! © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 846 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Important: If a DMX port is turned off or do not transmit DMX data (for any reason), then the port is in High-Z mode. This means that there is no data being transmitted at all! Other limitations with DMX input There is limitations regarding the number of DMX sources per universe. It is only allowed that a maximum of two outside sources send DMX data to the same Universe - this is per universe. It does not matter how the DMX is received. It can come from a DMX port on a console or from a Network Protocol. Only two outside sources per universe. If there is both an Art-Net and sACN source merging data into the same universe, then the limit of two different sources have been reached. There is also a limitation regarding the devices receiving the incoming DMX. Any grandMA2 device can only have one DMX port as input per universe. This means that for instance a 4 port can have the four DMX ports as input, but the ports need to send the DMX to different universes. It is the same if the DMX is connected to a console. The DMX ports can be set to receive DMX, but they need to merge it to different universes. A Master in a session can receive DMX data to universe 1 from Art-Net or sACN and use one of the DMX ports as input to universe 1. Universe The green input field can be used to set the universe number. DMX Fail Mode - DMX nodes only The nodes have an extra option called DMX Fail Mode. This determine what should happen if the node loses connection to the session or the DMX stream is stopped. The DMX stream can stop if there is a show upload or the session has ended. The options are: Timeout 10s Timeout 20s Timeout 30s Timeout 1m Timeout 10m Timeout 30m Timeout 1h Hold The Timeout options are similar except the time. They will hold the DMX values for the chosen time and then stop the DMX stream (High-Z mode). © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 847 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The Hold option will make the node continue to send the DMX values as long as it got power. Read more about configuring the MA Nodes in the Control the MA Node section. Timeout outfade time Here it is possible to set a fade time that will be used when a Timeout is selected. The DMX values will then fade from their last values to a value of 0. When it has completed the fade, then it will stop transmitting DMX (High-Z mode). The maximum fade time is 10 seconds. The Hold option also do not have a fade time option since it continues the DMX data stream. Merge Mode The bottom drop down list is for setting how the device should merge incoming DMX data from outside sources, if the device is not under MA-Net control. This could be DMX nodes that are set to a session number that does not exist. Then they can be used to transport DMX through an Ethernet network - without any consoles or onPCs. The options in the drop down are: None: There will be no merging. LTP: The universes will merge following the LTP (Latest Takes Precedence) rules. HTP: The universes will merge following the HTP (Highest Takes Precedence) rules. LoTP: The universes will merge following the LoTP (Lowest Takes Precedence) rules. When the settings are correct, tap the Please button to confirm the settings or tap the X in the upper right corner of the pop-up to cancel the change. Please remember the limitations mentioned above. Where are the settings stored? Changes to the DMX ports on Consoles, onPCs and NPUs are stored as a part of the show file. The settings will be loaded into the devices when a show is loaded, but only if the "Network Config" settings are included when loading from the show file. For more info on loading show files, please have a look at the Using the Backup Menu topics. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 848 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The DMX nodes (MA nodes) and MA switches are different. Their settings are stored locally in the devices and a not loaded or changed with the show file. The configuration of the DMX nodes and switches can be exported and imported. This can be done to/from the hard drive or a USB stick. Please read the Export and Import topics for more information about this. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 849 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.6.2.Network DMX protocols DMX can be transmitted or received using network DMX protocols instead of or together with the DMX ports in the system. This is all controlled from the Network Protocols menu. The menu can be opened by pressing the Setup key followed by a tap on the Network Protocols button. It could look like this: Network Protocols menu - Art-Net tap The grandMA2 supports the following network DMX protocols, each having their own tab in the Network Protocols view: Art-Net: Both transmit and receive. Several ranges of universes can have different settings. ETC-Net2: Transmit only. Only one range of universes. Pathport: Transmit only. Only one range of universes. sACN: (streaming ACN) © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 850 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Both transmit and receive. Several ranges of universes can have different settings. Shownet: Transmit only. Only one range of universes. KiNET: Transmit only. Several ranges of universes can have different settings. It is always the Master in a session that transmit and receive the network DMX data. Each of the different network protocols have at least one configuration line. If the protocols support it, then there might be more lines. General buttons in Network Protocols There are up to three buttons on the right side of the view: Network DMX if Alone - When this is active (the text is yellow), then the station will output DMX via the network. All network protocols are sent from the master station in a session. If there is no connected stations, you need to turn this on to output network DMX. This toggles all network DMX outputs. If the frame is red, then this station does not output network DMX. If the frame is green then this station outputs network DMX. This setting is shared across all network DMX protocols. [Protocol name] Output Active - When this is on (the text is yellow), then you can output the network DMX protocol. This needs to be enabled or disabled for each protocol. [Protocol name] Input Active - When this is on (the text is yellow), then you can input the DMX protocol. This is only possible in Art-Net and sACN. At the bottom of the view, there might be two buttons. They are only visible in Art-Net, sACN and Kinet1. They are used to Add and Delete lines in the table above. The three mentioned protocols can have more configurations lines. General settings in Network Protocols Some settings are shared by the different protocols. LocalStart - This is the number of the first DMX universe in your console that you want to transmit, or the first universe you want to receive. Amount - This is the amount of universes you want to receive or transmit. ExternStart - Many of the protocols use this to set the protocol universe number. For example grandMA2 universe number 10 should be transmitted as Shownet universe 5, then the ExternStart should be 5 and LocalStart is 10. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 851 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English TTL (Time To Live) - Specifies the number of routers (hops) that multicast traffic is permitted to pass through before expiring on the network. For each router (hop), the original specified TTL is subtracted by 1. When TTL reaches a value of 0, then the DMX data is no longer forwarded through the network. Priority - Many network protocols uses a Priority setting. This is used to tell the receiver how important the DMX data from this transmitter is. This is only relevant if the receiver have multiple DMX sources. Usually the highest number equals a higher priority. Info - In the Info cell you can write any relevant information. Art-Net Art-Net is a royalty free protocol developed by Artistic Licence (http://www.artisticlicence.com). MA supports Art-Net 1, 2 and 3. Art-Net 3 provides 128 networks of 256 universes. If the Network number is set to 1, then it is compatible with ArtNet 1 and 2. To add a line in the Art-Net window, tap Add. To remove a unwanted line, select it and tap Delete. There several options for each line (here is only mentioned the ones that are not mentioned in General Settings above): Valid - This field is read only and tells if the line is valid. It is not allowed to transmit (or receive) the same universe more than once. A valid line will transmit or receive data. Requested - Here you can set if the line is requested or not. A line that is not requested get a status of Not valid and will not transmit or receive Art-Net data. Mode - Change between OutputBroadcast, OutputUnicast, OutputAuto, and Input. Read more below. Destination IP - Only available if the mode is OutputUnicast. This is the IP address of the receiver. Network - This is the Art-Net network setting (1-128). Subnet - This is the Art-Net subnet setting (0-F). Universe - This is the Art-Net universe setting (0-F). Delay - Adding a number here will add milliseconds delay between the packets. This can be needed in slow networks. Only for Art-Net output. The Mode selection changes the functionality of the Art-Net line. Editing it opens a small pop-up giving the above mentioned options. The pop-up look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 852 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Select Mode pop-up - Art-Net mode The last option is "Input". This makes the line merge incoming Art-Net DMX into your system. DMX output via Art-Net supports Auto detection and manually setting of Broadcast or Unicast network traffic per universe. OutputBroadcast - sends the DMX Universes as broadcast. OutputUnicast - sends the DMX Universes as unicast to the IP address set in the Destination IP column. OutputAuto - sends each DMX Universe as Unicast to up to 5 receivers detected via ArtPoll. If more than 5 receivers, or if there are no detected receivers requesting the universe, then the universe will be send as broadcast! Hint: The default limitation of 5 individual receivers can be changed to a maximum of 10. This can only be done using the command line configuration and by using the "MaxUnicast" property. Important: Art-Net is transmitted from Ethernet connector number 2. If you use a onPC, then you do not need to make a valid Art-Net IP address. The software will create one and use it. If your computer have a valid Art-Net address, then it will use it. If there are several valid addresses, then it will use the first it sees. Do not give your Ethernet connector number 1 a valid Art-Net IP address. ETC-Net2 ETC-Net2 is developed by ETC (Electronic Theater Control - http://www.etcconnect.com). It was introduced in 1997. MA supports transmission of one range of DMX universes as ETC-Net2. This was implemented to support communication to older ETC dimmers and DMX nodes. Using sACN might be a better option if the receivers supports it. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 853 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English There are several options (here is only mentioned the ones that are not mentioned in General Settings above): Active - This is an 'On'/'Off' option. When 'On' the console will transmit ETCNet2. When it is 'Off', then the text is hidden. This can also be toggled by the button on the right side. Groups - ETC-Net2 uses multicast groups to simplify and optimize the transmission. Here you can select what group to transmit to. Priority - The lowest number has the highest priority. Pathport Pathport is created by Pathway Connectivity (http://www.pathwayconnect.com). MA supports transmission of one range of DMX universes as Pathport. This was implemented to support communication to older Pathway DMX nodes. Using sACN might be a better option if the receivers supports it. There are several options (here is only mentioned the ones that is not mentioned in General Settings above): Active - This is an 'On'/'Off' option. When 'On' the console will transmit Pathport. When it is 'Off', the text is hidden. This can also be toggled by the button on the right side. sACN (streaming ACN) ACN (and streaming ACN) is an ANSI/ESTA international standard. Further readings: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Architecture_for_control_networks. ACN (Architecture for Control Networks) is suite protocol. It uses a lot of elements that is currently not supported by grandMA. But the ACN protocols also have a lighter version for transporting DMX data. It is called 'Lightweight streaming protocol for transport of DMX512 using ACN' or more popular "streaming ACN" or "sACN". It is international standard number E1.31. There are several options (here is only mentioned the ones that are not mentioned in General Settings above): Valid - This displays a "Yes" if the line is valid. Only valid lines transmit or receive data. Requested - Here you can set if the line is requested or not. A line that is not requested, get a status of Not valid and will not transmit or receive sACN data. Mode - Change between OutputMulticast, OutputUnicast, InputMulticast, and InputUnicast. Read more below. Destination IP - Only available if the mode is OutputUnicast. This is the IP address of the receiver. sACN Universe - This is the sACN universe the DMX data should be transmitted to or received from (1 - 64000). Priority - The allowed value is 0 to 200. The highest number has the highest priority. The default value should be 100. Protocol - Here you can select between two different variations of the sACN protocol. You can choose the "Draft" or "Final" release of the sACN protocol. Some equipment have implemented the draft version of sACN before the final version was released. You might need to change to "draft mode" for those devices to work. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 854 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Delay(ms) - The delay can be used to slow down the traffic in the network. For some older and slower network nodes there is a big difference in receiving 10 universes in one burst or one by one. Mode Editing the Mode cell will open a small select pop-up that allows you to choose the different input an output modes mentioned above. The pop-up looks like this: Select Mode pop-up - sACN mode You can choose between input and output and each of them can be unicast or multicast. OutputMulticast: When choosing Output Multicast, sACN will be sent as multicast to the relevant multicast addresses. OutputUnicast: When choosing Output Unicast, a valid IP address has to be entered in the Destination IP column. Universes configured in this row will be sent as unicast to this IP address. InputMulticast: Input Multicast will join the Multicast group of the relevant DMX Input Universe. Input Multicast is limited to max. 10 Universes. If more than 10 rows are configured as Input Multicast, all rows beyond multicast input row 10 will be invalid. InputUnicast: Input Unicast is not limited and receives sACN data for the relevant universe without joining any multicast group. sACN input of grandMA2 console ignores sACN priorities. Shownet Strand Shownet is created by Strand Lighting (http://www.strandlighting.com). MA supports transmission of one range of DMX universes as Shownet. Using sACN might be a better option if the receivers supports it. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 855 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English There are several options (here is only mentioned the ones that is not mentioned in General Settings above): Active - This is an 'On'/'Off' option. When 'On' the console will transmit Strand Shownet. When it is 'Off', then the text is hidden. This can also be toggled by the button on the right side. Important: Shownet is a Broadcast protocol, but is transmitted from Ethernet connector 1. KiNET KiNET is developed by Philips Color Kinetic (http://www.colorkinetics.com/). MA supports transmission of several ranges of DMX universes. There are several options (here is only mentioned the ones that are not mentioned in General Settings above): Valid - There will be a "Yes" for each line that is a valid line. Only valid lines will transmit data. IP Address - This is the IP address of the receiver. Important: KiNET is a Broadcast protocol, but is transmitted from Ethernet connector 1. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 856 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.6.3.What affects my DMX output? The following affects the DMX output: A crash or a failure – this discontinues DMX output. Show upload – this stops DMX output. Changing the value of a fixture – this changes the DMX output. Important: In case of a failure or crash, the DMX lines should go off. This is called High-Z. What happens to the fixtures? Fixtures have a function called the DMX hold. What is a DMX hold? The end-device physically emits the latest value, e.g., the fixture is on or off. Note: DMX hold is the function of the end-device only, e.g., a fixture. How do I set the DMX hold on my end-device? Set it either individually on your end-device – on or off. The end-device goes back to default automatically – off. If you have two individual inputs in your end-device, the DMX input automatically chooses the second input in case of a crash or failure. Note: If your end-device does not support the feature DMX hold, add a DMX booster or splitter featuring DMX hold. How does the output behave in case of a single console? If a problem occurs, the console´s DMX outputs should go High-Z. How do I create backup? With the grandMA2 system you have a seamless switch between the transmitting console (master) and the backup console (connected) in case of a failure or crash. Here are three examples on how to create backup: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 857 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Getting DMX in and out of the system Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Use the grandMA2 console as master and the grandaMA2 onPC software version as connected, and DMX nodes for emission of the signal. Use the grandMA2 console as master with a second grandMA2 console as connected, and DMX nodes for emission of the signal. Use the grandMA2 replay unit (RPU) as master together with the grandMA2 onPC software as connected, and DMX nodes for emission of the signal. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 858 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.7. Using CITP CITP (Controller Interface Transport Protocol) is a suite of Protocols used to exchange pictures and Video streams through a network. It is developed and maintained by Capture, Sweden - http://www.citp-protocol.org/ The protocol suite supports many different things. The grandMA2 console and onPC only supports two elements of the protocol. Thumbnail exchange from 3rd party media servers and viewing a CITP video stream. Read about the two different types in the following pages or follow these links: Streaming CITP and Thumbnail Exchange. The MA 3D supports one element (streaming CITP video). Enabling CITP CITP is enabled in Setup and CITP Network Configuration in the Network tab. In this menu you can enabled CITP generally by tapping the CITP Enable . This will turn on CITP in your session. Important Information There are some things you should be aware of when using CITP. A CITP connection is not possible in MA when running CITP sender and CITP receiver at the same computer. The CITP Multicast address can be configured by pressing the title bar button in the CITP Network Configuration menu (in Setup). The CITP Multicast address 224.0.0.180 is not forwarded by many switches as soon as IGMP Snooping is enabled. The CITP Multicast address of MA products can be switched to 239.224.0.180 in order to use CITP in combination with IGMP Snooping. Be aware that the alternative multicast address 239.224.0.180 is not yet supported by many other media server manufacturers. Please check the compatibility with the manufacturer of your media server prior to changing the CITP Multicast address and enabling the IGMP Snooping while using CITP. Changing the multicast address in the CITP Network Config, will change the address for all MA stations (consoles, MA VPU and MA 3D) throughout the session. Streaming videos via network needs bandwidth. A single CITP video stream of 30fps generates up to 15Mbit/s. Video streams are sent as multicast. Requesting the same video stream from different grandMA2 consoles or MA 3Ds will not generate additional network traffic. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 859 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Some hints to keep network stability when using CITP: The list below gives a brief overview over the data rate of one 30 Frames per second CITP video stream. When having compressed streams, the data rate varies depending on the compressibility of the video content. Uncompressed RGB8 stream: 15Mbit/s PNG compressed stream: 7Mbit/s up to 15Mbit/s depending on video content. JPG compressed stream: 1Mbit/s up to 8Mbit/s depending on video content. The minimum network speed is 1000MBit/s. Do not enable CITP in an 100Mbit/s network environment! The maximum amount of CITP network data rate should not exceed 30Mbit/s per physical network. When exceeding this limit, reduce the video stream quality by choosing a higher compression (jpg) or request less different video streams. Otherwise visualizers and video stream viewers running at computers with installed operating system Microsoft® Windows® may not receive all video stream data resulting in CITP video stream fps dropping below 1 fps. The MA VPU CITP video streams frame rate is limited to 30fps shared by all requested outputs and 10fps shared by all requested layers of CITP video streams. E.g.: When requesting CITP video streams of Output1 and Output2, each stream will have a maximum refresh rate of 15 fps. The MA VPU reduces CITP video streams frame rate if the CITP network traffic of current connected network exceeds 30Mbit. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 860 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Using CITP Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.7.1.Streaming CITP video CITP can be used to stream a video feed through the network. This video stream can be viewed on the MA console and onPC in the CITP Video Viewer window - create it using the Create Basic Windows. In MA 3D you can use a CITP stream on a surface, thus mimicking a screen. For the console or onPC viewer to display a video stream, you need to set it up. Make sure the CITP is activated in the console/onPC. Have a look at the Using CITP topic. Tap the yellow ball in the upper left corner. This opens the Options pop-up. It could look like this: CITP Video Viewer Options with one active CITP stream source This view displays a list of all the CITP servers that can stream video. You see the IP address, Port, Name and connection state. At the bottom there are two buttons. The left one allows you set the requested frames per second. The actual feed might be faster or slower. The right button is used to select what the viewer displays. This can be layers or Outputs (for MA VPU). With a selected source and layer/output, the Viewer can display the stream. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 861 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Using CITP Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The viewer could look like this: CITP Video Viewer - with a feed The main part of this window displays the video stream. The title bar shows you that it is the CITP Video Viewer and the CITP source. In the picture above the source is a MA VPU. It also tells you if you are looking at a single layer or an output. There are two buttons in the title bar. The first one show you the frames per second. It shows the actual FPS and the requested. The second button allows you to start or stop the live video viewing. It has been tested with MA VPU, MSEX Lord, Green Hippo Hippotizer, PRG MBOX, Arkaos MediaMaster, and Coolux Desktop Streamer. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 862 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Using CITP Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.7.2.Thumbnail exchange CITP/MSEX protocols are used to transfer information between consoles, media server and visualizers. You can use it to transfer thumbnail pictures of media files from a media server to the console. This puts the thumbnails in the smart view and in the calculator pop-up. Hint This is not needed with MA VPU. They will automatically exchange the thumbnails using MA-Net. Restriction The video layers need to be positioned and patched first in the fixture schedule layer containing the fixtures profiles for the media server for CITP thumbnail exchange to function correctly. Open the CITP Network Configuration window by pressing the Setup key and then tap the CITP Network Configuration in the menu. The CITP Enabled button in the upper right corner enables the CITP protocol on all consoles in the session. The IP address listed next to the close button is the Multicast address used by CITP. Pressing it allows you to change the used IP address, please only do this if there is a really good reason for it. The configuration have four tabs. Only the MediaServers tab is active right now. LightingConsoles tab This part is not implemented yet. MediaServers tab Here you add the 3rd party media servers. Press the Add button to manually add a media server. Or you can use Add Present to automatically add all the Media Server in your network (the ones using CITP). The IP address of the server needs to match the IP address in the IP column. The Delete button deletes the highlighted line. It could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 863 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Using CITP Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English CITP Network Configuration - Media Servers with active server If the line has a red background then the server is not present or it have CITP disabled. A green background indicates an active media server. You need to specify the Fixture Layer and have a fixture setup here that matches the Media Server. If the Library and Image Subattributes is not automatically recognized by the system, then you need to manually select the Library and Image SubAttribute. This is important for the images to go to the correct folder. The Media Server will provide information like the server "Name", "Port", "Device State", "CITP command", "CITP Version" and "MSEX Version". When all is set up correctly then you can press the Update Thumbnail button. This will start the transfer of the thumbnails to the console. This might take a while and there will be a progress bar in the "CITP Command" cell. It can also be done using the command line. Please read more about it in the UpdateThumbnails command. Visualizers tab This part is not implemented yet. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 864 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking – Using CITP Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English OperationHubs tab This part is not implemented yet. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 865 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.8. PosiStageNet (PSN) PosiStageNet or PSN is a open protocol developed by MA Lighting and VYV Corporation http://www.posistage.net/. Restriction: grandMA2 supports PSN version 2.0 It uses a PSN server that transmit position information from different trackers connected to the server. grandMA2 can connect to the server, as a client, and receive the position information from each tracker. Usually you then connect the tracker information to a patched StageMarker. The StageMarker will then move around based on the incoming position data. You can then tell the XYZ enabled fixtures to point their light at the moving StageMarker. Hint: It is possible to patch up to 1024 StageMarkers. Connect to a PSN server To add a PSN server you need to open PSN Network Configuration in Setup . Tap the Add button at the bottom of the window. Then you get a row in the table in the window above. The line needs to be enabled. Edit the Enabled cell in the configuration row until it says "Yes". Then you should get an IP address in the IP column - this is the IP address of the server. The Name will also change to name of the server. If the connection is good, then the name will also get a green background color. The World column displays the PSN world the server is in. It is just for information. It is a setting in the server and is not used by the grandMA2. It is possible to change the Port and PSN Multicast address if the server does not follow the standard port and multicast address. If you want to use the PSN data, then you also need to turn on the general PSN function. This is the big Enabled button in the upper right side of the view. When a valid PSN server is present, then the view could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 866 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English PSN Network Configuration with valid server connection Connect tracker to a StageMarker If you want to view the incoming tracking information, then tap the View Tracker button in the bottom of the screen. This opens the View Tracker window. If you do not have a connection to a PSN server then this window is empty. If you have a server, then a table with the information from the server is visible. There are two things that can be edited in this view: A Fixture ID can be attached to the tracker. Type the Fixture ID of the StageMarker you want to be moved by the tracker. The Predict value can be changed. This will make the console try to predict the position of the tracker. The number type here is the number of seconds in the future the console should try to predict, based on the current speed and direction. If this is left at "0.00" then it is up to the server to do the calculation and prediction. It could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 867 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English View Tracker - PSN information from server with attached Fixture ID In this example, the tracker with PSN ID number 0 is attached to the Fixture ID 4001 (a StageMarker). The current position and rotation is 0 meters and 0 degrees in all three planes. When the tracker starts to move then the information will update and the StageMarker will move accordingly. The 3D Text button in the picture above should just be ignored - it does not do anything and is not implemented. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 868 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 13.9. FTP connection to console and NPU The consoles and the grandMA2 NPU can be accessed using a FTP client program. One such program could be FileZilla Client from the FileZilla Project (external link to internet webpage). The FTP client needs to be installed on a computer in the same network as the console or NPU. To access the console or NPU, the IP address of the device is needed. A user name and password is also required. Both username and password is: data. WARNING: Be very careful making any changes in the folders or files. This is direct access into the device. Deleting or moving files may cause serious harm to the device. Once the connection is made, it is possible to browse through the folders inside the device. The first level of folders should look something like this: FTP main folders If the device has been updated, then there might be several version folders. Most often the needed folder are found in the currently installed and active running software. These folders can be accessed using the "actual" link. This will give access to a new folder called gma2. Accessing this folder will give access to the folders and files that constitutes the grandMA2. The first few of these folders could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 869 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English gMA2 folders Some off these folders are also present on a USB stick if it has been used to save a show. There are many folders here that gives access to many of the elements that the grandMA2 software uses. Show folder The folder called "shows" contain all the show files save in this version of the software. If show files from a previous software is needed, then you will need to navigate to the correct version folder and find the show folder in that version. Template show folder The Template show folder is found in the first layer of folders. Show files can be copied to this folder. Show files in this folder are read only, and cannot be overwritten. They can be loaded from the grandMA2 software and stored as a new show either internal or on a USB stick. Then only way to get show files into the template folder is using FTP access. The template folder is not overwritten when the device is updated. It is only overwritten when a Full Install is performed. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 870 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Networking Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Import Export If something is exported using the Export keyword, then it most often ends up in the "importexport" folder. Depending on what it is it might end up in the "macro" folder or the "fixture_layers" folder. The internal fixture library are found in the "library" folder. Crashlogs It can happen that a device crashes. If this should happen then a crashlog is written and stored in the "temp" folder. On the consoles it is also possible to get these crash logs using the CrashLogCopy keyword. This is not possible on the NPUs. Screenshots It is possible to make a screenshot of the last touched screen by pressing the Prt Scr key on the keyboard. The screenshots are stored in the "temp" folder. It is a gz compressed tga file. It needs to be uncompressed before it can be opened. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 871 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 14. Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Patching is one word for everything that has to do with the fixtures we have in our show, how they are addressed - both signal wise but also for selecting them - and how they are arranged in a virtual 3D room. The following pages deals with adding fixtures to your show, giving them DMX addresses, arranging them in the Stage view and all the connected topics. We are not going to look at details about the Fixture types nor how to control the fixtures. For this please have a look at Basic Fixture types, Advanced Fixture types and Controlling Fixtures. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 872 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 14.1. What Are Channels & Fixtures The two words Channel and Fixtures can be several things and it can be a little bit confusing. Even in this manual we might use both words. When talking (or writing) about the actual device that emits light, we are referring to that as a fixture. This might be all sorts of devices from different manufacturers. They may have one function or many different functions. All these functions are called Attributes. When you program a show, you will need to be able to select these devices, so they have an ID number something we can type on a numeric keypad. The grandMA2 have the option to give each device two ID numbers. They can be the same number or they can be different numbers for the same physical device. The ID numbers are called Channel ID and Fixture ID. A device needs at least one ID number to be select-able and programmable. Two different devices cannot have the same Channel ID or the same Fixture ID. But one device can have Channel ID number 1 and another device can have Fixture ID number 1. A device with a Channel ID will be visible in the Channel Sheet and a device with a Fixture ID will be visible in a Fixture Sheet. If the device have two different ID numbers, then you can choose to hide one of the numbers in the sheets. If you have already programmed something with a device and you later change the ID numbers, then you will not loose any programmed information. If you remove the ID number so the device does not have any, then the values are still there and it will still output DMX even though you cannot select the device. When you cannot select it, then you cannot edit it or the stored values. It is not visible in sheets. You cannot delete the values either. You should pay attention to what your default beginning keyword is. You can see it in the Command Line input. The default on a new empty show is "Channel". Your Command Line input will look like this: [Channel]> If you are trying to select a device that only have a Fixture ID, then you need to specify that it is a Fixture ID by pressing the Fixture key before entering the ID number. You can change the default keyword by pressing the key corresponding to the one you want and the press Please . So to sum up. We call each device a fixture and each fixture can have a Channel ID and/or a Fixture ID and to be able to control it it will need at least one ID number. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 873 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 874 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup – What Are Channels & Fixtures Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 14.1.1.What are Attributes Attributes are the different functions in a fixture. It might just be a dimmer that uses 1 DMX channel, but can be something more complex like the Pan function that often use 2 DMX channels. In the grandMA2 it is just 1 Attribute no matter if it uses 1, 2 or 3 DMX channels. Attributes are organized in the grandMA2 into a structure. The top level of this structure are called Preset Type This could be something like "Gobo". In the Preset types there's a new level called Feature - a Feature could be something like "Gobo Wheel 1". In Features we find the Attributes - this is the specific function where you can select what gobo the fixture should project. There's also something below an Attribute called Subattributes - this could be a function of the gobo wheel, like half of the DMX range is select a gobo and the other half is continues wheel rotation. The grandMA2 have a lot of predefined attributes. You can make your own and you can edit the ones that are there. For more details about all this please have a look at What are attributes, features & preset types under the Basic Fixture types topic. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 875 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup – What Are Channels & Fixtures Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 14.1.2.What are DMX breaks DMX breaks is a term used when a fixture needs more than one DMX start address. It has nothing to do with how many address a fixture uses, just if it needs more than one start address. For example some fixtures have moved the dimmer out of the moving head. So the moving head needs to have one DMX address and the lamp inside is connected to an external dimmer in a rack in Dimmer City. The rack mounted dimmer have a different DMX address (might even be a different universe). In the grandMA2 we only look at this fixture as one device. It only have on ID number. To make this possible we have a fixture that uses two DMX breaks. We have broken the DMX range into two parts. There can be many examples of combining several devices and wanting to just use one ID number. It could be a color scroller and a mechanical dimmer unit on a big HMI fresnell with a DMX controlled ballast. So three separate units that each need a DMX address but we want to handle all of them using just one ID number. The grandMA2 can handle fixtures with up to 8 DMX breaks. Each DMX break have their own input field in the Fixture Wizard and their own column in the patch windows. It might be combined into one column in the Fixture Schedule. DMX Break in the Fixture Wizard DMX break in the Fixture Schedule window DMX break in the DMX patch window © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 876 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 14.2. What is 3D and Stage setup The grandMA2 have a virtual 3D space. In this space are all the patched fixtures and there position. The 3D space can also have other objects and elements. This could be a model of your venue and the set. There are generally two ways to see this 3D space. In the grandMA2 software and in the MA 3D visualizer running on a windows computer. Both of these are linked and display the information stored in the show file. It only makes sense to use these if you take the time to arrange your virtual fixtures according to the real world locations. In the grandMA2 software you can see a very simplified version of the 3D space. This can be seen in the Stage Window. In this view you'll see a simple wireframe model with the light from the fixtures just visualized as a single line showing the direction, intensity and color. Each fixture is represented by a box and all 3D elements are also represented by simple boxes. The in-build 3D Stage Window is a useful tool during programming and can be a big help. In the MA 3D visualizer you can have a more realistic display of what the fixtures are doing and what our 3D model look like. The software is free and can be downloaded from MA Lightings webpage. It runs on a windows computer connected the same network as your console or onPC. If you have a good computer, then you can run both grandMA2 onPC and MA 3D on the same computer. You will need to have a session running on the console/onPC and then you invite the MA 3D into your session. Besides getting the patch and fixture position from the show it also allows you to select a user. If you select the same user for the 3D as the one you are using on the console /onPC then the 3D will follow you if you use the Blind or Preview functions. This can be really useful if you need to change something in your programming in a live onsite situation. The main idea behind the MA 3D is for pre-programming a show. It allows you to visualize and program your entire show without the need for all the MA hardware you might need onsite. You can download both grandMA2 onPC and MA 3D for free and start programming a show with the maximum amount of parameters. It is first when you need to output all these parameters to real world fixtures, that you need real MA hardware. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 877 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English 14.3. Adding fixtures to the show Quick steps: 1. Press Setup and Patch & Fixture Schedule to enter the EditSetup menu. 2. Add a new or select an existing layer. 3. In the layer, Add new fixture. 4. Follow the Fixture Wizard. 1. Import a fixture from library (internal or from USB) or select already imported fixtures from the list. 2. Change the quantity. 3. Set a Fixture ID and/or Channel ID. 4. Set the start address for the first fixture. 5. Tap Apply . 5. Check that the result is correct. 6. Exit the EditSetup menu. 7. Tap Yes to confirm the changes. This was the quick steps - Keep reading for more details. Adding fixtures to the show is done from the EditSetup menu - also called Patch & Fixture Schedule. This can be found by pressing the Setup key and then Patch & Fixture Schedule . It could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 878 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English EditSetup menu This is one of the essential access points for everything that has to do with your entire fixture setup structure. A very important menu. It main part is divided into a left and a right side. There is a lot of buttons on the bottom and three important one on the right most side. The left side is Layers and the right side is the list of fixtures in the selected layer. In the picture above it is the "Dimmer" layer and all the Dimmer fixtures. Layers Read more details about Layers in the Working with Layers topic. The left side of the main window is a list of Layers. Any fixture added to the show needs to be put in a layer. You can decide how you want to organize the layers. All fixtures can be put in the same layer or organized in multiple layers - by fixture type or location. It is completely up to you. But you need at least one layer. When you have a layer then select it by tapping it. Then you can see all the list of fixtures in the layer on the right side of the menu. At the bottom there is a lot of buttons. We are going to use some of them. Please notice that the text on them changes depending on what side was tapped last - the layer list or the fixture list. The function is the same it is just a matter of affecting layers or fixtures. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 879 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Create a Layer to put fixtures in it You can add a layer by tapping in the layer part of the screen. You could tap where it says "New". Then tap where it says Add Layer . Now opens the Enter Name pop-up where you can give the new layer a name. Type a name and finish by pressing Please (Enter). When you create an empty layer, then the console will help you to the next logical step - to add fixtures in the layer. So the next thing you are presented with is the Fixture Wizard. Adding fixtures to an existing layer If you already have layers, then you can add new fixtures in them. Select the layer on the left side and then tap somewhere in the fixture list (the right side). Now you can tap the button that says Add Fixtures . If the menu is on screen 1 then you can also press the X1 key. This opens the Fixture Wizard. Using the Fixture Wizard - Part 1 When you add a fixture to your layers you are guided by the Fixture Wizard. If you are not already presented with the wizard then you can get to it by tapping on the layer, tap new in the fixture list and then tap the Add Fixture button. The wizard could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 880 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Fixture Wizard This pop-up is also divided into a left and right side. The left side is all the fields we need to fill out for the grandMA2 to add and be able to use the fixture. The right side is an area that changes depending on what input field you currently have selected on the left side. The first thing you need to select is what fixture type you want to add to your show. To make sure you are working with the correct input field, please tap where it says Please select fixturetype . The right side now shows you a three structure with minimum two objects: "From Library" and "Dimmer 00 (DMX1)". The general idea is that the console have a large library of fixture types. You then import a fixture type into the show file. That is a copy from the library. It can then be modify this copied fixture type in your show file without it affecting the original fixture type in the library. You can of course export the fixture type from your show file back into library if you think you need the modified fixture type again in a different show file. The library does not have to be the one in the console - it can be a library on a USB stick. As a default you will always have the standard "Dimmer" fixture type imported when you create a new show. If this is all you need please jump directly to Using the Fixture Wizard - Part 2. Keep reading if you need to add other fixture types. Importing a fixture type from the library When you tap the From Library button you get the Import Fixture Type pop-up. It looks like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 881 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Import Fixture Type The library is basically one big long list of fixture types. This list can sorted and it can be filtered by manufacturer and/or fixture name. At the top of the list you can select what library you are using - it is the "Select Drive" drop down. For the grandMA2 to be able to see the fixture types they need to be in the correct folder. If you insert a USB stick and open the Backup menu, then it automatically create the folder structure needed. Fixture types need to be in the folder called "library". This folder need to be inside a folder called "gma2". © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 882 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English USB file structure When you have selected the drive then you will see all the fixture types in one list. The two green input fields are the two filters that you can apply. These can be used to filter on a manufacturer name and/or the name of the fixture. It is a good idea that you might type (some part of) the manufacturer name. You do not need to write the entire name, just a unique part of it. If for instance you want to find a fixture from Clay Paky, you only need to write "clay" or "paky". Now the list only shows Clay Paky fixtures. The filter will show all manufacturers with the letters you write, in any part of their name. So if you write "ma" then you get a long list. The first manufacturer might be "Altman" - the letters "ma" are in it. Uppercase letters are not distinguished. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 883 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Same goes for the fixture filter. This filters on the fixture name. Try not to be more specific then you need to be. If you are looking for a Clay Paky Alpha Spot QWO 800, they you just need a manufacturer filter "clay" and a fixture filter "qwo". Since no one else currently have a fixture with "qwo" in the fixture name, we do not really need the manufacturer filter. On the right side of the two filters you will find a Clear Filter button. This will remove any input you have typed in your filters. Below the filters you have the list of fixtures. There are several columns in this list: Manufacturer: This is the name of the manufacturer of the fixture. Fixture Name: This is the name of the fixture. Mode: Many fixtures have several different modes. This can be a way a LED bar might be separated into different sections or different operational modes in a moving head. If a fixture types doesn't have a mode then it often have a "00" mode. The default Dimmer fixture type is an example of this. DMX Footprint: Close connected to the Mode is the amount of DMX channels a fixture uses. Instances: Some fixtures might be separated into different sections called Instances. This could be a LED bar with six individually controllable sections. It can also be a fixture like the Martin Aura where the fixture have two different color systems in the same moving head. Info: Here you can see any relevant info text. Filename: This is the actual name of the fixture type file. Filedate: This is the date the file was saved. FileSize: This is the size of the fixture type file. You can choose the display information about the DMX channels below the list. If you tap the the title bar then you will see the list of DMX channels and what function they have. in When you have found the fixture you need to tap it in the list and the tap the Import button in the lower right corner. If you do not want to import any fixture type anyway, then you can close the pop-up by tapping the X in the upper right corner. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 884 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Using the Fixture wizard - Part 2 If you have just imported a fixture type then this is automatically selected. If you have not, then you need to tap the, already imported, fixture type you want to add. Now the cursor jumps to the Quantity input field. This is where you set the amount of fixtures you want to add. You can see the top two input fields are the fixture type you selected and the second is the Name of the fixture. The suggested name comes from the fixture type definition. And it adds a space and a number (1) to the name. The result of this added space and number is that all the fixtures added will be enumerated from this number. You can of course change the name. After you have typed the quantity. You need to type the ID numbers. There are two types of ID number: The Fixture ID and the Channel ID. To use the fixture you need to give it at least one of the ID numbers. You can give it both a Fixture ID and Channel ID. It can be the same number but it does not have to be the same. The difference between the two are whether or not the fixture is visible in the Channel Sheet and the Fixture Sheet. A fixture with a Fixture ID is visible in the Fixture Sheet (This sheet displays all attributes for the fixture). A fixture with a Channel ID is visible in the Channel Sheet (This sheet only shows the Dimmer attributes for the fixture). The console also have a default beginning keyword. This is usually "Fixture" or "Channel". This is what the console assume you are addressing if you do not specify something else. You can see it in your command line. It could look like these two examples: [Channel]> [Fixture]> Hint: If you want to change what the default keyword is, then you can press the key followed by Please . If you do not want to give the fixtures an ID number then you need to type "0" in the input field. But remember that you need to give them at least one ID number to be able to select and control them. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 885 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Depending on what fixture type you have selected, you might have up to 8 different Patch Breaks. Most fixture only need one, but some multi instance fixtures needs several DMX start addresses. You can type in the DMX address using the following pattern [Universe].[DMX address] - so if you need the fixture to have start address 1 in universe 2, then you need to write 2.1 You can also choose to type the absolute DMX address. In the same example as above you could also type 513 this is because there are 512 possible DMX addresses in one universe, so the first number in the second universe will be 513. If you do not want to give the fixtures a DMX address now, then you can type "0" (zero) in the Patch Break. When you are happy with your input then you can tap the Apply button. This takes you back to the EditSetup menu. A closer look at the fixture list When you have added fixtures using the Fixture Wizard and tapped Apply, then you are back in the EditSetup. Here you can see the fixture you have added in the fixture list (right side of the screen). The fixture list shows us a lot of information and we can edit almost all of it. The following is a short description of the columns in the list. FixID: This is the Fixture ID number. If the fixture does not have an ID the there is a "-" instead of the number. ChaID: This is the Channel ID number. If the fixture does not have an ID the there is a "-" instead of the number. Name: This is the name if the fixture. Remember that if you are naming multiple fixtures at once, then you can add a space and a number to automatically enumerate the fixtures from that number. Fixture Type: This is the fixture type. If you edit this then you will get the Select Fixture type pop-up. It could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 886 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Select Fixture Type Here you can select an existing fixture type or you can import a new one (From Library). If you change the Fixture Type for an already used fixture then you are asked how colors should be transformed: Color Transform Options Here are three buttons that selects how the colors should be transformed from one fixture to the other. The three options are: Prefer MIXColor: This will prefer MIXColor and set all color wheels to open white. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 887 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Prefer Color Wheel: This will prefer the color wheels and set all MIXColors to open white. MIXColor + Col.Wheel: This will do a combination of both MIXColors and color wheels. When you have selected the options you like then you can tap the Transform button or you can choose to not transform the colors by tapping the Do not transform button. Patch: This is the patch address of the fixture. If a fixture is unpatched then there is a "(-)" here. Editing the patch cell opens the DMX Patch window. Read below for more info on this. There are two ways you can have the patch address displayed. Below the list is a button called "Patch Readout". This button has two different modes: "Univ.Address" or "Abs. Address". The first one (Universe) will separate the DMX address into universes. First number is the universe, second number is the DMX address. They are separated by a dot. The other option (Absolute) will add the address and only display one number. So the first DMX address in the second universe will be displayed as "513". This can be useful with equipment that are subsequently patched. For instance some network dimmer systems are patched using a single absolute DMX number for the address. The readout is a User setting and can also be changed in Setup -> User -> Settings . Here it is called "Patch Column Readout is absolute DMX address" and it is an On/Off setting. React to Master: This is "On" as a default. When it is on then the dimmer attribute of the fixture will be affected by the Grand Master, Group Masters and Solo. Turning this off makes sure the intensity is not affect by any such masters. This is great for power relays, blue lights and other stuff you do not want to accidently turn down. Pan DMX Invert: When this is "On", then the console inverts the DMX values on the Pan attribute. Tilt DMX Invert: When this is "On", then the console inverts the DMX values on the Tilt attribute. Pan Enc. (Encoder) Invert: This will invert the direction of the Pan movement when using the encoders. This will make it easier to match the 3D and real world pan movement with the encoder rotation. Tilt Enc. (Encoder) Invert: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 888 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English This will invert the direction of the Tilt movement when using the encoders. This will make it easier to match the 3D and real world tilt movement with the encoder rotation. Pan Offset: This can be used to offset the programmed Pan values. This can be very useful if the show has been preprogrammed or it is a touring show, and the fixtures are not hung the way they were planned to be. The offset value is not visible in the Fixture Sheet, but it can be seen in the DMX Sheet. It is a nice function as long the fixtures do not come all the way out to their endpoints in the programming. The number entered here is a degree number and can be a negative value. Important: The Pan and Tilt Offset values can also be edited with live output to the fixtures. This can be done in the Live patching, when editing fixtures, or via command line. When this is done for several hundred fixtures at the same time, then this information is distributed live to all stations and NPUs in the session and this is distributed with a small delay in the system. A progress bar is displayed. Please wait until the distribution is done before continuing working. If this is done live for a small group of fixtures, then there should be no delay. If the value is changed in the EditSetup then the values are updated with the show upload. Tilt Offset: This can be used to offset the programmed Tilt values. This can be very useful if the show has been preprogrammed or it is a touring show, and the fixtures are not hung the way they were planned to be. The offset value is not visible in the Fixture Sheet, but it can be seen in the DMX Sheet. It is a nice function as long the fixtures do not come all the way out to their endpoints in the programming. The number entered here is a degree number and can be a negative value. Swap: This will swap the Pan and Tilt DMX output. Bitmap Disable: Turning this "On" will exclude this fixture from being affected by any Bitmap Fixtures. Color: Here you can add a color to the light from your fixture. This is nice for dimmers, but does not make sense for any fixture with a color mixing system. It is like placing a color gel in front of the fixture. This color is visible in the Stage view, Layout view, the MA 3D and can be visible in Fixture and Channel Sheets. Editing this cell opens the Select Color pop-up: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 889 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Select color Here you can use what ever method you like to select the color and tap Please when you are happy or you could tap Reset to White if you do not want any color. Pos X, Pos Y, Pos Z: This the XYZ position of the fixture in the 3D space. Read more about positioning fixtures in the Position fixtures in the 3D stage topic. Rot X, Rot Y, Rot Z: This the XYZ rotation of the fixture in the 3D space. Read more about positioning fixtures in the Position fixtures in the 3D stage topic. No Parameter: This is for use with MA VPU (= video processing unit) pixel mapping. If this column is set to "Yes", all the programming for this fixture is lost, it does not consume any parameters any more in the grandMA2 and the MA VPU will send out the default values defined in the fixture profile additional to the Color RGB 1-3 values. The idea: if this flag has been set (No Parameter), the fixtures can still be selected, but only controlled by the MA VPU, not the console. Additionally the set default values for this fixture are transmitted. These values can be changed (for © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 890 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English example Dimmer to 100%) in the grandMA2 / Patch & Fixture Schedule / Fixture Types. RDM ID: This will display the RDM ID of the fixture when it matched in the RDM Devices. This was all the different columns in the Fixture list. The DMX Patch pop-up When you edit one or several patch address in the fixture list, then the DMX Patch pop-up. It could look like this: DMX Patch Again a window that is divided into two sides. The left side is the fixture you chose to edit. In the picture above it is four spots that was selected and the patch fields where edited. The right side displays the DMX universe and the DMX addresses. The Encoder Toolbar have changed to allow you to select a DMX address and actually text the DMX channel. At the bottom there is several buttons. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 891 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English The left side The left side shows you the fixtures. You can see the ID numbers, Fixture Type, Name and current DMX Address. If it is unpatched then there is a "-" instead of a number. Below the fixtures you have a button to change if you want the DMX address to be written in Universe or Absolute readout (follow this link to read details further up on this page). The fixtures here are the ones you selected before editing the patch. The only thing we can change here is the DMX address. The pop-up might close when you have given all your fixtures a DMX address. The workflow is that you select the"DMX Address" cell for the fixtures you want to give a new patch so the field is blue. Then you can use the right side to find the DMX address. The right side The right side shows you the DMX addresses in the selected universe. On the top right side (just below the yellow "X") you will find a green input field. This shows you the currently selected universe. If you tap it then you can use the calculator to change the universe. Any DMX addresses that have something patched will have a frame around them. Inside the frame you will see the Fixture ID and Channel ID and maybe the fixture name (if the space allows it). Below the list of DMX addresses you have a button called Skip Patched. If this is active then you cannot select already patched DMX addresses. You are only allowed to select empty one. You can scroll the list using the vertical scroll bar or the encoder (read more about that below). When you have found the address you want, then you can tap it and this will assign it to the selected fixture (on the left side). If you have more than one fixture selected, then you will automatically patch all the fixtures starting from the address you selected - There might be a gap between them (see "Offset" below). There are three other buttons below the right side: Unpatch: Tapping this button will remove any patch information from the selected fixtures. Patch to...: You can tap this button if you know what DMX address your fixture should have. © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 892 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Offset: This button can be used to set an offset. Offsets are used when you patch more than one fixture at a time and you want to add a gap between the fixtures. The number you define by tapping the button needs to be bigger, than the amount of DMX channels the fixture uses. If the number is lower than the amount of channels used, then the fixtures will be patched as close as possible. For example if you patch some fixtures that uses 12 DMX channel and you patch then from address 1 with the Offset at 20, then the fixtures will be patched at address 1, 21, 41, 61, and so on. The encoders The Encoder Toolbar have changed when you enter the DMX Patch window. It could look like this: The DMX Patch Encoder Toolbar The four encoders can be used to help you patch fixtures. The left encoder is used to select the fixtures - if you have selected more than one fixture going into the DMX patch window. The left center encoder is used to select the Universe. The right center encoder is used to select or scroll through the DMX addresses. The right encoder is a DMX tester. It can be used to test the DMX address. You can turn it to output a DMX value on the selected address. There is a button used to toggle between percent (0-100) or decimal (0-255) scale. This function is especially nice with dimmers and fixtures where the first channel is the dimmer. The Diagnostics At the bottom of the EditSetup menu, you will find a button called "Diagnostic". You will find this button on other menus and windows as well. This opens the Diagnostic pop-up. It could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 893 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Diagnostic There are two types of messages: Errors and Warnings. Errors are more severe than warnings, but none of them prevents you from leaving the setup. The warnings and errors explain the problem. The warning might not be a problem at all. Often a narrow beam fixture, might be reported as a warning even though it is not a problem (The beam angle is very small). There is only one button for this pop-up. The "Update" button runs the diagnostics again and check if there are still warnings and errors. Leaving the Setup and save your changes When you are happy with your added fixtures, then you can leave the setup and save the changes. You do this by closing the EditSetup menu by tapping the yellow "X" in the upper right corner. This gives you a pop-up warning asking you what to do. There are always three options and if the Diagnostics got warnings or error then you have four options. It could look like this: © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 894 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Leaving Setup warning Yes: This will close the EditSetup and save your changes. No: This will trough away what you have changed and keep the old settings. Cancel: This will cancel the exit and you are returned to the EditSetup. Open Diagnostic and Cancel: This will cancel the exit and return you to the Diagnostics pop-up. If you tap yes and you have made changes, then your console will upload the changes to the system. This is called a "show upload". Important: The system will stop all DMX output while the show upload is running. Further readings Fixture types Fixture position DMX profiles DMX List Live patching Multipatch © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 - [email protected] - www.malighting.com 895 of 1850 grandMA2 User Manual - Patching, DMX, and Fixture Setup Version 3.9 – 2024-09-30 English Export/Import Layers RDM devices © 2024 MA Lighting Technology GmbH - Dachdeckerstr. 16 - 97297 Waldbüttelbrunn - Germany Phone +49 5251 688865-30 -